KeyboardPartner Wiki - Benutzerbeiträge [de]

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2024-06-28T13:36:12Z

Christian: /* Configuration by HX3.6 Manager */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of December 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.036'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|800px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards. For upgrade from HX3.5 to HX3.6, also see the '''[[HX3.6 Migration Guide (english)]]'''.

* HX3.6 mainboard is factory programmed as MIDI expander. It will work after power-up '''without any additional boards attached''' (i.e. open pin headers).

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29/HX3.6%20Mainboard Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#F8F8F8;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
|style="background-color:#FFFADA"| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
|6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
|6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
|style="background-color:#F9C6BA"| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input/ouput, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
|style="background-color:#"| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
|style="background-color:#AEC905"| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
|style="background-color:#FBD8C9"| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
|style="background-color:#EF7D4B"| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch (note wrong label "SWELL" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector FC-7 compatible swell pedal (note wrong label "FOOTSW" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}
HX3.6 board revision '''b2''' has two additional jumpers to reverse tip/ring connection of swell pedal, located behind SWELL jack. Select the HAMD position if your swell pedal has a different pin assignment than the Yamaha FC7 (for FC7: Plug tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, plug ring = analog input, potentiometer wiper).
 
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_fc7.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for FC7: Tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, ring = potentiometer wiper]]
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_hmd.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for Hammond (also some others): Tip = analog input, potentiometer wiper, ring = reference voltage]]
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6b2 Additional Jumpers
|-
! JP6, JP7
| Select Hammond or Yamaha FC7 pinout of swell pedal jack
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers in position FC7''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when 9 to 12V power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL9). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL10 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is in Bootload mode, ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Two daisy-chained Preset16 boards connected to PL26 PANEL. MenuPanel may be connected to last Preset16 board.''']]
[[Datei:Preset16_2_silk.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connectors and jumper locations of Preset16-2 board (new version)''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically Preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons (possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

===Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|not used
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

The [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2024-06-28T13:35:25Z

Christian: /* Updating DSP Soundbanks */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of December 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.036'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|800px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards. For upgrade from HX3.5 to HX3.6, also see the '''[[HX3.6 Migration Guide (english)]]'''.

* HX3.6 mainboard is factory programmed as MIDI expander. It will work after power-up '''without any additional boards attached''' (i.e. open pin headers).

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29/HX3.6%20Mainboard Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#F8F8F8;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
|style="background-color:#FFFADA"| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
|6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
|6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
|style="background-color:#F9C6BA"| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input/ouput, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
|style="background-color:#"| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
|style="background-color:#AEC905"| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
|style="background-color:#FBD8C9"| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
|style="background-color:#EF7D4B"| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch (note wrong label "SWELL" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector FC-7 compatible swell pedal (note wrong label "FOOTSW" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}
HX3.6 board revision '''b2''' has two additional jumpers to reverse tip/ring connection of swell pedal, located behind SWELL jack. Select the HAMD position if your swell pedal has a different pin assignment than the Yamaha FC7 (for FC7: Plug tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, plug ring = analog input, potentiometer wiper).
 
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_fc7.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for FC7: Tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, ring = potentiometer wiper]]
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_hmd.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for Hammond (also some others): Tip = analog input, potentiometer wiper, ring = reference voltage]]
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6b2 Additional Jumpers
|-
! JP6, JP7
| Select Hammond or Yamaha FC7 pinout of swell pedal jack
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers in position FC7''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when 9 to 12V power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL9). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL10 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is in Bootload mode, ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Two daisy-chained Preset16 boards connected to PL26 PANEL. MenuPanel may be connected to last Preset16 board.''']]
[[Datei:Preset16_2_silk.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connectors and jumper locations of Preset16-2 board (new version)''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically Preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons (possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

===Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|not used
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

The [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2024-06-28T13:33:55Z

Christian: /* Updates */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of December 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.036'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|800px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards. For upgrade from HX3.5 to HX3.6, also see the '''[[HX3.6 Migration Guide (english)]]'''.

* HX3.6 mainboard is factory programmed as MIDI expander. It will work after power-up '''without any additional boards attached''' (i.e. open pin headers).

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29/HX3.6%20Mainboard Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#F8F8F8;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
|style="background-color:#FFFADA"| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
|6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
|6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
|style="background-color:#F9C6BA"| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input/ouput, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
|style="background-color:#"| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
|style="background-color:#AEC905"| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
|style="background-color:#FBD8C9"| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
|style="background-color:#EF7D4B"| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch (note wrong label "SWELL" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector FC-7 compatible swell pedal (note wrong label "FOOTSW" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}
HX3.6 board revision '''b2''' has two additional jumpers to reverse tip/ring connection of swell pedal, located behind SWELL jack. Select the HAMD position if your swell pedal has a different pin assignment than the Yamaha FC7 (for FC7: Plug tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, plug ring = analog input, potentiometer wiper).
 
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_fc7.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for FC7: Tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, ring = potentiometer wiper]]
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_hmd.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for Hammond (also some others): Tip = analog input, potentiometer wiper, ring = reference voltage]]
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6b2 Additional Jumpers
|-
! JP6, JP7
| Select Hammond or Yamaha FC7 pinout of swell pedal jack
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers in position FC7''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when 9 to 12V power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL9). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL10 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is in Bootload mode, ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Two daisy-chained Preset16 boards connected to PL26 PANEL. MenuPanel may be connected to last Preset16 board.''']]
[[Datei:Preset16_2_silk.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connectors and jumper locations of Preset16-2 board (new version)''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically Preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons (possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

===Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|not used
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

The [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2024-06-28T13:33:08Z

Christian: /* Serial USB cable */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of December 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.036'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|800px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards. For upgrade from HX3.5 to HX3.6, also see the '''[[HX3.6 Migration Guide (english)]]'''.

* HX3.6 mainboard is factory programmed as MIDI expander. It will work after power-up '''without any additional boards attached''' (i.e. open pin headers).

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29/HX3.6%20Mainboard Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#F8F8F8;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
|style="background-color:#FFFADA"| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
|6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
|6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
|style="background-color:#F9C6BA"| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input/ouput, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
|style="background-color:#"| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
|style="background-color:#AEC905"| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
|style="background-color:#FBD8C9"| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
|style="background-color:#EF7D4B"| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch (note wrong label "SWELL" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector FC-7 compatible swell pedal (note wrong label "FOOTSW" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}
HX3.6 board revision '''b2''' has two additional jumpers to reverse tip/ring connection of swell pedal, located behind SWELL jack. Select the HAMD position if your swell pedal has a different pin assignment than the Yamaha FC7 (for FC7: Plug tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, plug ring = analog input, potentiometer wiper).
 
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_fc7.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for FC7: Tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, ring = potentiometer wiper]]
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_hmd.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for Hammond (also some others): Tip = analog input, potentiometer wiper, ring = reference voltage]]
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6b2 Additional Jumpers
|-
! JP6, JP7
| Select Hammond or Yamaha FC7 pinout of swell pedal jack
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers in position FC7''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when 9 to 12V power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL9). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL10 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is in Bootload mode, ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Two daisy-chained Preset16 boards connected to PL26 PANEL. MenuPanel may be connected to last Preset16 board.''']]
[[Datei:Preset16_2_silk.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connectors and jumper locations of Preset16-2 board (new version)''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically Preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons (possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

===Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|not used
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

The [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2024-06-28T13:32:13Z

Christian: /* Preface */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of December 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.036'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|800px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards. For upgrade from HX3.5 to HX3.6, also see the '''[[HX3.6 Migration Guide (english)]]'''.

* HX3.6 mainboard is factory programmed as MIDI expander. It will work after power-up '''without any additional boards attached''' (i.e. open pin headers).

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29/HX3.6%20Mainboard Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#F8F8F8;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
|style="background-color:#FFFADA"| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
|6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
|6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
|style="background-color:#F9C6BA"| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input/ouput, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
|style="background-color:#"| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
|style="background-color:#AEC905"| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
|style="background-color:#FBD8C9"| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
|style="background-color:#EF7D4B"| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch (note wrong label "SWELL" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector FC-7 compatible swell pedal (note wrong label "FOOTSW" on older PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}
HX3.6 board revision '''b2''' has two additional jumpers to reverse tip/ring connection of swell pedal, located behind SWELL jack. Select the HAMD position if your swell pedal has a different pin assignment than the Yamaha FC7 (for FC7: Plug tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, plug ring = analog input, potentiometer wiper).
 
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_fc7.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for FC7: Tip = reference voltage, potentiometer end position, ring = potentiometer wiper]]
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_hmd.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper set for Hammond (also some others): Tip = analog input, potentiometer wiper, ring = reference voltage]]
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6b2 Additional Jumpers
|-
! JP6, JP7
| Select Hammond or Yamaha FC7 pinout of swell pedal jack
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers in position FC7''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when 9 to 12V power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL9). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL10 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is in Bootload mode, ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Two daisy-chained Preset16 boards connected to PL26 PANEL. MenuPanel may be connected to last Preset16 board.''']]
[[Datei:Preset16_2_silk.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connectors and jumper locations of Preset16-2 board (new version)''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically Preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons (possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

===Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|not used
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

The [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installationsanleitung

2024-06-28T13:31:34Z

Christian: /* Vorwort */

'''>>[[HX3.6 Installation Manual]] (english)'''

 '''Fassung vom 17. Dezember 2023, für Firmware Version 6.036'''

'''HX3.6 Einplatinen-Sound-Engine zum Anschluss eines beliebigen Keyboards, zum Einbau in vorhandene Orgeln oder zur MIDI-Steuerung'''

[[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|800px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6-Platine einbaufertig''']]

== Vorwort ==

Die Installation von HX3.6 sollte nur von einem qualifizierten Techniker durchgeführt werden. Sie sollten mit der Montage von Flachbandkabeln, der Installation von Crimpkontakten und dem Löten von empfindlichen Teilen vertraut sein. Wichtig: Die Platine enthält statisch empfindliche Bauteile. Verwenden Sie unbedingt antistatisches Werkzeug und geerdetes Lötwerkzeug. HX3.6-Firmware-Versionen sind sowohl für die MIDI-Steuerung als auch für die direkte Tastatursteuerung mittels unserer FatarScan2-, Scan61-Inline-, Scan16-Strip- und (veralteten) OrganScan61-Karten verfügbar. Für den Umstieg von HX3.5 auf HX3.6 beachten Sie bitte den '''[[HX3.6 Migration Guide (deutsch)]]'''.

* Die Platine wird ab Werk konfiguriert als MIDI-Expander. Nach Anschluss der Betriebsspannung und einer MIDI-Verbindung ist sie '''auch ohne angeschlossene Peripheriebausteine''' (d.h. offene Steckverbinder) spielbereit.

* Für Updates und zum Download des HX3.6 Managers besuchen Sie die '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6-Download-Seite]'''. Dort finden Sie aktuelle und Beta-Firmware, Handbücher, Schaltpläne und Tools. Die Updates in der ZIP-Datei HX36_Manager_6xxx.zip enthalten die Anwendung ''HX3.6 Manager'' sowie DSP-Firmware, Soundbänke, FPGA-Konfigurationsdatei und Scan-Treiber.

* Ein kompletter Satz PDF-Schaltpläne, auch für die Peripherie, steht zum Download bereit auf unserer '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Schematics-Seite]''' und '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings-Seite]'''.

* Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard-Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für Gebrauchsanweisungen nach der Installation.

* Der '''HX3.6 Editor''' (für die Installation erforderlich) ist Bestandteil des '''HX3.6 Manager'''-Pakets. Eine Bedienungsanleitung steht als PDF zum Download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX3_Manager.pdf auf unserem Update Server]''' zur Verfügung.

== Steckverbinder und Jumper ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Bauteil-/Steckverbinderplatzierung (auch als PDF verfügbar, siehe [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php auf unserem '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#F8F8F8;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
|style="background-color:#FFFADA"| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
|6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
|6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
|style="background-color:#F9C6BA"| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug Port (nicht verwenden!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC Eingang, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus auf Mittelkontakt
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input/output, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| 4014-basiertes Scan-Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 oder Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| ARM Cortex M3 Debug Port (nicht verwenden!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
|style="background-color:#"| SD card adapter
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Anschluss für FT800 Grafik-Display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
|style="background-color:#AEC905"| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
|style="background-color:#FBD8C9"| Serielle Schnittstelle für FTDI-Kabel
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
|style="background-color:#EF7D4B"| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch (Achtung: falsche Beschriftung "SWELL" auf älterer Platine!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector FC-7-kompatibler Schweller (Achtung: falsche Beschriftung "FOOTSW" auf älterer Platine!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Vibrato-Drehschalter
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_fc7.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper in Stellung FC7: Spitze = Referenzspannung, Ende des Potentiometers]]
[[Datei:Hx36_jp_hmd.jpg|300px|thumb|right|HX3.6b2 Jumper in Stellung Hammond (und wenige andere): Spitze = Analogeingang, Schleifer des Potentiometers]]
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), beide Pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC-Eingang auf PL9/PL11 (Steckernetzteilanschluss) wenn gejumpert 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (nicht verwenden) 
|-
! JP4
| Stromversorgung über USB (kann Störgeräusch verursachen)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), beide Pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default Jumper-Einstellung: 2 Jumper auf PL20 pin 2-3 und 5-6 (linker Pin ist 1) für zweiten MIDI IN''
|}
HX3.6 in der Board-Revision '''b2''' besitzt zwei zusätzliche Jumper, um die Verbindung Spitze/Ring des Schweller-Pedals umzukehren. Diese Jumper finden sich hinter der SWELL-Buchse. Wählen Sie die Stellung HAMD, wenn Ihr Schweller-Pedal eine andere Anschlussbelegung als das Yamaha FC7 hat (bei FC7: Spitze = Referenzspannung, Ende des Potentiometers, Ring = Analogeingang, Schleifer des Potentiometers).
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6b2 Additional Jumpers
|-
! JP6, JP7
| Wähle Hammond- oder Yamaha-FC7-Pinout des Schweller-Pedals
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default Jumper-Einstellung: 2 Jumper Richtung Position FC7''
|}

== Stromversorgung ==

Das HX3.6-Mainboard kann entweder über den koaxialen '''DC-Eingang PL9''' (5,5/2,1 mm-Stecker, Plus am Mittelstift, DC 9V 500mA Steckernetzteil) oder über die '''grünen DC-Anschlüsse''' PL11 (9 bis 12V Eingang) oder PL10 (5V Eingang; 5V Ausgang bei Versorgung an DC-Buchse PL11 oder PL9) mit Strom versorgt werden. '''Spannungen über 5,2V an PL10 zerstören die Platine!'''

Wenn Sie eine externe '''5V DC''' Versorgung am '''DC-Eingang PL9''' verwenden müssen, stecken Sie den Jumper JP2 (neben der DC-Buchse). Wir raten von dieser Konfiguration ab, da der versehentliche Anschluss einer DC-Versorgung mit mehr als 5V Ausgangsspannung zur '''Zerstörung der Platine''' führt!

Nach dem Einschalten flackert eine rote LED in der Nähe von PL17 kurz auf; sie flackert auch, wenn der HX3.6-Controller beschäftigt ist. Wenn die TrueOrgan-Sound-Engine bereit ist, wird eine gelbe LED gedimmt; sie "atmet" mit der Geschwindigkeit der Rotationssimulation. Wenn der Effekt-/GM-DSP bereit ist, blinkt eine blaue LED im Sekundentakt. Die blaue LED flackert ein/3x kurz aus, wenn sich der DSP im DFU-Bootload-Modus befindet, um Updates entgegenzunehmen.

== HX3.6 für den ersten Gebrauch vorbereiten ==

Ab Werk sind die HX3.6-Karten als MIDI-Expander konfiguriert (keine analogen Eingänge). Sie sollte mit MIDI-Input einen grundlegenden Orgelklang an den Audioausgängen liefern, auch wenn keine anderen Peripheriegeräte angeschlossen sind. Grundfunktionen sind verfügbar, wenn ein Menü-Panel angeschlossen ist. Zu anderen Installationen müssen Sie zumindest einige '''System Init'''-Parameter einstellen. Siehe Abschnitt '''Installation mit dem HX3.6 Manager''' weiter unten.

===Menü-Panel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 Menü-Panel''', bestückt mit optionalen LEDs]]

Unser [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] ermöglicht die bequeme Einstellung verschiedener HX3-Parameter, um Ihr Setup zu optimieren. Zwei Versionen sind erhältlich, die kurze Version ohne Anzeige-LEDs ist für den Einbau in Orgeln gedacht.

Das Menü-Panel wird über ein 10pol. Flachbandkabel an '''PL26 PANEL''' angeschlossen. Wird das Menü-Panel zusammen mit Preset16- oder Extend16-Platinen eingesetzt, sollte das Menü-Panel das letzte Modul in der Bus-Kette an PL26 sein, da es nur einen Bus-Anschluss aufweist.

Neuere Menü-Panel der langen Ausführung besitzen einen separaten Anschluss für die 7 LEDs. Dieser wird mit '''PL35''' des Mainboards verbunden.

===Serielles USB-Kabel===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI-Kabel verbunden mit HX3''']]

Zur schnellen Konfiguration des Boards können Sie eine serielle Verbindung über ein FTDI-USB-Adapterkabel oder ein USB-Interface verwenden, das mit PL22 verbunden wird (Kabelfarben aufgedruckt). Alternativ können Sie den USB-Anschluss oder sogar die MIDI IN/OUT-Buchsen über ein USB-MIDI-Interface eines Fremdherstellers verwenden. Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für weitere Details.

=== Konfiguration per SD-Karte ===

Wenn unser [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/sd-card-adapter SD-Kartenadapter] mit eingesteckter SD-Karte (FAT32-formatiert) eingesteckt ist, startet HX3.6 nach dem Einschalten grundsätzlich im Bootloader-Update-Modus. Starten Sie ein Update mit einem Druck auf den Menupanel-Drehknopf. Es werden nur die Teile aktualisiert, für die eine entsprechende Datei (.BIN, .DAT) auf der Karte gefunden wird.

Alternativ zu einzelnen Dateien kann mit dem ''HX3.6 Manager BootLoad'' auch eine einzelne gepackte DFU-Datei erstellt und auf der Karte gespeichert werden. Sie wird von HX3.6 genau so behandelt wie ein DFU-Update über USB-Kabel. Updates werden von uns in der Regel als eine solche DFU-Datei geliefert.

Bitte beachten Sie: Wenn eine neue Firmware installiert wurde, bleiben die bisherigen ''System Inits''-Einstellungen und erhalten; andere Parameter müssen möglicherweise geändert werden, damit Ihre Konfiguration funktioniert.

Fortgeschrittene Benutzer können eigene INI-Skripte erstellen, die alle notwendigen Befehle enthalten und im Grunde dasselbe tun wie der HX3.6-Editor. Details finden Sie auf der Seite '''[[HX3.6 Verwendung von SD-Karten]]'''.

=== Konfiguration mit dem HX3.6-Manager===

Verbinden Sie alternativ den HX3.6 mit Ihrem PC über USB. Starten Sie den '''HX3.6 Manager''', klicken sie '''Connect''' und öffnen Sie das Fenster '''Updater'''. Vollständige oder teilweise Updates können über Menüs ausgeführt werden. Ein klick auf "Get Board Info" sollte die aktuelle Konfiguration anzeigen. Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für Details.

Checkliste:

* Funktioniert MIDI IN? Fabrikneue Boards sollten an den Audioausgängen einen einfachen Orgelsound liefern, der MIDI-Eingang liegt auf MIDI-Kanal 1. Der rechte 5-polige DIN-Anschluss (von hinten gesehen) ist immer ein MIDI IN.
* Ist ein passender Scan-Treiber installiert? Sie können den Scan-Treiber mit Hilfe des Updaters im HX3.6 Manager ersetzen. Verwenden Sie das Menü Update und wählen Sie "Scan Driver file". Der HX3.6 Updater fragt nach einer DAT-Datei, öffnen Sie entweder ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'' oder ''scanfatr.dat'', je nach Ihren Anforderungen.
* Sind die HX3.6-System-Inits korrekt? HX3.6 scannt keine Tasten oder Analogeingänge, wenn diese nicht korrekt eingestellt sind. Verwenden Sie den Editor im HX3.6 Manager und klicken Sie auf die rote Schaltfläche '''System Inits'''. Klicken Sie auf '''Get Group''' im Action-Menü, um die Tabelleneinträge zu aktualisieren.
* Funktionieren die analogen Drawbar-Eingänge? Wenn alle analogen Eingänge aktiviert sind (Parameter 1503>1), prüfen Sie, ob Änderungen an den Zugriegeln auf '''Upper DB''' bzw. allen anderen analogen Eingangsgruppen zu sehen sind, wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche '''Get Group''' klicken.
* Funktionieren die analogen Volumen-Eingänge? Nicht funktionierende Analogeingänge wurden möglicherweise auf "nicht zugewiesen" umgewidmet. Siehe Gruppe '''Analog Remap''' im Editor.

=== Updates ===

Einzelheiten finden Sie auf der Seite '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' oder auf der Seite '''[[HX3.6 Verwendung von SD-Karten]]'''.

=== Aktualisieren von DSP-Soundbänken ===

Siehe Seite '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für weitere Details.

==Parameter-Optimierung ==

Wenn Sie Hardware zu Ihrem HX3.6-Board hinzufügen, müssen Sie möglicherweise einige Parameter anpassen, um sie zum Laufen zu bringen. Ab Werk ist der HX3.6 als MIDI-Expander konfiguriert; er fragt keine angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte außer dem Menü-Panel ab und steuert sie nicht. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel die FatarScan2-Karte anschließen, müssen Sie auch den Scan-Treiber aktualisieren. Wenn Sie Zugriegel, Tasten oder Schalter anschließen, müssen Sie diese aktivieren.

Das Ändern von Parametern, die nicht im Menüsystem vorhanden sind, ist nur mit dem HX3.6 Editor möglich.

== MIDI-Konfiguration ==

Die HX3.6-Karte ist ab Werk als MIDI-Expander mit zwei MIDI-Eingängen konfiguriert. Der linke MIDI-DIN-Anschluss (von hinten gesehen) ist standardmäßig MIDI IN2. Er kann als MIDI OUT konfiguriert werden, indem Sie die Jumper-Einstellung an der Stiftleiste PL20 gemäß der folgenden Tabelle ändern (Pin 1 liegt in der Nähe des USB-Anschlusses, Pin 10 in der Nähe der DIN-Buchse). Für die +5V-Phantomspeisung an MIDI IN setzen Sie Jumper an den Pins 7-8 und 9-10. Wenn die Jumper für die Phantomspeisung installiert sind, führt die DIN-Buchse Masse am mittleren Pin 2 und +5V an den beiden ansonsten unbenutzten äußeren Pins 1 und 3. Die Phantomspeisung kann zur Versorgung der an die linke DIN-Buchse angeschlossenen '''BASS25 MIDI''' Scan-Karte verwendet werden.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - Funktion der linken MIDI-Buchse
|-
!Funktion
!JP auf Pin
!JP auf Pin
!Gnd (blau) JP auf Pin
!Vcc (rot) JP auf Pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|offen
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|offen
|offen
|-
!MIDI IN m. Phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 ist links, von hinten (Platinenrand) aus gesehen''
|}

MIDI über USB ist verfügbar, wenn die USB-Buchse PL25 installiert ist oder ein Mini-USB-Buchsenadapter (optional) oder das HX3.5 Extension Board per Kabel mit PL32 verbunden ist. Bitte beachten Sie: Aufgrund von Hardware-Einschränkungen dürfen '''MIDI IN2 und USB MIDI IN nicht gleichzeitig verwendet werden'''. Es treten sonst Übertragungsfehler auf!

==USB Port==

An Position PL25 kann bei Bedarf ein USB-Typ-B-Stecker eingelötet werden. Er ist werksseitig nicht bestückt, um die mechanische Kompatibilität mit bestehenden Rückwänden zu gewährleisten. Zusätzlich ist das USB-Signal auf der Stiftleiste PL24 (in der Nähe der USB-Buchse) verfügbar, um USB zu unserem HX3.5 Extension Board zu leiten. Der USB-Anschluss ist standardmäßig als "MIDI over USB"-Gerät konfiguriert. Im DFU-Update-Modus wird er zum Anschluss für die HX3.6-DFU-Update-Anwendung.

'''Wichtig:''' Wenn Sie eine "MIDI-over-USB"-Verbindung verwenden (wie beim HX3.6 Manager), trennen Sie alle MIDI-Geräte von der sekundären (linken) MIDI-Eingangs-DIN-Buchse, da sie sich dieselbe MIDI-Eingangsleitung teilen.

Der USB-Anschluss wird auch für DSP-Firmware- oder Soundbank-Updates verwendet.

===Installation des Mini-USB-Adapters===

Zur Verwendung mit der HX3.4-Rückwand mit Mini-USB-Ausschnitt schließen Sie den Mini-USB-Adapter wie folgt an:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB-Adapter
!USB-Kabelfarbe
|-
|G
|GND
|schwarz
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|grün
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|weiß
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|rot
|}
 

==Audio-Ausgänge==

Zusätzlich zu den 1/4"-Audiobuchsen links/rechts liegt das Stereo-Audiosignal an PL3 an (Mitte = analoge Masse).

==Analoge Eingänge anschließen==

HX3.6 bietet '''24 interne Analogeingänge''', die alle auf den Stiftleisten '''PL31 und PL32''' liegen, sowie bis zu '''64 externe Analogeingänge''' über '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' Zugriegel- und '''PTX4-25/35''' Potentiometer-Baugruppen, die am '''PL27 MPX-Bus''' angeschlossen sind. Alle analogen Eingänge sind DC-gesteuert. Der Eingangsspannungsbereich reicht von 0V (aus oder minimale Lautstärke) bis +3,3V (maximale Lautstärke). In der Werkskonfiguration sind alle Analogeingänge deaktiviert, so dass HX3.6 '''ohne angeschlossene Schalter/Zugriegel/Potis''' verwendet werden kann. Sie können die internen Anschlüsse PL31 und PL32 offen lassen, wenn Sie nur eine Steuerung über MIDI planen.

===Analoge Eingänge zuweisen===

Um analoge Steuereingänge zu aktivieren, setzen Sie in der Anwendung HX3.6-Editor den Parameter #1503 auf den Wert 2 (wenn alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegel an PL31/PL32 verwendet werden sollen) oder 3 (sonst). Einzelne Analogeingänge können im Abschnitt '''Analog Remap''' des HX3.6-Editors mit den Parametern #5000 bis #5023 (für die internen Eingänge PL31/PL32) und #5024 bis #5088 (externe DBX/PTX-Platinen an PL27) deaktiviert oder umgelenkt werden. Siehe Abschnitt [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Mischen_von_DB9.2FDB12-_und_DBX-Drawbar-Sets]] für weitere Details.

Wenn einzelne interne Eingangspins an PL31/PL32 nicht verwendet werden (d.h. offen bleiben, keine Zugriegel oder Potis installiert), setzen Sie den entsprechenden Parameter #5000..#5023 auf "254 - Nicht belegt". Um '''alle''' internen Eingänge an PL31/PL32 zu sperren, setzen Sie den ersten Parameter #5000 auf "255 - Ende der Tabelle". Gleiches gilt für PL27 MPX-Bus-Eingänge: Wenn keine zusätzlichen DBX- oder PTX-Karten angeschlossen sind, setzen Sie Parameter #5024 auf "255 - Ende der Tabelle".

Hinweis: Weisen Sie eine Orgelfunktion nicht mehr als einem Analogeingang zu.

===Eingabeprüfung & -überwachung===

Alle zugewiesenen Eingänge sollten mit einem physischen Steuerelement verbunden sein. Andernfalls "floaten" die Eingänge und HX3.6 sendet zufällige MIDI-Steuerungswerte mit einer hohen Rate; dies kann ein Update unmöglich machen.

Im HX3.6 Editor gibt es eine Überwachungsfunktion, mit der Sie die Zustände der physischen Tasten und die analogen Eingangsspannungen überprüfen können. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Input Monitor" und markieren Sie die Checkboxen der Eingangstypen, die Sie überwachen möchten. Änderungen der Eingangsspannung sollten sofort in der/den Tabelle(n) erscheinen. Wenn Sie auf einen Tabelleneintrag klicken, springt die Haupttabelle auf die zugehörige Zuweisungsgruppe.

==Interne Analogeingänge==

Um interne Analogeingänge an '''PL31 und PL32''' zu verwenden, setzen Sie ''System Inits'' Parameter #1503 auf 2 oder 3. Setzen Sie die ''Analog Remap''-Parameter #5000 bis #5023 entsprechend Ihrer Anschlussbelegung. Standardmäßig ist die Anschlussbelegung auf HX3.4-DB9/DB12-Kompatibilität eingestellt.

===Anschluss von Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Zugriegel- und Potianschluss an PL31 und PL32 (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Untermanual-Konfiguration mit DB12 (A#-Presettaste, links) und DB9-MPX (B-Presettaste, rechts). Anschluss an HX3 über langes Flachbandkabel (rechts). Die Oberemanual-Konfiguration ist ähnlich, verwendet aber DB9 oder DB11 anstelle von DB12.''']]

Die klassischen Zugriegelsets DB9/DB11/DB12 können für Einzelzugriegelkonfigurationen verwendet werden. Der Anschluss an unsere alten Zugriegelplatinen DB9 und DB12 ist einfach: DB9 (oben) wird an '''PL31 ANLG UPR''' angeschlossen, DB12 (unten) an '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' über ein 16-adriges Flachbandkabel (Länge bis zu 1m, Stecker 1:1 verdrahtet). DB9 bietet 3-polige Stiftleisten für den Anschluss von Tone- und Amp122 Volume-Potis.

Zusätzliche DB9-MPX-Karten (veraltet - verwenden Sie stattdessen DBX-Zugriegel-Module) können für Konfigurationen mit zwei Zugriegelsätzen pro Manual eingefügt werden. Sekundäre DB9-MPX-Drawbar-Sets sollten wie bei Hammond-Konsolen rechts neben den entsprechenden primären DB9- oder DB12-Drawbars angeordnet werden. Ein kurzes Flachbandkabel verbindet beide (siehe Bild).

DB9 und DB11/12 sind kompatibel und austauschbar, trotz zusätzlicher Zugriegel für Basspedal bzw. Tone/Amp-Volume.

===Anschließen anderer Zugriegel-Potis===

Sie können auch Ihre eigenen oder vorhandene Zugriegel wie folgt verwenden: Schließen Sie mindestens 9 Zugriegel oder Schieberegler und den Lautstärkeregler Leslie an '''PL31 ANLG UPR''' an. Der R-Wert sollte im Bereich von 10 kOhm liegen, '''linear taper''' (zum Beispiel Typ B10K). Höhere Widerstandswerte sind zulässig, wenn Sie an den Schleifer-Anschluss einen 100n-Keramikkondensator nach Masse schalten. Beachten Sie, dass die Verwendung von Zugriegel-Potentiometern mit logarithmischer Kennlinie, wie sie in verschiedenen älteren LSI- und Transistor-Orgeln zu finden sind, nicht zu einer korrekten Lautstärke und Zugriegelposition auf dem Menü-Panel führt.

Jeder Analogeingang kann im Abschnitt "Analog Remap" des HX3.6-Editors mit einer beliebigen Analogfunktion "weich verdrahtet" werden. Standardmäßig werden analoge Funktionen so zugeordnet, dass die HX3.4-Kompatibilität erhalten bleibt (siehe unten).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Steuerspannungen Obermanual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, Volumen des simulierten Röhrenverstärkers
|-
! Pin 12
| Zugewiesenes Poti (zuweisbar mit HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Poti gemeinsame Masse GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B Schaltsignal (kann mit Pin 16 verbunden werden)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Poti Ende 3.3V+ (Referenz)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Steuerspannungen Untermanual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Poti Bass Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Poti gemeinsame Masse GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B Schaltsignal (kann mit Pin 16 verbunden werden)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Poti Ende 3.3V+ (Referenz)
|}
 
Auch bei MIDI-Steuerung sollte für eine schnellere Reaktion ein Schwellpedal an die SWELL-Buchse angeschlossen werden. Dies überschreibt die MIDI-Lautstärkeregelung. Sie können ein Schwellpedal wie das Yamaha FC-7 oder ein einfaches Lautstärkepotentiometer an die SWELL-Buchse anschließen.

Auf der HX3-Hauptplatine sind werkseitig die Eingänge für die Tone/Treble- und Amp-Lautstärkeregelung aktiv (kann auch mit dem ''HX3.6 Editor'' geändert werden). Der Schleifer des Tone-Potis wird an Pin 10 von PL31 angeschlossen. Pin 11 wird zum Lautstärke-/Drive-Regler des Leslie-Verstärkers (obligatorisch). Der Schleifer des Amp-Volume-Potis wird an Pin 11 von PL31 angeschlossen. Beide Potis beginnen mit GND und enden mit Ref 3.3V+.

Bitte beachten Sie: Offene Analogeingänge (nicht beschaltet) "schweben" und ändern sich zufällig, auch bei aktiven Presets. Deaktivieren Sie nicht verwendete Eingänge mit dem Abschnitt ''Analog Remap'' im HX3.6-Editor (auf "254 - Not assigned" einstellen).

 

==Externe Analogeingänge (PL27 MPX-Bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9-Drawbar-Set zum Anschluss an PL27-MPX-Bus-Eingang, auf der rechten Seite gekürzt, um in die Orgel zu passen (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 Drawbar-Set in 9+3-Konfiguration für B3-ähnliche Installationen. Beachten Sie, dass der rechte Anschluss PL4 (Bottom Mount) nicht verwendet werden kann, da der Platz vom Zugriegel-Potentiometer belegt wird. Verwenden Sie den oberen Anschluss PL8 oder die rechten Lötpads zum Aneinanderreihen von Zugriegel-Sets. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX6-Zugriegelsatz und PTX4-35-Potentiometer-Baugruppe hintereinandergeschaltet, geeignet für ADRS-, Lautstärke- oder Equalizer-Regelung (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 und DBX9 Zugriegel-Sets verbunden mit oberen Anschlüssen. Alternativ können auch Lötpads auf der linken und rechten Seite verwendet werden. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Aufgrund einer Design-Fehlers bei den Zugriegelsätzen DBX12 v4 und DBX9 v4 (erste Serie) muss bei Verwendung der oberen Anschlüsse ein Draht an PL8 Pin 2 und Pin 5 angelötet werden, wie gezeigt. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]

Wir empfehlen die Baugruppen '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 oder 12 DrawBars gemultipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog-Eingänge gemultipleXed) und '''PTX4-25 oder PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometer gemultipleXed) für neue Orgel-Designs, da sie die Installation stark vereinfachen. Diese Baugruppen besitzen eigene Multiplexer/Schieberegister-ICs, so dass sie über das MPX-Bussystem, ein 10-adriges Flachbandkabel, das an '''PL27 MPX''' auf der HX3.6-Hauptplatine angeschlossen wird, in Reihe geschaltet werden können. Es können beliebig viele DBX6-, DBX9-, DBX12-, ANX8- und PTX4-Module in beliebiger Reihenfolge aneinandergereiht werden, bis die maximale Kapazität von 64 analogen Reglern erreicht ist. Die 24 internen Eingänge auf '''PL31/PL32''' können unabhängig davon genutzt werden, so dass sich insgesamt '''88 analoge Eingänge''' ergeben.

===DBX-Steckverbinder installieren===

DBX-Platinen sind mit zwei abgewinkelten 10-poligen Steckern versehen. Alle DBX-Zugriegelplatinen sind auch ohne Zugriegel-Potentiometer lieferbar. Bitte bestellen Sie Zugriegel-Potentiometer und -Kappen dafür gesondert. Stecken Sie die Zugriegel von der Unterseite der Platine (keine Siebdruckbeschriftung) an den gewünschten Positionen in die Lötpads, drehen Sie sie um und legen Sie sie vor dem Löten auf eine ebene Fläche, um gleichmäßige Abstände zu erhalten.

Für den Einsatz in engen Installationen können alle DBX-Platinen mit einem fein gezahnten Sägeblatt entlang der weißen Linien auf der Platine ohne Beeinträchtigung der Funktion getrennt werden. Dies sollte vor der Montage von Zugriegel-Potentiometern erfolgen.

===DBX6 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX6-Karten sind für ADSR, Equalizer oder Lautstärkeregler mit 4 bis 6 Zugriegeln geeignet. Bei 6 montierten Zugriegeln wird die rechte untere Position des Steckverbinders durch den letzten Zugriegel belegt. Verwenden Sie in diesem Fall Lötpad-Drahtverbindungen oder oben montierte Steckverbinder für die Anreihung von Boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX6 (Zugriegel für diverse Funktionen)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX9-Karten eignen sich für klassische 9-Zugriegel-Installationen an B3- oder M100-ähnlichen Orgelkonsolen. Sie bieten zusätzlich 3 analoge Eingänge (bei Bedarf) zum Anschluss eigener Potentiometer (10k bis 47k Typen geeignet). Um diese zu nutzen, setzen Sie den Lötpunkt-"Jumper" JP1 offen und JP2 geschlossen (Modus 12 Analogeingänge). Die Potentiometer-Eingänge stehen an dem 6-poligen Stecker PL2 zur Verfügung (nicht montiert; alle 6-poligen Stecker sind parallel verdrahtet, gleiche Pinbelegung). Die Eingänge sind auch an 5 Lötpads verfügbar, die mit AIN +9 bis AIN +11 gekennzeichnet sind, sowie an GND und VREF (gemeinsam für alle Potis). Die Jumper-Einstellungen geschehen durch Entfernen oder Hinzufügen von Lötpunkten. Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Bedienelements auf dem nächsten Modul in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper-Einstellungen DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars auf DBX9
|offen
|geschlossen
|-
!9 Drawbars und 1 bis 3 Potis auf DBX9
|geschlossen
|offen
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 harmonische Zugriegel, JP2 geschlossen)''
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX9 + 3 Analogeingänge
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 Zugriegel) plus 3 zusätzliche Potentiometer-Eingänge (JP1 geschlossen)''
|}

Die Belegung der 6-poligen Steckerleisten zum Anschluss weiterer Potentiometer ist wie folgt:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Belegung der 6-poligen Steckerleiste PL2
|-
!Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(nicht verbunden)
|-
!5
|VREF (gemeinsames Poti-Ende)
|-
!6
|GND (gemeinsamer Poti-Anfang)
|}

===DBX12 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX12-Platinen sind für 12-Zugriegel-Installationen auf '''H100-, Böhm- oder Wersi'''-ähnlichen Orgelpulten geeignet. Die Zugriegelpositionen DB+0 bis DB+11 sind bestückt, die ganz rechte Position R16 bleibt leer.

Es ist aber auch möglich, DBX12-Platinen in einer '''B3-ähnlichen 9+3'''-Zugriegelkonfiguration zu verwenden (d.h. 9 obere oder untere auf der linken Seite, eine Leerstelle und 3 Pedal-Zugriegel auf der rechten Seite). Bestücken Sie in diesem Fall nicht R13 (Leerstelle), sondern verwenden Sie stattdessen die Position R16 (ganz rechts). Beachten Sie, dass die Position R16 (Pedal Sustain) als Eingang #9 (R13) behandelt wird, nicht #12. In jedem Fall hat der DBX12 nur 12 Eingänge, nicht 13. Es ist '''nicht''' möglich, DBX12 als 3+9 Zugriegel (Pedalzugriegel auf der linken Seite) zu bestücken, da sich die Positionen R13 und R16 denselben Analogeingang teilen! Siehe Abschnitt [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Typische_Anwendungen]] für Details. Jumper-Einstellungen durch Entfernen oder Hinzufügen von Lötpunkten. Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelements des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper-Einstellungen DBX12
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars auf DBX12
|geschlossen
|offen
|-
!9+3 Drawbars auf DBX12
|geschlossen
|offen
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX12 in H100-Konfiguration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | kein R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| keiner
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Eingangsbelegung für H100-ähnliche Installation (12 Zugriegel) mit '''R13''' installiert, '''kein R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX12 in B3-ähnlicher Konfiguration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | kein R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| keiner
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 harmonische plus 3 Pedal-Zugriegel) mit '''R16''' installiert, '''kein R13''' ''
|}

===PTX4 Potentiometer-Modul===

Die Karten '''PTX4-25''' und '''PTX4-35''' verfügen über 4 hochwertige Potentiometer, wahlweise mit oder ohne Mittelrastung. Der einzige Unterschied ist der Abstand von einem Poti zum nächsten (25mm bei PTX4-25, 35mm bei PTX4-35). Beliebig viele PTX4-Karten können an beliebiger Stelle in die MPX-Bus-Kette eingefügt werden. Eine einzelne PTX4-Platine fügt +4 zum Nummerierungschema der Eingänge hinzu, wie oben erwähnt, d.h. wenn das erste (linke) Potentiometer zum Eingang #20 wurde ( wegen vorgeschalteter DBX-Platinen), ist das ganz rechte Potentiometer #23, und die nächste PTX- oder DBX-Platine (rechts angeschlossen) wird mit #24 beginnen.

PTX4-Potentiometerplatinen sind '''nicht''' zur Verwendung als externe Potentiometer an den DBX9-Analogeingängen vorgesehen. Verwenden Sie stattdessen separate Potentiometer.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung PTX4-25 und PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Poti
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 ist das erste linke Potentiometer''
|}

Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelement des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls). 

===ANX8 Analoges Eingangsmodul===

'''ANX8'''-Boards verfügen über 8 zusätzliche analoge Eingänge zum Anschluss von eingebauten Potentiometern, Zugriegeln, Pitch/Modulationsrädern und anderen analogen Bedienelementen. Es können beliebig viele ANX8-Karten an beliebiger Stelle in die MPX-Buskette eingefügt werden, wobei PL9 "NEXT BOARD" zum Ende der Kette zeigt. Eine einzelne ANX8-Karte fügt +8 zur Eingangsnummerierung hinzu, wie oben erwähnt, d.h. wenn das erste (ganz linke) Potentiometer zum Eingang #20 wurde ( wegen vorgeschalteter DBX-Boards), ist das ganz rechte Potentiometer #27, und die nächste PTX- oder DBX-Platine (rechts angeschlossen) wird mit #28 beginnen.

Es stehen 8 separate Eingänge an den 3-poligen Stiftleisten PL1 bis PL8 zur Verfügung. Verbinden Sie den/die mit "REF" gekennzeichneten Pin(s) mit dem Ende des Potentiometers, Pin "GND" mit dem Anfang, Pin "AIN" mit dem Schleifer.

Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelements des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Eingang
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

Zur komfortablen Verdrahtung sind die Analogeingänge auch in Gruppen von 4 Eingängen zugänglich (PL11 mit den Eingängen +0 bis +3, PL12 mit den Eingängen +4 bis +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Eingang
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Hintereinanderschaltung von DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 und PTX4===

Schließen Sie die erste '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' oder '''PTX4''' Baugruppe an PL27 an. Der äußerste linke Regler, den HX3.6 in der Kette "sieht", ist der externe MPX-Analogeingang #0 (zugewiesen durch Parameter #5024). Die Nummer zählt bis zur nächsten DBX/PTX-Baugruppe, die an den Daisy-Chain-Anschluss angeschlossen ist. D.h. wenn Sie einen DBX9 und einen PTX4 (in dieser Reihenfolge) verketten, wird das ganz linke (erste) Potentiometer am PTX4 zum Regler #9, zugewiesen durch Parameter #5033 (#0 bis #8 durch DBX9 verbraucht). Das Hinzufügen eines DBX12 beginnt bei #13, zugewiesen durch Parameter #5037, und so weiter.

Ihre Kette sieht nun so aus:
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

Hinweis: PL1 (links oben, unten montiert) und PL7 sind intern parallel geschaltet, ebenso wie PL3 (rechts oben, unten montiert) und PL8. Diese Anschlüsse können alternativ verwendet werden (siehe [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Installations-Alternativen]] für Details).

Wie bereits erwähnt, können DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 oder PTX4 in beliebiger Reihenfolge angeordnet werden, solange sie eine Kette von einer Karte zur anderen bilden. Die Parametrierung beginnt immer bei #0 (Parameter #5024) für das am weitesten links stehende Bedienelement in der Kette. Es ist möglich, einzelne Zugriegel-Eingänge zu '''überspringen''', indem ihr Zuordnungsparameter auf "254 - Not assigned" gesetzt wird. Dies kann bei Leerstellen in der Zugriegelanordnung sinnvoll sein, z. B. zwischen harmonischen und ADSR-Zugriegeln oder Obermanual- und Pedalzugriegeln. Alle DBX-Karten sind ohne montierte Zugriegel-Potentiometer erhältlich, so dass Sie diese nach Ihren Wünschen konfigurieren können.

===Typische Anwendungen===
Eine typische Orgelkonfiguration (9 Zugriegel pro Manual, 3 für Pedal) mit DBX12 kann wie folgt aussehen:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
oder, je nach Installation (um die Kabellänge kurz zu halten):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
Eine H100-ähnliche Installation kann wie folgt aussehen:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Hinweis: PL1 (links oben, unten montiert) und PL7 sind intern parallel geschaltet, ebenso wie PL3/PL4 (rechts oben, unten montiert) und PL8. Diese Anschlüsse können alternativ verwendet werden (siehe [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Installations-Alternativen]] für Details).

====Installations-Alternativen====

DBX-Platinen können miteinander verkettet (hintereinandergeschaltet) werden, indem Sie 10-polige Steckverbinder von unten (linke und rechte Seite der Platine), 10-polige Steckverbinder von oben oder auf Lötpads gelötete Drähte verwenden. Mit jeder Karte werden 2 abgewinkelte 10-polige Steckverbinder mitgeliefert; Sie können auch gerade Steckverbinder verwenden, wenn der Platz dies zulässt.

Statt Flachbandkabel zu verwenden, können benachbarte DBX-Platinen mit Hilfe von Lötpunkten und 6 kurzen Drahtstücken (in obiger Tabelle mit "=" gekennzeichnet) dort verkettet werden, wo die Platinen "aneinanderstoßen". Lötpads auf der linken und rechten Seite ermöglichen eine einfache Verbindung von einer Platine zur nächsten durch '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG und NRST''' Pads ('''VREF3 bleibt unbeschaltet''', ebenso wie zusätzliche Potentiometer-Pads!)

Die Platinen können auch '''entlang der weißen Linien''' abgesägt werden, wenn kein Platz von einem Zugriegel zum nächsten auf einer anderen Platine vorhanden ist. Trennen Sie die Platine bei Bedarf '''vor''' der Montage der Zugriegel-Potentiometer. Die Platinen verfügen über zusätzliche Lötpads für die Verkettung mit Drähten, auch wenn die Platine gekürzt wird. Die letzte DBX-Platine der Reihe sollte jedoch PL3 (DBX9) oder PL4 (DBX12) beibehalten, da Sie in Zukunft eventuell weitere DBX- oder PTX4-Platinen hinzufügen möchten. '''Auch hier gilt: Planen Sie sorgfältig, bevor Sie Zugriegel-Potis einlöten oder Boards absägen!'''

 

====Zweifache/sekundäre DBX-Drawbar-Sätze====

Klassische Konsolorgel-Installationen erfordern zwei Zugriegelsätze für jedes Manual. Die Verwendung von doppelten Zugriegelsätzen mit dem DBX-Sammelsystem unterscheidet sich von alten DB9-MPX-Installationen. In DBX-Installationen können alle Zugriegel von der Firmware "gesehen" werden, auch die inaktiven (sie werden nur übersprungen, wenn der Zugriegelsatz nicht aktiv ist). Setzen Sie den Parameter #1503 auf 3 (DBX-Modus) und weisen Sie allen Eingängen, die primäre Zugriegel sind, die Werte ''Upr1'' oder ''Lwr1'' zu, während sekundäre Zugriegel zu ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' werden (128 und höher).

Die sekundären Zugriegel werden aktiviert, wenn die im jeweiligen Manual eingestellte '''Voice''' der Nummer in "System Inits" Parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number) entspricht, andernfalls werden sie übersprungen und die primären Zugriegel werden aktiv.

====Mischen von DB9/DB12- und DBX-Drawbar-Sets====

Da die internen Eingänge an PL31/PL32 auch in DBX-Konfigurationen als Zugriegel-Eingänge verwendet werden können, dürfen vorhandene DB9/DB12- und sogar DB9-MPX-Zugriegel, die an PL31/PL32 angeschlossen sind (zugewiesen durch ''Analog Remap'' #5000 bis #5023), weiterhin verwendet werden, entweder als primäre oder sekundäre Zugriegel-Sets.

* Wenn '''alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegelboards''' als sekundäre Zugriegel-Sets an PL31/PL32 angeschlossen sind, setzen Sie den Wert von Parameter #1503 auf 2 (DB9-MPX-Modus). In diesem Fall '''verwenden Sie nicht''' die sekundären Zugriegel-Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' für die Eingänge (Parameterwerte 128 und höher) im Abschnitt "Analog Remap"; die Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' werden ignoriert.

* Wenn alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegelboards '''nicht''' verwendet werden, setzen Sie den Wert von Parameter #1503 auf 3 (DBX-Modus). In diesem Fall können die sekundären Zugriegel-Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' für Eingänge (Parameterwerte ab 128) im Abschnitt "Analog Remap" verwendet werden.

 

==Digitale Eingänge==

Das HX3.6-System bietet insgesamt 64 interne (logische) Schalterfunktionen oder "Tabs" (z. B. "Tube Amp Bypass" oder "H100 Keying Mode") sowie einige Sonderfunktionen (ab Firmware 5.7, z.B. Transpose Up/Down). Das Mainboard besitzt '''16 interne digitale Eingänge''' an PL35/PL36 (erweiterbar durch bis zu 5 externe Boards '''Preset16''' oder '''Extend16''' auf bis zu 96 Preset- und Schalterfunktionen) zum Anschluss von Schaltern oder Tastern plus einen Drehschaltereingang (Vibrato-Knopf V1..C3). Schalter sind einrastende Taster, Wipp- oder Kippschalter. Taster sind momentane Schaltkontakte, normalerweise offen. Alle Eingänge sind aktiv low, d.h. sie liegen auf Masse, wenn der Schalter/Taster betätigt wird. Sie können die Schalteranschlüsse offen lassen, wenn Sie HX3.6 nur über MIDI steuern wollen.

===Input Monitor===

Eine sehr hilfreiche Funktion des HX3.6 Editors ist der ''Input Monitor''. Sie können hiermit die Funktion aller Taster und Schalter überprüfen. Aktive (gedrückte) Buttons werden mit "ON" gekennzeichnet.

Durch Klick in die Input-Tabelle erfahren Sie auch, welchem HX3.6-Tab der Eingang bzw. der Button zugeordnet ist. Umgekehrt springt das aktive Feld in den Input-Monitor-Tabellen beim Klick auf eine Zuordnung in ''Switch Remap'' auf den zugeordneten Eingang.

===Onboard-Eingänge PL35/PL36===

Die Steckverbinder '''PL35 und PL36''' führen die 16 internen digitalen Eingänge; hier können eigene Taster/Schalter oder ein Panel16-Board angeschlossen werden (siehe unter '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Viele Installationen werden mit diesen 16 Tabs auskommen.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinbelegung PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default-Funktion
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinbelegung PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default-Funktion
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Taster oder Schalter====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss von Tasten mit LED-Anzeigen an PL35 PERC/VIBON und PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Verwenden Sie für blaue oder weiße LEDs einen R-Wert von 1k, da diese LEDs sehr hell sind.''']]

Anstelle von Panel16 können Sie auch Ihre eigenen Taster oder Registerkartenschalter (bis zu 16) direkt an die HX3.6-Hauptplatine anschließen. Jede Funktion wird entweder durch eine Taste oder einen Schalter (abhängig vom Parameter '''Button Mask''' in den Systemeinstellungen des HX3.6-Editors) an den digitalen Eingängen PL35/PL36 aktiviert. Bei Tastern schaltet ein kurzzeitiger Kontakt mit Masse an jedem PL35/PL36-Pin den Status um und steuert Anzeige-LEDs an (siehe Schaltplan). Bei Schaltern kann die Anzeige-LED weggelassen werden, da der mechanische Schalter den aktuellen Zustand anzeigt. Lassen Sie unbenutzte digitale Eingänge offen.

====Panel16====

Die einfachste Lösung für ein Schaltpanel ist die Verwendung [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/panel16 unserer Panel16-Platine], die über zwei 10-polige Flachbandkabel mit '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL und PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' verbunden ist. '''Panel16''' bietet 16 Tasten für die komplette Steuerung des HX3; fügen Sie einfach den Drehschalter für die Vibratotiefe hinzu.

Panel16 hat 4 "Common Preset"-Tasten im Layout für Standard-Orgelinstallationen. Die "Common Preset"-Tasten sind binär kodiert, so dass mehr als eine Preset-Taste aktiv sein kann (gleichzeitiges Drücken). Dies ermöglicht 16 Tastenkombinationen (alle aus bis alle an), die den Common Presets 0 (live) bis 15 entsprechen. Alternativ können diese Tasten zur Auswahl von V1-V3-Vibrato oder C1-C3-Chorus-Tiefe verwendet werden. In diesem Fall entfällt der Vibrato-Drehschalter an PL24; stellen Sie dann ''System Inits'' Parameter #1497 auf 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default-Button-Zuordnung Panel16 an PL25/26
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons obere Reihe
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe mit Vibrato-Buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe mit Preset-Buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Die Positionen der Tasten, die für Common Presets oder V1..V3 V/C verwendet werden, sind unter den Parametern ''Switch Remap Onboard'' abgelegt. Alle Tasten können frei belegt werden.

===Weitere Taster/Schalter===

Zur Erweiterung der Taster-/Schalter-Eingänge stehen die Boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' und auch das ältere '''Preset12-2''' zur Verfügung. Sie werden an '''PL26 PANEL''' auf dem Mainboard angeschlossen und über ein Bus-System (I2C) in Serie geschaltet. Jedes Board bildet eine Gruppe aus 16 Eingängen (2 x 12 bei Preset 12-2). Das MenüPanel wird ebenfalls mit diesem Bus verbunden; praktischerweise setzt man es an das Ende der Kette, da es nur einen Bus-Steckverbinder aufweist. Es ist ebenso möglich, mehrere 10polige Steckverbinder auf das Flachbandkabel an PL26 anzupressen.

Jedem Board muss über seine Jumper eine '''eindeutige Bus-Adresse''' zugeordnet werden ($60 bis $65, siehe Aufdruck und Tabelle unten). Bei älteren Preset16 und dem Preset12-2 sind die Adressen fest verdrahtet ($60 oder $61 für Preset16 alt, Preset12-2 belegt gleich zwei Adressen $60 und $61). Jede Adresse darf im Verbund nur einmal vergeben sein, sonst kommt es zu Bus-Konflikten.

Die 16 Eingänge eines Preset16- oder Extend16-Boards bilden ein Gruppe, bei 5 Boards sind dies die Gruppen 0 bis 5 entsprechend den eingestellten Adressen $60 bis $65. Es ist nicht nötig, die Adressen und damit die Gruppennummern der angeschlossenen Boards fortlaufend zu numerieren, es dürfen "Lücken" vorhanden sein. Diese fragt HX3.6 nicht ab.

Alle Taster-/Schalter können über die HX3.6-Editor-Parameter ''Switch Remap'' einer beliebigen HX3.6-Funktion ("Tab") zugeordnet werden; die Parameter in der Gruppe ''Input Mode'' entscheiden, ob am entsprechenden Eingang ein Schalter (ON, 255) oder ein Taster mit LED (OFF, 0, default) angeschlossen ist.

Um die Funktion und Zugehörigkeit eines digitalen Eingangs zu überprüfen, verwenden Sie den ''Input Monitor'' im HX3.6-Editor. Durch einen Klick in die Monitor-Tabelle können Sie außerdem feststellen, welchem HX3.6-Tab dieser Eingang zugeordnet ist.

Jeder digitale Eingang kann im Abschnitt ''Switch Remap'' des HX3-Editors, Parameter 5100 bis 5195, aktiviert/deaktiviert oder umgeleitet werden. Auch Preset- und Voice-Taster dürfen beliebig auf die 96 Eingänge verteilt werden. Einzige Restriktion: Taster einer bestimmten Preset-Funktion (Upper, Lower oder Common) müssen innerhalb einer Gruppe bzw. eines Boards auf fortlaufenden Buttons liegen, es ist nicht möglich, zum Beispiel Upper Voices auf 2 Boards/Gruppen zu verteilen.

====Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge====

Input-Gruppe 2 ($62) ist bereits für die 16 Eingänge auf dem HX3.6-Mainboard vergeben (siehe unten, Abschnitt '''Panel16''') und darf für externe Preset16/Extend16 nicht verwendet werden.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input-Gruppe
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus-Adresse
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper auf Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 geschlossen
|JP2, JP3 geschlossen
|JP1, JP3 geschlossen
|JP3 geschlossen
|JP1, JP2 geschlossen
|JP2 geschlossen
|-
!Hinweis
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Feste Adressen für Preset16 (alt, Upper 0, Lower 1) und Preset12-2 (beide)
|HX3.6-Platine onboard, feste Adresse '''Nicht für Preset16, Extend16 benutzen!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button links oben oder erster Eingang
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

Die Nummer eines bestimmten Tasters/Schalters ergibt sich aus der Gruppen-Basisnummer (16 * Gruppe/Board-Nummer) plus dem angegebenen Offset. Für das Board mit Adresse '''$63''' wäre der erste Eingang also 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]
[[Datei:Preset16_2_silk.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschlüsse und Jumper der Platine Preset16-2 (neue Version)''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] ist ein eigenständiges Panel mit 2 Reihen zu je 8 LED-Tasten. Es wird über ein 10-poliges Flachbandkabel mit '''HX3 PL26''' verbunden. Weitere Preset16 können an die jeweils zweite 10-polige Stiftleiste angeschlossen werden (Daisy Chain). Beide 10-poligen Stiftleisten am Preset16 können verwendet werden (sind parallel verdrahtet).

Ein gesteckter Jumper auf älteren Preset16-Platinen wählt das obere Manual aus, falls vorhanden. Fehlt die Brücke, arbeitet Preset16 auf unterem Manual. Neuere Preset16-Platinen verfügen über drei Jumper (Lötbrücken), um das Preset16 auf obere oder untere manuelle Voice-Presets (Adresse $60 und $61) einzustellen (siehe Tabelle '''Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge'''). Setzen Sie Lötpunkte, um eine der in der Tabelle angegebenen Platinenadressen zu erhalten.

Wenn Sie zwei Zugriegel pro Manual verwenden, indem Sie DBX oder ältere DB9-MPX (veraltet) Zugriegelkarten verwenden, setzen Sie den ''System Inits'' Parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" auf 1. Dadurch wird der erste Zugriegelsatz auf Preset 0 aktiviert, der zweite Zugriegelsatz auf Preset 1. Sie können eine beliebige Voice von 1 bis 15 für die Aktivierung des zweiten Zugriegelsets verwenden. Höhere Zahlen deaktivieren die Umschaltung.

Die Board-Adresse darf beliebig sein (außer $62 für Gruppe 2), da die Preset-Buttons über ''Switch Remap'' zugewiesen werden. Voreingestellt in der Firmware sind allerdings $60 und $61, um mit bestehenden Installationen kompatibel zu bleiben. Um eine Kompatibilität mit vorhendenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, was obere und untere Button-Reihe von Preset16 vertauscht. Alternativ können Sie die grauen Tastenkappen in die obere Button-Reihe umstecken; sie lassen sich mit etwas Kraft abziehen. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default-Button-Belegung
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons obere Reihe
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live-Einstellung
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (oder 2. DB-Satz)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Änderbar über '''Switch Remap''', können auf jedem Board und in jeder Gruppe liegen, jedoch fortlaufende Buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16-Schalter-Erweiterung''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss von Tasten mit LED-Anzeigen an Extend16, PL17 und PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/taster-schalter-eingangsplatine-extend16 Extend16-Boards] sind im Prinzip Preset16 ohne Taster; der Anschluss von Schaltern oder Buttons (ggf. mit LED) erfolgt wie oben für die On-Board-Eingänge des HX3.6 beschrieben. Die Pinbelegung von PL17/PL16 auf dem Extend16-Board ist kompatibel mit '''PL35/PL36 des Mainboards'''. Zusätzlich sind alle Taster-Eingänge auf 3-polige Steckverbinder geführt. Extend16 können bei entsprechender Konfiguration auch zur Auswahl von Presets dienen und ersetzen dann die älteren '''Preset12-2'''.

Die Nummer des Tasters/Schalters ergibt sich aus der Gruppen-Basisnummer (16 * Gruppe/Board-Nummer) plus dem angegebenen Offset. Für das Board mit Adresse '''$63''' (Gruppe 3) wäre der erste Eingang also 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pin-Belegung PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Einzeleingang
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pin-Belegung PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Einzeleingang
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
Zur bequemeren Verdrahtung sind die LED-Taster-Eingänge auch auf 16 dreipolige Steckverbinder geführt, an die jeweils ein LED-Taster angeschlossen wird. Wenn Sie Schalter oder Taster ohne LED verwenden, lassen Sie den Anschluss L+ offen. Vorwiderstände für die LEDs sind hier bereits enthalten, sie können rote, gelbe und grüne LEDs direkt an PL1..PL16 anschließen. Für blaue und weiße LEDs sollte in die Leitung L+ noch ein zusätzlicher Vorwiderstand von 1kOhm eingefügt werden, da die LEDs sonst zu hell sind und blenden. Pinbelegung PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Einzeleingänge
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Funktion
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button und LED- (Verbindung)
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

Die Board-Adresse darf beliebig sein (außer $62 für Gruppe 2), da die Preset-Buttons über ''Switch Remap'' zugewiesen werden. Voreingestellt in der Firmware sind allerdings $60 und $61, um mit bestehenden Installationen kompatibel zu bleiben. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolet)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|Die Preset12-2-Platine wird an HX3.6 PL26 angeschlossen. Das Flachbandkabel kann mit einem zusätzlichen Stecker verlängert werden, um das Menü-Panel anschließen zu können.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] ist eine Interface-Platine für bis zu 2 x 12 "invertierte" Preset-Tasten (mit optionalen LED-Anzeigen), wie sie an Hammond-Konsolenorgeln zu finden sind. Die Preset12-2-Platine entspricht im Prinzip zwei Panel16 oder Extend16, bei dem die letzten 4 Eingänge fehlen. Sie wird über ein 10-adriges Flachbandkabel mit dem '''HX3.6 PL26''' verbunden. Pin 1 der beiden 14-poligen Stiftleisten ist Preset 0 = Live (rechter Zugriegelsatz) = B-Taste, Pin 2 ist Preset 1 = Live (linker Zugriegelsatz) usw. bis hinunter zu Pin 12 = CANCEL-Taste.

Die Standard-Orgel-Firmware unterstützt '''Momentan-Kontakte'''. Um ein Preset zu speichern, halten Sie die Preset-Taste/den Taster für 2 Sekunden gedrückt.

Bei Verwendung von '''2 Zugriegelsätzen pro Manual''' durch DB9-MPX-Zugriegel/Multiplexer und Preset12-2-Platine, setzen Sie ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" Parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" auf 1. Das Umschalten von Zugriegelsätzen A#/B ist nur aktiv, wenn kein Common Preset eingeschaltet ist ("Live" Modus #0). Wenn ein '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) angewählt ist, wird immer das '''rechte Zugriegel-Set''' aktiv.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 Kathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 Kathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 Kathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 Kathode (Preset 11, CANCEL-Taste) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

Die LED-Ausgänge haben integrierte 220-Ohm-Widerstände, wodurch sich ein LED-Strom von 15 mA ergibt. Das lange Bein der LEDs ist die Anode (+), das kurze Bein die Kathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Taster/Schalter)''' 
Pin - Funktion (active low – auf Gnd schalten) 
1: Schalter 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Schalter 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Schalter 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Schalter 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Gemeinsames Gnd (0V)

Um eine Kompatibiltät mit vorhandenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. Dadurch wird die richtige Voice-Preset-Reihenfolge wiederhergestellt. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolet)====

Die alten '''Preset12-MPX'''-Karten für HX3 mk2/mk3 können auch für HX3.6 zusammen mit zwei Sätzen von Nicht-MPX-Drawbar-Boards verwendet werden. Sie bieten jedoch keine variable Voreinstellnummer für den zweiten Zugriegelsatz. Stattdessen ist der zweite Zugriegelsatz fest auf Voice Preset 15 verdrahtet. Sie müssen also die Nummer des zweiten Zugriegelsatzes in Parameter #1505 auf 15 ändern, nicht auf 1, wenn Sie Preset12-MPX verwenden.

Um eine Kompatibiltät mit vorhandenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. Dadurch wird die richtige Voice-Preset-Reihenfolge wiederhergestellt. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets und Voices====

HX3.6 kennt für jedes Manual und das Pedal getrennt gespeicherte reinen Zugriegeleinstellungen ("Voices") und die (je nach System Inits-Konfiguration) viele oder sämtliche Analog- und Tab-Einstellungen umfassenden "Common Presets" (1 bis 99). Zugriegel-'''Voices''' (wie sie als "invertierte Tasten" auf B3-Konsolen zu finden sind) arbeiten unabhängig von den Common Presets; sie wirken sich nur auf die Zugriegel-Einstellungen aus und können über das Menü aufgerufen werden. 2x8, 2x12 oder 2x16 Voice Presets können mit den optionalen Karten '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (mehrere zulässig) oder '''Preset12-2''' erreicht werden.

Wird ein Common Preset aufgerufen und steht ein Voice-Preset nicht auf 0 (live), blinkt der nun ungültige Voice-Button. Ein erneuter Druck auf den Voice-Button ruft die hier abgespeicherte Zugriegeleinstellung auf; nun blinkt der Common-Preset-Button, um anzuzeigen, dass das Common Preset nicht mehr gültig ist.

===Vibrato-Knopf (Drehschalter)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss des Vibrato-Drehschalters an PL33 VIBSW. Ignorieren Sie die Beschriftung "PL5" im Schaltplan. Erste Kontaktfahne des Drehschalters wird nicht verwendet!''']]

Vibrato/Chorus V1 bis C3 wird mit einem Drehschalter ausgewählt, der an '''PL33''' angeschlossen ist. Die Schalterstellung wird immer abgefragt, es sei denn, Panel16 ist mit V1..3/Chorus-Tasten konfiguriert (''System Inits'' Parameter #1504, siehe auch Hinweis unten). PL33 führt auch Schaltsignale, die die Drehschalterstellung anzeigen. Sie können hier eine LED mit seriellem Widerstand (330R und höher) anschließen, wobei die Kathode (-) mit Common Gnd verbunden ist.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato-Drehschalter (active low – auf Gnd schalten):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato-Knopf
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|nicht verwendet
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|nicht verwendet
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

Um Vibrato-Tasten zuzuweisen, setzen Sie die entsprechenden Eingänge im Abschnitt ''Switch Remap'' auf 84, 85, 87 (Drei-Tasten-Modus) bzw. 84..87 (Vier-Tasten-Modus). Der ''System Inits'' Parameter #1504 = 1 wird ignoriert.

==Anschließen von Tastatur-Scan-Karte(n)==

Für geringste Key-to-Audio-Latenz empfehlen wir den direkten Tastaturanschluss über Scan-Boards (verschiedene Versionen verfügbar). Scan-Boards werden durch Update von SD-Karte (passend zu Ihrer Anwendung) oder ''HX3.6 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie die Treiber ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' bzw. ''scansr61.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6. Alle Scan-Treiber unterstützen auch MIDI-Input/Output, aber für reine MIDI-Fernsteuerung empfehlen wir den MIDI-Input-Treiber ''scanmidi.dat''. Neue HX3.6-Karten werden mit installierter ''scanmidi.dat'' geliefert.

===Sustain/Sostenuto/Cancel Taster===

Der Anschluss '''PL16 AUXILIARY''' steuert Sustain/Sostenuto und MIDI Cancel für jedes Manual. (Fuss)Taster müssen den betreffenden Eingang mit Masse verbinden, um die Funktion zu aktivieren:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL16 AUXILIARY
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Bit 0, Cancel MIDI Upper
|-
!2
|Bit 1, Cancel MIDI Lower
|-
!3
|Bit 2, Sostenuto Lower
|-
!4
|Bit 3, Sustain Lower
|-
!5
|Bit 4, Sostenuto Upper
|-
!6
|Bit 5, Sustain Upper
|-
!7
|not used
|-
!8
|not used
|-
!9
| +5V (not used)
|-
!10
|Common Gnd für Taster
|}

Bitte beachten Sie: Diese Eingänge sind ungeschützt und können durch statische Aufladung, z.B. durch Einstecken eines Kabels, zerstört werden. Jeder als Fusstaster benutzte Eingang von PL16 sollte durch eine Zenerdiode 4V7/250mW geschützt werden (Anode an Gnd, Kathodenring an Eingang).

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2-Anschlussplan (mk4-Mainboard abgebildet, PL-Indizes für HX3.6 nicht gültig), Anschluss an PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

Eine einzelne [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2-Karte] wird an '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN''' angeschlossen. An eine FatarScan2-Platine können ein oder zwei Fatar 61-Tastaturen (Typ TP/8O o.ä.) mit Hilfe eines speziellen Kabelsatzes (MicroMatch-Stecker zu Tastatur-Scanleisten) angeschlossen werden. Siehe Seite [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] für weitere Bilder. Wir empfehlen den Kauf des FatarScan2-Kabelsatzes für den Anschluss an die MicroMatch-Steckerleisten der Fatar-Tastaturen (ein Satz für jedes Manual).

Eine FatarScan2-Platine '''muss''' an PL8 angeschlossen werden, wenn Sie den FatarScan-Treiber verwenden, ansonsten ist ein lautes Geräusch zu hören.

Basspedale können an eine zusätzliche Scan16-Strip-, Scan61-Inline- oder Bass25-Karte angeschlossen werden, die mit '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!) verbunden wird.

FatarScan2-Karten werden durch Update von SD-Karte oder ''HX3 Manager'' Anwendung aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scanfatr.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6.

'''Bitte beachten Sie:''' Die FatarScan2-Platine muss angeschlossen sein, wenn der Treiber scanfatr.dat verwendet wird, sonst wird die Kommunikation mit dem HX3.6 Manager blockiert.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Anschluss von Scan16 Strip oder Scan61 an HX3-Platine PL12 4014 SCAN (HX3.4 abgebildet, HX3.6 hat andere PL-Indizes)]]'''

Für die meisten "ein Kontakt pro Taste"-Orgeln können ein oder zwei Sätze von langen [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] Boards (ein Satz für jedes Manual) verwendet werden, die eine einfachere Installation an diesen Tastaturen ermöglichen. Für jedes Manual benötigen Sie 3 (44 oder 49 Tasten) oder 4 (61 Tasten) Scan16-Platinen. Bitte beachten Sie die [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN Schaltpläne und Teileplatzierung] in unserem Git Repo. Alle mit Scan16 bestückten Manuale werden parallel mit einem 10-adrigen Flachbandkabel (mit mehreren Steckern) an '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN''' verdrahtet. Bass25 kann als Pedal-Scanboard verwendet werden. Ein Jumper auf der "untersten" Scan16-Platine legt fest, ob das Tastenfeld oberes, unteres oder Bass-Pedal ist:

JP1 = Obermanual 
JP2 = Untermanual 
JP3 = Pedal 

Bitte beachten Sie: Das unterste Tastenkontakt-Pad auf dem Scan16 ist immer die Taste "C" auf 4- und 5-Oktaven-Tastaturen. Bei 61-Tasten-Manualen kann der obere Teil der rechten Scan16-Platine abgeschnitten sein, wie auf dem Siebdruck der Platine markiert (oder die Pads bleiben offen). Bei 44-Tasten-Manualen bleiben die untersten 5 Pads offen, Manual(e) beginnen mit Taste "F". Bei 49-Tasten-Manualen wird das Pad PL20 mit der höchsten "C"-Note verbunden. Alle Kontakte müssen auf Masse schalten. Die Boards stellen Massekontakte für den Anschluss an die Stromschiene zur Verfügung.

Scan16-Karten für ein oder zwei 49/61-Tasten-Manuale werden durch Update von SD-Karte oder Anwendung ''HX3 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scansr61.dat'' mit dem ''Updater''-Fenster auf den HX3.6 hoch. Siehe Seite [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] für Bilder.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board verbunden mit HX3 Board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] funktioniert genau wie ein Scan16-Strip-Set mit 4 Platinen, hat aber alle Teile auf einer kompakten Platine montiert (für jedes Manual wird eine Scan61-Inline benötigt). Daher muss jede Taste separat verdrahtet werden. Bitte beachten Sie [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN Schaltplan und Teileplatzierung] in unserem Git Repo. Alle mit Scan61 bestückten Manuale werden parallel mit einem 10-adrigen Flachbandkabel (mit mehreren Steckern) an '''HX3.6 PL12''' verdrahtet. Bass25 kann als drittes Pedal-Scanboard verwendet werden. Ein Jumper auf der Scan61-Inlineplatine legt fest, ob das Tastenfeld oberes, unteres oder Bass-Pedal ist:

JP1 = Obermanual 
JP2 = Untermanual 
JP3 = Pedal 

Bitte beachten Sie: Unterstes Tastenkontakt-Pad bei Strip61-Inline ist immer Taste "C". Bei kürzeren Manualen lassen Sie unbenutzte Tasteneingänge offen. Wie bei OrganScan61 oder Scan16-Strip müssen alle Kontakte auf Masse schalten. Die Karten stellen Massekontakte für den Anschluss an die Stromschiene zur Verfügung.

Scan61-Inline-Karten werden per Update von der SD-Karte oder der Anwendung ''HX3 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scansr61.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 und Bass25 MIDI (oben rechts) mit eigenem MIDI OUT und Phantomspeisung''']]

Die [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/bass25 Bass25] Scanplatine (siehe PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 unserem Github Repo-Ordner PLATINEN/BASS25]) kann als Ergänzung zu den FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline und Scan16-Strip Platinen zum bequemen Anschluss der Basspedalkontakte wie oben abgebildet verwendet werden (beachten Sie die unterschiedlichen HX3 Stecker). Die Karte kann im Boden der Orgel platziert werden, wenn das 10-adrige Flachbandkabel zum HX3 oder zur letzten OrganScan61-Karte nicht länger als 1 m ist. Bitte beachten Sie die Jumperstellung am Bass25:

* '''JP1''' Lötbrücke, immer offen
* '''JP2''' Lötbrücke bei Verwendung mit HX3.4 OrganScan61 (wird bei HX3.6 nicht unterstützt)
* '''JP3''' Lötbrücke bei Verwendung mit FatarScan2 auf '''HX3.6 PL8''' oder Scan16 Strip auf '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 bietet In-Line-Stecker und einen 26-poligen Flachbandkabelanschluss für den alternativen Anschluss von Basspedal-Kontakten:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 Tasten-Anschluss
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Tiefste Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|weitere Tasten
|-
!25
|Höchste Note C
|-
!26
|Gemeinsame Masse (busbar)
|}

Statt an PL1 können die Tastaturkontakte auch an die Inline-Stiftleisten PL2 bis PL7 oder an die Lötpads vor den Stiftleisten angeschlossen werden (linker Pin PL2: tiefstes C). Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 dient auch als gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

'''JP3 und JP4''' Lötbrücken müssen geschlossen sein.

Hinweis: Eine dritte Scan16-Strip- oder Scan61-Inline-Platine kann alternativ für das Basspedal anstelle von Bass25 verwendet werden, wobei nur die ersten 13 oder 25 Kontakteingänge genutzt werden. Setzen Sie den Jumper JP3 auf der Scan-Karte, um sie für die Verwendung als Basspedal zu aktivieren.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] ist mit einem eigenen MIDI-Controller und einer MIDI-Ausgangsbuchse ausgestattet. Er wird über ein 5-adriges MIDI-Kabel mit der HX3.6-Hauptplatine verbunden. Bass25 MIDI bietet Inline-Steckverbinder und einen 26-poligen Flachbandkabelanschluss für den alternativen Anschluss von Basspedal-Kontakten. Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 bietet auch eine gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI Tasten-Anschluss
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Tiefste Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|weitere Tasten
|-
!25
|Höchste Note C
|-
!26
|Gemeinsame Masse (busbar)
|}

Statt an PL1 können die Tastaturkontakte auch an die Inline-Stiftleisten PL2 bis PL7 an die Lötpads vor den Stiftleisten angeschlossen werden (linker Pin PL2: tiefstes C). Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 dient auch als gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

'''JP3''' Lötbrücke muss geschlossen sein.

'''JP4''' Lötbrücke muss geschlossen sein, wenn der Bass25 MIDI mit Phantomspeisung von der HX3-Platine, linke MIDI-Eingangsbuchse (von hinten gesehen), versorgt wird. MIDI-Phantomspeisung-Jumper auf der HX3-Platine müssen gesteckt sein.

Für eine separate Stromversorgung (interne +5V oder externes 9V DC Steckernetzteil), öffnen Sie die '''JP4'''-Lötbrücke. Verwenden Sie die 2-polige Stiftleiste PL12 neben der MIDI OUT-Buchse für die interne +5V-Versorgung: Pin 1 (links, zur Diode weisend) ist VCC +5V, Pin 2 (rechts) ist Masse (siehe PDF-Schaltplan in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 unserem Github-Repo-Ordner PLATINEN/BASS25]).

Eine +5V-MIDI-Phantomspeisung an den äußeren Pins des MIDI-Eingangs kann von der HX3-Hauptplatine durch Einsetzen von zwei '''zusätzlichen''' Jumpern auf HX3.6 PL20 '''Pins 7-8 und 9-10''' erhalten werden. Installieren Sie diese Steckbrücken nicht, wenn Sie andere MIDI-Geräte anschließen, die keine Phantomspeisung verwenden.

==Extension Board==

Das HX3 Extension Board mk5 ist für den Anschluss eines Leslie mit 11-Pin-Anschluss und Kopfhörer verfügbar. Es ist kompatibel mit HX3.6.

Die alte Erweiterungsplatine für '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' kann verwendet werden, nachdem zwei Widerstände von der Erweiterungsplatine entfernt und zwei Drähte auf der Rückseite der HX3.6-Hauptplatine vom Anschluss der Erweiterungsplatine zum seriellen Anschluss gelötet wurden.

'''Siehe Seite [[HX3.5 Extension Board (deutsch)]]''' für Details.

HX3.5 Main page

2024-02-07T15:58:53Z

Christian: /* Documents, Updates & Manuals */

[[Datei:HX35_0.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5 mainboard''']]

== Preface ==

=== Features ===

HX3.5 (HX3 mk5) is the follow-up model of the well-known HX3 mk4 board. While maintaining size and form factor, it offers higher performance and more flexibilty by using a larger 6th generation XILINX FPGA (3 times more gates than 3rd Generation FPGA on HX3.4). Connectors are mostly compatible with HX3 mk4, so HX3.5 will be a drop-in replacement for many applications.

As an option (extended licence required), the new HX3 mk5 engine is capable of emulating all electromagnetic organs including H100, combo organs, several concert organs of the 70s and 80s like Böhm Orchester and Wersi Helios. This implies up to 15 harmonics, up to 12 drawbars per manual with individual mixtures, including phasing rotor (WersiVoice), mechanical and electronic keying available simultaneously. ADSR envelope available on all drawbars, also H100 percussion and "Harp Sustain". New tone generator switchable from tonewheel to TOS (top octave synthesizer) or single note mode, loadable generator waveforms for "cheesy" combo organs as well as fully fledged concert organs.

In many respects, HX3.5 is compatible with the older HX3.4 board (most peripherals, header pinout, mechanical dimensions). However, there are additional connectors, also the connector lettering has changed. An Editor application (part of the HX3.5 Manager application) provides access to the vastly increased HX3.5 parameter count.

'''HX3.5 components are meant to be installed by a skilled technician. Basic IT knowledge is mandatory since software has to be installed and configurated in some cases.'''

=== Technical Data ===

'''Size:''' 200 x 100 mm

'''Power Supply:''' 5V/400mA or 9-12V/300mA (without peripherals)

'''Sound generation:''' HX3 mk5 Sound Engine, hardware emulation (physical modeling) by 6th generation FPGA. 61 keys on upper/lower manual as well as pedal. 15 harmonics per key, Hammond-type percussion on all harmonics. Keying of each harmonic selectable to "mechanical" (Hammond-type key contacts) or electronic gating (LSI/transistor organs). Electronic gating uses separate ADSR circuit for each harmonic and each key (915 ADSR/VCA circuits per manual).

Quad core DSP with 64 MByte sample memory for reverb/efx and 128 GM2 voices. 81-note polyphony.

'''Connections:''' 1/4" jack footswitch, 1/4" jack Swell pedal (Yamaha FC-7 or similar), DIN-5pin MIDI IN, MIDI IN/OUT, DC jack 5V or 9V wallwart power supply min. 500mA, 1/4" jacks for stereo audio output, USB MIDI jack (must be soldered in place if needed). Connectors for up to 24 drawbars/pots on board (extendable to 64 drawbars/pots), 16 buttons (extendable to 64 buttons), 6-position Vibrato rotary switch, I2C bus system for MenuPanel and Preset board connection (compatible to our Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards).

== Documents, Updates & Manuals ==

'''[[HX3.5 Backgrounder]]''' In-depth information about HX3 mk5 resp. Böhm RealOrgan Sound Engine 
'''[[HX3.5 Installation Manual]]''' Mainboard hardware installation 
'''[[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' Installation 
'''[[Using HX3 with MIDI controllers]]''' - HX3 MIDI implementation charts for all MIDI CC sets 
'''[[HX3.5 SD Card Usage]]''' Updating Controller firmware and FPGA sound engine using SD card adaptor 
'''[[HX3.5 Firmware 5.8 Migration Guide (english)]]''' Hints for upgrading to HX3.5 Firmware #5.8xx

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX35_Mainboard.pdf HX3.5 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' 
'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX35_MIDI_Expander.pdf HX3.5 MIDI Expander User Manual, printable PDF file]''' 
'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_DrawbarExpander.pdf HX3.5 Drawbar Expander User Manual, printable PDF file]''' 
'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for altering parameters, update transfers and finalizing 
'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/WiFi_Module_Installation_Guide.pdf HX3 WiFi interface installation guide, printable PDF file]''' 

'''[http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com HX3.5 Files Page]''' Most recent updates, manuals, schematics and tools

Using HX3 with MIDI controllers

2023-11-03T15:15:10Z

Christian: /* #9, #10 MIDI Custom CC */

==MIDI Control==

HX3 accepts MIDI key on/off events (default: channel 1 to upper manual, 2 to lower manual, channel 3 to bass pedals) as well as various MIDI CCs with selectable compatibility sets. MIDI dynamics slightly affect key click noise. SysEx data other than its own are always ignored. Both MIDI jacks act as MIDI inputs with equal priority (default). The second MIDI jack may be jumpered as MIDI Out. (Details for HX3 mk4 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', for HX35 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

You may connect two MIDI keyboards or controllers at the same time. Connecting a third MIDI device requires a MIDI Merge Interface. All HX3 functions that are relevant for the organ player may be remote-controlled by MIDI commands.

==General==

Connect MIDI Out of your MIDI controller/keyboard to one of the two HX3 MIDI inputs. Since MIDI is a one-way interface, HX3 cannot determine the setting of any MIDI controller value until you touch/use it once. By default all HX3 controllers are OFF. Do not use any controller button or drawbar unless HX3 is ready to accept data (drawbar/preset menu displayed). It is a good idea to power up HX3 before your MIDI master keyboard or master controller.

MIDI CC #7 (default, CC number variable) controls master volume. MIDI CC #11 (default, CC number variable) controls swell pedal/expression if no expression pedal connected to HX3. If you use your HX3-attached swell pedal, any MIDI expression message will be overwritten. If the attached swell pedal is not actuated, MIDI expression messages are accepted.

==HX3.4==

Some MIDI controllers as well as organ keyboards (like Hammond XK and SK series) allow 2nd and 3rd harmonic percussion ON at the same time. In this case HX3 implementation regards "2nd ON" as "Percussion ON" tab.

Refer to section 3.2.4 Group Commons in the user manual to select the desired MIDI CC set. Factory default is Native Instruments B4.

MenuDisplay and HX3 Remote (HX3.4) or HX35 Editor (HX3.5 only) allow setup of MIDI Channel as well as MIDI CC set. Step down to MIDI menu section to alter settings. On the Menu Panel, press encoder knob for 2 seconds to save to power-up defaults.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT is THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI received, only own MIDI key events to MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge'(MIDI received, own MIDI key events and incoming MIDI events merged to MIDI OUT) and
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (as before, but MIDI CC commands discarded). On expander module, only valid setting is 'ReceiveThru'.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===HX3.4 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 board) transmits local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to NI B4 implementation (independently of selected CC set). From firmware 3.82 and up, HX3 will not send own MIDI CCs on MIDI OUT when '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC). MIDI Option = 3 is now default on all firmwares except HX3 Expander (which has to accept MIDI CCs). This change has been made since MIDI CCs sended by HX3 may disturb MIDI workstations/arrangers. Note: If send/receive of MIDI CCs is enabled (Option = 1 or 2), HX3 will transmit its own CCs.

HX3 will transmit swell pedal on CC #11 (0x0B) as well as rotary run/stop on CC #68 (0x44) and fast/stop on CC #01.

===Program Change on HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 will accept MIDI Program Change Commands in some MIDI CC sets. In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice according to common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 supports MIDI over USB through its USB port connected to a USB host, typically a PC. The USB connection is also suitable for controlling HX3.5 by the HX35 Editor application, firmware updates via MIDI SysEx, and DSP updates via DFU data transfer. '''Important:''' MIDI IN2 and MIDI IN over USB must not be used simultaneously.

'''(HX3.5 and later)''' The new CC Set Editor allows a very extensive adaptation to the controlling device; the CC Sets known from HX3.4 have been taken over and partly supplemented. They can be changed at will (exception: NI B4 and Hamichord due to some special features in vibrato, percussion and presets). Important: The extended scan driver available in HX3.5 accepts the MIDI CCs for the sustain and sostenuto pedal. However, some devices use CCs #64 and #66 for other functions (NI B4, Hamichord). When CCs #64 or #66 are used in a CC Set, the Sustain and Sostenuto functions in scan drivers (MIDI receive as well as directly connected keyboards) are disabled, so that the assigned controller does not result in "hanging" notes. The new CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (firmware #5.6xx or higher) is the most comprehensive CC-Set available, it allows remote control of all relevant HX3.5 parameters.

The menu panel and HX35 Editor allow you to set the MIDI channel and select the MIDI CC set. In the menu, press and hold the knob for two seconds to save the setting as the start default value.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sends own keyboard data),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 routed to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 routed to MIDI OUT) and
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB routed to MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'Versatile' Boehm, Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2'
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' for TouchOSC, but can also be used for freely configurable master keyboards,
** 'Custom A' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor) ex factory occupied by Nord C2D CC set,
** 'Custom B' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Further CC sets are available and can easily transfered to the HX3.5. Supported instruments include Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend and more.

===HX3.5 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.5 is transmitting local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to selected CC set. MIDI IN1, IN2 and MIDI over USB are always accepted.

For OEM only: Independent from MIDI option selected, HX3 will always send a 3.3V TTL level MIDI signal on PL16 pin 8 for controlling Ventilator/Minivent DSP board with synced stop/slow/fast. Pin 34 of Vent DSP board is MIDI TTL input. Also wire digital ground (PL16 pin 10). Ventilator DSP accepts MIDI CC #21 values 0 (stop), 1 (slow), 2 (fast) on channel 1.

With TouchOSC it is possible to create a preset by remote control; otherwise the memory function of the menu panel must be used.

===Program Change on HX3.5===

In general, HX3.5 (firmware 5.3 and up) will handle '''MIDI Program Change Commands''' (valid numbers range from 0 to 15). Numbers will be handled as "Set Drawbar Voice" for upper, lower and pedal MIDI channel separately, i.e. it resembles the "inverse" preset keys found on Hammond console organs. Drawbar Voice changes will not affect Tab settings (Percussion, Vibrato etc) in any way. Use the Common Presets for this.

However, not all HX3.5 MIDI CC sets are handling MIDI program changes in the same way: In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice complying with common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0. In Nord C1/C2 CC mode, program 126/127 are "live" presets (inverse "A#" and "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

===Bank Select on HX3.5===

HX3.5 will handle '''MIDI Bank Select Commands''' as "Set Overall Preset" (valid numbers range from 0 to 15 or 0 to 99 from FW #5.516 on) per default. Overall Presets include all Tab settings and additional pots (volume, reverb amount etc) as well as the drawbar settings. Note that some MIDI keyboards will send a MIDI Bank Select command separately, others will issue a MIDI Bank Select only with a MIDI Program Change. In the latter case, the issued MIDI Program Change command will override the voice setting.

Early HX3.5 boards switched Common Presets with a bank select command (20 hex or 32 dec.). This caused incompatibilities with unusual MIDI implementations of the controlling keyboard (e.g. Mojo). Starting with firmware #5.526, the CC command for switching the Common Presets can be set using the menu. Please note: Common Presets '''cannot''' be switched using MIDI Program Changes, which are reserved for the above Drawbar settings.

'''Up to HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 are selected in all CC Sets by Bank Select messages (MSB, CC #00), with all three channels valid.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 to #5.515:''' These firmwares contained a bug that prevented Common Preset switching.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by bank select commands (LSB, CC #32 decimal), where all three channels are valid.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by a CC command (default: #32 dec. = Bank Select LSB) that can be set in the menu, where all three channels are valid.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 provides several pre-configured MIDI CC sets plus one fully customizable set (two custom CC sets on HX3.5), selectable by MenuPanel, by HX3 Remote or HX35 Editor application, respectively. Factory default is the '''Native Instruments B4''' set, supported by many MIDI controllers. If MIDI CC output is enabled, HX3.4 will '''send''' CCs always according to NI B4 set. HX3 does '''not''' support weird SysEx encodings found on some Roland, Oberheim and Viscount models. '''All values based decimal!'''

A very comprehensive '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' MIDI CC set is available on HX3.5 mainboards.

Starting with firmware version 5.61x, the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window can be used to fetch, modify and write back CC sets from the HX3.5. Due to some special features, some functions are fixed for CC Set "#0 NI B4" and "#7 Hamichord" (e.g. the vibrato setting for the NI B4, where a NI B4 controller sends two values). With these sets, some CC settings previously handled in the firmware cannot be changed, all others can.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

The Doepfer d3c drawbar controller is a very nice and rugged piece of gear, so we recommend it for use with our HX3 board. It does support foot controllers and foot switches. The Keyswerk/Böhm db4 is also compatible with NI B4 CC set.

Upper, lower and bass drawbars work as usual. It is a good idea to set all to zero before switching on as this is a “known state” for HX3. Also the Percussion and Vibrato buttons work as described in d3c manual. There is a small drawback, anyway: Default HX3 Vibrato setting is V1 (but upper/lower vibrato OFF), while the V1 LED will not light up when powering up the d3c (there is no “V0” on a real Hammond!). So pressing the V1 button will not change the sound – just turn its LED on.

The BRIGHTNESS knob controls AO28 tone parameter of the HX3. There is no key click simulated by HX3 (it is just there), so there is no key click adjustment button. The KEY CLICK knob controls the bass sustain instead.

Do not use the HARMONIC CONTENT knob as it sends the PERCUSSION button’s controller number like a continuous controller. What for? No idea. This is definitely of no use.

Preset buttons may be used, but in a restricted way. First, HX3 has 15 presets per manual, not 127 like NI B4. When selecting BANK 1, all 12 available preset buttons work on upper manual. When selecting BANK 2, all 12 preset buttons work on lower manual. Doepfer d3c resends the program change message when changing the bank, which may be annoying. Therefore, proceeds as follows: Choose bank 2, lower preset first, then bank 1, upper preset. BTW: Bank buttons do not send bank select messages, they just add an offset to the preset buttons. Blame Doepfer for that.

Doepfer d3c preset 1 is the HX3 “Live” (preset 0) position. It will be saved temporarily (until HX3 is switched off) when a preset sound (2 to 12) is selected. If you return to preset 1 “Live”, your last drawbar/button setting will be recalled. Please note: HX3 tracks drawbar and button changes even when in preset position 2 to 12, so it keeps itself updated all the time.

NI B4 set accepts program changes for upper manual MIDI channel, range 0..11 = upper presets and 12..23 = lower presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''From HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

The '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (only one drawbar set, made by Böhm for Native Instruments) sends mostly the same CCs as the Doepfer d3c, but the most important difference is the assignment of the drawbars: All Drawbars are sent on CC 12..20, but with different channel identifiers. It also sends tab CCs (percussion, vibrato knob) with very own values. We have adapted the NI B4 set especially for this controller, it can be used alternatively to the NI B4 set for Doepfer d3c (factory setting). For the D4B, upload the set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' using the HX3.5 Editor window "MIDI CC Editor":

*Use "Open CSV Table..." to load the file ''boehm_b4d.csv'' in the ''user'' directory
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

To return to the Doepfer d3c set, upload the ''nib4_send.csv'' set using the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window:

*Load file with "Open CSV Table...
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

The D4B sends all set MIDI values when powered on, so you should first power up HX3.5 and then the D4B. For the pedal, the Drawbar sequence 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) applies to the first 5 Drawbars on the D4B. The "Bank" button is a little ambiguous: it does not send a bank select message, but only moves the MIDI program changes ("preset" numbers) up.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 supports most of Hammond XK MIDI controller functions. For convenience, some controllers have been relocated to other HX3 functions:

* XK Overdrive knob controls HX3 Rotary Tube Amp Volume
* XK Reverb button controls HX3 lower manual Vibrato On
* XK Tube On button controls HX3 Reverb

Hammond uses NRPN controllers instead of standard controllers. Drawbars are encoded through a weird grid scheme using only 3 CC#s, see XK manual for details.

Hammond XK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond XK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Hammond SK does not use the weird drawbar encoding scheme of the XK, instead standard CCs whith same numbers as NI B4 CCs for upper/lower manual and bass pedal 16'/8'. For other controllers, knobs and buttons, the SK uses a similar NRPN scheme as found on XK. Some NRPNs differ, though (see table).

The Hammond SK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond SK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Versatile set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Nord C1/C2 set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce Drawbars===

Using your HX3 board with Voce MIDI Drawbars is straightforward, as the Voce module sends on one MIDI channel only (i.e. upper manual). Please note that Voce MIDI Drawbars does not send drawbar data unless you press the “Drawbar/Save” button, so that its LED lights up. You may change the Voce MIDI Drawbars send channel (back rotary HEX switch) at any time to lower (2) and bass channel (3), although this is somewhat inconvenient. In case of your technician has installed a toggle switch on the back side, channels can be changed easily.

Voce CC set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Italian KeyB/Diversi controller set supports three MIDI channels.

KeyB set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Italian Hamichord/Mojo controller set supports only base MIDI channel. Key ON/OFF data of channel 2 (lower) and 3 (pedals) will be accepted, though.

Hamichord/Mojo CC set will not accept Program Change messages since Hamichord/Mojo always sends a "snapshot" of all MIDI CCs when changing a preset.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5 and HX3.6)'''

HX3/KBP set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal. This MIDI CC set has been designed for use with the TouchOSC app.

'''Please note''': In addition to MIDI base channel, base channel+1, and base channel+2, the HX3/KBP set uses base channel+3 for specific TouchOSC commands. Avoid assigning base channel+3 to other instruments.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_KBP_CCset.pdf HX3.6/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

HX3.4 FW #3.6x and up provides a "custom MIDI CC" set, which may be altered to your needs by using ''HX3 Remote'' application (HX3.4 only). By factory default, it is set to accept Nord C2 MIDI data (also compatible with Ocean Beach DB-1 controller). See wiki page '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' on how to create a custom CC set and store it to HX3. Please note that currently the custom MIDI CC set only accepts controller commands on upper manual MIDI channel (1 on factory default).

 

From HX3 Fimware 5.61 on, in principle all CC Sets can be changed. With this firmware HX3 also sends the set CCs. For editing, use the built-in CC Set Editor in the ''HX3 Manager''.

HX3 provides two custom MIDI CC sets at positions 9 and 10, which are pre-assigned with Nord C2D and Viscount Legend from firmware version 5.833 and 6.032 respectively. These can be overwritten with your own CC sets.
 

==Additional Info==

HX3 mk4 only: Firmware #3.6x and FPGA #20072014 or newer provide a '''secondary MIDI input''' (merged with other) and also send MIDI CCs according to NI B4 from all local controllers (drawbars/buttons/switches).

HX3 MIDI-Implementierung

2023-11-03T15:14:45Z

Christian: /* #9, #10 MIDI Custom CC */

==MIDI-Steuerung==

HX3 akzeptiert MIDI-Tasteninformationen NOTE ON / OFF (Default: Kanal 1 für Obermanual, Kanal 2 für Untermanual und Kanal 3 für Pedal; der Basiskanal 1 kann per Menu MIDI CH geändert werden) wie auch verschiedene MIDI CCs in selektierbaren, zu vielen Instrumenten kompatiblen Sets. Fremde SysEx-Daten werden generell ignoriert.
Die beiden MIDI-IN-Buchsen (Default) haben gleiche Priorität. Die zweite MIDI-Buchse kann durch Jumper auf dem Board als Ausgang geschaltet werden (für HX3 mk4 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', für HX35 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

Sie können zwei Masterkeyboards, ein Keyboard und ein Basspedal oder einen MIDI-Controller gleichzeitig anschließen. Zum Anschluss eines dritten Eingabegeräts ist ein MIDI Merge Interface erforderlich. HX3 kann in allen für das Orgelspiel relevanten Funktionen über MIDI fernbedient werden.

==Allgemein==

Der MIDI-OUT-Anschluss Ihres MIDI Controllers/Keyboards wird mit einem der beiden HX3 MIDI IN verbunden. HX3 kann die Einstellung eines neu angeschlossenen MIDI-Controllers nicht bestimmen, bevor dessen Bedienelemente erstmalig benutzt werden. Warten Sie, bis HX3 zum Datenempfang bereit ist (Preset/Drawbar-Hauptmenü erscheint im Display). Es ist ratsam, den HX3 vor dem angeschlossenen Masterkeyboard oder Controller in Betrieb zu nehmen.

MIDI CC #7 steuert den analogen Ausgangspegel (Master Volume), MIDI CC #11 die Schwellerstellung. Diese Zuordnungen können, falls erforderlich, im Menü geändert werden. Wenn Sie ein Schwellerpedal benutzen, das direkt an den HX3 angeschlossen ist, werden MIDI-Expression-Einstellungen dadurch überschrieben. Wenn das Schwellerpedal nicht benutzt wird, werden die MIDI-Expression-Befehle wirksam. Jedes gültige MIDI CC Kommando überschreibt die HX3-eigenen analogen Controller und Schalter, bis sie selbst im HX3 verändert werden.

==HX3.4==

Einige MIDI-Controller wie auch Orgel-Keyboards (z.B. Hammond SK und XK-Serien) erlauben 2nd und 3rd Percussion gleichzeitig. Der HX3 betrachtet in diesem Fall die Funktion "2nd ON" als "Percussion ON"-Schalter, da er sich streng an die Bedienweise der B3 hält.

Lesen Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung den Abschnitt 3.2.4 Gruppe Commons zur Auswahl des gewünschten MIDI CC Satzes.

Das Menü-Panel und HX3 Remote ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT ist THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI-Empfang, nur eigene MIDI-Noten-Events auf MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge' (MIDI-Empfang, eigene MIDI-Noten-Events und eingehende MIDI-Events werden gemerged auf MIDI OUT)
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (wie zuvor, aber ohne MIDI CC-Befehle). Beim HX3 Expander ist nur 'ReceiveThru' gültig.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===Von HX3.4 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 Board) sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen (Zugriegel, Schalter) entsprechend der NI B4-Implementierung (unabhängig vom gewählten CC-Set). Ab Firmware 3.82 sendet HX3 keine eigenen MIDI CCs auf MIDI OUT, wenn die '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC) gesetzt ist. MIDI Option = 3 ist jetzt Default auf allen Firmware-Versionen ausgenommen für den HX3 Expander (der MIDI CCs annehmen muss). Diese Änderung ist erfolgt, weil die vom HX gesendeten MIDI CCs einige MIDI-Workstations/Arranger gestört haben. Bitte beachten: Wenn Senden/Empfang von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist (Option = 1 oder 2), sendet HX3 seine eigenen CCs.

===Program Change bei HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 akzeptiert MIDI Program Change-Befehle in einigen MIDI CC-Sets. Im NI B4-Modus, rufen MIDI Program Changes 12...23 auf dem Kanal für das '''obere''' Manual die Presets für das '''untere''' Manual auf, übereinstimmend mit gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft die Voice 0 auf.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 ermöglicht MIDI over USB durch den USB-Port, verbunden mit einem USB-Host, typischerweise einem PC. Die USB-Verbindung ist außerdem geeignet für die Kommunikation des HX3.5 mit dem HX35 Editor, für Firmware-Updates über MIDI SysEx und für DSP-Updates über DFU-Datentransfer. '''Wichtig:''' MIDI IN2 und MIDI IN over USB dürfen nicht simultan genutzt werden.

'''(ab HX3.5)''' Der neue CC-Set-Editor erlaubt eine sehr weitreichende Anpassung an das steuernde Gerät; die von HX3.4 bekannten CC-Sets wurden hierbei übernommen und zum Teil ergänzt. Sie können nach Belieben geändert werden (Ausnahme: NI B4 und Hamichord wegen einiger Besonderheiten bei Vibrato, Percussion und Presets). Wichtig: Der im HX3.5 vorhandene erweiterte Scan-Treiber akzeptiert die MIDI-CCs für das Sustain- und Sostenuto-Pedal. Allerdings benutzen einige Geräte die CCs #64 und #66 für andere Funktionen (NI B4, Hamichord). Wenn in einem CC-Satz die CCs #64 oder #66 verwendet werden, wird die Sustain- und Sostenuto-Funktion in Scan-Treiber (MIDI-Empfang wie auch direkt angeschlossene Keyboards) abgeschaltet, damit der zugeordnete Controller nicht zu "hängenden" Noten führt. Der neue CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (ab Firmware #5.6xx) ist hierbei der umfangreichste CC-Set, er erlaubt eine Fernsteuerung aller relevanten HX3.5-Parameter.

Das Menü-Panel und HX35 Editor ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sendet eigene Keyboard-Daten),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 geroutet auf MIDI OUT und MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 geroutet auf MIDI OUT),
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB geroutet auf MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'Versatile' ähnlich Boehm Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2',
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' für TouchOSC, aber auch für frei konfigurierbare Masterkeyboards nutzbar,
** 'Custom A' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor), ab Werk belegt mit Nord C2D
** 'Custom B' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Weitere CC-Sets sind verfügbar und können einfach auf das HX3.5-Gerät übertragen werden. Zu den unterstützten Instrumenten gehören Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend und mehr.

===Von HX3.5 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.5 sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen entsprechend dem gewählten CC-Set. MIDI IN1, IN2 und MIDI over USB werden immer akzeptiert.

Hinweis für OEM: Unabhängig von der gewählten MIDI Option sendet HX3 immer ein Signal mit 3.3V TTL-Pegel auf PL16 Pin 8 zur Steuerung des Ventilator/Minivent DSP-Boards mit synchronisiertem Stop/Slow/Fast. Pin 34 des Vent DSP-Board ist der MIDI TTL-Eingang. Außerdem Digital Ground (PL16 pin 10) verbinden. Der Ventilator DSP akzeptiert MIDI CC #21 mit den Werten 0 (Stop), 1 (Slow), 2 (Fast) auf Kanal 1.

Mit TouchOSC besteht die Möglichkeit, per Fernsteuerung ein Preset anzulegen; ansonsten ist dafür die Speicherfunktion des Menü-Panels zu verwenden.

===Program Change bei HX3.5===

Generell verarbeitet HX3.5 (ab Firmware 5.3) '''MIDI Program Change-Befehle''' (gültiger Bereich 0 bis 15, bei NI B4 0 bis 23). Die Nummern 0 bis 15 werden nach den MIDI-Kanälen getrennt verarbeitet als "Auswahl der Zugriegel-Voice" für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal, das heißt, sie entsprechen der "inversen" Preset-Tasten , die man von Hammond-Konsolenorgeln kennt. Der Wechsel einer Zugriegel-Voice wirkt sich '''nicht''' auf Schalterstellungen (Perkussion, Vibrato etc) aus. Verwenden Sie dafür die Common Presets.

Allerdings verarbeiten nicht alle HX3.5 MIDI CC Sets die MIDI Program Changes in gleicher Weise: Im NI B4-Modus rufen MIDI Program Changes 12 bis 23 auf dem '''Obermanual'''-Kanal die Voices für das '''Untermanual''' ab, entsprechend gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi, ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft Voice 0 ab. Im Nord C1/C2 CC-Modus sind Program 126/127 die "Live"-Presets (inverse "A#"- und "B"-Tasten) und rufen Voice 0 ab.

===Bank Select bei HX3.5===

HX3.5 verarbeitet '''MIDI Bank Select-Befehle''' als "Overall-Preset-Auswahl" (gültiger Nummernbereich von 0 bis 15 bzw. 0 bis 99 bei FW ab #5.516). Overall Presets enthalten alle Einstellungen von Schaltern und Drehreglern (Volumen, Hall-Stärke etc,) sowie die Zugriegel-Einstellungen. Beachten Sie, dass einige MIDI-Keyboards den MIDI Bank Select-Befehl separat senden, andere senden ihn nur in Verbindung mit MIDI Program Change. In letzerem Fall setzt MIDI Program Change die Zugriegel-Voice.

Frühe HX3.5-Boards schalteten Common Presets mit einem Bank-Select-Befehl (20 hex bzw. 32 dez.) um. Dies führte bei ungewöhnlichen MIDI-Implementierungen des steuernden Keyboards (z.B. Mojo) zu Inkompatibilitäten. Ab Firmware #5.526 kann man den CC-Befehl zum Umschalten der Common Presets mit dem Menü einstellen. Bitte beachten Sie: Common Presets lassen sich '''nicht''' mit MIDI Program Changes umschalten, die sind für obige Zugriegel-Einstellungen reserviert.

'''Bis HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (MSB, CC #00) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 bis #5.515:''' Diese Firmwares enthielten einen Bug, der die Common-Preset-Umschaltung verhinderte.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (LSB, CC #32 dezimal) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch einen im Menü einstellbaren CC-Befehl (Default: #32 dez. = Bank Select LSB) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 stellt einige vorkonfigurierte MIDI CC-Sets und einen komplett anpassbaren Set (zwei Custom CC Sets bei HX3.5) zur Verfügung, wählbar per Menü-Panel, mit HX3 Remote beziehungsweise HX35 Editor. Werkseinstellung ist der '''Native Instruments B4''' Set, den viele MIDI-Controllern beherrschen. Wenn die Ausgabe von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist, sendet HX3 CCs stets nach dem NI B4 Set. HX3 unterstützt '''nicht''' die sonderbaren SysEx-Kodierung von einigen Roland-, Oberheim- und Viscount-Modelle. '''Alle Werte auf Dezimalbasis!'''

Ein umfassender MIDI CC Set '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' ist für die HX3.5-Mainboards verfügbar.

Ab Firmware-Version 5.61x können die CC-Sets mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" vom HX3.5 geholt, geändert und zurückgeschrieben werden. Wegen einiger Besonderheiten sind bei CC-Set "#0 NI B4" und "#7 Hamichord" einige Funktionen fest vorgegeben (beim NI B4 z.B. die Vibrato-Einstellung, bei der ein NI B4 Controller zwei Werte sendet). Bei diesen Sets können einige in der Firmware vorab behandelte CC-Einstellungen nicht geändert werden, alle anderen schon.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

Der '''Doepfer d3c Drawbar Controller''' ist ein robustes Gerät, das uneingeschränkt für für den HX3 Expander empfohlen werden kann. Es unterstützt obendrein Fußschalter und Regler. Der Keyswerk/Böhm db4 ist gleichfalls kompatibel mit dem NI B4 CC Set.

OM-, UM- und Pedal-Zugriegel arbeiten wie gewohnt. Es ist empfehlenswert, diese vor dem Einschalten auf NULL zu stellen, diese Position ist ein bekannter Status für den HX3. Auch die Percussion und Vibrato Schalter arbeiten wie in der d3c-Beschreibung. Dennoch gibt es einen kleinen Lapsus: Die Default Einstellung des HX3-Vibratos ist V1 (aber Upper/Lower Vibrato OFF) während die V1-LED des d3c nach dem Einschalten zunächst nicht leuchtet. Es gibt aber keine "V0"-Vibrato-Einstellung in einer echten Hammond. Wird der V1 Taster gedrückt, ändert sich der Sound nicht, nur die LED leuchtet jetzt.

Der BRIGHTNESS-Knopf ist bei HX3 der TONE-Regler des simulierten AO28-Preamps. HX3 simuliert den Keyclick nicht (er ist einfach da), deshalb gibt es keinen Keyclick-Regler. Der KEY CLICK Knopf steuert stattdessen das Pedalsustain des HX3.

Der d3c-Knopf "HARMONIC CONTENT" sollte nicht benutzt werden; er sendet unsinnigerweise die Controller-Nummer des PERCUSSION-Knopfes.

Die Preset-Buttons des d3c können in eingeschränkter Weise benutzt werden. HX3 verwaltet pro Manual 15 Presets und nicht wie bei der NI B4 127. Wenn BANK 1 angewählt ist, fungieren die 12 Preset-Taster alle für das Obermanual.
Wird die BANK 2 angewählt, fungieren die 12 Preset Taster für das Untermanual. Doepfer d3c sendet bei Bankwechsel die Programmchange-Daten erneut. Also hier wie folgt vorgehen: Zuerst BANK 2 Untermanual-Preset anwählen, dann BANK 1 und das Preset des Obermanuals anwählen. Anmerkung: Die Bank-Schalter senden keine Bank-Select-Daten, sondern addieren nur einen Offset auf das später gedrückte Preset - keine gute Lösung seitens Doepfer.

Das Doepfer Preset 1 entspricht der "LIVE" Einstellung beim HX3. Es wird automatisch gespeichert, wenn auf ein anderes Preset (2 bis 12) gewechselt wird. Kehrt man zum "LIVE"-Preset aus einem anderen Preset zurück, wird die letzte Zugriegeleinstellung wieder hergestellt.

Der NI B4 Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf dem Obermanual-MIDI-Kanal, Bereich 0..11 = Obermanual-Presets und 12..23 = Untermanual-Presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''Ab HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

Der '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (nur ein Zugriegel-Satz, von Böhm für Native Instruments gefertigt) sendet größtenteils die gleichen CCs wie der Doepfer d3c, der wichtigste Unterschied ist allerdings die Belegung der Drawbars: Alle Zugriegel werden jeweils auf CC 12..20 gesendet, aber mit unterschiedlicher Kanal-Kennung. Außerdem sendet es Tab-CCs (Percussion, Vibrato-Drehknopf) mit sehr eigenen Werten. Wir haben das NI B4-Set speziell für diesen Controller angepasst, es kann alternativ zum NI B4-Set für Doepfer d3c (Werkseinstellung) verwendet werden. Für den D4B laden Sie das Set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" hoch:

*Mit "Open CSV Table..." die Datei ''boehm_b4d.csv'' im Verzeichnis ''user'' laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Um wieder zum Doepfer-d3c-Set zurückzukehren, laden Sie mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" das Set ''nib4_send.csv'' hoch:

*Datei mit "Open CSV Table..." laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Der D4B sendet beim Einschalten alle eingestellten MIDI-Werte, es sollte daher erst der HX3.5 und dann der D4B eingeschaltet werden. Beim Pedal gilt die Zugriegel-Reihenfolge 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) für die ersten 5 Zugriegel am D4B. Der Button "Bank" ist etwas missverständlich: Er sendet keinen Bank-Select-Befehl, sondern verschiebt nur die MIDI-Program-Changes ("Preset"-Nummern) nach oben.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 unterstützt die meisten der Hammond XK MIDI-Controller-Nummern. Der einfacheren Bedienung halber sind einige Controller anderen HX3 Funktionen zugeordnet:

* XK Overdrive regelt HX3 TubeAmp Gain
* XK REVERB schaltet HX3 Lower Manual Vibrato ON/OFF
* XK TUBE ON schaltet HX3 REVERB ein/aus

Hammond verwendet NRPN-Controller anstelle von standardgemäßen Controllern. Zugriegel werden unter Verwendung von nur drei CCs über ein seltsames Netzschema kodiert, Details siehe XK-Bedienungsanleitung.

Der Hammond XK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond XK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Die Hammond SK verwendet nicht das seltsame Kodierungsschema des XK, stattdessen standardgemäße CCs mit denselben Nummer wie NI B4 CCs für OM/UM und Bass Pedal 16'/8'. Für andere Bedienelemente wird jedoch ein ähnliche NRPN-Schema verwendet wie bei der XK. Einige NRPNs unterscheiden sich allerdings (siehe Tabelle).

Der Hammond SK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond SK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Versatile-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Er orientiert sich an der Belegung für Böhm Sempra Orgeln.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 
 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Nord C1/C2-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce-Zugriegel===

HX3 in Verbindung mit VOCE MIDI-Zugriegeln zu nutzen ist sehr einfach, da das VOCE Modul nur einen MIDI-Kanal unterstützt (etwa das Obermanual). Bitte beachten Sie, dass das VOCE MIDI DRAWBARS keine Zugriegeldaten sendet, wenn dort nicht der "Drawbar/Save" Taster gedrückt ist (die LED im Taster muss leuchten). Den Voce-Sendekanal für MIDI-Zugriegel können Sie mit dem Drehschalter auf der Rückseite jederzeit auf Untermanual- (2) und Bass-Kanal (3) ändern, was allerdings etwas unbequem ist.

Der Voce CC-Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Der italienische KeyB/Diversi-Controller-Set unterstützt drei MIDI-Kanäle.

Der KeyB Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Der italienische Hamichord/Mojo-Controller Set unterstützt nur den MIDI-Basiskanal. Noten-ON/OFF-Daten auf den Kanälen 2 (UM) und 3 (Pedal) werden allerdings akzeptiert.

Der Hamichord/Mojo CC Set akzeptiert keine Program Change Befehle, weil Hamichord/Mojo beim Preset-Wechsel immer einen "Schnappschuss" aller MIDI CCs sendet.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5, HX3.6)'''

Der HX3/KBP-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Dieser MIDI CC Set wurde speziell für die Nutzung mit der TouchOSC App entwickelt.

'''Bitte beachten Sie''': Zusätzlich zu MIDI-Basiskanal, Basiskanal+1 und Basiskanal+2 verwendet der HX3/KBP Set MIDI-Basiskanal+3 für spezifische TouchOSC-Befehle. Vermeiden Sie es, MIDI-Basiskanal+3 anderen Instrumenten zuweisen.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_KBP_CCset.pdf HX3.6/KBP MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

Ab HX3.4 Firmware #3.6 steht ein "Custom MIDI CC"-Set zur Verfügung, der mittels ''HX3 Remote'' nach Wunsch belegt werden kann (nur HX3.4). Ab Werk ist der Custom MIDI CC-Set für Nord C2 MIDI-Daten (auch kompatibel mit Ocean Beach DB-1) vorbelegt. Auf der Wiki-Seite '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' ist beschrieben, wie Sie einen eigenen CC-Set erstellen und im HX3 speichern können. Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Custom CC-Set Controller-Befehle nur auf dem MIDI-Kanal für das Obermanual empfängt (1 in der Werkseinstellung).

Ab HX3 Firmware 5.61 sind im Prinzip alle CC-Sets änderbar. Mit dieser Firmware sendet HX3 auch die eingestellten CCs. Verwenden Sie zum Editieren den im ''HX3 Manager'' eingebauten CC-Set-Editor.

HX3 stellt an den Positionen 9 und 10 zwei Custom MIDI CC-Sets zur Verfügung, die ab Firmware-Version 5.833 beziehungsweise 6.032 mit Nord C2D und Viscount Legend vorbelegt sind. Diese können mit eigenen CC Sets überschrieben werden.
 

==Zusätzliche Info==

Nur HX3 mk4: Firmware #3.6x und FPGA #20072014 oder neuer stellen einen '''zweiten MIDI-Eingang''' (gemerged mit dem anderen Eingang) zur Verfügung und senden auch MIDI CCs gemäß NI B4 von allen lokalen Bedienelementen (Zugriegel/Taster/Schalter).

Using HX3 with MIDI controllers

2023-11-03T15:14:02Z

Christian: /* #9, #10 MIDI Custom CC */

==MIDI Control==

HX3 accepts MIDI key on/off events (default: channel 1 to upper manual, 2 to lower manual, channel 3 to bass pedals) as well as various MIDI CCs with selectable compatibility sets. MIDI dynamics slightly affect key click noise. SysEx data other than its own are always ignored. Both MIDI jacks act as MIDI inputs with equal priority (default). The second MIDI jack may be jumpered as MIDI Out. (Details for HX3 mk4 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', for HX35 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

You may connect two MIDI keyboards or controllers at the same time. Connecting a third MIDI device requires a MIDI Merge Interface. All HX3 functions that are relevant for the organ player may be remote-controlled by MIDI commands.

==General==

Connect MIDI Out of your MIDI controller/keyboard to one of the two HX3 MIDI inputs. Since MIDI is a one-way interface, HX3 cannot determine the setting of any MIDI controller value until you touch/use it once. By default all HX3 controllers are OFF. Do not use any controller button or drawbar unless HX3 is ready to accept data (drawbar/preset menu displayed). It is a good idea to power up HX3 before your MIDI master keyboard or master controller.

MIDI CC #7 (default, CC number variable) controls master volume. MIDI CC #11 (default, CC number variable) controls swell pedal/expression if no expression pedal connected to HX3. If you use your HX3-attached swell pedal, any MIDI expression message will be overwritten. If the attached swell pedal is not actuated, MIDI expression messages are accepted.

==HX3.4==

Some MIDI controllers as well as organ keyboards (like Hammond XK and SK series) allow 2nd and 3rd harmonic percussion ON at the same time. In this case HX3 implementation regards "2nd ON" as "Percussion ON" tab.

Refer to section 3.2.4 Group Commons in the user manual to select the desired MIDI CC set. Factory default is Native Instruments B4.

MenuDisplay and HX3 Remote (HX3.4) or HX35 Editor (HX3.5 only) allow setup of MIDI Channel as well as MIDI CC set. Step down to MIDI menu section to alter settings. On the Menu Panel, press encoder knob for 2 seconds to save to power-up defaults.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT is THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI received, only own MIDI key events to MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge'(MIDI received, own MIDI key events and incoming MIDI events merged to MIDI OUT) and
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (as before, but MIDI CC commands discarded). On expander module, only valid setting is 'ReceiveThru'.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===HX3.4 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 board) transmits local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to NI B4 implementation (independently of selected CC set). From firmware 3.82 and up, HX3 will not send own MIDI CCs on MIDI OUT when '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC). MIDI Option = 3 is now default on all firmwares except HX3 Expander (which has to accept MIDI CCs). This change has been made since MIDI CCs sended by HX3 may disturb MIDI workstations/arrangers. Note: If send/receive of MIDI CCs is enabled (Option = 1 or 2), HX3 will transmit its own CCs.

HX3 will transmit swell pedal on CC #11 (0x0B) as well as rotary run/stop on CC #68 (0x44) and fast/stop on CC #01.

===Program Change on HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 will accept MIDI Program Change Commands in some MIDI CC sets. In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice according to common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 supports MIDI over USB through its USB port connected to a USB host, typically a PC. The USB connection is also suitable for controlling HX3.5 by the HX35 Editor application, firmware updates via MIDI SysEx, and DSP updates via DFU data transfer. '''Important:''' MIDI IN2 and MIDI IN over USB must not be used simultaneously.

'''(HX3.5 and later)''' The new CC Set Editor allows a very extensive adaptation to the controlling device; the CC Sets known from HX3.4 have been taken over and partly supplemented. They can be changed at will (exception: NI B4 and Hamichord due to some special features in vibrato, percussion and presets). Important: The extended scan driver available in HX3.5 accepts the MIDI CCs for the sustain and sostenuto pedal. However, some devices use CCs #64 and #66 for other functions (NI B4, Hamichord). When CCs #64 or #66 are used in a CC Set, the Sustain and Sostenuto functions in scan drivers (MIDI receive as well as directly connected keyboards) are disabled, so that the assigned controller does not result in "hanging" notes. The new CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (firmware #5.6xx or higher) is the most comprehensive CC-Set available, it allows remote control of all relevant HX3.5 parameters.

The menu panel and HX35 Editor allow you to set the MIDI channel and select the MIDI CC set. In the menu, press and hold the knob for two seconds to save the setting as the start default value.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sends own keyboard data),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 routed to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 routed to MIDI OUT) and
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB routed to MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'Versatile' Boehm, Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2'
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' for TouchOSC, but can also be used for freely configurable master keyboards,
** 'Custom A' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor) ex factory occupied by Nord C2D CC set,
** 'Custom B' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Further CC sets are available and can easily transfered to the HX3.5. Supported instruments include Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend and more.

===HX3.5 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.5 is transmitting local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to selected CC set. MIDI IN1, IN2 and MIDI over USB are always accepted.

For OEM only: Independent from MIDI option selected, HX3 will always send a 3.3V TTL level MIDI signal on PL16 pin 8 for controlling Ventilator/Minivent DSP board with synced stop/slow/fast. Pin 34 of Vent DSP board is MIDI TTL input. Also wire digital ground (PL16 pin 10). Ventilator DSP accepts MIDI CC #21 values 0 (stop), 1 (slow), 2 (fast) on channel 1.

With TouchOSC it is possible to create a preset by remote control; otherwise the memory function of the menu panel must be used.

===Program Change on HX3.5===

In general, HX3.5 (firmware 5.3 and up) will handle '''MIDI Program Change Commands''' (valid numbers range from 0 to 15). Numbers will be handled as "Set Drawbar Voice" for upper, lower and pedal MIDI channel separately, i.e. it resembles the "inverse" preset keys found on Hammond console organs. Drawbar Voice changes will not affect Tab settings (Percussion, Vibrato etc) in any way. Use the Common Presets for this.

However, not all HX3.5 MIDI CC sets are handling MIDI program changes in the same way: In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice complying with common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0. In Nord C1/C2 CC mode, program 126/127 are "live" presets (inverse "A#" and "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

===Bank Select on HX3.5===

HX3.5 will handle '''MIDI Bank Select Commands''' as "Set Overall Preset" (valid numbers range from 0 to 15 or 0 to 99 from FW #5.516 on) per default. Overall Presets include all Tab settings and additional pots (volume, reverb amount etc) as well as the drawbar settings. Note that some MIDI keyboards will send a MIDI Bank Select command separately, others will issue a MIDI Bank Select only with a MIDI Program Change. In the latter case, the issued MIDI Program Change command will override the voice setting.

Early HX3.5 boards switched Common Presets with a bank select command (20 hex or 32 dec.). This caused incompatibilities with unusual MIDI implementations of the controlling keyboard (e.g. Mojo). Starting with firmware #5.526, the CC command for switching the Common Presets can be set using the menu. Please note: Common Presets '''cannot''' be switched using MIDI Program Changes, which are reserved for the above Drawbar settings.

'''Up to HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 are selected in all CC Sets by Bank Select messages (MSB, CC #00), with all three channels valid.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 to #5.515:''' These firmwares contained a bug that prevented Common Preset switching.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by bank select commands (LSB, CC #32 decimal), where all three channels are valid.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by a CC command (default: #32 dec. = Bank Select LSB) that can be set in the menu, where all three channels are valid.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 provides several pre-configured MIDI CC sets plus one fully customizable set (two custom CC sets on HX3.5), selectable by MenuPanel, by HX3 Remote or HX35 Editor application, respectively. Factory default is the '''Native Instruments B4''' set, supported by many MIDI controllers. If MIDI CC output is enabled, HX3.4 will '''send''' CCs always according to NI B4 set. HX3 does '''not''' support weird SysEx encodings found on some Roland, Oberheim and Viscount models. '''All values based decimal!'''

A very comprehensive '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' MIDI CC set is available on HX3.5 mainboards.

Starting with firmware version 5.61x, the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window can be used to fetch, modify and write back CC sets from the HX3.5. Due to some special features, some functions are fixed for CC Set "#0 NI B4" and "#7 Hamichord" (e.g. the vibrato setting for the NI B4, where a NI B4 controller sends two values). With these sets, some CC settings previously handled in the firmware cannot be changed, all others can.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

The Doepfer d3c drawbar controller is a very nice and rugged piece of gear, so we recommend it for use with our HX3 board. It does support foot controllers and foot switches. The Keyswerk/Böhm db4 is also compatible with NI B4 CC set.

Upper, lower and bass drawbars work as usual. It is a good idea to set all to zero before switching on as this is a “known state” for HX3. Also the Percussion and Vibrato buttons work as described in d3c manual. There is a small drawback, anyway: Default HX3 Vibrato setting is V1 (but upper/lower vibrato OFF), while the V1 LED will not light up when powering up the d3c (there is no “V0” on a real Hammond!). So pressing the V1 button will not change the sound – just turn its LED on.

The BRIGHTNESS knob controls AO28 tone parameter of the HX3. There is no key click simulated by HX3 (it is just there), so there is no key click adjustment button. The KEY CLICK knob controls the bass sustain instead.

Do not use the HARMONIC CONTENT knob as it sends the PERCUSSION button’s controller number like a continuous controller. What for? No idea. This is definitely of no use.

Preset buttons may be used, but in a restricted way. First, HX3 has 15 presets per manual, not 127 like NI B4. When selecting BANK 1, all 12 available preset buttons work on upper manual. When selecting BANK 2, all 12 preset buttons work on lower manual. Doepfer d3c resends the program change message when changing the bank, which may be annoying. Therefore, proceeds as follows: Choose bank 2, lower preset first, then bank 1, upper preset. BTW: Bank buttons do not send bank select messages, they just add an offset to the preset buttons. Blame Doepfer for that.

Doepfer d3c preset 1 is the HX3 “Live” (preset 0) position. It will be saved temporarily (until HX3 is switched off) when a preset sound (2 to 12) is selected. If you return to preset 1 “Live”, your last drawbar/button setting will be recalled. Please note: HX3 tracks drawbar and button changes even when in preset position 2 to 12, so it keeps itself updated all the time.

NI B4 set accepts program changes for upper manual MIDI channel, range 0..11 = upper presets and 12..23 = lower presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''From HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

The '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (only one drawbar set, made by Böhm for Native Instruments) sends mostly the same CCs as the Doepfer d3c, but the most important difference is the assignment of the drawbars: All Drawbars are sent on CC 12..20, but with different channel identifiers. It also sends tab CCs (percussion, vibrato knob) with very own values. We have adapted the NI B4 set especially for this controller, it can be used alternatively to the NI B4 set for Doepfer d3c (factory setting). For the D4B, upload the set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' using the HX3.5 Editor window "MIDI CC Editor":

*Use "Open CSV Table..." to load the file ''boehm_b4d.csv'' in the ''user'' directory
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

To return to the Doepfer d3c set, upload the ''nib4_send.csv'' set using the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window:

*Load file with "Open CSV Table...
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

The D4B sends all set MIDI values when powered on, so you should first power up HX3.5 and then the D4B. For the pedal, the Drawbar sequence 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) applies to the first 5 Drawbars on the D4B. The "Bank" button is a little ambiguous: it does not send a bank select message, but only moves the MIDI program changes ("preset" numbers) up.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 supports most of Hammond XK MIDI controller functions. For convenience, some controllers have been relocated to other HX3 functions:

* XK Overdrive knob controls HX3 Rotary Tube Amp Volume
* XK Reverb button controls HX3 lower manual Vibrato On
* XK Tube On button controls HX3 Reverb

Hammond uses NRPN controllers instead of standard controllers. Drawbars are encoded through a weird grid scheme using only 3 CC#s, see XK manual for details.

Hammond XK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond XK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Hammond SK does not use the weird drawbar encoding scheme of the XK, instead standard CCs whith same numbers as NI B4 CCs for upper/lower manual and bass pedal 16'/8'. For other controllers, knobs and buttons, the SK uses a similar NRPN scheme as found on XK. Some NRPNs differ, though (see table).

The Hammond SK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond SK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Versatile set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Nord C1/C2 set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce Drawbars===

Using your HX3 board with Voce MIDI Drawbars is straightforward, as the Voce module sends on one MIDI channel only (i.e. upper manual). Please note that Voce MIDI Drawbars does not send drawbar data unless you press the “Drawbar/Save” button, so that its LED lights up. You may change the Voce MIDI Drawbars send channel (back rotary HEX switch) at any time to lower (2) and bass channel (3), although this is somewhat inconvenient. In case of your technician has installed a toggle switch on the back side, channels can be changed easily.

Voce CC set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Italian KeyB/Diversi controller set supports three MIDI channels.

KeyB set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Italian Hamichord/Mojo controller set supports only base MIDI channel. Key ON/OFF data of channel 2 (lower) and 3 (pedals) will be accepted, though.

Hamichord/Mojo CC set will not accept Program Change messages since Hamichord/Mojo always sends a "snapshot" of all MIDI CCs when changing a preset.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5 and HX3.6)'''

HX3/KBP set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal. This MIDI CC set has been designed for use with the TouchOSC app.

'''Please note''': In addition to MIDI base channel, base channel+1, and base channel+2, the HX3/KBP set uses base channel+3 for specific TouchOSC commands. Avoid assigning base channel+3 to other instruments.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_KBP_CCset.pdf HX3.6/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

HX3.4 FW #3.6x and up provides a "custom MIDI CC" set, which may be altered to your needs by using ''HX3 Remote'' application (HX3.4 only). By factory default, it is set to accept Nord C2 MIDI data (also compatible with Ocean Beach DB-1 controller). See wiki page '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' on how to create a custom CC set and store it to HX3. Please note that currently the custom MIDI CC set only accepts controller commands on upper manual MIDI channel (1 on factory default).

 

From HX3 Fimware 5.61 on, in principle all CC Sets can be changed. With this firmware HX3 also sends the set CCs. For editing, use the built-in CC Set Editor in the ''HX3 Manager''.

HX3 provides two custom MIDI CC sets at positions 9 and 10, which are pre-assigned with the CC sets for Nord C2D and Viscount Legend from firmware version 5.833 and 6.032 respectively. These can be overwritten with your own CC sets.
 

==Additional Info==

HX3 mk4 only: Firmware #3.6x and FPGA #20072014 or newer provide a '''secondary MIDI input''' (merged with other) and also send MIDI CCs according to NI B4 from all local controllers (drawbars/buttons/switches).

HX3 MIDI-Implementierung

2023-11-03T15:12:18Z

Christian: /* #9, #10 MIDI Custom CC */

==MIDI-Steuerung==

HX3 akzeptiert MIDI-Tasteninformationen NOTE ON / OFF (Default: Kanal 1 für Obermanual, Kanal 2 für Untermanual und Kanal 3 für Pedal; der Basiskanal 1 kann per Menu MIDI CH geändert werden) wie auch verschiedene MIDI CCs in selektierbaren, zu vielen Instrumenten kompatiblen Sets. Fremde SysEx-Daten werden generell ignoriert.
Die beiden MIDI-IN-Buchsen (Default) haben gleiche Priorität. Die zweite MIDI-Buchse kann durch Jumper auf dem Board als Ausgang geschaltet werden (für HX3 mk4 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', für HX35 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

Sie können zwei Masterkeyboards, ein Keyboard und ein Basspedal oder einen MIDI-Controller gleichzeitig anschließen. Zum Anschluss eines dritten Eingabegeräts ist ein MIDI Merge Interface erforderlich. HX3 kann in allen für das Orgelspiel relevanten Funktionen über MIDI fernbedient werden.

==Allgemein==

Der MIDI-OUT-Anschluss Ihres MIDI Controllers/Keyboards wird mit einem der beiden HX3 MIDI IN verbunden. HX3 kann die Einstellung eines neu angeschlossenen MIDI-Controllers nicht bestimmen, bevor dessen Bedienelemente erstmalig benutzt werden. Warten Sie, bis HX3 zum Datenempfang bereit ist (Preset/Drawbar-Hauptmenü erscheint im Display). Es ist ratsam, den HX3 vor dem angeschlossenen Masterkeyboard oder Controller in Betrieb zu nehmen.

MIDI CC #7 steuert den analogen Ausgangspegel (Master Volume), MIDI CC #11 die Schwellerstellung. Diese Zuordnungen können, falls erforderlich, im Menü geändert werden. Wenn Sie ein Schwellerpedal benutzen, das direkt an den HX3 angeschlossen ist, werden MIDI-Expression-Einstellungen dadurch überschrieben. Wenn das Schwellerpedal nicht benutzt wird, werden die MIDI-Expression-Befehle wirksam. Jedes gültige MIDI CC Kommando überschreibt die HX3-eigenen analogen Controller und Schalter, bis sie selbst im HX3 verändert werden.

==HX3.4==

Einige MIDI-Controller wie auch Orgel-Keyboards (z.B. Hammond SK und XK-Serien) erlauben 2nd und 3rd Percussion gleichzeitig. Der HX3 betrachtet in diesem Fall die Funktion "2nd ON" als "Percussion ON"-Schalter, da er sich streng an die Bedienweise der B3 hält.

Lesen Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung den Abschnitt 3.2.4 Gruppe Commons zur Auswahl des gewünschten MIDI CC Satzes.

Das Menü-Panel und HX3 Remote ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT ist THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI-Empfang, nur eigene MIDI-Noten-Events auf MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge' (MIDI-Empfang, eigene MIDI-Noten-Events und eingehende MIDI-Events werden gemerged auf MIDI OUT)
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (wie zuvor, aber ohne MIDI CC-Befehle). Beim HX3 Expander ist nur 'ReceiveThru' gültig.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===Von HX3.4 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 Board) sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen (Zugriegel, Schalter) entsprechend der NI B4-Implementierung (unabhängig vom gewählten CC-Set). Ab Firmware 3.82 sendet HX3 keine eigenen MIDI CCs auf MIDI OUT, wenn die '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC) gesetzt ist. MIDI Option = 3 ist jetzt Default auf allen Firmware-Versionen ausgenommen für den HX3 Expander (der MIDI CCs annehmen muss). Diese Änderung ist erfolgt, weil die vom HX gesendeten MIDI CCs einige MIDI-Workstations/Arranger gestört haben. Bitte beachten: Wenn Senden/Empfang von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist (Option = 1 oder 2), sendet HX3 seine eigenen CCs.

===Program Change bei HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 akzeptiert MIDI Program Change-Befehle in einigen MIDI CC-Sets. Im NI B4-Modus, rufen MIDI Program Changes 12...23 auf dem Kanal für das '''obere''' Manual die Presets für das '''untere''' Manual auf, übereinstimmend mit gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft die Voice 0 auf.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 ermöglicht MIDI over USB durch den USB-Port, verbunden mit einem USB-Host, typischerweise einem PC. Die USB-Verbindung ist außerdem geeignet für die Kommunikation des HX3.5 mit dem HX35 Editor, für Firmware-Updates über MIDI SysEx und für DSP-Updates über DFU-Datentransfer. '''Wichtig:''' MIDI IN2 und MIDI IN over USB dürfen nicht simultan genutzt werden.

'''(ab HX3.5)''' Der neue CC-Set-Editor erlaubt eine sehr weitreichende Anpassung an das steuernde Gerät; die von HX3.4 bekannten CC-Sets wurden hierbei übernommen und zum Teil ergänzt. Sie können nach Belieben geändert werden (Ausnahme: NI B4 und Hamichord wegen einiger Besonderheiten bei Vibrato, Percussion und Presets). Wichtig: Der im HX3.5 vorhandene erweiterte Scan-Treiber akzeptiert die MIDI-CCs für das Sustain- und Sostenuto-Pedal. Allerdings benutzen einige Geräte die CCs #64 und #66 für andere Funktionen (NI B4, Hamichord). Wenn in einem CC-Satz die CCs #64 oder #66 verwendet werden, wird die Sustain- und Sostenuto-Funktion in Scan-Treiber (MIDI-Empfang wie auch direkt angeschlossene Keyboards) abgeschaltet, damit der zugeordnete Controller nicht zu "hängenden" Noten führt. Der neue CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (ab Firmware #5.6xx) ist hierbei der umfangreichste CC-Set, er erlaubt eine Fernsteuerung aller relevanten HX3.5-Parameter.

Das Menü-Panel und HX35 Editor ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sendet eigene Keyboard-Daten),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 geroutet auf MIDI OUT und MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 geroutet auf MIDI OUT),
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB geroutet auf MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'Versatile' ähnlich Boehm Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2',
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' für TouchOSC, aber auch für frei konfigurierbare Masterkeyboards nutzbar,
** 'Custom A' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor), ab Werk belegt mit Nord C2D
** 'Custom B' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Weitere CC-Sets sind verfügbar und können einfach auf das HX3.5-Gerät übertragen werden. Zu den unterstützten Instrumenten gehören Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend und mehr.

===Von HX3.5 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.5 sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen entsprechend dem gewählten CC-Set. MIDI IN1, IN2 und MIDI over USB werden immer akzeptiert.

Hinweis für OEM: Unabhängig von der gewählten MIDI Option sendet HX3 immer ein Signal mit 3.3V TTL-Pegel auf PL16 Pin 8 zur Steuerung des Ventilator/Minivent DSP-Boards mit synchronisiertem Stop/Slow/Fast. Pin 34 des Vent DSP-Board ist der MIDI TTL-Eingang. Außerdem Digital Ground (PL16 pin 10) verbinden. Der Ventilator DSP akzeptiert MIDI CC #21 mit den Werten 0 (Stop), 1 (Slow), 2 (Fast) auf Kanal 1.

Mit TouchOSC besteht die Möglichkeit, per Fernsteuerung ein Preset anzulegen; ansonsten ist dafür die Speicherfunktion des Menü-Panels zu verwenden.

===Program Change bei HX3.5===

Generell verarbeitet HX3.5 (ab Firmware 5.3) '''MIDI Program Change-Befehle''' (gültiger Bereich 0 bis 15, bei NI B4 0 bis 23). Die Nummern 0 bis 15 werden nach den MIDI-Kanälen getrennt verarbeitet als "Auswahl der Zugriegel-Voice" für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal, das heißt, sie entsprechen der "inversen" Preset-Tasten , die man von Hammond-Konsolenorgeln kennt. Der Wechsel einer Zugriegel-Voice wirkt sich '''nicht''' auf Schalterstellungen (Perkussion, Vibrato etc) aus. Verwenden Sie dafür die Common Presets.

Allerdings verarbeiten nicht alle HX3.5 MIDI CC Sets die MIDI Program Changes in gleicher Weise: Im NI B4-Modus rufen MIDI Program Changes 12 bis 23 auf dem '''Obermanual'''-Kanal die Voices für das '''Untermanual''' ab, entsprechend gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi, ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft Voice 0 ab. Im Nord C1/C2 CC-Modus sind Program 126/127 die "Live"-Presets (inverse "A#"- und "B"-Tasten) und rufen Voice 0 ab.

===Bank Select bei HX3.5===

HX3.5 verarbeitet '''MIDI Bank Select-Befehle''' als "Overall-Preset-Auswahl" (gültiger Nummernbereich von 0 bis 15 bzw. 0 bis 99 bei FW ab #5.516). Overall Presets enthalten alle Einstellungen von Schaltern und Drehreglern (Volumen, Hall-Stärke etc,) sowie die Zugriegel-Einstellungen. Beachten Sie, dass einige MIDI-Keyboards den MIDI Bank Select-Befehl separat senden, andere senden ihn nur in Verbindung mit MIDI Program Change. In letzerem Fall setzt MIDI Program Change die Zugriegel-Voice.

Frühe HX3.5-Boards schalteten Common Presets mit einem Bank-Select-Befehl (20 hex bzw. 32 dez.) um. Dies führte bei ungewöhnlichen MIDI-Implementierungen des steuernden Keyboards (z.B. Mojo) zu Inkompatibilitäten. Ab Firmware #5.526 kann man den CC-Befehl zum Umschalten der Common Presets mit dem Menü einstellen. Bitte beachten Sie: Common Presets lassen sich '''nicht''' mit MIDI Program Changes umschalten, die sind für obige Zugriegel-Einstellungen reserviert.

'''Bis HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (MSB, CC #00) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 bis #5.515:''' Diese Firmwares enthielten einen Bug, der die Common-Preset-Umschaltung verhinderte.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (LSB, CC #32 dezimal) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch einen im Menü einstellbaren CC-Befehl (Default: #32 dez. = Bank Select LSB) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 stellt einige vorkonfigurierte MIDI CC-Sets und einen komplett anpassbaren Set (zwei Custom CC Sets bei HX3.5) zur Verfügung, wählbar per Menü-Panel, mit HX3 Remote beziehungsweise HX35 Editor. Werkseinstellung ist der '''Native Instruments B4''' Set, den viele MIDI-Controllern beherrschen. Wenn die Ausgabe von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist, sendet HX3 CCs stets nach dem NI B4 Set. HX3 unterstützt '''nicht''' die sonderbaren SysEx-Kodierung von einigen Roland-, Oberheim- und Viscount-Modelle. '''Alle Werte auf Dezimalbasis!'''

Ein umfassender MIDI CC Set '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' ist für die HX3.5-Mainboards verfügbar.

Ab Firmware-Version 5.61x können die CC-Sets mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" vom HX3.5 geholt, geändert und zurückgeschrieben werden. Wegen einiger Besonderheiten sind bei CC-Set "#0 NI B4" und "#7 Hamichord" einige Funktionen fest vorgegeben (beim NI B4 z.B. die Vibrato-Einstellung, bei der ein NI B4 Controller zwei Werte sendet). Bei diesen Sets können einige in der Firmware vorab behandelte CC-Einstellungen nicht geändert werden, alle anderen schon.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

Der '''Doepfer d3c Drawbar Controller''' ist ein robustes Gerät, das uneingeschränkt für für den HX3 Expander empfohlen werden kann. Es unterstützt obendrein Fußschalter und Regler. Der Keyswerk/Böhm db4 ist gleichfalls kompatibel mit dem NI B4 CC Set.

OM-, UM- und Pedal-Zugriegel arbeiten wie gewohnt. Es ist empfehlenswert, diese vor dem Einschalten auf NULL zu stellen, diese Position ist ein bekannter Status für den HX3. Auch die Percussion und Vibrato Schalter arbeiten wie in der d3c-Beschreibung. Dennoch gibt es einen kleinen Lapsus: Die Default Einstellung des HX3-Vibratos ist V1 (aber Upper/Lower Vibrato OFF) während die V1-LED des d3c nach dem Einschalten zunächst nicht leuchtet. Es gibt aber keine "V0"-Vibrato-Einstellung in einer echten Hammond. Wird der V1 Taster gedrückt, ändert sich der Sound nicht, nur die LED leuchtet jetzt.

Der BRIGHTNESS-Knopf ist bei HX3 der TONE-Regler des simulierten AO28-Preamps. HX3 simuliert den Keyclick nicht (er ist einfach da), deshalb gibt es keinen Keyclick-Regler. Der KEY CLICK Knopf steuert stattdessen das Pedalsustain des HX3.

Der d3c-Knopf "HARMONIC CONTENT" sollte nicht benutzt werden; er sendet unsinnigerweise die Controller-Nummer des PERCUSSION-Knopfes.

Die Preset-Buttons des d3c können in eingeschränkter Weise benutzt werden. HX3 verwaltet pro Manual 15 Presets und nicht wie bei der NI B4 127. Wenn BANK 1 angewählt ist, fungieren die 12 Preset-Taster alle für das Obermanual.
Wird die BANK 2 angewählt, fungieren die 12 Preset Taster für das Untermanual. Doepfer d3c sendet bei Bankwechsel die Programmchange-Daten erneut. Also hier wie folgt vorgehen: Zuerst BANK 2 Untermanual-Preset anwählen, dann BANK 1 und das Preset des Obermanuals anwählen. Anmerkung: Die Bank-Schalter senden keine Bank-Select-Daten, sondern addieren nur einen Offset auf das später gedrückte Preset - keine gute Lösung seitens Doepfer.

Das Doepfer Preset 1 entspricht der "LIVE" Einstellung beim HX3. Es wird automatisch gespeichert, wenn auf ein anderes Preset (2 bis 12) gewechselt wird. Kehrt man zum "LIVE"-Preset aus einem anderen Preset zurück, wird die letzte Zugriegeleinstellung wieder hergestellt.

Der NI B4 Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf dem Obermanual-MIDI-Kanal, Bereich 0..11 = Obermanual-Presets und 12..23 = Untermanual-Presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''Ab HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

Der '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (nur ein Zugriegel-Satz, von Böhm für Native Instruments gefertigt) sendet größtenteils die gleichen CCs wie der Doepfer d3c, der wichtigste Unterschied ist allerdings die Belegung der Drawbars: Alle Zugriegel werden jeweils auf CC 12..20 gesendet, aber mit unterschiedlicher Kanal-Kennung. Außerdem sendet es Tab-CCs (Percussion, Vibrato-Drehknopf) mit sehr eigenen Werten. Wir haben das NI B4-Set speziell für diesen Controller angepasst, es kann alternativ zum NI B4-Set für Doepfer d3c (Werkseinstellung) verwendet werden. Für den D4B laden Sie das Set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" hoch:

*Mit "Open CSV Table..." die Datei ''boehm_b4d.csv'' im Verzeichnis ''user'' laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Um wieder zum Doepfer-d3c-Set zurückzukehren, laden Sie mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" das Set ''nib4_send.csv'' hoch:

*Datei mit "Open CSV Table..." laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Der D4B sendet beim Einschalten alle eingestellten MIDI-Werte, es sollte daher erst der HX3.5 und dann der D4B eingeschaltet werden. Beim Pedal gilt die Zugriegel-Reihenfolge 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) für die ersten 5 Zugriegel am D4B. Der Button "Bank" ist etwas missverständlich: Er sendet keinen Bank-Select-Befehl, sondern verschiebt nur die MIDI-Program-Changes ("Preset"-Nummern) nach oben.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 unterstützt die meisten der Hammond XK MIDI-Controller-Nummern. Der einfacheren Bedienung halber sind einige Controller anderen HX3 Funktionen zugeordnet:

* XK Overdrive regelt HX3 TubeAmp Gain
* XK REVERB schaltet HX3 Lower Manual Vibrato ON/OFF
* XK TUBE ON schaltet HX3 REVERB ein/aus

Hammond verwendet NRPN-Controller anstelle von standardgemäßen Controllern. Zugriegel werden unter Verwendung von nur drei CCs über ein seltsames Netzschema kodiert, Details siehe XK-Bedienungsanleitung.

Der Hammond XK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond XK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Die Hammond SK verwendet nicht das seltsame Kodierungsschema des XK, stattdessen standardgemäße CCs mit denselben Nummer wie NI B4 CCs für OM/UM und Bass Pedal 16'/8'. Für andere Bedienelemente wird jedoch ein ähnliche NRPN-Schema verwendet wie bei der XK. Einige NRPNs unterscheiden sich allerdings (siehe Tabelle).

Der Hammond SK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond SK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Versatile-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Er orientiert sich an der Belegung für Böhm Sempra Orgeln.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 
 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Nord C1/C2-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce-Zugriegel===

HX3 in Verbindung mit VOCE MIDI-Zugriegeln zu nutzen ist sehr einfach, da das VOCE Modul nur einen MIDI-Kanal unterstützt (etwa das Obermanual). Bitte beachten Sie, dass das VOCE MIDI DRAWBARS keine Zugriegeldaten sendet, wenn dort nicht der "Drawbar/Save" Taster gedrückt ist (die LED im Taster muss leuchten). Den Voce-Sendekanal für MIDI-Zugriegel können Sie mit dem Drehschalter auf der Rückseite jederzeit auf Untermanual- (2) und Bass-Kanal (3) ändern, was allerdings etwas unbequem ist.

Der Voce CC-Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Der italienische KeyB/Diversi-Controller-Set unterstützt drei MIDI-Kanäle.

Der KeyB Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Der italienische Hamichord/Mojo-Controller Set unterstützt nur den MIDI-Basiskanal. Noten-ON/OFF-Daten auf den Kanälen 2 (UM) und 3 (Pedal) werden allerdings akzeptiert.

Der Hamichord/Mojo CC Set akzeptiert keine Program Change Befehle, weil Hamichord/Mojo beim Preset-Wechsel immer einen "Schnappschuss" aller MIDI CCs sendet.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5, HX3.6)'''

Der HX3/KBP-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Dieser MIDI CC Set wurde speziell für die Nutzung mit der TouchOSC App entwickelt.

'''Bitte beachten Sie''': Zusätzlich zu MIDI-Basiskanal, Basiskanal+1 und Basiskanal+2 verwendet der HX3/KBP Set MIDI-Basiskanal+3 für spezifische TouchOSC-Befehle. Vermeiden Sie es, MIDI-Basiskanal+3 anderen Instrumenten zuweisen.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_KBP_CCset.pdf HX3.6/KBP MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

Ab HX3.4 Firmware #3.6 steht ein "Custom MIDI CC"-Set zur Verfügung, der mittels ''HX3 Remote'' nach Wunsch belegt werden kann (nur HX3.4). Ab Werk ist der Custom MIDI CC-Set für Nord C2 MIDI-Daten (auch kompatibel mit Ocean Beach DB-1) vorbelegt. Auf der Wiki-Seite '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' ist beschrieben, wie Sie einen eigenen CC-Set erstellen und im HX3 speichern können. Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Custom CC-Set Controller-Befehle nur auf dem MIDI-Kanal für das Obermanual empfängt (1 in der Werkseinstellung).

Ab HX3 Firmware 5.61 sind im Prinzip alle CC-Sets änderbar. Mit dieser Firmware sendet HX3 auch die eingestellten CCs. Verwenden Sie zum Editieren den im ''HX3 Manager'' eingebauten CC-Set-Editor.

HX3 stellt an den Positionen 9 und 10 zwei Custom MIDI CC-Sets, die ab Firmware-Version 5.833 beziehungsweise 6.032, die mit den CC Sets für Nord C2D und Viscount Legend vorbelegt sind. Diese können mit eigenen CC Sets überschrieben werden.
 

==Zusätzliche Info==

Nur HX3 mk4: Firmware #3.6x und FPGA #20072014 oder neuer stellen einen '''zweiten MIDI-Eingang''' (gemerged mit dem anderen Eingang) zur Verfügung und senden auch MIDI CCs gemäß NI B4 von allen lokalen Bedienelementen (Zugriegel/Taster/Schalter).

HX3.6 Migration Guide (deutsch)

2023-10-15T10:08:41Z

Christian: /* Bekannte Probleme */

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.5-Platine einbaufertig''']][[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6-Platine einbaufertig''']]
=== Features ===

HX3.6 bietet die gleiche Sound-Qualität wie das bisherige HX3.5-Board. Aufgrund des etwas größeren FPGAs der letzten Generation konnte die Rotary-Simulation weiter verfeinert werden. Als zuküftige Erweiterung ist ein TFT-Touchscreen vorgesehen, der viele Bedienelemente ersetzen kann. Der Controller ist nun deutlich leistungsfähiger und reagiert schneller auf die Bedienelemente. Gegenüber der HX3.5-Firmware 5.7xx sind nun konfigurierbare Orgel- und Speaker-Modelle (je 16 verschiedene) hinzugekommen. Die Abmessungen des Boards und die Positionen der Buchsen für USB, Schweller, Fußschalter und Audio haben sich nicht geändert.

=== Bekannte Probleme ===

[[Datei:HX36_mod_dac.jpg|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6-Platine DAC-Modifikation (nur falls Knistern nicht durch Update auf #14102023 zu beseitigen ist)''']]

Beim Abspielen von Noten erzeugen einige Boards nach dem Einschalten '''manchmal''' ein knisterndes oder "körniges" Geräusch (d.h. nach jedem dritten bis zehnten Einschalten). Dies wird durch Timing-Probleme zwischen FPGA, DAC und DSP verursacht. Wir glauben, dieses Problem durch eine verbesserte I2S-Schnittstelle innerhalb der FPGA-Struktur gelöst zu haben. Wenn die '''Aktualisierung der FPGA Sound Engine auf Version #14102023''' nicht hilft und Sie immer noch ein solches Verhalten feststellen (und nur dann!), ist eine kleine Hardware-Modifikation notwendig. Diese führen wir kostenlos in unserer Werkstatt durch.

Falls Sie es sich selbst zutrauen und mit dem SMD-Löten vertraut sind, können Sie diese Modifikation auch selbst ausführen: Entfernen Sie die Widerstände R1 und R8 (beidseitig mit zwei Lötkolben erwärmen). Verdahten Sie die Lötstellen wie auf nebenstehendem Bild mit Fädel- oder Kupferlackdraht oder dünnem isolierten Draht.

Die erste Serie von Mainboards mit der Bezeichnung HX3.6b erfordert eine Dämpfungsschaltung am MPX-Anschluss, die kostenlos mit den MPX-Boards geliefert wird.

=== Hardware ===

HX3.6 ist grundsätzlich mit der Peripherie für HX3.5-Boards kompatibel, allerdings hat sich die Nummerierung der Anschlüsse geändert. Den separaten und nur sehr selten genutzten Ausgang PREAMP CTRL mit verschiedenen Steuersignalen gibt es jetzt nicht mehr. PL19 ist für die zukünftige Erweiterung mit einem TFT-Touchscreen neu hinzugekommen.

Bitte beachten Sie, dass auf der Platinenrevision HX3.6b von 08/22 die Buchsen PL28 und PL29 '''falsch beschriftet''' sind. PL28 ist der FOOTSW-Eingang, PL29 ist der SWELL-Eingang.

Beachten Sie das Verhalten von HX3.6 bei nicht angeschlossenen Scan-Boards: Sofern ein anderer als der MIDI-Scan-Treiber (''scanmidi.dat'' Version #53.4x, Default bei Expander) installiert ist, '''muss auch das zugehörige Scan-Board angeschlossen sein'''; ansonsten kommt es zu keiner Verbindung zum HX3 Manager, und das MenuPanel lässt sich möglicherweise nicht bedienen.

=== Software ===

Firmware und FPGA (Sound Engine) sind aufgrund der nun verwendeten neuen Bauteile '''nicht mit HX3.5 kompatibel'''. Verwenden Sie '''keinesfalls''' Firmware oder FPGA-Konfiguration von HX3.5 für HX3.6 oder umgekehrt! Scan-Treiber, Presets, CC-Sets, Taperings und Wavesets sind dagegen gleich; Sie können also Ihre eigenen Presets oder Taperings weiterverwenden.

HX3.6 ist von der Software-Schnittstelle her kompatibel mit HX3.5 in der neuesten Firmware-Version 5.8xx, verwendet also auch den gleichen ''HX3 Manager'' und ''Editor''. Dieser hat sich gegenüber #5.7xx leicht geändert. Hinzugekommen sind nun Editor-Registerkarten für die Voreinstellung von bis zu 16 Orgel- und Speaker-Modellen. HX3.6 verwendet bis auf einige Ausnahmen größtenteils die gleichen Parameter wie HX3.5. Überprüfen Sie die folgenden Werte sorgfältig und korrigieren Sie sie bei Bedarf:

* Einige ''System Inits''-Parameternummern haben sich verschoben: 2nd DB Set Voice Number hat sich auf #1505 verschoben. #1504 sollte "0" sein (die Nummer des 1. DB-Sets hat noch keine Auswirkungen auf den HX3.5)
* Bei ''System Inits'' "Preset Save/Restore Mask" #1498 hat sich die Bit-Codierung geändert (siehe Parameter-Help-Text im Editor)
* Die ''Switch Remap''-Codes für die Voice- und Preset-Tasten ab #5100 wurden geändert, um Platz für die nun möglichen Buttons der neuen Orgel- und Speaker-Modelle zu schaffen. Der "Adding"-Preset-Modus wurde von Wert 100 auf 104 geändert, ebenso Upper von 102 auf 101, Lower von 103 auf 102 und so weiter. Dies war notwendig, um Orgel- und Lautsprecher-Preset-Tastengruppen zu implementieren (siehe unten).
* Alle älteren Presets mit Nicht-B3-Einstellungen (H100, EG-Modus) sollten für die Orgelmodell- und Lautsprechermodell-Werte überarbeitet werden. Hierfür sind die alten Preset-Einstellungen nicht mehr gültig. Ein Preset speichert jetzt das jeweils verwendete Orgel- und Speaker-Modell statt der einzelnen Werte hierfür ab.
* Der ''HX3 Editor'' wurde zur Bearbeitung der Orgel- und Rotary/Speaker-Voreinstellungen um zwei Registerkarten erweitert und zeigt dann eine farblich hervorgehobene Darstellung der hierfür verfügbaren Werte.
* Die Orgel- und Rotary/Speaker-Voreinstellungen haben eigene neue Menü-Einträge. Die zugehörigen Parameter finden Sie im HX3 Editor in der ''Knobs''-Gruppe.

====Buttons für Orgel- und Speaker-Modelle====

Sie können nun wie bei Presets und Drawbar-Voices zusammenhängende Button-Gruppen zur Auswahl von Orgel- und Speaker-Modellen auf Panel16/Preset16/Extend16-Boards definieren. Beispiel: Sie wollen vier Buttons auf Panel16 für die Auswahl des Orgelmodells vorsehen. Diesen weisen Sie in ''Switch Remap'' den Wert ''Organ Model'' = 112 zu:
...
5139 = 7 / Input 39 (onboard Pin PL25-8) Function
5140 = 112 / Input 40 (onboard Pin PL26-1) Function: Erster Button der Orgelmodell-Buttons
5141 = 112 / Input 41 (onboard Pin PL26-2) Function
5142 = 112 / Input 42 (onboard Pin PL26-3) Function
5143 = 112 / Input 43 (onboard Pin PL26-4) Function: Letzter Button der Orgelmodell-Buttons
5144 = 12 / Input 44 (onboard Pin PL26-5) Function
...

Diese Tasten arbeiten wie Drawbar/Voice-Presets. Die den Buttons jeweils zugeordneten Orgel- und Speaker-Modelle weisen Sie mit den ''Model Btn Assign''-Sektion (#5400 ff.) zu, beginnend mit dem ersten Button. Es ist somit möglich, aus den 16 zur Verfügung stehenden Modellen nur die für Sie interessanten auszuwählen, was die Anzahl der nötigen Buttons verringert:
5400 = 0 / Organ Model assigned to first Button in group (B3 Standard = 0, Erster Button der Orgelmodell-Buttons)
5401 = 3 / Organ Model assigned to Button 2 (M100/M3 = 3)
5402 = 11 / Organ Model assigned to Button 3 (Custom 1 = 11)
5403 = 4 / Organ Model assigned to Button 4 (H100 = 4, Letzter Button der Orgelmodell-Buttons)
5404 = 0 / Organ Model assigned to Button 5 (nicht mehr vorhanden)
...
Die Zuweisung der Tasten (so vorhanden) für das Lautsprechermodell funktioniert auf sehr ähnliche Weise mit den Parametern ab #5500.

=== Updates ===

[[Datei:dfu_util.png|400px|thumb|right|'''Neues DFU-Upload-Tool in HX3 Manager 6.0x''']]

Eine erhebliche Verbesserung stellt der neue Bootloader des HX3.6 dar, der für Firmware und FPGA Sound Engine einen anderen Update-Prozess erfordert. Der Bootloader ist nun in der Lage, Updates direkt von SD-Karte zu laden oder über den standardisierten DFU-Modus über USB zu empfangen und weist ein eigenes Menü auf. Sie starten den Bootloader, indem Sie vom Preset-Hauptmenu aus ins Submenü wechseln (Taste DOWN) und dort zum Eintrag ''BootLd Update'' navigieren. Drücken Sie den Encoder-Knopf für 2 Sekunden. Alternativ können Sie beim Einschalten den Encoder-Knopf gedrückt halten. HX3.6 startet nun im Bootloader-Modus, erkennbar an einem invers dargestellten '''BL''' in der unteren Display-Zeile. '''Wichtig:''' Im Bootloader-Modus reagiert HX3.6 nicht mehr auf Befehle vom ''HX3 Editor''. Stattdessen erwartet er nun ein DFU-Update-Paket über USB oder eine SD-Karte mit den für das Update nötigen Teilen.

Der DFU-Modus arbeitet sehr viel schneller als die bisherige serielle Übertragung. Der Update-Prozess ist in der neuen [http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX35_Manager.pdf Anleitung zum HX3 Manager für Version 6.0xx] genau beschrieben. Neu im HX3 Manager ist nun das BootLoad-Tool. Möglicherweise müssen Sie die Größe des Startfensters vm HX3 Manager vergrößern (nach unten aufziehen), um diese Schaltfläche zu sehen. Hier nur eine Kurzform:

====Updatevorgang mit HX3 Manager (Kurzform)====

* ''HX3 Manager'' App starten, mit dem Gerät verbinden (per USB-Kabel) und Updater öffnen. Versionen prüfen.
* ''HX3.6 Update'' Schaltfläche anklicken. Nach der Bestätigung wechselt HX3.6 in den Bootloader-Modus ("BL" wird im MenuPanel angezeigt).
* Öffnen Sie die Datei ''hx36_update.dfu''. Der HX3.6 Bootloader entpackt das DFU-Paket, sobald der Upload beendet ist und startet neu.

====Alternative für manuelle Updates (erfahrene Benutzer)====

* Starten Sie die ''HX3 Manager''-App und klicken Sie auf ''BootLoad (HX3.6)''. Möglicherweise müssen Sie die Größe des Startfensters von ''HX3 Manager'' ändern, um diese Schaltfläche zu sehen.
* Öffnen Sie den HX3.6 Bootloader, indem Sie vom Preset-Hauptmenü zum Untermenü ''Bootld Update'' navigieren. HX3.6 wird im Bootloader-Modus neu gestartet, "BL" wird im MenuPanel angezeigt.
* Wählen Sie im Fenster ''HX3.6 DFU Pack & Send Updater'' in der Spalte ''Update'' alle zu aktualisierenden Dateien aus (YES). Heben Sie die Auswahl nicht benötigter Dateien auf (NO).
* Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche ''Send DFU Pack''. Der HX3.6 Bootloader entpackt das DFU-Paket, wenn der Upload beendet ist und startet neu.

Sollte der Bootloader nicht automatisch verlassen werden, navigieren Sie auf dem HX3-MenuPanel zum Menü ''Exit BootLd'' und drücken den Encoder-Knopf.

=== Erste Hilfe ===

Bitte beachten Sie auch die Seite '''[[HX3.6 First Aid (deutsch)]]''', falls irgendetwas nicht funktioniert.

HX3.6 Migration Guide (english)

2023-10-15T10:07:08Z

Christian: /* Known Bugs */

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.5 Board''']][[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6 Board''']]

=== Features ===

HX3.6 offers the same sound quality as the previous HX3.5 board. Due to the slightly larger FPGA of the last generation, the rotary simulation could be further refined. As a future extension a TFT touch screen is planned, which can replace many control elements. The controller is now much more powerful and reacts faster to the controls. Compared to the HX3.5 firmware 5.7xx, configurable organ and speaker models (16 different each) have now been added. The dimensions of the board and the positions of the sockets for USB, sill, footswitch and audio have not changed.

=== Known Bugs ===

[[Datei:HX36_mod_dac.jpg|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6 board DAC modification if update to #14102023 does not help (click on picture to enlarge)''']]

When playing notes, a few boards produce a "grainy" noise '''sometimes''' after switching on (i.e. sometimes every 3 to 10 power cycles). This is caused by timing issues from FPGA to DAC and DSP, and we solved it for every known case by improved I2S interfacing within FPGA structure. If '''updating the FPGA Sound Engine to #14102023''' does not help and you still experience such behaviour, a small hardware modification is necessary. This has to be done free of charge in our workshop.

If you are confident and familiar with SMD soldering, you can also do this modification yourself (see picture on right): Remove resistors R1 and R8 (heat both sides with two soldering irons). Wire the solder joints from R1 and R8 to R34 (middle) as shown in picture with enamelled copper wire or thin (!) insulated wire. Do not use bare wire.

The first series of mainboards, labeled HX3.6b, requires a damping circuit at the MPX connector, that is supplied free of cost with MPX boards.

=== Hardware ===

HX3.6 is basically compatible with the peripherals for HX3.5 boards, but the numbering of the connectors has changed. The separate and only very rarely used output PREAMP CTRL with various control signals is no longer available. PL19 is newly added for future expansion with a TFT touch screen.

Please note that on board revision HX3.6b from 08/22 the pin headers PL28 and PL29 are '''not labeled correctly'''. PL28 is the FOOTSW input, PL29 is the SWELL input.

Also note the behavior of HX3.6 when scan boards are not connected: If another than the MIDI scan driver (''scanmidi.dat'', default for HX3 Expander) is installed, '''the corresponding scan board must also be connected'''; otherwise there will be no connection to the HX3 Manager, and the MenuPanel may not be operable.

=== Software ===

Firmware and FPGA (Sound Engine) '''are not compatible''' with HX3.5 due to the new components now used. '''Do not use firmware or FPGA configuration from HX3.5''' for HX3.6 or vice versa! Otherwise, Scan drivers, presets, CC sets, taperings and wavesets are the same; so you can continue to use your own presets or taperings.

HX3.6 is compatible from the software interface with HX3.5 in the latest firmware version 5.8xx, so it also uses the same ''HX3 Manager'' and ''Editor''. This has changed slightly compared to #5.7xx. Added are now editor tabs for presetting up to 16 organ and speaker models. HX3.6 uses mostly the same parameters as HX3.5, with some exceptions. Check the following values carefully and correct them if necessary:

* Some ''System Inits'' parameter numbers have moved: "2nd DB Set Voice Number" has moved to #1505. #1504 should be "0" (the 1st DB Set number has no effect on the HX3.5 yet)
* ''System Inits'' "Preset Save/Restore Mask" #1498 has changed bit coding (see parameter help text in editor).
* The ''Switch Remap'' codes for the Voice and Preset buttons starting with #5100 have been changed to make room for the now possible buttons of the new Organ and Speaker models. The "Adding" preset mode was changed from value 100 to 104, as was Upper from 102 to 101, Lower from 103 to 102, and so on. This was necessary to implement organ and speaker preset key groups (see below).
*
* All older presets with non-B3 settings (H100, EG mode) should be revised for organ model and speaker model values. For this, the old preset settings are no longer valid. A preset now stores the respective organ model and speaker model used instead of the individual values for these.

'''Buttons for Organ and Speaker Models'''

You can now define related (consecutive) button groups for organ and speaker model selection on Panel16/Preset16/Extend16 boards, as with presets and drawbar voices. Example: You want to provide four buttons on Panel16 for organ model selection. So you assign the value ''Organ Model'' = 112 to them in ''Switch Remap'':
...
5139 = 7 / Input 39 (onboard Pin PL25-8) Function
5140 = 112 / Input 40 (onboard Pin PL26-1) Function: First Button of Organ Model Button Group
5141 = 112 / Input 41 (onboard Pin PL26-2) Function
5142 = 112 / Input 42 (onboard Pin PL26-3) Function
5143 = 112 / Input 43 (onboard Pin PL26-4) Function: Last Button of Organ Model Button Group
5144 = 12 / Input 44 (onboard Pin PL26-5) Function
...

These buttons work like drawbar/voice presets. You assign the organ and speaker models linked to each button using the ''Model Btn Assign'' section (#5400 ff.), starting with the first button. It is thus possible to select only the models you are interested in from the 16 available, which reduces the number of buttons required:
5400 = 0 / Organ Model assigned to first Button in group (B3 Standard = 0)
5401 = 3 / Organ Model assigned to Button 2 (M100/M3 = 3)
5402 = 11 / Organ Model assigned to Button 3 (Custom 1 = 11)
5403 = 4 / Organ Model assigned to Button 4 (H100 = 4)
5404 = 0 / Organ Model assigned to Button 5 (not used, no more buttons)
...

Speaker model button assignment does work in a very similar way, using parameters ab #5500 to #5515.

=== Updates ===

[[Datei:dfu_util.png|400px|thumb|right|'''New DFU Upload Tool in HX3 Manager 6.0x''']]

A significant improvement is the new bootloader of HX3.6, which requires a different update process for firmware and FPGA sound engine. The bootloader is now able to load updates directly from SD card or receive them via USB using the standardized DFU mode and features its own menu. You start the bootloader by switching to the submenu from the preset main menu (DOWN button) and navigating to the ''BootLd Update'' entry. Press the encoder knob for 2 seconds. Alternatively you can press and hold the encoder knob while powering on. '''Important:''' In bootloader mode, HX3.6 no longer responds to commands from the ''HX3 Editor''. Instead, it now expects a DFU update package via USB or SD card with the parts necessary for the update.

The DFU mode works much faster than the previous serial transfer. The update process is described in detail in the new [http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/HX3.6%20Manager%20Current%20Firmware/UserManual_HX3_Manager.pdf HX3 Manager User Manual] for version 6.0xx. New in the HX3 Manager is the BootLoad tool. You may need to increase the size of the startup window vm HX3 Manager (drag it down) to see this button. Here is just a short form:

====Update procedure with HX3 Manager (short form)====

* Start HX3 Manager app, connect to device (by USB cable) and open Updater. Check versions.
* Click HX3.6 Update button. After confirmation, HX3.6 will switch to bootloader mode ("BL" displayed on MenuPanel).
* Open file hx36_update.dfu. HX3.6 Bootloader will unpack DFU package when upload is finished and restart.

====Alternative for manual updates (experienced users)====

* Start HX3 Manager app and click BootLoad (HX3.6). You may have to resize HX3 Manager's start window to see this button.
* Enter HX3.6 Bootloader by navigating to submenu Bootld Update. HX3.6 will restart in Bootloader mode, "BL" will be displayed on MenuPanel.
* In HX3.6 DFU Pack & Send Updater window, select all files to be updated from table above (YES) in Update column. Unselect unnecessary files (NO).
* Click Send DFU Pack button. HX3.6 Bootloader will unpack DFU package when upload is finished and restart.

If Bootloader does not exit automatically, navigate to menu ''Exit BootLd'' on HX3 MenuPanel und press encoder knob.

=== First Aid ===

Please also see the '''[[HX3.6 First Aid (english)]]''' page if anything fails.

HX3 mk3/mk4 additional info

2023-10-13T10:22:33Z

Christian: /* HX3 mk4 Changes */

[[Datei:Mk3 midiout.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk3 jumper wires (supplied with HX3 mk3 board) configuring left MIDI DIN jack as standard MIDI OUT. For HX3 mk4 series, use plain jumpers (see text at bottom).''']]

[[File:Mk3 midiin.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk3 jumper wires configuring left MIDI DIN jack as secondary MIDI IN (wires may be replaced by jumper bridges). Jumpers for phantom supply of secondary MIDI input are not installed here.''']]

[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|450px|thumb|right|'''FTDI Cable connected to HX3 board. Your board may be equipped with a non-angled or white pin header; just regard wire colours.''']]

New '''HX3 mk3/mk4''' boards are equipped with stereo Leslie® simulation, secondary MIDI input and configurable mono audio output jacks.

On factory default for '''HX3 mk3/mk4''', menu item "Jack Config A" yields bass pedal on left (inner) audio jack, plain organ signal (like G-G on B3 AO28) on right (outer) audio jack. "Jack Config B" yields stereo Leslie® simulation on both jacks with added dry bass pedal signal. Both configurations may be changed to any combination with "AudioJ Conf A" and "AudioJ Conf B" menus (scroll down to access).

Jumpers JP5 und JP7/8 (I2C_REV) must be removed during operation - only needed for factory programming. JP6 must be set to REF position (not on HX3 Expander).

HX3 mk3/mk4 has an auxiliary connector PL8 behind the audio jacks which carries auido signal as present on jacks. Similar, two connectors PL18 and PL19 are swell (SWL) and footswitch inputs (connected to control jacks) for internal use.

PL16 (not installed) might be used for future use.

===HX3 mk3/mk4 Tab/Switch Connection===

HX3 mk3/mk4 does not have additional tab switch inputs PL8/PL12 with same functiononality as button/LED inputs PL7/PL11. Instead, button/LED toggle pins on PL7/PL11 may be configured individually as switch inputs by ''HX3 Remote'' software, '''Organ Defaults''' parameters 478 and 479. A checked box indicates a switch input, an unchecked box means a toogling button/LED input. Default is toggle inputs for Panel16 or button connection.

For other connectors, see page [[HX3 Board Installation]].

HX3 mk3 boards have a spare footprint '''U12''' for an additional PCA9554AD I2C port circuit which may be used to control external preamplifiers etc. If populated (standard on mk4), '''PL17''' carries following signals (active high) with firmware #3.6 and up:

PREAMP_DBSELECT_UPPER '''Pin 1''', Drawbar A/B Select for Upper Preset 1/15 
PREAMP_DBSELECT_LOWER '''Pin 2''', Drawbar A/B Select for Lower Preset 1/15 
PREAMP_LESLIE_RUN '''Pin 3''' 
PREAMP_LESLIE_FAST '''Pin 4''' 
PREAMP_REV1 '''Pin 5''', Reverb I 
PREAMP_REV2 '''Pin 6''', Reverb II 
PREAMP_OD1 '''Pin 7''' (not used) 
PREAMP_OD2 '''Pin 8''' (not used) 

===HX3 mk3 Secondary MIDI Input===

Both MIDI DIN jacks are wired by internal jumpers as MIDI inputs with merge as pictured. '''Please disregard lettering on old HX3 MIDI expander back panel.''' You may use a MIDI master keyboard and a additional MIDI keyboard or MIDI drawbar controller. Original MIDI OUT configuration may be obtained by internal jumper setting. Also, MIDI phantom supply may be routed to left MIDI input by placing two additional jumpers.

Phantom supply on secondary MIDI IN may be enabled by placing one jumper to two rightmost pins of PL6 and one jumper on JP13. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins.

Factory default for "MIDI Custom CC" set is '''Nord C2''' organ (works also with '''Ocean Beach DB-1''' drawbar controller); all MIDI controller assignments may be changed by ''HX3 Remote'' application (USB adaptor cable required) to any desired value.

===HX3 mk3/mk4 Firmware Update===

On HX3 mk3, '''no''' additional jumpers must be installed for updating with ''HX3 Remote'' application. Please use HX3 Remote application contained in firmware update ZIP or HX3 Flash packages provided in Github Repo.

'''HX3 MIDI Expander:''' To access internal configuration port with FTDI USB adaptor cable, please unscrew front panel and remove top lid. MenuPanel should be left connected to view messages on display. Models with USB port use simple Mini-USB cable instead, no FTDI cable needed.

===HX3 mk4 Changes===

Inconvenience of jumper cables for MIDI in/out configuration was due to '''design quirk''' on HX3 mk3 boards and has been corrected on mk4 series. HX3 mk4 also has a "preamp control" output with rotary, reverb and drawbar A/B switch control signals on PL17 (see avbove). Summary:

* Preamp control circuit '''U12''' is alsways populated to use PL17
* MIDI configuration connector PL6 has been renamed to PL10. You may connect switches to configurate MIDI IN/OUT or use jumpers (see below).
* Jumper setting for left MIDI OUT is 1-2, 3-4 and 7-8 on PL10 (3 jumpers, leftmost pin is 1)
* Jumper setting for left MIDI IN is 2-3 and 6-7 on PL10 (2 jumpers, leftmost pin is 1)
* For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set additional jumper on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins.
* Jumper setting for left MIDI IN is 2-3 and 5-6 on PL10 (2 jumpers, similar second pic)
* PL14 has internal pullups so using FatarScan core with no scan board attached will produce noise.

===HX3 mk4 MIDI Hardware Configuration===

From factory, both MIDI DIN jacks are wired by internal jumpers as MIDI inputs with merge by two jumpers on PL10, bridging pins 2-3 and 5-6. The '''left''' MIDI jack may be configured as a '''MIDI output''' by placing jumpers on PL10 pin '''1-2 and 3-4''' instead of 2-3 and 5-6. Place an additional jumper on '''pins 7-8''' for ground on MIDI output. Seen from back, PL10 pin 1 ist the '''leftmost''' pin.

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input for MIDISCAN25 bass pedal board may be obtained by two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3 PL10 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

If the Extension board is installed, both MIDI jacks on mainboard should be jumpered as MIDI INs as the Extension board has its own MIDI OUT.

HX3.5 Extension Board

2023-09-18T10:38:51Z

Christian: /* HX3.4 Extension Board (discontinued) */

[[Datei:Hx35_extension_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.5 Extension Board connected to HX3.5 Mainboard''']]

==Preface==

An updated HX3.5 Extension Board is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It carries a Leslie control and preamp circuit with separate Audio DAC, two 1/4" jacks for either audio (plain organ and pedal bass) or sustain and sostenuto pedals (selectable by jumpers) and an headphone amp. However, with some restrictions, you may use the old Extension Board mk3/mk4 for HX3.5 mainboard as well (see below).

==HX3.5 Extension Board==

An updated HX3.5 Extension Board is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It carries a Leslie control and preamp circuit with separate Audio DAC, two 1/4" jacks for either audio (plain organ and pedal bass) or sustain and sostenuto switches (selectable by jumpers) and a headphone amp. It also provides an USB socket which is routed-through to HX3.5 mainboard (no USB socket installed on mainboard).

===Installation===

The extension board for HX3.5 mainboards adds two additional audio outputs, Leslie(R) control and preamplifier for 9- and 11-pin Leslies, headphone jack, USB interface for MIDI over USB to your HX3 mainboard. It also adds a MIDI OUT, so that the HX3.5 board may be jumpered for two MIDI inputs.

The extension board connects to HX3 mainboard by 26-pin header '''PL33''' and flat ribbon cable. Length of cable must not exceed 15 cm (6") as high-frequency digital signals are transmitted. For additional audio outputs, the extension board provides a second D/A converter. Outputs carry plain organ audio and bass pedal signal as they are routed to the Leslie connector. There is no reverb added.

HX3 extension board brings its own power supply for Leslie preamp (DC/DC converter). Normally, '''PL30''' may be left open. If noise appears on Leslie audio, connect '''PL30''' to common +5V supply of HX3 (green header).

===1/4" Jack Jumpers===

Two 1/4" jacks may either be used as audio outputs (factory default) or Sostenuto/Sustain footswitch inputs (momentary switches). Set jumpers JP1 and JP2 to 1-2 (facing towards JP lettering) to obtain switch inputs. Set jumpers JP1 and JP2 to 2-3 (facing towards 1/4" jacks)) to obtain audio output (Pedal Bass, organ main output; no reverb, no speaker simulation).

===Potentiometer Inserts===

A 16-pin header '''PL32''' provides send/return of Leslie and headphone signals to insert potentiometers (any 10k to 47k audio taper pot will do) or effects like 3-band equalizer. '''If no pots or effects are inserted, pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and 7-8 must be bridged by jumpers.''' The connector also provides symmetrical 12V power supply for audio preamp circuits.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''PL32'''
|'''Connection to insert pots'''
|-

|Pin 1
|headphone signal (rotary sim left out) to pot
|-

|Pin 2
|headphone amp input signal (left) from pot wiper
|-

|Pin 3
|headphone signal (rotary sim right out) to pot
|-

|Pin 4
|headphone amp input signal (right) from pot wiper
|-

|Pin 5
|Plain organ signal to pot or effect
|-

|Pin 6
|Leslie Rotary signal from pot wiper or effect
|-

|Pin 7
|Bass/Pedal signal to pot or effect
|-

|Pin 8
|Leslie Bass/Stationary signal from pot wiper or effect
|-

|Pin 9,10
|Audio Ground for pots/inserts
|-

|Pin 11,12
| +12V optional opamp supply
|-

|Pin 13,14
| +5V optional digital supply
|-

|Pin 15,16
| -12V optional opamp supply
|-
|}
 

===Leslie Connection===

'''PL31''' carries complete 11-pin Leslie(R) control signals (power, slow/fast, audio signals organ and bass pedals). It connects to 11-pin Amphenol jack one-on-one, pins 12 to 14 of PL31 remain open. For connection of 9-pin Leslies, mind the different pinout. 6-pin Leslies (122/147) need an additional interface/relay circuit; please ask an experienced Hammond tech.

Trim pots '''R8''' (stationary channel) and '''R9''' (rotary channel) on HX3.5 extension board may be adjusted to required Leslie output level (set to mid position as default).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''PL31'''
|'''Connection to 11 pin Leslie'''
|-
|Pin 1
|Rotary audio channel
|-
|Pin 2
|Stationary audio channel
|-
|Pin 4
|Audio ground
|-
|Pin 5
|Common ground for control signals
|-
|Pin 6
|Power ON
|-
|Pin 7
|Fast
|-
|Pin 9
|Slow
|-
|Pin 11
| Leslie +30V supply
|-
|}

 

===MIDI/USB===

[[Datei:Hx35_extension_2.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.5 Extension Board USB wiring by 4-wire cable (supplied). Note: Cable colors may be different.''']]

USB interfaces to HX3.5 DSP as "MIDI over USB" only. To use the USB jack, install 4-wire cable (supplied) from Extension Board header PL42 to HX3.5 mainboard PL32. Omit installation of PL3 on HX3.5 mainboard (both connectors are wired in parallel). Connect a USB A/B cable to your PC; it should register as a standard USB MIDI interface. In some cases, a USB hub can disturb communication. In this case, connect HX3.5 USB directly to your PC.

'''Please note: If USB MIDI is being used, the secondary MIDI IN2 input on HX3.5 mainboard may not be used simultaneously'''.

MIDI OUT on extension board is always an output, independant of PL18 jumper setting on HX3.5 mainboard.

===Output Level for 147 type Leslies===

Output level of the Leslie output pins is not sufficient for old tube Leslies. Bridge R1 and R2 on HX3 Extension board with two additional 22kOhms SMD resistors (size 0805) to obtain doubled output level. Please note that 147 Leslies need a relais for SLOW/FAST switching. Relais coil may be driven from FAST motor control output of extension board.

==HX3.4 Extension Board (discontinued)==

[[Datei:Hx35_old_ext1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''Additional wires required to use HX3.5 with old HX3 mk3/mk4 Extension Board USB port''']]

Old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used with HX3.5 mainboard with some modifications. '''Remove R17 and R25''' (22k SMD, near PL33) from HX3.4 Extension board, otherwise a DC offset will occur on PEDAL BASS output.

The USB port on old Extension board can be used as a remote control port; this requires '''two wires''' to be soldered from Extension Board connector to serial port on back of HX3.5 mainboard. Without these wires, the USB port on Extension Board is useless. Route one wire from PL1 pin 10 to PL19 pin 4 and one wire from PL1 pin 11 to PL19 pin 5 (see pictures).

Please note: Even with HX3.5 mainboard, USB socket on old Extension Board is solely to be used for parameter tweaking with HX3.5 Editor. The connection is made via FTDI. '''DSP updates and MIDI over USB are not supported'''. For best results, use HX3.5 Extension board as described above. See page [[HX3 Extension Board Installation]] for details on old Extension Board.

Therefore, you may use USB port on HX3.5 mainboard as "MIDI over USB" and USB remote control port (for HX3.5 Editor) on old Extension board simultaneously.

HX3.5 Extension Board (deutsch)

2023-09-18T10:36:31Z

Christian: /* HX3.4 Extension Board (nicht mehr erhältlich) */

[[Datei:Hx35_extension_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.5 Extension Board verbunden mit HX3.5 Mainboard''']]

==Vorbemerkung==

Ein neues HX3.5 Extension Board ist verfügbar für Leslie- und Kopfhöreranschluss. Es enthält einen Leslie-Vorverstärker mit separatem Audio-DAC, eine Leslie-Steuerschaltung und einen Kopfhörerverstärker. Mit einigen Einschränkungen kann aber auch das alte HX3 Extension Board mk4 am HX3.5-Mainboard verwendet werden (siehe unten).

==HX3.5 Extension Board==

Ein neues HX3.5 Extension Board ist verfügbar für Leslie- und Kopfhöreranschluss. Es enthält einen Leslie-Vorverstärker mit separatem Audio-DAC, eine Leslie-Steuerschaltung und einen Kopfhörerverstärker. Zwei 6,3mm-Buchsen führen entweder Audio (trockenes Orgelsignal und Pedal-Bass) oder können als Sustain- und Sostenuto-Schaltbuchsen gejumpert werden. Die dritte dient zum Anschluss des Kopfhörers. Außerdem ist eine USB-Buchse vorhanden, die mit dem HX3.5-Mainboard verbunden wird (wenn die USB-Buchse auf dem Mainboard nicht installiert ist).

===Installation===

Das Extension Board für HX3.5-Mainboards fügt diesem zwei Audio-Ausgänge, die Leslie(R)-Steuerung und einen Vorverstärker für 9- und 11-polige Leslies, einen Kopfhöreranschluss sowie ein USB Interface für MIDI over USB hinzu. Außerdem ist ein MIDI OUT-Anschluss vorhanden, so dass die beiden MIDI-Buchsen auf dem Mainboard als Eingänge gejumpert werden können.

Mit dem Mainboard wird das Extension Board über den 26-poligen Steckverbinder '''PL33''' über Flachbandkabel verbunden. Das Kabel darf nicht länger sein als 15cm, weil hochfrequente digitale Signale übertragen werden. Für die Audio-Ausgänge ist ein zweiter D/A-Konverter vorhanden. Die Ausgänge führen das trockene Orgelsignal und das Basspedal-Signal, wie sie zum Leslie gesendet werden. Reverb wird auf diesen Ausgängen nicht hinzugefügt.

Das HX3 Extension Board erzeugt die höhere Versorgungsspannung für den Leslie-Preamp selbst (DC/DC-Konverter). '''PL30''' kann normalerweise offen bleiben. Wenn Störgeräusch im Leslie-Audiosignal auftritt, schließen Sie die 5V-Stromversorgung an '''PL30''' (grüner Steckverbinder) an.

===Jumper für 6,3mm-Buchsen===

Ab Werk sind zwei 6,3mm-Buchsen als Audio-Ausgänge geschaltet, sie können aber auch zur Verwendung als Eingänge für Sostenuto/Sustain-Fußschalter (Taster) gejumpert werden. Setzen Sie die Jumper JP1 und JP2 dazu auf 1-2 (neben der JP-Beschriftung). Setzen Sie die Jumper JP1 and JP2 auf 2-3 (neben den Buchsen), um Audioausgänge zu erhalten (Orgelsignal, Pedal-Bass; kein Reverb, keine Lautsprechersimulation).

===Potentiometer-Inserts===

Der 16-polige Steckverbinder '''PL32''' liefert Send/Return des Leslie- and Kopfhörersignals. Hier können Potentiometer (jedes 10k bis 47k log. passt) oder Effekte wie ein 3-Band-Equalizer eingeschleift werden. Wenn das nicht gemacht wird, müssen die Pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and 7-8 durch Jumper gebrückt werden. Der Steckverbinder führt außerdem die symetrische 12V-Versorgungsspannung für Audio-Vorverstärkerschaltungen.

{| class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 35%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL32 Anschlussbelegung
|-
!Pin 1
|headphone signal left to pot
|-

!Pin 2
|headphone signal left from pot wiper
|-

!Pin 3
|headphone signal right to pot
|-

!Pin 4
|headphone signal right from pot wiper
|-

!Pin 5
|Leslie Rotary signal to pot
|-

!Pin 6
|Leslie Rotary signal from pot wiper
|-

!Pin 7
|Leslie Bass/Stationary signal to pot
|-

!Pin 8
|Leslie Bass/Stationary signal from pot wiper
|-

!Pin 9,10
|Audio Ground for pots/inserts
|-

!Pin 11,12
| +12V optional opamp supply
|-

!Pin 13,14
| +5V optional digital supply
|-

!Pin 15,16
| -12V optional opamp supply
|-
|}
 

===Leslie-Anschluss===

'''PL31''' führt alle Signale für ein 11-poliges Leslie(R)(power, slow/fast, Audiosignale von Orgel und Basspedal). Eine 11-polige Amphenolbuchse kann 1 zu 1 verbunden werden, die Pins 12 bis 14 von PL31 bleiben offen. Zur Verbindung mit 9-poligen Leslies beachten Sie bitte die abweichende Pin-Belegung. 6-polige Leslies (122/147) brauchen ein zusätzliches Interface/Relaisschaltung; bitte fragen Sie einen erfahrenen Hammond-Fachmann.

Die Trimmer '''R8''' (stationärer Kanal) und '''R9''' (rotierender Kanal) auf dem HX3.5 Extension Board können eingestellt werden, um den gewünschten Leslie-Ausgangspegel zu erreichen.

{| class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 35%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 11-Pin Leslie Anschlussbelegung
|-
!Pin 1
|Rotary audio channel
|-
!Pin 2
|Stationary audio channel
|-
!Pin 4
|Audio ground
|-
!Pin 5
|Common ground for control signals
|-
!Pin 6
|Power ON
|-
!Pin 7
|Fast
|-
!Pin 9
|Slow
|-
!Pin 11
| Leslie +30V supply
|-
|}

 

===MIDI/USB===

[[Datei:Hx35_extension_2.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.5 Extension Board: USB-Verdrahtung mit 4pol. Kabel (mitgeliefert). Die Kabelfarben können abweichen.''']]

Der USB-Anschluss verbindet mit dem DSP auf dem HX3.5-Mainboard ausschießlich als "MIDI over USB". Um den Anschluss zu verwenden, muss ein vierpoliges Kabel (mitgeliefert) vom Anschluss PL42 auf dem Extension Board zu Anschluss PL32 auf dem HX3.5-Mainboard geführt werden. Auf PL3 auf dem HX3.5-Mainboard sollte dann keine USB-Buchse eingelötet sein (beide Buchsen sind parallel geschaltet). Verbinden Sie ein USB-A/B-Kabel mit Ihrem PC; das Extension Board sollte als Standard-USB-MIDI-Gerät erkannt werden. Ein USB Hub stört in manchen Fällen die Kommunikation. Dann sollten Sie das Kabel direkt zum PC führen.

'''Bitte beachten: Wenn MIDI over USB benutzt wird, darf der zweite MIDI-Eingang auf dem HX3.5-Mainboard nicht gleichzeitig verwendet werden'''.

MIDI OUT auf dem Extension Board ist immer Ausgang, unabhängig davon, wie Jumper PL18 auf dem HX3.5-Mainboard gesetzt wird.

===Ausgangspegel für 147er Leslies===

Der Ausgangspegel an den Leslie-Ausgangspins reicht nicht aus für alte Röhren-Leslies. Sie können die Widerstände R1 und R2 auf dem HX3 Extension Board mit zwei weiteren 22kOhm-SMD-Widerständen (Größe 0805) überbrücken, um den Pegel zu verdoppeln. Bitte beachten Sie, dass 147er Leslies ein Relais für die Umschaltung LANGSAM/SCHNELL benötigen. Die Relaisspule kann durch den SCHNELL-Motorsteuerausgang auf dem Extension Board angesteuert werden.

==HX3.4 Extension Board (nicht mehr erhältlich)==

[[Datei:Hx35_old_ext1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''Eine zusätzliche Drahtverbindung muss hergestellt werden, um den USB-Port auf dem alten HX3 mk3/mk4 Extension Board mit dem HX3.5-Mainboard zu nutzen''']]

Das alte Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' kann nach kleinen Änderungen mit dem HX3.5-Mainboard genutzt werden. '''Entfernen Sie R17 und R25''' (22k SMD, nahe PL33) von dem HX3.4 Extension Board, sonst gibt es einen Gleichspannungsoffset auf dem PEDAL BASS Ausgang.

Der USB-Port auf dem alten Extension Board kann als zur Verbindung mit dem HX3.5 Editor genutzt werden. Das erfordert '''zwei Drähte''', die auf der Rückseite des HX3.5-Mainboards vom Extension-Board-Steckverbinder zum seriellen Port einzulöten sind. Ohne diese Drahtverbindung ist der USB-Port auf dem Extension Board nutzlos. Verbinden Sie Pin 10 von PL1 mit Pin 4 von PL19 und Pin11 von PL1 mit Pin5 von PL19 (siehe Bilder).

Bitte beachten: Auch mit dem HX3.5-Mainboard ist der USB-Anschluss auf dem alten Extension Board nur zur Parametereinstellung und für Updates mit dem HX3.5 Editor zu gebrauchen. Die Verbindung erfolgt über FTDI. '''DSP-Updates und MIDI over USB sind nicht möglich'''. Nutzen Sie dazu das HX3.5 Extension Board wie oben beschrieben. Siehe Seite [[HX3 Extension Board Installation]] mit Details zum alten Extension Board.

Sie können gleichzeitig den USB-Port auf dem HX3.5-Mainboard als "MIDI over USB" und den USB-Port auf dem alten Extension-Board zur Steuerung mit dem HX3.5 Editor benutzen.

HX3.5 Firmware 5.8 Migration Guide (deutsch)

2023-08-15T11:24:04Z

Christian: /* Features */

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3.5-Platine einbaufertig''']]
=== Features ===

Gegenüber der HX3.5-Firmware #5.7xx sind nun konfigurierbare Orgel- und Speaker-Modelle (je 16 verschiedene) hinzugekommen, die nach eigenem Geschmack angepasst werden können. Statt der einzelnen hierfür verantwortlichen Werte wird nun nur noch die Orgel- oder Speaker-Nummer im Preset gespeichert. Für die voreingestellten Orgel- und Speaker-Modelle sind Menü-Einträge hinzugekommen. Wenn ein Menü-Wert im aktuell ausgewählten Orgel- oder Rotary/Speaker-Modell statt im Preset oder in den Defaults gespeichert wird, zeigt das Menü die Kennbuchstaben "O" oder "R".
FPGA (Sound Engine), Scan-Treiber, Presets, CC-Sets, Taperings und Wavesets sind gleich geblieben; Sie können also Ihre eigenen Presets oder Taperings weiterverwenden. Für Firmware #5.8xx benötigen Sie '''den neuen HX3 Manager 6.0x''', der im Update-Paket enthalten ist.

=== Software ===

Firmware #5.8xx verwendet bis auf einige Ausnahmen die gleichen Parameter (siehe Editor-Tabelle) wie Firmware #5.7xx; einige nun überflüssige (wie verschiedene Vibrato-Voreinstellungen) sind entfallen. Überprüfen Sie die folgenden Werte sorgfältig und korrigieren Sie sie bei Bedarf:

* Einige System-Inits-Parameternummern haben sich verschoben: 2nd DB Set Voice Number hat sich auf #1505 verschoben. #1504 sollte "0" sein (die Nummer des 1. DB-Sets hat noch keine Auswirkungen auf den HX3.5)
* System Inits Preset Save/Restore Mask #1498 hat die Bit-Codierung geändert (siehe Parameter-Help-Text im Editor)
* Die ''Switch Remap''-Codes für die Voice- und Preset-Tasten ab #5100 wurden geändert, um Platz für die nun möglichen Buttons der neuen Orgel- und Speaker-Modelle zu schaffen. Der "Adding"-Preset-Modus wurde von Wert 100 auf 104 geändert, ebenso Upper von 102 auf 101, Lower von 103 auf 102 und so weiter. Dies war notwendig, um Orgel- und Lautsprecher-Preset-Tastengruppen zu implementieren.
* Sie können wie bei Presets und Drawbar-Voices zusammenhängende Button-Gruppen für Orgel- und Speaker-Modelle auf Preset16/Extend16-Boards definieren. Die den Buttons jeweils zugeordneten Orgel- und Speaker-Modelle weisen Sie mit den ''Model Btn Assign''-Gruppen (#5400 ff.) zu. Es ist somit möglich, aus den 16 zur Verfügung stehenden Modellen nur die für Sie interessanten auszuwählen, was die Anzahl der nötigen Buttons verringert.
* Alle älteren Presets mit Nicht-B3-Einstellungen (H100, EG-Modus) sollten für die Orgelmodell- und Lautsprechermodell-Werte überarbeitet werden. Hierfür sind die alten Preset-Einstellungen nicht mehr gültig. Ein Preset speichert jetzt das jeweils verwendete Orgel- und Speaker-Modell statt der einzelnen Werte hierfür ab.
* Der ''HX3 Editor'' wurde zur Bearbeitung der Orgel- und Rotary/Speaker-Voreinstellungen um zwei Registerkarten erweitert und zeigt dann eine farblich hervorgehobene Darstellung der hierfür verfügbaren Werte.

=== Updates ===

Der ''HX3 Manager'' in Version #6.0x führt nun keine automatischen Updates für HX3.5-Geräte mehr aus. Die für das Update nötigen Teile sind stattdessen im Changelog auf unserer Update-Seite aufgeführt. In der Regel sollte sich ein Update auf die Firmware (Datei "firmware.bin") beschränken, es sei denn, im Changeloog wird explizit auf weitere Teile hingewiesen. Verwenden Sie im ''HX3 Updater'' das Menü "Update via USB or FTDI cable".

Bei Updates von älteren Versionen vor #5.730 können sich recht viele Default-Parameter (EEPROM) geändert haben; die Orgel könnte damit schlecht klingen. Es ist dann empfehlenswert, auch ein EEPROM-Update durchzuführen und die für das eigene Gerät erforderlichen Einstellungen (z.B. Button-, Schalter- und Drawbar-Zuweisungen) im HX3 Editor manuell durchzuführen.

HX3 MIDI-Implementierung

2023-06-27T14:42:25Z

Christian: /* #8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set */

==MIDI-Steuerung==

HX3 akzeptiert MIDI-Tasteninformationen NOTE ON / OFF (Default: Kanal 1 für Obermanual, Kanal 2 für Untermanual und Kanal 3 für Pedal; der Basiskanal 1 kann per Menu MIDI CH geändert werden) wie auch verschiedene MIDI CCs in selektierbaren, zu vielen Instrumenten kompatiblen Sets. Fremde SysEx-Daten werden generell ignoriert.
Die beiden MIDI-IN-Buchsen (Default) haben gleiche Priorität. Die zweite MIDI-Buchse kann durch Jumper auf dem Board als Ausgang geschaltet werden (für HX3 mk4 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', für HX35 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

Sie können zwei Masterkeyboards, ein Keyboard und ein Basspedal oder einen MIDI-Controller gleichzeitig anschließen. Zum Anschluss eines dritten Eingabegeräts ist ein MIDI Merge Interface erforderlich. HX3 kann in allen für das Orgelspiel relevanten Funktionen über MIDI fernbedient werden.

==Allgemein==

Der MIDI-OUT-Anschluss Ihres MIDI Controllers/Keyboards wird mit einem der beiden HX3 MIDI IN verbunden. HX3 kann die Einstellung eines neu angeschlossenen MIDI-Controllers nicht bestimmen, bevor dessen Bedienelemente erstmalig benutzt werden. Warten Sie, bis HX3 zum Datenempfang bereit ist (Preset/Drawbar-Hauptmenü erscheint im Display). Es ist ratsam, den HX3 vor dem angeschlossenen Masterkeyboard oder Controller in Betrieb zu nehmen.

MIDI CC #7 steuert den analogen Ausgangspegel (Master Volume), MIDI CC #11 die Schwellerstellung. Diese Zuordnungen können, falls erforderlich, im Menü geändert werden. Wenn Sie ein Schwellerpedal benutzen, das direkt an den HX3 angeschlossen ist, werden MIDI-Expression-Einstellungen dadurch überschrieben. Wenn das Schwellerpedal nicht benutzt wird, werden die MIDI-Expression-Befehle wirksam. Jedes gültige MIDI CC Kommando überschreibt die HX3-eigenen analogen Controller und Schalter, bis sie selbst im HX3 verändert werden.

==HX3.4==

Einige MIDI-Controller wie auch Orgel-Keyboards (z.B. Hammond SK und XK-Serien) erlauben 2nd und 3rd Percussion gleichzeitig. Der HX3 betrachtet in diesem Fall die Funktion "2nd ON" als "Percussion ON"-Schalter, da er sich streng an die Bedienweise der B3 hält.

Lesen Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung den Abschnitt 3.2.4 Gruppe Commons zur Auswahl des gewünschten MIDI CC Satzes.

Das Menü-Panel und HX3 Remote ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT ist THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI-Empfang, nur eigene MIDI-Noten-Events auf MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge' (MIDI-Empfang, eigene MIDI-Noten-Events und eingehende MIDI-Events werden gemerged auf MIDI OUT)
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (wie zuvor, aber ohne MIDI CC-Befehle). Beim HX3 Expander ist nur 'ReceiveThru' gültig.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===Von HX3.4 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 Board) sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen (Zugriegel, Schalter) entsprechend der NI B4-Implementierung (unabhängig vom gewählten CC-Set). Ab Firmware 3.82 sendet HX3 keine eigenen MIDI CCs auf MIDI OUT, wenn die '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC) gesetzt ist. MIDI Option = 3 ist jetzt Default auf allen Firmware-Versionen ausgenommen für den HX3 Expander (der MIDI CCs annehmen muss). Diese Änderung ist erfolgt, weil die vom HX gesendeten MIDI CCs einige MIDI-Workstations/Arranger gestört haben. Bitte beachten: Wenn Senden/Empfang von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist (Option = 1 oder 2), sendet HX3 seine eigenen CCs.

===Program Change bei HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 akzeptiert MIDI Program Change-Befehle in einigen MIDI CC-Sets. Im NI B4-Modus, rufen MIDI Program Changes 12...23 auf dem Kanal für das '''obere''' Manual die Presets für das '''untere''' Manual auf, übereinstimmend mit gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft die Voice 0 auf.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 ermöglicht MIDI over USB durch den USB-Port, verbunden mit einem USB-Host, typischerweise einem PC. Die USB-Verbindung ist außerdem geeignet für die Kommunikation des HX3.5 mit dem HX35 Editor, für Firmware-Updates über MIDI SysEx und für DSP-Updates über DFU-Datentransfer. '''Wichtig:''' MIDI IN2 und MIDI IN over USB dürfen nicht simultan genutzt werden.

'''(ab HX3.5)''' Der neue CC-Set-Editor erlaubt eine sehr weitreichende Anpassung an das steuernde Gerät; die von HX3.4 bekannten CC-Sets wurden hierbei übernommen und zum Teil ergänzt. Sie können nach Belieben geändert werden (Ausnahme: NI B4 und Hamichord wegen einiger Besonderheiten bei Vibrato, Percussion und Presets). Wichtig: Der im HX3.5 vorhandene erweiterte Scan-Treiber akzeptiert die MIDI-CCs für das Sustain- und Sostenuto-Pedal. Allerdings benutzen einige Geräte die CCs #64 und #66 für andere Funktionen (NI B4, Hamichord). Wenn in einem CC-Satz die CCs #64 oder #66 verwendet werden, wird die Sustain- und Sostenuto-Funktion in Scan-Treiber (MIDI-Empfang wie auch direkt angeschlossene Keyboards) abgeschaltet, damit der zugeordnete Controller nicht zu "hängenden" Noten führt. Der neue CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (ab Firmware #5.6xx) ist hierbei der umfangreichste CC-Set, er erlaubt eine Fernsteuerung aller relevanten HX3.5-Parameter.

Das Menü-Panel und HX35 Editor ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sendet eigene Keyboard-Daten),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 geroutet auf MIDI OUT und MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 geroutet auf MIDI OUT),
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB geroutet auf MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'Versatile' ähnlich Boehm Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2',
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' für TouchOSC, aber auch für frei konfigurierbare Masterkeyboards nutzbar,
** 'Custom A' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor), ab Werk belegt mit Nord C2D
** 'Custom B' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Weitere CC-Sets sind verfügbar und können einfach auf das HX3.5-Gerät übertragen werden. Zu den unterstützten Instrumenten gehören Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend und mehr.

===Von HX3.5 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.5 sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen entsprechend dem gewählten CC-Set. MIDI IN1, IN2 und MIDI over USB werden immer akzeptiert.

Hinweis für OEM: Unabhängig von der gewählten MIDI Option sendet HX3 immer ein Signal mit 3.3V TTL-Pegel auf PL16 Pin 8 zur Steuerung des Ventilator/Minivent DSP-Boards mit synchronisiertem Stop/Slow/Fast. Pin 34 des Vent DSP-Board ist der MIDI TTL-Eingang. Außerdem Digital Ground (PL16 pin 10) verbinden. Der Ventilator DSP akzeptiert MIDI CC #21 mit den Werten 0 (Stop), 1 (Slow), 2 (Fast) auf Kanal 1.

Mit TouchOSC besteht die Möglichkeit, per Fernsteuerung ein Preset anzulegen; ansonsten ist dafür die Speicherfunktion des Menü-Panels zu verwenden.

===Program Change bei HX3.5===

Generell verarbeitet HX3.5 (ab Firmware 5.3) '''MIDI Program Change-Befehle''' (gültiger Bereich 0 bis 15, bei NI B4 0 bis 23). Die Nummern 0 bis 15 werden nach den MIDI-Kanälen getrennt verarbeitet als "Auswahl der Zugriegel-Voice" für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal, das heißt, sie entsprechen der "inversen" Preset-Tasten , die man von Hammond-Konsolenorgeln kennt. Der Wechsel einer Zugriegel-Voice wirkt sich '''nicht''' auf Schalterstellungen (Perkussion, Vibrato etc) aus. Verwenden Sie dafür die Common Presets.

Allerdings verarbeiten nicht alle HX3.5 MIDI CC Sets die MIDI Program Changes in gleicher Weise: Im NI B4-Modus rufen MIDI Program Changes 12 bis 23 auf dem '''Obermanual'''-Kanal die Voices für das '''Untermanual''' ab, entsprechend gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi, ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft Voice 0 ab. Im Nord C1/C2 CC-Modus sind Program 126/127 die "Live"-Presets (inverse "A#"- und "B"-Tasten) und rufen Voice 0 ab.

===Bank Select bei HX3.5===

HX3.5 verarbeitet '''MIDI Bank Select-Befehle''' als "Overall-Preset-Auswahl" (gültiger Nummernbereich von 0 bis 15 bzw. 0 bis 99 bei FW ab #5.516). Overall Presets enthalten alle Einstellungen von Schaltern und Drehreglern (Volumen, Hall-Stärke etc,) sowie die Zugriegel-Einstellungen. Beachten Sie, dass einige MIDI-Keyboards den MIDI Bank Select-Befehl separat senden, andere senden ihn nur in Verbindung mit MIDI Program Change. In letzerem Fall setzt MIDI Program Change die Zugriegel-Voice.

Frühe HX3.5-Boards schalteten Common Presets mit einem Bank-Select-Befehl (20 hex bzw. 32 dez.) um. Dies führte bei ungewöhnlichen MIDI-Implementierungen des steuernden Keyboards (z.B. Mojo) zu Inkompatibilitäten. Ab Firmware #5.526 kann man den CC-Befehl zum Umschalten der Common Presets mit dem Menü einstellen. Bitte beachten Sie: Common Presets lassen sich '''nicht''' mit MIDI Program Changes umschalten, die sind für obige Zugriegel-Einstellungen reserviert.

'''Bis HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (MSB, CC #00) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 bis #5.515:''' Diese Firmwares enthielten einen Bug, der die Common-Preset-Umschaltung verhinderte.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (LSB, CC #32 dezimal) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch einen im Menü einstellbaren CC-Befehl (Default: #32 dez. = Bank Select LSB) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 stellt einige vorkonfigurierte MIDI CC-Sets und einen komplett anpassbaren Set (zwei Custom CC Sets bei HX3.5) zur Verfügung, wählbar per Menü-Panel, mit HX3 Remote beziehungsweise HX35 Editor. Werkseinstellung ist der '''Native Instruments B4''' Set, den viele MIDI-Controllern beherrschen. Wenn die Ausgabe von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist, sendet HX3 CCs stets nach dem NI B4 Set. HX3 unterstützt '''nicht''' die sonderbaren SysEx-Kodierung von einigen Roland-, Oberheim- und Viscount-Modelle. '''Alle Werte auf Dezimalbasis!'''

Ein umfassender MIDI CC Set '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' ist für die HX3.5-Mainboards verfügbar.

Ab Firmware-Version 5.61x können die CC-Sets mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" vom HX3.5 geholt, geändert und zurückgeschrieben werden. Wegen einiger Besonderheiten sind bei CC-Set "#0 NI B4" und "#7 Hamichord" einige Funktionen fest vorgegeben (beim NI B4 z.B. die Vibrato-Einstellung, bei der ein NI B4 Controller zwei Werte sendet). Bei diesen Sets können einige in der Firmware vorab behandelte CC-Einstellungen nicht geändert werden, alle anderen schon.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

Der '''Doepfer d3c Drawbar Controller''' ist ein robustes Gerät, das uneingeschränkt für für den HX3 Expander empfohlen werden kann. Es unterstützt obendrein Fußschalter und Regler. Der Keyswerk/Böhm db4 ist gleichfalls kompatibel mit dem NI B4 CC Set.

OM-, UM- und Pedal-Zugriegel arbeiten wie gewohnt. Es ist empfehlenswert, diese vor dem Einschalten auf NULL zu stellen, diese Position ist ein bekannter Status für den HX3. Auch die Percussion und Vibrato Schalter arbeiten wie in der d3c-Beschreibung. Dennoch gibt es einen kleinen Lapsus: Die Default Einstellung des HX3-Vibratos ist V1 (aber Upper/Lower Vibrato OFF) während die V1-LED des d3c nach dem Einschalten zunächst nicht leuchtet. Es gibt aber keine "V0"-Vibrato-Einstellung in einer echten Hammond. Wird der V1 Taster gedrückt, ändert sich der Sound nicht, nur die LED leuchtet jetzt.

Der BRIGHTNESS-Knopf ist bei HX3 der TONE-Regler des simulierten AO28-Preamps. HX3 simuliert den Keyclick nicht (er ist einfach da), deshalb gibt es keinen Keyclick-Regler. Der KEY CLICK Knopf steuert stattdessen das Pedalsustain des HX3.

Der d3c-Knopf "HARMONIC CONTENT" sollte nicht benutzt werden; er sendet unsinnigerweise die Controller-Nummer des PERCUSSION-Knopfes.

Die Preset-Buttons des d3c können in eingeschränkter Weise benutzt werden. HX3 verwaltet pro Manual 15 Presets und nicht wie bei der NI B4 127. Wenn BANK 1 angewählt ist, fungieren die 12 Preset-Taster alle für das Obermanual.
Wird die BANK 2 angewählt, fungieren die 12 Preset Taster für das Untermanual. Doepfer d3c sendet bei Bankwechsel die Programmchange-Daten erneut. Also hier wie folgt vorgehen: Zuerst BANK 2 Untermanual-Preset anwählen, dann BANK 1 und das Preset des Obermanuals anwählen. Anmerkung: Die Bank-Schalter senden keine Bank-Select-Daten, sondern addieren nur einen Offset auf das später gedrückte Preset - keine gute Lösung seitens Doepfer.

Das Doepfer Preset 1 entspricht der "LIVE" Einstellung beim HX3. Es wird automatisch gespeichert, wenn auf ein anderes Preset (2 bis 12) gewechselt wird. Kehrt man zum "LIVE"-Preset aus einem anderen Preset zurück, wird die letzte Zugriegeleinstellung wieder hergestellt.

Der NI B4 Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf dem Obermanual-MIDI-Kanal, Bereich 0..11 = Obermanual-Presets und 12..23 = Untermanual-Presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''Ab HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

Der '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (nur ein Zugriegel-Satz, von Böhm für Native Instruments gefertigt) sendet größtenteils die gleichen CCs wie der Doepfer d3c, der wichtigste Unterschied ist allerdings die Belegung der Drawbars: Alle Zugriegel werden jeweils auf CC 12..20 gesendet, aber mit unterschiedlicher Kanal-Kennung. Außerdem sendet es Tab-CCs (Percussion, Vibrato-Drehknopf) mit sehr eigenen Werten. Wir haben das NI B4-Set speziell für diesen Controller angepasst, es kann alternativ zum NI B4-Set für Doepfer d3c (Werkseinstellung) verwendet werden. Für den D4B laden Sie das Set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" hoch:

*Mit "Open CSV Table..." die Datei ''boehm_b4d.csv'' im Verzeichnis ''user'' laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Um wieder zum Doepfer-d3c-Set zurückzukehren, laden Sie mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" das Set ''nib4_send.csv'' hoch:

*Datei mit "Open CSV Table..." laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Der D4B sendet beim Einschalten alle eingestellten MIDI-Werte, es sollte daher erst der HX3.5 und dann der D4B eingeschaltet werden. Beim Pedal gilt die Zugriegel-Reihenfolge 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) für die ersten 5 Zugriegel am D4B. Der Button "Bank" ist etwas missverständlich: Er sendet keinen Bank-Select-Befehl, sondern verschiebt nur die MIDI-Program-Changes ("Preset"-Nummern) nach oben.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 unterstützt die meisten der Hammond XK MIDI-Controller-Nummern. Der einfacheren Bedienung halber sind einige Controller anderen HX3 Funktionen zugeordnet:

* XK Overdrive regelt HX3 TubeAmp Gain
* XK REVERB schaltet HX3 Lower Manual Vibrato ON/OFF
* XK TUBE ON schaltet HX3 REVERB ein/aus

Hammond verwendet NRPN-Controller anstelle von standardgemäßen Controllern. Zugriegel werden unter Verwendung von nur drei CCs über ein seltsames Netzschema kodiert, Details siehe XK-Bedienungsanleitung.

Der Hammond XK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond XK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Die Hammond SK verwendet nicht das seltsame Kodierungsschema des XK, stattdessen standardgemäße CCs mit denselben Nummer wie NI B4 CCs für OM/UM und Bass Pedal 16'/8'. Für andere Bedienelemente wird jedoch ein ähnliche NRPN-Schema verwendet wie bei der XK. Einige NRPNs unterscheiden sich allerdings (siehe Tabelle).

Der Hammond SK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond SK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Versatile-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Er orientiert sich an der Belegung für Böhm Sempra Orgeln.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 
 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Nord C1/C2-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce-Zugriegel===

HX3 in Verbindung mit VOCE MIDI-Zugriegeln zu nutzen ist sehr einfach, da das VOCE Modul nur einen MIDI-Kanal unterstützt (etwa das Obermanual). Bitte beachten Sie, dass das VOCE MIDI DRAWBARS keine Zugriegeldaten sendet, wenn dort nicht der "Drawbar/Save" Taster gedrückt ist (die LED im Taster muss leuchten). Den Voce-Sendekanal für MIDI-Zugriegel können Sie mit dem Drehschalter auf der Rückseite jederzeit auf Untermanual- (2) und Bass-Kanal (3) ändern, was allerdings etwas unbequem ist.

Der Voce CC-Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Der italienische KeyB/Diversi-Controller-Set unterstützt drei MIDI-Kanäle.

Der KeyB Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Der italienische Hamichord/Mojo-Controller Set unterstützt nur den MIDI-Basiskanal. Noten-ON/OFF-Daten auf den Kanälen 2 (UM) und 3 (Pedal) werden allerdings akzeptiert.

Der Hamichord/Mojo CC Set akzeptiert keine Program Change Befehle, weil Hamichord/Mojo beim Preset-Wechsel immer einen "Schnappschuss" aller MIDI CCs sendet.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5, HX3.6)'''

Der HX3/KBP-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Dieser MIDI CC Set wurde speziell für die Nutzung mit der TouchOSC App entwickelt.

'''Bitte beachten Sie''': Zusätzlich zu MIDI-Basiskanal, Basiskanal+1 und Basiskanal+2 verwendet der HX3/KBP Set MIDI-Basiskanal+3 für spezifische TouchOSC-Befehle. Vermeiden Sie es, MIDI-Basiskanal+3 anderen Instrumenten zuweisen.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_KBP_CCset.pdf HX3.6/KBP MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

Ab HX3.4 Firmware #3.6 steht ein "Custom MIDI CC"-Set zur Verfügung, der mittels ''HX3 Remote'' nach Wunsch belegt werden kann (nur HX3.4). Ab Werk ist der Custom MIDI CC-Set für Nord C2 MIDI-Daten (auch kompatibel mit Ocean Beach DB-1) vorbelegt. Auf der Wiki-Seite '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' ist beschrieben, wie Sie einen eigenen CC-Set erstellen und im HX3 speichern können. Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Custom CC-Set Controller-Befehle nur auf dem MIDI-Kanal für das Obermanual empfängt (1 in der Werkseinstellung).

Ab HX3 Fimware 5.61 sind im Prinzip alle CC-Sets änderbar. Mit dieser Firmware sendet HX3 auch die eingestellten CCs. Verwenden Sie zum Editieren den im ''HX3 Manager'' eingebauten CC-Set-Editor.

 

==Zusätzliche Info==

Nur HX3 mk4: Firmware #3.6x und FPGA #20072014 oder neuer stellen einen '''zweiten MIDI-Eingang''' (gemerged mit dem anderen Eingang) zur Verfügung und senden auch MIDI CCs gemäß NI B4 von allen lokalen Bedienelementen (Zugriegel/Taster/Schalter).

HX3 MIDI-Implementierung

2023-06-27T14:41:38Z

Christian: /* #8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set */

==MIDI-Steuerung==

HX3 akzeptiert MIDI-Tasteninformationen NOTE ON / OFF (Default: Kanal 1 für Obermanual, Kanal 2 für Untermanual und Kanal 3 für Pedal; der Basiskanal 1 kann per Menu MIDI CH geändert werden) wie auch verschiedene MIDI CCs in selektierbaren, zu vielen Instrumenten kompatiblen Sets. Fremde SysEx-Daten werden generell ignoriert.
Die beiden MIDI-IN-Buchsen (Default) haben gleiche Priorität. Die zweite MIDI-Buchse kann durch Jumper auf dem Board als Ausgang geschaltet werden (für HX3 mk4 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', für HX35 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

Sie können zwei Masterkeyboards, ein Keyboard und ein Basspedal oder einen MIDI-Controller gleichzeitig anschließen. Zum Anschluss eines dritten Eingabegeräts ist ein MIDI Merge Interface erforderlich. HX3 kann in allen für das Orgelspiel relevanten Funktionen über MIDI fernbedient werden.

==Allgemein==

Der MIDI-OUT-Anschluss Ihres MIDI Controllers/Keyboards wird mit einem der beiden HX3 MIDI IN verbunden. HX3 kann die Einstellung eines neu angeschlossenen MIDI-Controllers nicht bestimmen, bevor dessen Bedienelemente erstmalig benutzt werden. Warten Sie, bis HX3 zum Datenempfang bereit ist (Preset/Drawbar-Hauptmenü erscheint im Display). Es ist ratsam, den HX3 vor dem angeschlossenen Masterkeyboard oder Controller in Betrieb zu nehmen.

MIDI CC #7 steuert den analogen Ausgangspegel (Master Volume), MIDI CC #11 die Schwellerstellung. Diese Zuordnungen können, falls erforderlich, im Menü geändert werden. Wenn Sie ein Schwellerpedal benutzen, das direkt an den HX3 angeschlossen ist, werden MIDI-Expression-Einstellungen dadurch überschrieben. Wenn das Schwellerpedal nicht benutzt wird, werden die MIDI-Expression-Befehle wirksam. Jedes gültige MIDI CC Kommando überschreibt die HX3-eigenen analogen Controller und Schalter, bis sie selbst im HX3 verändert werden.

==HX3.4==

Einige MIDI-Controller wie auch Orgel-Keyboards (z.B. Hammond SK und XK-Serien) erlauben 2nd und 3rd Percussion gleichzeitig. Der HX3 betrachtet in diesem Fall die Funktion "2nd ON" als "Percussion ON"-Schalter, da er sich streng an die Bedienweise der B3 hält.

Lesen Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung den Abschnitt 3.2.4 Gruppe Commons zur Auswahl des gewünschten MIDI CC Satzes.

Das Menü-Panel und HX3 Remote ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT ist THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI-Empfang, nur eigene MIDI-Noten-Events auf MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge' (MIDI-Empfang, eigene MIDI-Noten-Events und eingehende MIDI-Events werden gemerged auf MIDI OUT)
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (wie zuvor, aber ohne MIDI CC-Befehle). Beim HX3 Expander ist nur 'ReceiveThru' gültig.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===Von HX3.4 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 Board) sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen (Zugriegel, Schalter) entsprechend der NI B4-Implementierung (unabhängig vom gewählten CC-Set). Ab Firmware 3.82 sendet HX3 keine eigenen MIDI CCs auf MIDI OUT, wenn die '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC) gesetzt ist. MIDI Option = 3 ist jetzt Default auf allen Firmware-Versionen ausgenommen für den HX3 Expander (der MIDI CCs annehmen muss). Diese Änderung ist erfolgt, weil die vom HX gesendeten MIDI CCs einige MIDI-Workstations/Arranger gestört haben. Bitte beachten: Wenn Senden/Empfang von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist (Option = 1 oder 2), sendet HX3 seine eigenen CCs.

===Program Change bei HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 akzeptiert MIDI Program Change-Befehle in einigen MIDI CC-Sets. Im NI B4-Modus, rufen MIDI Program Changes 12...23 auf dem Kanal für das '''obere''' Manual die Presets für das '''untere''' Manual auf, übereinstimmend mit gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft die Voice 0 auf.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 ermöglicht MIDI over USB durch den USB-Port, verbunden mit einem USB-Host, typischerweise einem PC. Die USB-Verbindung ist außerdem geeignet für die Kommunikation des HX3.5 mit dem HX35 Editor, für Firmware-Updates über MIDI SysEx und für DSP-Updates über DFU-Datentransfer. '''Wichtig:''' MIDI IN2 und MIDI IN over USB dürfen nicht simultan genutzt werden.

'''(ab HX3.5)''' Der neue CC-Set-Editor erlaubt eine sehr weitreichende Anpassung an das steuernde Gerät; die von HX3.4 bekannten CC-Sets wurden hierbei übernommen und zum Teil ergänzt. Sie können nach Belieben geändert werden (Ausnahme: NI B4 und Hamichord wegen einiger Besonderheiten bei Vibrato, Percussion und Presets). Wichtig: Der im HX3.5 vorhandene erweiterte Scan-Treiber akzeptiert die MIDI-CCs für das Sustain- und Sostenuto-Pedal. Allerdings benutzen einige Geräte die CCs #64 und #66 für andere Funktionen (NI B4, Hamichord). Wenn in einem CC-Satz die CCs #64 oder #66 verwendet werden, wird die Sustain- und Sostenuto-Funktion in Scan-Treiber (MIDI-Empfang wie auch direkt angeschlossene Keyboards) abgeschaltet, damit der zugeordnete Controller nicht zu "hängenden" Noten führt. Der neue CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (ab Firmware #5.6xx) ist hierbei der umfangreichste CC-Set, er erlaubt eine Fernsteuerung aller relevanten HX3.5-Parameter.

Das Menü-Panel und HX35 Editor ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sendet eigene Keyboard-Daten),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 geroutet auf MIDI OUT und MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 geroutet auf MIDI OUT),
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB geroutet auf MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'Versatile' ähnlich Boehm Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2',
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' für TouchOSC, aber auch für frei konfigurierbare Masterkeyboards nutzbar,
** 'Custom A' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor), ab Werk belegt mit Nord C2D
** 'Custom B' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Weitere CC-Sets sind verfügbar und können einfach auf das HX3.5-Gerät übertragen werden. Zu den unterstützten Instrumenten gehören Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend und mehr.

===Von HX3.5 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.5 sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen entsprechend dem gewählten CC-Set. MIDI IN1, IN2 und MIDI over USB werden immer akzeptiert.

Hinweis für OEM: Unabhängig von der gewählten MIDI Option sendet HX3 immer ein Signal mit 3.3V TTL-Pegel auf PL16 Pin 8 zur Steuerung des Ventilator/Minivent DSP-Boards mit synchronisiertem Stop/Slow/Fast. Pin 34 des Vent DSP-Board ist der MIDI TTL-Eingang. Außerdem Digital Ground (PL16 pin 10) verbinden. Der Ventilator DSP akzeptiert MIDI CC #21 mit den Werten 0 (Stop), 1 (Slow), 2 (Fast) auf Kanal 1.

Mit TouchOSC besteht die Möglichkeit, per Fernsteuerung ein Preset anzulegen; ansonsten ist dafür die Speicherfunktion des Menü-Panels zu verwenden.

===Program Change bei HX3.5===

Generell verarbeitet HX3.5 (ab Firmware 5.3) '''MIDI Program Change-Befehle''' (gültiger Bereich 0 bis 15, bei NI B4 0 bis 23). Die Nummern 0 bis 15 werden nach den MIDI-Kanälen getrennt verarbeitet als "Auswahl der Zugriegel-Voice" für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal, das heißt, sie entsprechen der "inversen" Preset-Tasten , die man von Hammond-Konsolenorgeln kennt. Der Wechsel einer Zugriegel-Voice wirkt sich '''nicht''' auf Schalterstellungen (Perkussion, Vibrato etc) aus. Verwenden Sie dafür die Common Presets.

Allerdings verarbeiten nicht alle HX3.5 MIDI CC Sets die MIDI Program Changes in gleicher Weise: Im NI B4-Modus rufen MIDI Program Changes 12 bis 23 auf dem '''Obermanual'''-Kanal die Voices für das '''Untermanual''' ab, entsprechend gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi, ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft Voice 0 ab. Im Nord C1/C2 CC-Modus sind Program 126/127 die "Live"-Presets (inverse "A#"- und "B"-Tasten) und rufen Voice 0 ab.

===Bank Select bei HX3.5===

HX3.5 verarbeitet '''MIDI Bank Select-Befehle''' als "Overall-Preset-Auswahl" (gültiger Nummernbereich von 0 bis 15 bzw. 0 bis 99 bei FW ab #5.516). Overall Presets enthalten alle Einstellungen von Schaltern und Drehreglern (Volumen, Hall-Stärke etc,) sowie die Zugriegel-Einstellungen. Beachten Sie, dass einige MIDI-Keyboards den MIDI Bank Select-Befehl separat senden, andere senden ihn nur in Verbindung mit MIDI Program Change. In letzerem Fall setzt MIDI Program Change die Zugriegel-Voice.

Frühe HX3.5-Boards schalteten Common Presets mit einem Bank-Select-Befehl (20 hex bzw. 32 dez.) um. Dies führte bei ungewöhnlichen MIDI-Implementierungen des steuernden Keyboards (z.B. Mojo) zu Inkompatibilitäten. Ab Firmware #5.526 kann man den CC-Befehl zum Umschalten der Common Presets mit dem Menü einstellen. Bitte beachten Sie: Common Presets lassen sich '''nicht''' mit MIDI Program Changes umschalten, die sind für obige Zugriegel-Einstellungen reserviert.

'''Bis HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (MSB, CC #00) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 bis #5.515:''' Diese Firmwares enthielten einen Bug, der die Common-Preset-Umschaltung verhinderte.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (LSB, CC #32 dezimal) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch einen im Menü einstellbaren CC-Befehl (Default: #32 dez. = Bank Select LSB) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 stellt einige vorkonfigurierte MIDI CC-Sets und einen komplett anpassbaren Set (zwei Custom CC Sets bei HX3.5) zur Verfügung, wählbar per Menü-Panel, mit HX3 Remote beziehungsweise HX35 Editor. Werkseinstellung ist der '''Native Instruments B4''' Set, den viele MIDI-Controllern beherrschen. Wenn die Ausgabe von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist, sendet HX3 CCs stets nach dem NI B4 Set. HX3 unterstützt '''nicht''' die sonderbaren SysEx-Kodierung von einigen Roland-, Oberheim- und Viscount-Modelle. '''Alle Werte auf Dezimalbasis!'''

Ein umfassender MIDI CC Set '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' ist für die HX3.5-Mainboards verfügbar.

Ab Firmware-Version 5.61x können die CC-Sets mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" vom HX3.5 geholt, geändert und zurückgeschrieben werden. Wegen einiger Besonderheiten sind bei CC-Set "#0 NI B4" und "#7 Hamichord" einige Funktionen fest vorgegeben (beim NI B4 z.B. die Vibrato-Einstellung, bei der ein NI B4 Controller zwei Werte sendet). Bei diesen Sets können einige in der Firmware vorab behandelte CC-Einstellungen nicht geändert werden, alle anderen schon.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

Der '''Doepfer d3c Drawbar Controller''' ist ein robustes Gerät, das uneingeschränkt für für den HX3 Expander empfohlen werden kann. Es unterstützt obendrein Fußschalter und Regler. Der Keyswerk/Böhm db4 ist gleichfalls kompatibel mit dem NI B4 CC Set.

OM-, UM- und Pedal-Zugriegel arbeiten wie gewohnt. Es ist empfehlenswert, diese vor dem Einschalten auf NULL zu stellen, diese Position ist ein bekannter Status für den HX3. Auch die Percussion und Vibrato Schalter arbeiten wie in der d3c-Beschreibung. Dennoch gibt es einen kleinen Lapsus: Die Default Einstellung des HX3-Vibratos ist V1 (aber Upper/Lower Vibrato OFF) während die V1-LED des d3c nach dem Einschalten zunächst nicht leuchtet. Es gibt aber keine "V0"-Vibrato-Einstellung in einer echten Hammond. Wird der V1 Taster gedrückt, ändert sich der Sound nicht, nur die LED leuchtet jetzt.

Der BRIGHTNESS-Knopf ist bei HX3 der TONE-Regler des simulierten AO28-Preamps. HX3 simuliert den Keyclick nicht (er ist einfach da), deshalb gibt es keinen Keyclick-Regler. Der KEY CLICK Knopf steuert stattdessen das Pedalsustain des HX3.

Der d3c-Knopf "HARMONIC CONTENT" sollte nicht benutzt werden; er sendet unsinnigerweise die Controller-Nummer des PERCUSSION-Knopfes.

Die Preset-Buttons des d3c können in eingeschränkter Weise benutzt werden. HX3 verwaltet pro Manual 15 Presets und nicht wie bei der NI B4 127. Wenn BANK 1 angewählt ist, fungieren die 12 Preset-Taster alle für das Obermanual.
Wird die BANK 2 angewählt, fungieren die 12 Preset Taster für das Untermanual. Doepfer d3c sendet bei Bankwechsel die Programmchange-Daten erneut. Also hier wie folgt vorgehen: Zuerst BANK 2 Untermanual-Preset anwählen, dann BANK 1 und das Preset des Obermanuals anwählen. Anmerkung: Die Bank-Schalter senden keine Bank-Select-Daten, sondern addieren nur einen Offset auf das später gedrückte Preset - keine gute Lösung seitens Doepfer.

Das Doepfer Preset 1 entspricht der "LIVE" Einstellung beim HX3. Es wird automatisch gespeichert, wenn auf ein anderes Preset (2 bis 12) gewechselt wird. Kehrt man zum "LIVE"-Preset aus einem anderen Preset zurück, wird die letzte Zugriegeleinstellung wieder hergestellt.

Der NI B4 Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf dem Obermanual-MIDI-Kanal, Bereich 0..11 = Obermanual-Presets und 12..23 = Untermanual-Presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''Ab HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

Der '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (nur ein Zugriegel-Satz, von Böhm für Native Instruments gefertigt) sendet größtenteils die gleichen CCs wie der Doepfer d3c, der wichtigste Unterschied ist allerdings die Belegung der Drawbars: Alle Zugriegel werden jeweils auf CC 12..20 gesendet, aber mit unterschiedlicher Kanal-Kennung. Außerdem sendet es Tab-CCs (Percussion, Vibrato-Drehknopf) mit sehr eigenen Werten. Wir haben das NI B4-Set speziell für diesen Controller angepasst, es kann alternativ zum NI B4-Set für Doepfer d3c (Werkseinstellung) verwendet werden. Für den D4B laden Sie das Set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" hoch:

*Mit "Open CSV Table..." die Datei ''boehm_b4d.csv'' im Verzeichnis ''user'' laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Um wieder zum Doepfer-d3c-Set zurückzukehren, laden Sie mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" das Set ''nib4_send.csv'' hoch:

*Datei mit "Open CSV Table..." laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Der D4B sendet beim Einschalten alle eingestellten MIDI-Werte, es sollte daher erst der HX3.5 und dann der D4B eingeschaltet werden. Beim Pedal gilt die Zugriegel-Reihenfolge 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) für die ersten 5 Zugriegel am D4B. Der Button "Bank" ist etwas missverständlich: Er sendet keinen Bank-Select-Befehl, sondern verschiebt nur die MIDI-Program-Changes ("Preset"-Nummern) nach oben.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 unterstützt die meisten der Hammond XK MIDI-Controller-Nummern. Der einfacheren Bedienung halber sind einige Controller anderen HX3 Funktionen zugeordnet:

* XK Overdrive regelt HX3 TubeAmp Gain
* XK REVERB schaltet HX3 Lower Manual Vibrato ON/OFF
* XK TUBE ON schaltet HX3 REVERB ein/aus

Hammond verwendet NRPN-Controller anstelle von standardgemäßen Controllern. Zugriegel werden unter Verwendung von nur drei CCs über ein seltsames Netzschema kodiert, Details siehe XK-Bedienungsanleitung.

Der Hammond XK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond XK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Die Hammond SK verwendet nicht das seltsame Kodierungsschema des XK, stattdessen standardgemäße CCs mit denselben Nummer wie NI B4 CCs für OM/UM und Bass Pedal 16'/8'. Für andere Bedienelemente wird jedoch ein ähnliche NRPN-Schema verwendet wie bei der XK. Einige NRPNs unterscheiden sich allerdings (siehe Tabelle).

Der Hammond SK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond SK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Versatile-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Er orientiert sich an der Belegung für Böhm Sempra Orgeln.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 
 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Nord C1/C2-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce-Zugriegel===

HX3 in Verbindung mit VOCE MIDI-Zugriegeln zu nutzen ist sehr einfach, da das VOCE Modul nur einen MIDI-Kanal unterstützt (etwa das Obermanual). Bitte beachten Sie, dass das VOCE MIDI DRAWBARS keine Zugriegeldaten sendet, wenn dort nicht der "Drawbar/Save" Taster gedrückt ist (die LED im Taster muss leuchten). Den Voce-Sendekanal für MIDI-Zugriegel können Sie mit dem Drehschalter auf der Rückseite jederzeit auf Untermanual- (2) und Bass-Kanal (3) ändern, was allerdings etwas unbequem ist.

Der Voce CC-Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Der italienische KeyB/Diversi-Controller-Set unterstützt drei MIDI-Kanäle.

Der KeyB Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Der italienische Hamichord/Mojo-Controller Set unterstützt nur den MIDI-Basiskanal. Noten-ON/OFF-Daten auf den Kanälen 2 (UM) und 3 (Pedal) werden allerdings akzeptiert.

Der Hamichord/Mojo CC Set akzeptiert keine Program Change Befehle, weil Hamichord/Mojo beim Preset-Wechsel immer einen "Schnappschuss" aller MIDI CCs sendet.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5, HX3.6)'''

Der HX3/KBP-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Dieser MIDI CC Set wurde speziell für die Nutzung mit der TouchOSC App entwickelt.

'''Bitte beachten Sie''': Zusätzlich zu MIDI-Basiskanal, Basiskanal+1 und Basiskanal+2 verwendet der HX3/KBP Set MIDI-Basiskanal+3 für spezifische TouchOSC-Befehle. Vermeiden Sie es, MIDI-Basiskanal+3 anderen Instrumenten zuweisen.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_KBP_CCset.pdf HX3.6/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

Ab HX3.4 Firmware #3.6 steht ein "Custom MIDI CC"-Set zur Verfügung, der mittels ''HX3 Remote'' nach Wunsch belegt werden kann (nur HX3.4). Ab Werk ist der Custom MIDI CC-Set für Nord C2 MIDI-Daten (auch kompatibel mit Ocean Beach DB-1) vorbelegt. Auf der Wiki-Seite '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' ist beschrieben, wie Sie einen eigenen CC-Set erstellen und im HX3 speichern können. Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Custom CC-Set Controller-Befehle nur auf dem MIDI-Kanal für das Obermanual empfängt (1 in der Werkseinstellung).

Ab HX3 Fimware 5.61 sind im Prinzip alle CC-Sets änderbar. Mit dieser Firmware sendet HX3 auch die eingestellten CCs. Verwenden Sie zum Editieren den im ''HX3 Manager'' eingebauten CC-Set-Editor.

 

==Zusätzliche Info==

Nur HX3 mk4: Firmware #3.6x und FPGA #20072014 oder neuer stellen einen '''zweiten MIDI-Eingang''' (gemerged mit dem anderen Eingang) zur Verfügung und senden auch MIDI CCs gemäß NI B4 von allen lokalen Bedienelementen (Zugriegel/Taster/Schalter).

Using HX3 with MIDI controllers

2023-06-27T14:40:58Z

Christian: /* #8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set */

==MIDI Control==

HX3 accepts MIDI key on/off events (default: channel 1 to upper manual, 2 to lower manual, channel 3 to bass pedals) as well as various MIDI CCs with selectable compatibility sets. MIDI dynamics slightly affect key click noise. SysEx data other than its own are always ignored. Both MIDI jacks act as MIDI inputs with equal priority (default). The second MIDI jack may be jumpered as MIDI Out. (Details for HX3 mk4 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', for HX35 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

You may connect two MIDI keyboards or controllers at the same time. Connecting a third MIDI device requires a MIDI Merge Interface. All HX3 functions that are relevant for the organ player may be remote-controlled by MIDI commands.

==General==

Connect MIDI Out of your MIDI controller/keyboard to one of the two HX3 MIDI inputs. Since MIDI is a one-way interface, HX3 cannot determine the setting of any MIDI controller value until you touch/use it once. By default all HX3 controllers are OFF. Do not use any controller button or drawbar unless HX3 is ready to accept data (drawbar/preset menu displayed). It is a good idea to power up HX3 before your MIDI master keyboard or master controller.

MIDI CC #7 (default, CC number variable) controls master volume. MIDI CC #11 (default, CC number variable) controls swell pedal/expression if no expression pedal connected to HX3. If you use your HX3-attached swell pedal, any MIDI expression message will be overwritten. If the attached swell pedal is not actuated, MIDI expression messages are accepted.

==HX3.4==

Some MIDI controllers as well as organ keyboards (like Hammond XK and SK series) allow 2nd and 3rd harmonic percussion ON at the same time. In this case HX3 implementation regards "2nd ON" as "Percussion ON" tab.

Refer to section 3.2.4 Group Commons in the user manual to select the desired MIDI CC set. Factory default is Native Instruments B4.

MenuDisplay and HX3 Remote (HX3.4) or HX35 Editor (HX3.5 only) allow setup of MIDI Channel as well as MIDI CC set. Step down to MIDI menu section to alter settings. On the Menu Panel, press encoder knob for 2 seconds to save to power-up defaults.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT is THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI received, only own MIDI key events to MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge'(MIDI received, own MIDI key events and incoming MIDI events merged to MIDI OUT) and
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (as before, but MIDI CC commands discarded). On expander module, only valid setting is 'ReceiveThru'.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===HX3.4 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 board) transmits local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to NI B4 implementation (independently of selected CC set). From firmware 3.82 and up, HX3 will not send own MIDI CCs on MIDI OUT when '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC). MIDI Option = 3 is now default on all firmwares except HX3 Expander (which has to accept MIDI CCs). This change has been made since MIDI CCs sended by HX3 may disturb MIDI workstations/arrangers. Note: If send/receive of MIDI CCs is enabled (Option = 1 or 2), HX3 will transmit its own CCs.

HX3 will transmit swell pedal on CC #11 (0x0B) as well as rotary run/stop on CC #68 (0x44) and fast/stop on CC #01.

===Program Change on HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 will accept MIDI Program Change Commands in some MIDI CC sets. In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice according to common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 supports MIDI over USB through its USB port connected to a USB host, typically a PC. The USB connection is also suitable for controlling HX3.5 by the HX35 Editor application, firmware updates via MIDI SysEx, and DSP updates via DFU data transfer. '''Important:''' MIDI IN2 and MIDI IN over USB must not be used simultaneously.

'''(HX3.5 and later)''' The new CC Set Editor allows a very extensive adaptation to the controlling device; the CC Sets known from HX3.4 have been taken over and partly supplemented. They can be changed at will (exception: NI B4 and Hamichord due to some special features in vibrato, percussion and presets). Important: The extended scan driver available in HX3.5 accepts the MIDI CCs for the sustain and sostenuto pedal. However, some devices use CCs #64 and #66 for other functions (NI B4, Hamichord). When CCs #64 or #66 are used in a CC Set, the Sustain and Sostenuto functions in scan drivers (MIDI receive as well as directly connected keyboards) are disabled, so that the assigned controller does not result in "hanging" notes. The new CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (firmware #5.6xx or higher) is the most comprehensive CC-Set available, it allows remote control of all relevant HX3.5 parameters.

The menu panel and HX35 Editor allow you to set the MIDI channel and select the MIDI CC set. In the menu, press and hold the knob for two seconds to save the setting as the start default value.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sends own keyboard data),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 routed to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 routed to MIDI OUT) and
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB routed to MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'Versatile' Boehm, Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2'
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' for TouchOSC, but can also be used for freely configurable master keyboards,
** 'Custom A' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor) ex factory occupied by Nord C2D CC set,
** 'Custom B' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Further CC sets are available and can easily transfered to the HX3.5. Supported instruments include Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend and more.

===HX3.5 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.5 is transmitting local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to selected CC set. MIDI IN1, IN2 and MIDI over USB are always accepted.

For OEM only: Independent from MIDI option selected, HX3 will always send a 3.3V TTL level MIDI signal on PL16 pin 8 for controlling Ventilator/Minivent DSP board with synced stop/slow/fast. Pin 34 of Vent DSP board is MIDI TTL input. Also wire digital ground (PL16 pin 10). Ventilator DSP accepts MIDI CC #21 values 0 (stop), 1 (slow), 2 (fast) on channel 1.

With TouchOSC it is possible to create a preset by remote control; otherwise the memory function of the menu panel must be used.

===Program Change on HX3.5===

In general, HX3.5 (firmware 5.3 and up) will handle '''MIDI Program Change Commands''' (valid numbers range from 0 to 15). Numbers will be handled as "Set Drawbar Voice" for upper, lower and pedal MIDI channel separately, i.e. it resembles the "inverse" preset keys found on Hammond console organs. Drawbar Voice changes will not affect Tab settings (Percussion, Vibrato etc) in any way. Use the Common Presets for this.

However, not all HX3.5 MIDI CC sets are handling MIDI program changes in the same way: In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice complying with common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0. In Nord C1/C2 CC mode, program 126/127 are "live" presets (inverse "A#" and "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

===Bank Select on HX3.5===

HX3.5 will handle '''MIDI Bank Select Commands''' as "Set Overall Preset" (valid numbers range from 0 to 15 or 0 to 99 from FW #5.516 on) per default. Overall Presets include all Tab settings and additional pots (volume, reverb amount etc) as well as the drawbar settings. Note that some MIDI keyboards will send a MIDI Bank Select command separately, others will issue a MIDI Bank Select only with a MIDI Program Change. In the latter case, the issued MIDI Program Change command will override the voice setting.

Early HX3.5 boards switched Common Presets with a bank select command (20 hex or 32 dec.). This caused incompatibilities with unusual MIDI implementations of the controlling keyboard (e.g. Mojo). Starting with firmware #5.526, the CC command for switching the Common Presets can be set using the menu. Please note: Common Presets '''cannot''' be switched using MIDI Program Changes, which are reserved for the above Drawbar settings.

'''Up to HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 are selected in all CC Sets by Bank Select messages (MSB, CC #00), with all three channels valid.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 to #5.515:''' These firmwares contained a bug that prevented Common Preset switching.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by bank select commands (LSB, CC #32 decimal), where all three channels are valid.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by a CC command (default: #32 dec. = Bank Select LSB) that can be set in the menu, where all three channels are valid.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 provides several pre-configured MIDI CC sets plus one fully customizable set (two custom CC sets on HX3.5), selectable by MenuPanel, by HX3 Remote or HX35 Editor application, respectively. Factory default is the '''Native Instruments B4''' set, supported by many MIDI controllers. If MIDI CC output is enabled, HX3.4 will '''send''' CCs always according to NI B4 set. HX3 does '''not''' support weird SysEx encodings found on some Roland, Oberheim and Viscount models. '''All values based decimal!'''

A very comprehensive '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' MIDI CC set is available on HX3.5 mainboards.

Starting with firmware version 5.61x, the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window can be used to fetch, modify and write back CC sets from the HX3.5. Due to some special features, some functions are fixed for CC Set "#0 NI B4" and "#7 Hamichord" (e.g. the vibrato setting for the NI B4, where a NI B4 controller sends two values). With these sets, some CC settings previously handled in the firmware cannot be changed, all others can.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

The Doepfer d3c drawbar controller is a very nice and rugged piece of gear, so we recommend it for use with our HX3 board. It does support foot controllers and foot switches. The Keyswerk/Böhm db4 is also compatible with NI B4 CC set.

Upper, lower and bass drawbars work as usual. It is a good idea to set all to zero before switching on as this is a “known state” for HX3. Also the Percussion and Vibrato buttons work as described in d3c manual. There is a small drawback, anyway: Default HX3 Vibrato setting is V1 (but upper/lower vibrato OFF), while the V1 LED will not light up when powering up the d3c (there is no “V0” on a real Hammond!). So pressing the V1 button will not change the sound – just turn its LED on.

The BRIGHTNESS knob controls AO28 tone parameter of the HX3. There is no key click simulated by HX3 (it is just there), so there is no key click adjustment button. The KEY CLICK knob controls the bass sustain instead.

Do not use the HARMONIC CONTENT knob as it sends the PERCUSSION button’s controller number like a continuous controller. What for? No idea. This is definitely of no use.

Preset buttons may be used, but in a restricted way. First, HX3 has 15 presets per manual, not 127 like NI B4. When selecting BANK 1, all 12 available preset buttons work on upper manual. When selecting BANK 2, all 12 preset buttons work on lower manual. Doepfer d3c resends the program change message when changing the bank, which may be annoying. Therefore, proceeds as follows: Choose bank 2, lower preset first, then bank 1, upper preset. BTW: Bank buttons do not send bank select messages, they just add an offset to the preset buttons. Blame Doepfer for that.

Doepfer d3c preset 1 is the HX3 “Live” (preset 0) position. It will be saved temporarily (until HX3 is switched off) when a preset sound (2 to 12) is selected. If you return to preset 1 “Live”, your last drawbar/button setting will be recalled. Please note: HX3 tracks drawbar and button changes even when in preset position 2 to 12, so it keeps itself updated all the time.

NI B4 set accepts program changes for upper manual MIDI channel, range 0..11 = upper presets and 12..23 = lower presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''From HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

The '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (only one drawbar set, made by Böhm for Native Instruments) sends mostly the same CCs as the Doepfer d3c, but the most important difference is the assignment of the drawbars: All Drawbars are sent on CC 12..20, but with different channel identifiers. It also sends tab CCs (percussion, vibrato knob) with very own values. We have adapted the NI B4 set especially for this controller, it can be used alternatively to the NI B4 set for Doepfer d3c (factory setting). For the D4B, upload the set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' using the HX3.5 Editor window "MIDI CC Editor":

*Use "Open CSV Table..." to load the file ''boehm_b4d.csv'' in the ''user'' directory
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

To return to the Doepfer d3c set, upload the ''nib4_send.csv'' set using the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window:

*Load file with "Open CSV Table...
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

The D4B sends all set MIDI values when powered on, so you should first power up HX3.5 and then the D4B. For the pedal, the Drawbar sequence 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) applies to the first 5 Drawbars on the D4B. The "Bank" button is a little ambiguous: it does not send a bank select message, but only moves the MIDI program changes ("preset" numbers) up.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 supports most of Hammond XK MIDI controller functions. For convenience, some controllers have been relocated to other HX3 functions:

* XK Overdrive knob controls HX3 Rotary Tube Amp Volume
* XK Reverb button controls HX3 lower manual Vibrato On
* XK Tube On button controls HX3 Reverb

Hammond uses NRPN controllers instead of standard controllers. Drawbars are encoded through a weird grid scheme using only 3 CC#s, see XK manual for details.

Hammond XK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond XK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Hammond SK does not use the weird drawbar encoding scheme of the XK, instead standard CCs whith same numbers as NI B4 CCs for upper/lower manual and bass pedal 16'/8'. For other controllers, knobs and buttons, the SK uses a similar NRPN scheme as found on XK. Some NRPNs differ, though (see table).

The Hammond SK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond SK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Versatile set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Nord C1/C2 set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce Drawbars===

Using your HX3 board with Voce MIDI Drawbars is straightforward, as the Voce module sends on one MIDI channel only (i.e. upper manual). Please note that Voce MIDI Drawbars does not send drawbar data unless you press the “Drawbar/Save” button, so that its LED lights up. You may change the Voce MIDI Drawbars send channel (back rotary HEX switch) at any time to lower (2) and bass channel (3), although this is somewhat inconvenient. In case of your technician has installed a toggle switch on the back side, channels can be changed easily.

Voce CC set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Italian KeyB/Diversi controller set supports three MIDI channels.

KeyB set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Italian Hamichord/Mojo controller set supports only base MIDI channel. Key ON/OFF data of channel 2 (lower) and 3 (pedals) will be accepted, though.

Hamichord/Mojo CC set will not accept Program Change messages since Hamichord/Mojo always sends a "snapshot" of all MIDI CCs when changing a preset.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5 and HX3.6)'''

HX3/KBP set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal. This MIDI CC set has been designed for use with the TouchOSC app.

'''Please note''': In addition to MIDI base channel, base channel+1, and base channel+2, the HX3/KBP set uses base channel+3 for specific TouchOSC commands. Avoid assigning base channel+3 to other instruments.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_KBP_CCset.pdf HX3.6/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

HX3.4 FW #3.6x and up provides a "custom MIDI CC" set, which may be altered to your needs by using ''HX3 Remote'' application (HX3.4 only). By factory default, it is set to accept Nord C2 MIDI data (also compatible with Ocean Beach DB-1 controller). See wiki page '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' on how to create a custom CC set and store it to HX3. Please note that currently the custom MIDI CC set only accepts controller commands on upper manual MIDI channel (1 on factory default).

 

From HX3 Fimware 5.61 on, in principle all CC Sets can be changed. With this firmware HX3 also sends the set CCs. For editing, use the built-in CC Set Editor in the ''HX3 Manager''.

 

==Additional Info==

HX3 mk4 only: Firmware #3.6x and FPGA #20072014 or newer provide a '''secondary MIDI input''' (merged with other) and also send MIDI CCs according to NI B4 from all local controllers (drawbars/buttons/switches).

Using HX3 with MIDI controllers

2023-06-27T14:24:52Z

Christian: /* #9, #10 MIDI Custom CC */

==MIDI Control==

HX3 accepts MIDI key on/off events (default: channel 1 to upper manual, 2 to lower manual, channel 3 to bass pedals) as well as various MIDI CCs with selectable compatibility sets. MIDI dynamics slightly affect key click noise. SysEx data other than its own are always ignored. Both MIDI jacks act as MIDI inputs with equal priority (default). The second MIDI jack may be jumpered as MIDI Out. (Details for HX3 mk4 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', for HX35 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

You may connect two MIDI keyboards or controllers at the same time. Connecting a third MIDI device requires a MIDI Merge Interface. All HX3 functions that are relevant for the organ player may be remote-controlled by MIDI commands.

==General==

Connect MIDI Out of your MIDI controller/keyboard to one of the two HX3 MIDI inputs. Since MIDI is a one-way interface, HX3 cannot determine the setting of any MIDI controller value until you touch/use it once. By default all HX3 controllers are OFF. Do not use any controller button or drawbar unless HX3 is ready to accept data (drawbar/preset menu displayed). It is a good idea to power up HX3 before your MIDI master keyboard or master controller.

MIDI CC #7 (default, CC number variable) controls master volume. MIDI CC #11 (default, CC number variable) controls swell pedal/expression if no expression pedal connected to HX3. If you use your HX3-attached swell pedal, any MIDI expression message will be overwritten. If the attached swell pedal is not actuated, MIDI expression messages are accepted.

==HX3.4==

Some MIDI controllers as well as organ keyboards (like Hammond XK and SK series) allow 2nd and 3rd harmonic percussion ON at the same time. In this case HX3 implementation regards "2nd ON" as "Percussion ON" tab.

Refer to section 3.2.4 Group Commons in the user manual to select the desired MIDI CC set. Factory default is Native Instruments B4.

MenuDisplay and HX3 Remote (HX3.4) or HX35 Editor (HX3.5 only) allow setup of MIDI Channel as well as MIDI CC set. Step down to MIDI menu section to alter settings. On the Menu Panel, press encoder knob for 2 seconds to save to power-up defaults.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT is THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI received, only own MIDI key events to MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge'(MIDI received, own MIDI key events and incoming MIDI events merged to MIDI OUT) and
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (as before, but MIDI CC commands discarded). On expander module, only valid setting is 'ReceiveThru'.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===HX3.4 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 board) transmits local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to NI B4 implementation (independently of selected CC set). From firmware 3.82 and up, HX3 will not send own MIDI CCs on MIDI OUT when '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC). MIDI Option = 3 is now default on all firmwares except HX3 Expander (which has to accept MIDI CCs). This change has been made since MIDI CCs sended by HX3 may disturb MIDI workstations/arrangers. Note: If send/receive of MIDI CCs is enabled (Option = 1 or 2), HX3 will transmit its own CCs.

HX3 will transmit swell pedal on CC #11 (0x0B) as well as rotary run/stop on CC #68 (0x44) and fast/stop on CC #01.

===Program Change on HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 will accept MIDI Program Change Commands in some MIDI CC sets. In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice according to common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 supports MIDI over USB through its USB port connected to a USB host, typically a PC. The USB connection is also suitable for controlling HX3.5 by the HX35 Editor application, firmware updates via MIDI SysEx, and DSP updates via DFU data transfer. '''Important:''' MIDI IN2 and MIDI IN over USB must not be used simultaneously.

'''(HX3.5 and later)''' The new CC Set Editor allows a very extensive adaptation to the controlling device; the CC Sets known from HX3.4 have been taken over and partly supplemented. They can be changed at will (exception: NI B4 and Hamichord due to some special features in vibrato, percussion and presets). Important: The extended scan driver available in HX3.5 accepts the MIDI CCs for the sustain and sostenuto pedal. However, some devices use CCs #64 and #66 for other functions (NI B4, Hamichord). When CCs #64 or #66 are used in a CC Set, the Sustain and Sostenuto functions in scan drivers (MIDI receive as well as directly connected keyboards) are disabled, so that the assigned controller does not result in "hanging" notes. The new CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (firmware #5.6xx or higher) is the most comprehensive CC-Set available, it allows remote control of all relevant HX3.5 parameters.

The menu panel and HX35 Editor allow you to set the MIDI channel and select the MIDI CC set. In the menu, press and hold the knob for two seconds to save the setting as the start default value.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sends own keyboard data),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 routed to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 routed to MIDI OUT) and
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB routed to MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'Versatile' Boehm, Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2'
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' for TouchOSC, but can also be used for freely configurable master keyboards,
** 'Custom A' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor) ex factory occupied by Nord C2D CC set,
** 'Custom B' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Further CC sets are available and can easily transfered to the HX3.5. Supported instruments include Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend and more.

===HX3.5 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.5 is transmitting local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to selected CC set. MIDI IN1, IN2 and MIDI over USB are always accepted.

For OEM only: Independent from MIDI option selected, HX3 will always send a 3.3V TTL level MIDI signal on PL16 pin 8 for controlling Ventilator/Minivent DSP board with synced stop/slow/fast. Pin 34 of Vent DSP board is MIDI TTL input. Also wire digital ground (PL16 pin 10). Ventilator DSP accepts MIDI CC #21 values 0 (stop), 1 (slow), 2 (fast) on channel 1.

With TouchOSC it is possible to create a preset by remote control; otherwise the memory function of the menu panel must be used.

===Program Change on HX3.5===

In general, HX3.5 (firmware 5.3 and up) will handle '''MIDI Program Change Commands''' (valid numbers range from 0 to 15). Numbers will be handled as "Set Drawbar Voice" for upper, lower and pedal MIDI channel separately, i.e. it resembles the "inverse" preset keys found on Hammond console organs. Drawbar Voice changes will not affect Tab settings (Percussion, Vibrato etc) in any way. Use the Common Presets for this.

However, not all HX3.5 MIDI CC sets are handling MIDI program changes in the same way: In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice complying with common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0. In Nord C1/C2 CC mode, program 126/127 are "live" presets (inverse "A#" and "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

===Bank Select on HX3.5===

HX3.5 will handle '''MIDI Bank Select Commands''' as "Set Overall Preset" (valid numbers range from 0 to 15 or 0 to 99 from FW #5.516 on) per default. Overall Presets include all Tab settings and additional pots (volume, reverb amount etc) as well as the drawbar settings. Note that some MIDI keyboards will send a MIDI Bank Select command separately, others will issue a MIDI Bank Select only with a MIDI Program Change. In the latter case, the issued MIDI Program Change command will override the voice setting.

Early HX3.5 boards switched Common Presets with a bank select command (20 hex or 32 dec.). This caused incompatibilities with unusual MIDI implementations of the controlling keyboard (e.g. Mojo). Starting with firmware #5.526, the CC command for switching the Common Presets can be set using the menu. Please note: Common Presets '''cannot''' be switched using MIDI Program Changes, which are reserved for the above Drawbar settings.

'''Up to HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 are selected in all CC Sets by Bank Select messages (MSB, CC #00), with all three channels valid.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 to #5.515:''' These firmwares contained a bug that prevented Common Preset switching.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by bank select commands (LSB, CC #32 decimal), where all three channels are valid.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by a CC command (default: #32 dec. = Bank Select LSB) that can be set in the menu, where all three channels are valid.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 provides several pre-configured MIDI CC sets plus one fully customizable set (two custom CC sets on HX3.5), selectable by MenuPanel, by HX3 Remote or HX35 Editor application, respectively. Factory default is the '''Native Instruments B4''' set, supported by many MIDI controllers. If MIDI CC output is enabled, HX3.4 will '''send''' CCs always according to NI B4 set. HX3 does '''not''' support weird SysEx encodings found on some Roland, Oberheim and Viscount models. '''All values based decimal!'''

A very comprehensive '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' MIDI CC set is available on HX3.5 mainboards.

Starting with firmware version 5.61x, the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window can be used to fetch, modify and write back CC sets from the HX3.5. Due to some special features, some functions are fixed for CC Set "#0 NI B4" and "#7 Hamichord" (e.g. the vibrato setting for the NI B4, where a NI B4 controller sends two values). With these sets, some CC settings previously handled in the firmware cannot be changed, all others can.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

The Doepfer d3c drawbar controller is a very nice and rugged piece of gear, so we recommend it for use with our HX3 board. It does support foot controllers and foot switches. The Keyswerk/Böhm db4 is also compatible with NI B4 CC set.

Upper, lower and bass drawbars work as usual. It is a good idea to set all to zero before switching on as this is a “known state” for HX3. Also the Percussion and Vibrato buttons work as described in d3c manual. There is a small drawback, anyway: Default HX3 Vibrato setting is V1 (but upper/lower vibrato OFF), while the V1 LED will not light up when powering up the d3c (there is no “V0” on a real Hammond!). So pressing the V1 button will not change the sound – just turn its LED on.

The BRIGHTNESS knob controls AO28 tone parameter of the HX3. There is no key click simulated by HX3 (it is just there), so there is no key click adjustment button. The KEY CLICK knob controls the bass sustain instead.

Do not use the HARMONIC CONTENT knob as it sends the PERCUSSION button’s controller number like a continuous controller. What for? No idea. This is definitely of no use.

Preset buttons may be used, but in a restricted way. First, HX3 has 15 presets per manual, not 127 like NI B4. When selecting BANK 1, all 12 available preset buttons work on upper manual. When selecting BANK 2, all 12 preset buttons work on lower manual. Doepfer d3c resends the program change message when changing the bank, which may be annoying. Therefore, proceeds as follows: Choose bank 2, lower preset first, then bank 1, upper preset. BTW: Bank buttons do not send bank select messages, they just add an offset to the preset buttons. Blame Doepfer for that.

Doepfer d3c preset 1 is the HX3 “Live” (preset 0) position. It will be saved temporarily (until HX3 is switched off) when a preset sound (2 to 12) is selected. If you return to preset 1 “Live”, your last drawbar/button setting will be recalled. Please note: HX3 tracks drawbar and button changes even when in preset position 2 to 12, so it keeps itself updated all the time.

NI B4 set accepts program changes for upper manual MIDI channel, range 0..11 = upper presets and 12..23 = lower presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''From HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

The '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (only one drawbar set, made by Böhm for Native Instruments) sends mostly the same CCs as the Doepfer d3c, but the most important difference is the assignment of the drawbars: All Drawbars are sent on CC 12..20, but with different channel identifiers. It also sends tab CCs (percussion, vibrato knob) with very own values. We have adapted the NI B4 set especially for this controller, it can be used alternatively to the NI B4 set for Doepfer d3c (factory setting). For the D4B, upload the set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' using the HX3.5 Editor window "MIDI CC Editor":

*Use "Open CSV Table..." to load the file ''boehm_b4d.csv'' in the ''user'' directory
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

To return to the Doepfer d3c set, upload the ''nib4_send.csv'' set using the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window:

*Load file with "Open CSV Table...
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

The D4B sends all set MIDI values when powered on, so you should first power up HX3.5 and then the D4B. For the pedal, the Drawbar sequence 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) applies to the first 5 Drawbars on the D4B. The "Bank" button is a little ambiguous: it does not send a bank select message, but only moves the MIDI program changes ("preset" numbers) up.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 supports most of Hammond XK MIDI controller functions. For convenience, some controllers have been relocated to other HX3 functions:

* XK Overdrive knob controls HX3 Rotary Tube Amp Volume
* XK Reverb button controls HX3 lower manual Vibrato On
* XK Tube On button controls HX3 Reverb

Hammond uses NRPN controllers instead of standard controllers. Drawbars are encoded through a weird grid scheme using only 3 CC#s, see XK manual for details.

Hammond XK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond XK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Hammond SK does not use the weird drawbar encoding scheme of the XK, instead standard CCs whith same numbers as NI B4 CCs for upper/lower manual and bass pedal 16'/8'. For other controllers, knobs and buttons, the SK uses a similar NRPN scheme as found on XK. Some NRPNs differ, though (see table).

The Hammond SK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond SK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Versatile set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Nord C1/C2 set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce Drawbars===

Using your HX3 board with Voce MIDI Drawbars is straightforward, as the Voce module sends on one MIDI channel only (i.e. upper manual). Please note that Voce MIDI Drawbars does not send drawbar data unless you press the “Drawbar/Save” button, so that its LED lights up. You may change the Voce MIDI Drawbars send channel (back rotary HEX switch) at any time to lower (2) and bass channel (3), although this is somewhat inconvenient. In case of your technician has installed a toggle switch on the back side, channels can be changed easily.

Voce CC set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Italian KeyB/Diversi controller set supports three MIDI channels.

KeyB set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Italian Hamichord/Mojo controller set supports only base MIDI channel. Key ON/OFF data of channel 2 (lower) and 3 (pedals) will be accepted, though.

Hamichord/Mojo CC set will not accept Program Change messages since Hamichord/Mojo always sends a "snapshot" of all MIDI CCs when changing a preset.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5 and HX3.6)'''

HX3/KBP set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal. This MIDI CC set has been designed for use with the TouchOSC app.

'''Please note''': In addition to MIDI base channel, base channel+1, and base channel+2, the HX3/KBP set uses base channel+3 for specific TouchOSC commands. Avoid assigning base channel+3 to other instruments.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

HX3.4 FW #3.6x and up provides a "custom MIDI CC" set, which may be altered to your needs by using ''HX3 Remote'' application (HX3.4 only). By factory default, it is set to accept Nord C2 MIDI data (also compatible with Ocean Beach DB-1 controller). See wiki page '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' on how to create a custom CC set and store it to HX3. Please note that currently the custom MIDI CC set only accepts controller commands on upper manual MIDI channel (1 on factory default).

 

From HX3 Fimware 5.61 on, in principle all CC Sets can be changed. With this firmware HX3 also sends the set CCs. For editing, use the built-in CC Set Editor in the ''HX3 Manager''.

 

==Additional Info==

HX3 mk4 only: Firmware #3.6x and FPGA #20072014 or newer provide a '''secondary MIDI input''' (merged with other) and also send MIDI CCs according to NI B4 from all local controllers (drawbars/buttons/switches).

HX3 MIDI-Implementierung

2023-06-27T14:24:39Z

Christian: /* #9, #10 MIDI Custom CC */

==MIDI-Steuerung==

HX3 akzeptiert MIDI-Tasteninformationen NOTE ON / OFF (Default: Kanal 1 für Obermanual, Kanal 2 für Untermanual und Kanal 3 für Pedal; der Basiskanal 1 kann per Menu MIDI CH geändert werden) wie auch verschiedene MIDI CCs in selektierbaren, zu vielen Instrumenten kompatiblen Sets. Fremde SysEx-Daten werden generell ignoriert.
Die beiden MIDI-IN-Buchsen (Default) haben gleiche Priorität. Die zweite MIDI-Buchse kann durch Jumper auf dem Board als Ausgang geschaltet werden (für HX3 mk4 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', für HX35 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

Sie können zwei Masterkeyboards, ein Keyboard und ein Basspedal oder einen MIDI-Controller gleichzeitig anschließen. Zum Anschluss eines dritten Eingabegeräts ist ein MIDI Merge Interface erforderlich. HX3 kann in allen für das Orgelspiel relevanten Funktionen über MIDI fernbedient werden.

==Allgemein==

Der MIDI-OUT-Anschluss Ihres MIDI Controllers/Keyboards wird mit einem der beiden HX3 MIDI IN verbunden. HX3 kann die Einstellung eines neu angeschlossenen MIDI-Controllers nicht bestimmen, bevor dessen Bedienelemente erstmalig benutzt werden. Warten Sie, bis HX3 zum Datenempfang bereit ist (Preset/Drawbar-Hauptmenü erscheint im Display). Es ist ratsam, den HX3 vor dem angeschlossenen Masterkeyboard oder Controller in Betrieb zu nehmen.

MIDI CC #7 steuert den analogen Ausgangspegel (Master Volume), MIDI CC #11 die Schwellerstellung. Diese Zuordnungen können, falls erforderlich, im Menü geändert werden. Wenn Sie ein Schwellerpedal benutzen, das direkt an den HX3 angeschlossen ist, werden MIDI-Expression-Einstellungen dadurch überschrieben. Wenn das Schwellerpedal nicht benutzt wird, werden die MIDI-Expression-Befehle wirksam. Jedes gültige MIDI CC Kommando überschreibt die HX3-eigenen analogen Controller und Schalter, bis sie selbst im HX3 verändert werden.

==HX3.4==

Einige MIDI-Controller wie auch Orgel-Keyboards (z.B. Hammond SK und XK-Serien) erlauben 2nd und 3rd Percussion gleichzeitig. Der HX3 betrachtet in diesem Fall die Funktion "2nd ON" als "Percussion ON"-Schalter, da er sich streng an die Bedienweise der B3 hält.

Lesen Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung den Abschnitt 3.2.4 Gruppe Commons zur Auswahl des gewünschten MIDI CC Satzes.

Das Menü-Panel und HX3 Remote ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT ist THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI-Empfang, nur eigene MIDI-Noten-Events auf MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge' (MIDI-Empfang, eigene MIDI-Noten-Events und eingehende MIDI-Events werden gemerged auf MIDI OUT)
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (wie zuvor, aber ohne MIDI CC-Befehle). Beim HX3 Expander ist nur 'ReceiveThru' gültig.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===Von HX3.4 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 Board) sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen (Zugriegel, Schalter) entsprechend der NI B4-Implementierung (unabhängig vom gewählten CC-Set). Ab Firmware 3.82 sendet HX3 keine eigenen MIDI CCs auf MIDI OUT, wenn die '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC) gesetzt ist. MIDI Option = 3 ist jetzt Default auf allen Firmware-Versionen ausgenommen für den HX3 Expander (der MIDI CCs annehmen muss). Diese Änderung ist erfolgt, weil die vom HX gesendeten MIDI CCs einige MIDI-Workstations/Arranger gestört haben. Bitte beachten: Wenn Senden/Empfang von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist (Option = 1 oder 2), sendet HX3 seine eigenen CCs.

===Program Change bei HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 akzeptiert MIDI Program Change-Befehle in einigen MIDI CC-Sets. Im NI B4-Modus, rufen MIDI Program Changes 12...23 auf dem Kanal für das '''obere''' Manual die Presets für das '''untere''' Manual auf, übereinstimmend mit gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft die Voice 0 auf.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 ermöglicht MIDI over USB durch den USB-Port, verbunden mit einem USB-Host, typischerweise einem PC. Die USB-Verbindung ist außerdem geeignet für die Kommunikation des HX3.5 mit dem HX35 Editor, für Firmware-Updates über MIDI SysEx und für DSP-Updates über DFU-Datentransfer. '''Wichtig:''' MIDI IN2 und MIDI IN over USB dürfen nicht simultan genutzt werden.

'''(ab HX3.5)''' Der neue CC-Set-Editor erlaubt eine sehr weitreichende Anpassung an das steuernde Gerät; die von HX3.4 bekannten CC-Sets wurden hierbei übernommen und zum Teil ergänzt. Sie können nach Belieben geändert werden (Ausnahme: NI B4 und Hamichord wegen einiger Besonderheiten bei Vibrato, Percussion und Presets). Wichtig: Der im HX3.5 vorhandene erweiterte Scan-Treiber akzeptiert die MIDI-CCs für das Sustain- und Sostenuto-Pedal. Allerdings benutzen einige Geräte die CCs #64 und #66 für andere Funktionen (NI B4, Hamichord). Wenn in einem CC-Satz die CCs #64 oder #66 verwendet werden, wird die Sustain- und Sostenuto-Funktion in Scan-Treiber (MIDI-Empfang wie auch direkt angeschlossene Keyboards) abgeschaltet, damit der zugeordnete Controller nicht zu "hängenden" Noten führt. Der neue CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (ab Firmware #5.6xx) ist hierbei der umfangreichste CC-Set, er erlaubt eine Fernsteuerung aller relevanten HX3.5-Parameter.

Das Menü-Panel und HX35 Editor ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sendet eigene Keyboard-Daten),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 geroutet auf MIDI OUT und MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 geroutet auf MIDI OUT),
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB geroutet auf MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'Versatile' ähnlich Boehm Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2',
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' für TouchOSC, aber auch für frei konfigurierbare Masterkeyboards nutzbar,
** 'Custom A' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor), ab Werk belegt mit Nord C2D
** 'Custom B' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Weitere CC-Sets sind verfügbar und können einfach auf das HX3.5-Gerät übertragen werden. Zu den unterstützten Instrumenten gehören Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend und mehr.

===Von HX3.5 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.5 sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen entsprechend dem gewählten CC-Set. MIDI IN1, IN2 und MIDI over USB werden immer akzeptiert.

Hinweis für OEM: Unabhängig von der gewählten MIDI Option sendet HX3 immer ein Signal mit 3.3V TTL-Pegel auf PL16 Pin 8 zur Steuerung des Ventilator/Minivent DSP-Boards mit synchronisiertem Stop/Slow/Fast. Pin 34 des Vent DSP-Board ist der MIDI TTL-Eingang. Außerdem Digital Ground (PL16 pin 10) verbinden. Der Ventilator DSP akzeptiert MIDI CC #21 mit den Werten 0 (Stop), 1 (Slow), 2 (Fast) auf Kanal 1.

Mit TouchOSC besteht die Möglichkeit, per Fernsteuerung ein Preset anzulegen; ansonsten ist dafür die Speicherfunktion des Menü-Panels zu verwenden.

===Program Change bei HX3.5===

Generell verarbeitet HX3.5 (ab Firmware 5.3) '''MIDI Program Change-Befehle''' (gültiger Bereich 0 bis 15, bei NI B4 0 bis 23). Die Nummern 0 bis 15 werden nach den MIDI-Kanälen getrennt verarbeitet als "Auswahl der Zugriegel-Voice" für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal, das heißt, sie entsprechen der "inversen" Preset-Tasten , die man von Hammond-Konsolenorgeln kennt. Der Wechsel einer Zugriegel-Voice wirkt sich '''nicht''' auf Schalterstellungen (Perkussion, Vibrato etc) aus. Verwenden Sie dafür die Common Presets.

Allerdings verarbeiten nicht alle HX3.5 MIDI CC Sets die MIDI Program Changes in gleicher Weise: Im NI B4-Modus rufen MIDI Program Changes 12 bis 23 auf dem '''Obermanual'''-Kanal die Voices für das '''Untermanual''' ab, entsprechend gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi, ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft Voice 0 ab. Im Nord C1/C2 CC-Modus sind Program 126/127 die "Live"-Presets (inverse "A#"- und "B"-Tasten) und rufen Voice 0 ab.

===Bank Select bei HX3.5===

HX3.5 verarbeitet '''MIDI Bank Select-Befehle''' als "Overall-Preset-Auswahl" (gültiger Nummernbereich von 0 bis 15 bzw. 0 bis 99 bei FW ab #5.516). Overall Presets enthalten alle Einstellungen von Schaltern und Drehreglern (Volumen, Hall-Stärke etc,) sowie die Zugriegel-Einstellungen. Beachten Sie, dass einige MIDI-Keyboards den MIDI Bank Select-Befehl separat senden, andere senden ihn nur in Verbindung mit MIDI Program Change. In letzerem Fall setzt MIDI Program Change die Zugriegel-Voice.

Frühe HX3.5-Boards schalteten Common Presets mit einem Bank-Select-Befehl (20 hex bzw. 32 dez.) um. Dies führte bei ungewöhnlichen MIDI-Implementierungen des steuernden Keyboards (z.B. Mojo) zu Inkompatibilitäten. Ab Firmware #5.526 kann man den CC-Befehl zum Umschalten der Common Presets mit dem Menü einstellen. Bitte beachten Sie: Common Presets lassen sich '''nicht''' mit MIDI Program Changes umschalten, die sind für obige Zugriegel-Einstellungen reserviert.

'''Bis HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (MSB, CC #00) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 bis #5.515:''' Diese Firmwares enthielten einen Bug, der die Common-Preset-Umschaltung verhinderte.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (LSB, CC #32 dezimal) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch einen im Menü einstellbaren CC-Befehl (Default: #32 dez. = Bank Select LSB) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 stellt einige vorkonfigurierte MIDI CC-Sets und einen komplett anpassbaren Set (zwei Custom CC Sets bei HX3.5) zur Verfügung, wählbar per Menü-Panel, mit HX3 Remote beziehungsweise HX35 Editor. Werkseinstellung ist der '''Native Instruments B4''' Set, den viele MIDI-Controllern beherrschen. Wenn die Ausgabe von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist, sendet HX3 CCs stets nach dem NI B4 Set. HX3 unterstützt '''nicht''' die sonderbaren SysEx-Kodierung von einigen Roland-, Oberheim- und Viscount-Modelle. '''Alle Werte auf Dezimalbasis!'''

Ein umfassender MIDI CC Set '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' ist für die HX3.5-Mainboards verfügbar.

Ab Firmware-Version 5.61x können die CC-Sets mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" vom HX3.5 geholt, geändert und zurückgeschrieben werden. Wegen einiger Besonderheiten sind bei CC-Set "#0 NI B4" und "#7 Hamichord" einige Funktionen fest vorgegeben (beim NI B4 z.B. die Vibrato-Einstellung, bei der ein NI B4 Controller zwei Werte sendet). Bei diesen Sets können einige in der Firmware vorab behandelte CC-Einstellungen nicht geändert werden, alle anderen schon.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

Der '''Doepfer d3c Drawbar Controller''' ist ein robustes Gerät, das uneingeschränkt für für den HX3 Expander empfohlen werden kann. Es unterstützt obendrein Fußschalter und Regler. Der Keyswerk/Böhm db4 ist gleichfalls kompatibel mit dem NI B4 CC Set.

OM-, UM- und Pedal-Zugriegel arbeiten wie gewohnt. Es ist empfehlenswert, diese vor dem Einschalten auf NULL zu stellen, diese Position ist ein bekannter Status für den HX3. Auch die Percussion und Vibrato Schalter arbeiten wie in der d3c-Beschreibung. Dennoch gibt es einen kleinen Lapsus: Die Default Einstellung des HX3-Vibratos ist V1 (aber Upper/Lower Vibrato OFF) während die V1-LED des d3c nach dem Einschalten zunächst nicht leuchtet. Es gibt aber keine "V0"-Vibrato-Einstellung in einer echten Hammond. Wird der V1 Taster gedrückt, ändert sich der Sound nicht, nur die LED leuchtet jetzt.

Der BRIGHTNESS-Knopf ist bei HX3 der TONE-Regler des simulierten AO28-Preamps. HX3 simuliert den Keyclick nicht (er ist einfach da), deshalb gibt es keinen Keyclick-Regler. Der KEY CLICK Knopf steuert stattdessen das Pedalsustain des HX3.

Der d3c-Knopf "HARMONIC CONTENT" sollte nicht benutzt werden; er sendet unsinnigerweise die Controller-Nummer des PERCUSSION-Knopfes.

Die Preset-Buttons des d3c können in eingeschränkter Weise benutzt werden. HX3 verwaltet pro Manual 15 Presets und nicht wie bei der NI B4 127. Wenn BANK 1 angewählt ist, fungieren die 12 Preset-Taster alle für das Obermanual.
Wird die BANK 2 angewählt, fungieren die 12 Preset Taster für das Untermanual. Doepfer d3c sendet bei Bankwechsel die Programmchange-Daten erneut. Also hier wie folgt vorgehen: Zuerst BANK 2 Untermanual-Preset anwählen, dann BANK 1 und das Preset des Obermanuals anwählen. Anmerkung: Die Bank-Schalter senden keine Bank-Select-Daten, sondern addieren nur einen Offset auf das später gedrückte Preset - keine gute Lösung seitens Doepfer.

Das Doepfer Preset 1 entspricht der "LIVE" Einstellung beim HX3. Es wird automatisch gespeichert, wenn auf ein anderes Preset (2 bis 12) gewechselt wird. Kehrt man zum "LIVE"-Preset aus einem anderen Preset zurück, wird die letzte Zugriegeleinstellung wieder hergestellt.

Der NI B4 Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf dem Obermanual-MIDI-Kanal, Bereich 0..11 = Obermanual-Presets und 12..23 = Untermanual-Presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''Ab HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

Der '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (nur ein Zugriegel-Satz, von Böhm für Native Instruments gefertigt) sendet größtenteils die gleichen CCs wie der Doepfer d3c, der wichtigste Unterschied ist allerdings die Belegung der Drawbars: Alle Zugriegel werden jeweils auf CC 12..20 gesendet, aber mit unterschiedlicher Kanal-Kennung. Außerdem sendet es Tab-CCs (Percussion, Vibrato-Drehknopf) mit sehr eigenen Werten. Wir haben das NI B4-Set speziell für diesen Controller angepasst, es kann alternativ zum NI B4-Set für Doepfer d3c (Werkseinstellung) verwendet werden. Für den D4B laden Sie das Set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" hoch:

*Mit "Open CSV Table..." die Datei ''boehm_b4d.csv'' im Verzeichnis ''user'' laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Um wieder zum Doepfer-d3c-Set zurückzukehren, laden Sie mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" das Set ''nib4_send.csv'' hoch:

*Datei mit "Open CSV Table..." laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Der D4B sendet beim Einschalten alle eingestellten MIDI-Werte, es sollte daher erst der HX3.5 und dann der D4B eingeschaltet werden. Beim Pedal gilt die Zugriegel-Reihenfolge 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) für die ersten 5 Zugriegel am D4B. Der Button "Bank" ist etwas missverständlich: Er sendet keinen Bank-Select-Befehl, sondern verschiebt nur die MIDI-Program-Changes ("Preset"-Nummern) nach oben.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 unterstützt die meisten der Hammond XK MIDI-Controller-Nummern. Der einfacheren Bedienung halber sind einige Controller anderen HX3 Funktionen zugeordnet:

* XK Overdrive regelt HX3 TubeAmp Gain
* XK REVERB schaltet HX3 Lower Manual Vibrato ON/OFF
* XK TUBE ON schaltet HX3 REVERB ein/aus

Hammond verwendet NRPN-Controller anstelle von standardgemäßen Controllern. Zugriegel werden unter Verwendung von nur drei CCs über ein seltsames Netzschema kodiert, Details siehe XK-Bedienungsanleitung.

Der Hammond XK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond XK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Die Hammond SK verwendet nicht das seltsame Kodierungsschema des XK, stattdessen standardgemäße CCs mit denselben Nummer wie NI B4 CCs für OM/UM und Bass Pedal 16'/8'. Für andere Bedienelemente wird jedoch ein ähnliche NRPN-Schema verwendet wie bei der XK. Einige NRPNs unterscheiden sich allerdings (siehe Tabelle).

Der Hammond SK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond SK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Versatile-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Er orientiert sich an der Belegung für Böhm Sempra Orgeln.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 
 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Nord C1/C2-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce-Zugriegel===

HX3 in Verbindung mit VOCE MIDI-Zugriegeln zu nutzen ist sehr einfach, da das VOCE Modul nur einen MIDI-Kanal unterstützt (etwa das Obermanual). Bitte beachten Sie, dass das VOCE MIDI DRAWBARS keine Zugriegeldaten sendet, wenn dort nicht der "Drawbar/Save" Taster gedrückt ist (die LED im Taster muss leuchten). Den Voce-Sendekanal für MIDI-Zugriegel können Sie mit dem Drehschalter auf der Rückseite jederzeit auf Untermanual- (2) und Bass-Kanal (3) ändern, was allerdings etwas unbequem ist.

Der Voce CC-Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Der italienische KeyB/Diversi-Controller-Set unterstützt drei MIDI-Kanäle.

Der KeyB Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Der italienische Hamichord/Mojo-Controller Set unterstützt nur den MIDI-Basiskanal. Noten-ON/OFF-Daten auf den Kanälen 2 (UM) und 3 (Pedal) werden allerdings akzeptiert.

Der Hamichord/Mojo CC Set akzeptiert keine Program Change Befehle, weil Hamichord/Mojo beim Preset-Wechsel immer einen "Schnappschuss" aller MIDI CCs sendet.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5, HX3.6)'''

Der HX3/KBP-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Dieser MIDI CC Set wurde speziell für die Nutzung mit der TouchOSC App entwickelt.

'''Bitte beachten Sie''': Zusätzlich zu MIDI-Basiskanal, Basiskanal+1 und Basiskanal+2 verwendet der HX3/KBP Set MIDI-Basiskanal+3 für spezifische TouchOSC-Befehle. Vermeiden Sie es, MIDI-Basiskanal+3 anderen Instrumenten zuweisen.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

Ab HX3.4 Firmware #3.6 steht ein "Custom MIDI CC"-Set zur Verfügung, der mittels ''HX3 Remote'' nach Wunsch belegt werden kann (nur HX3.4). Ab Werk ist der Custom MIDI CC-Set für Nord C2 MIDI-Daten (auch kompatibel mit Ocean Beach DB-1) vorbelegt. Auf der Wiki-Seite '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' ist beschrieben, wie Sie einen eigenen CC-Set erstellen und im HX3 speichern können. Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Custom CC-Set Controller-Befehle nur auf dem MIDI-Kanal für das Obermanual empfängt (1 in der Werkseinstellung).

Ab HX3 Fimware 5.61 sind im Prinzip alle CC-Sets änderbar. Mit dieser Firmware sendet HX3 auch die eingestellten CCs. Verwenden Sie zum Editieren den im ''HX3 Manager'' eingebauten CC-Set-Editor.

 

==Zusätzliche Info==

Nur HX3 mk4: Firmware #3.6x und FPGA #20072014 oder neuer stellen einen '''zweiten MIDI-Eingang''' (gemerged mit dem anderen Eingang) zur Verfügung und senden auch MIDI CCs gemäß NI B4 von allen lokalen Bedienelementen (Zugriegel/Taster/Schalter).

HX3 MIDI-Implementierung

2023-06-27T14:23:52Z

Christian: /* #8 HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set */

==MIDI-Steuerung==

HX3 akzeptiert MIDI-Tasteninformationen NOTE ON / OFF (Default: Kanal 1 für Obermanual, Kanal 2 für Untermanual und Kanal 3 für Pedal; der Basiskanal 1 kann per Menu MIDI CH geändert werden) wie auch verschiedene MIDI CCs in selektierbaren, zu vielen Instrumenten kompatiblen Sets. Fremde SysEx-Daten werden generell ignoriert.
Die beiden MIDI-IN-Buchsen (Default) haben gleiche Priorität. Die zweite MIDI-Buchse kann durch Jumper auf dem Board als Ausgang geschaltet werden (für HX3 mk4 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', für HX35 siehe '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

Sie können zwei Masterkeyboards, ein Keyboard und ein Basspedal oder einen MIDI-Controller gleichzeitig anschließen. Zum Anschluss eines dritten Eingabegeräts ist ein MIDI Merge Interface erforderlich. HX3 kann in allen für das Orgelspiel relevanten Funktionen über MIDI fernbedient werden.

==Allgemein==

Der MIDI-OUT-Anschluss Ihres MIDI Controllers/Keyboards wird mit einem der beiden HX3 MIDI IN verbunden. HX3 kann die Einstellung eines neu angeschlossenen MIDI-Controllers nicht bestimmen, bevor dessen Bedienelemente erstmalig benutzt werden. Warten Sie, bis HX3 zum Datenempfang bereit ist (Preset/Drawbar-Hauptmenü erscheint im Display). Es ist ratsam, den HX3 vor dem angeschlossenen Masterkeyboard oder Controller in Betrieb zu nehmen.

MIDI CC #7 steuert den analogen Ausgangspegel (Master Volume), MIDI CC #11 die Schwellerstellung. Diese Zuordnungen können, falls erforderlich, im Menü geändert werden. Wenn Sie ein Schwellerpedal benutzen, das direkt an den HX3 angeschlossen ist, werden MIDI-Expression-Einstellungen dadurch überschrieben. Wenn das Schwellerpedal nicht benutzt wird, werden die MIDI-Expression-Befehle wirksam. Jedes gültige MIDI CC Kommando überschreibt die HX3-eigenen analogen Controller und Schalter, bis sie selbst im HX3 verändert werden.

==HX3.4==

Einige MIDI-Controller wie auch Orgel-Keyboards (z.B. Hammond SK und XK-Serien) erlauben 2nd und 3rd Percussion gleichzeitig. Der HX3 betrachtet in diesem Fall die Funktion "2nd ON" als "Percussion ON"-Schalter, da er sich streng an die Bedienweise der B3 hält.

Lesen Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung den Abschnitt 3.2.4 Gruppe Commons zur Auswahl des gewünschten MIDI CC Satzes.

Das Menü-Panel und HX3 Remote ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT ist THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI-Empfang, nur eigene MIDI-Noten-Events auf MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge' (MIDI-Empfang, eigene MIDI-Noten-Events und eingehende MIDI-Events werden gemerged auf MIDI OUT)
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (wie zuvor, aber ohne MIDI CC-Befehle). Beim HX3 Expander ist nur 'ReceiveThru' gültig.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===Von HX3.4 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 Board) sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen (Zugriegel, Schalter) entsprechend der NI B4-Implementierung (unabhängig vom gewählten CC-Set). Ab Firmware 3.82 sendet HX3 keine eigenen MIDI CCs auf MIDI OUT, wenn die '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC) gesetzt ist. MIDI Option = 3 ist jetzt Default auf allen Firmware-Versionen ausgenommen für den HX3 Expander (der MIDI CCs annehmen muss). Diese Änderung ist erfolgt, weil die vom HX gesendeten MIDI CCs einige MIDI-Workstations/Arranger gestört haben. Bitte beachten: Wenn Senden/Empfang von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist (Option = 1 oder 2), sendet HX3 seine eigenen CCs.

===Program Change bei HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 akzeptiert MIDI Program Change-Befehle in einigen MIDI CC-Sets. Im NI B4-Modus, rufen MIDI Program Changes 12...23 auf dem Kanal für das '''obere''' Manual die Presets für das '''untere''' Manual auf, übereinstimmend mit gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft die Voice 0 auf.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 ermöglicht MIDI over USB durch den USB-Port, verbunden mit einem USB-Host, typischerweise einem PC. Die USB-Verbindung ist außerdem geeignet für die Kommunikation des HX3.5 mit dem HX35 Editor, für Firmware-Updates über MIDI SysEx und für DSP-Updates über DFU-Datentransfer. '''Wichtig:''' MIDI IN2 und MIDI IN over USB dürfen nicht simultan genutzt werden.

'''(ab HX3.5)''' Der neue CC-Set-Editor erlaubt eine sehr weitreichende Anpassung an das steuernde Gerät; die von HX3.4 bekannten CC-Sets wurden hierbei übernommen und zum Teil ergänzt. Sie können nach Belieben geändert werden (Ausnahme: NI B4 und Hamichord wegen einiger Besonderheiten bei Vibrato, Percussion und Presets). Wichtig: Der im HX3.5 vorhandene erweiterte Scan-Treiber akzeptiert die MIDI-CCs für das Sustain- und Sostenuto-Pedal. Allerdings benutzen einige Geräte die CCs #64 und #66 für andere Funktionen (NI B4, Hamichord). Wenn in einem CC-Satz die CCs #64 oder #66 verwendet werden, wird die Sustain- und Sostenuto-Funktion in Scan-Treiber (MIDI-Empfang wie auch direkt angeschlossene Keyboards) abgeschaltet, damit der zugeordnete Controller nicht zu "hängenden" Noten führt. Der neue CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (ab Firmware #5.6xx) ist hierbei der umfangreichste CC-Set, er erlaubt eine Fernsteuerung aller relevanten HX3.5-Parameter.

Das Menü-Panel und HX35 Editor ermöglichen die Einstellung des MIDI-Kanals und die Auswahl des MIDI CC-Sets. Im Menü halten Sie den Drehknopf zwei Sekunden gedrückt, um die Einstellung als Start-Defaultwert zu sichern.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - stellt MIDI-Basiskanal für Senden/Empfang von 1 bis 10 ein (Obermanual, Untermanual ist +1, Pedal +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - stellt MIDI-Routingverhalten ein auf
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sendet eigene Keyboard-Daten),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 geroutet auf MIDI OUT und MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 geroutet auf MIDI OUT),
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB geroutet auf MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - stellt den akzeptierten MIDI CC-Set ein auf
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (Default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Bitte beachten: Hammond hat den MIDI CC-Set zwischen der XK- und SK-Serie getauscht, bitte ausprobieren, welcher passt),
** 'Versatile' ähnlich Boehm Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2',
** 'Voce' MIDI Zugriegel,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (oder 'Mojo', dieselbe Hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' für TouchOSC, aber auch für frei konfigurierbare Masterkeyboards nutzbar,
** 'Custom A' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor), ab Werk belegt mit Nord C2D
** 'Custom B' (einrichten und benennen mit HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Weitere CC-Sets sind verfügbar und können einfach auf das HX3.5-Gerät übertragen werden. Zu den unterstützten Instrumenten gehören Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend und mehr.

===Von HX3.5 generierte MIDI-Events===

HX3.5 sendet lokale Noten-ON/OFF-Events auf dem MIDI-Basiskanal (Obermanual), dem Basiskanal +1 (Untermanual) und dem Basiskanal +2 (Pedal). Es sendet MIDI CCs von Bedienelementen entsprechend dem gewählten CC-Set. MIDI IN1, IN2 und MIDI over USB werden immer akzeptiert.

Hinweis für OEM: Unabhängig von der gewählten MIDI Option sendet HX3 immer ein Signal mit 3.3V TTL-Pegel auf PL16 Pin 8 zur Steuerung des Ventilator/Minivent DSP-Boards mit synchronisiertem Stop/Slow/Fast. Pin 34 des Vent DSP-Board ist der MIDI TTL-Eingang. Außerdem Digital Ground (PL16 pin 10) verbinden. Der Ventilator DSP akzeptiert MIDI CC #21 mit den Werten 0 (Stop), 1 (Slow), 2 (Fast) auf Kanal 1.

Mit TouchOSC besteht die Möglichkeit, per Fernsteuerung ein Preset anzulegen; ansonsten ist dafür die Speicherfunktion des Menü-Panels zu verwenden.

===Program Change bei HX3.5===

Generell verarbeitet HX3.5 (ab Firmware 5.3) '''MIDI Program Change-Befehle''' (gültiger Bereich 0 bis 15, bei NI B4 0 bis 23). Die Nummern 0 bis 15 werden nach den MIDI-Kanälen getrennt verarbeitet als "Auswahl der Zugriegel-Voice" für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal, das heißt, sie entsprechen der "inversen" Preset-Tasten , die man von Hammond-Konsolenorgeln kennt. Der Wechsel einer Zugriegel-Voice wirkt sich '''nicht''' auf Schalterstellungen (Perkussion, Vibrato etc) aus. Verwenden Sie dafür die Common Presets.

Allerdings verarbeiten nicht alle HX3.5 MIDI CC Sets die MIDI Program Changes in gleicher Weise: Im NI B4-Modus rufen MIDI Program Changes 12 bis 23 auf dem '''Obermanual'''-Kanal die Voices für das '''Untermanual''' ab, entsprechend gebräuchlichen NI B4-Hardware-Controllern. In den Hammond CC-Modi, ist Program 11 das "Live"-Preset (inverse "B"-Taste) und ruft Voice 0 ab. Im Nord C1/C2 CC-Modus sind Program 126/127 die "Live"-Presets (inverse "A#"- und "B"-Tasten) und rufen Voice 0 ab.

===Bank Select bei HX3.5===

HX3.5 verarbeitet '''MIDI Bank Select-Befehle''' als "Overall-Preset-Auswahl" (gültiger Nummernbereich von 0 bis 15 bzw. 0 bis 99 bei FW ab #5.516). Overall Presets enthalten alle Einstellungen von Schaltern und Drehreglern (Volumen, Hall-Stärke etc,) sowie die Zugriegel-Einstellungen. Beachten Sie, dass einige MIDI-Keyboards den MIDI Bank Select-Befehl separat senden, andere senden ihn nur in Verbindung mit MIDI Program Change. In letzerem Fall setzt MIDI Program Change die Zugriegel-Voice.

Frühe HX3.5-Boards schalteten Common Presets mit einem Bank-Select-Befehl (20 hex bzw. 32 dez.) um. Dies führte bei ungewöhnlichen MIDI-Implementierungen des steuernden Keyboards (z.B. Mojo) zu Inkompatibilitäten. Ab Firmware #5.526 kann man den CC-Befehl zum Umschalten der Common Presets mit dem Menü einstellen. Bitte beachten Sie: Common Presets lassen sich '''nicht''' mit MIDI Program Changes umschalten, die sind für obige Zugriegel-Einstellungen reserviert.

'''Bis HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (MSB, CC #00) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 bis #5.515:''' Diese Firmwares enthielten einen Bug, der die Common-Preset-Umschaltung verhinderte.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch Bank-Select-Befehle (LSB, CC #32 dezimal) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

'''Ab HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 werden in allen CC-Sets durch einen im Menü einstellbaren CC-Befehl (Default: #32 dez. = Bank Select LSB) ausgewählt, wobei alle drei Kanäle gültig sind.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 stellt einige vorkonfigurierte MIDI CC-Sets und einen komplett anpassbaren Set (zwei Custom CC Sets bei HX3.5) zur Verfügung, wählbar per Menü-Panel, mit HX3 Remote beziehungsweise HX35 Editor. Werkseinstellung ist der '''Native Instruments B4''' Set, den viele MIDI-Controllern beherrschen. Wenn die Ausgabe von MIDI CCs eingeschaltet ist, sendet HX3 CCs stets nach dem NI B4 Set. HX3 unterstützt '''nicht''' die sonderbaren SysEx-Kodierung von einigen Roland-, Oberheim- und Viscount-Modelle. '''Alle Werte auf Dezimalbasis!'''

Ein umfassender MIDI CC Set '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' ist für die HX3.5-Mainboards verfügbar.

Ab Firmware-Version 5.61x können die CC-Sets mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" vom HX3.5 geholt, geändert und zurückgeschrieben werden. Wegen einiger Besonderheiten sind bei CC-Set "#0 NI B4" und "#7 Hamichord" einige Funktionen fest vorgegeben (beim NI B4 z.B. die Vibrato-Einstellung, bei der ein NI B4 Controller zwei Werte sendet). Bei diesen Sets können einige in der Firmware vorab behandelte CC-Einstellungen nicht geändert werden, alle anderen schon.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

Der '''Doepfer d3c Drawbar Controller''' ist ein robustes Gerät, das uneingeschränkt für für den HX3 Expander empfohlen werden kann. Es unterstützt obendrein Fußschalter und Regler. Der Keyswerk/Böhm db4 ist gleichfalls kompatibel mit dem NI B4 CC Set.

OM-, UM- und Pedal-Zugriegel arbeiten wie gewohnt. Es ist empfehlenswert, diese vor dem Einschalten auf NULL zu stellen, diese Position ist ein bekannter Status für den HX3. Auch die Percussion und Vibrato Schalter arbeiten wie in der d3c-Beschreibung. Dennoch gibt es einen kleinen Lapsus: Die Default Einstellung des HX3-Vibratos ist V1 (aber Upper/Lower Vibrato OFF) während die V1-LED des d3c nach dem Einschalten zunächst nicht leuchtet. Es gibt aber keine "V0"-Vibrato-Einstellung in einer echten Hammond. Wird der V1 Taster gedrückt, ändert sich der Sound nicht, nur die LED leuchtet jetzt.

Der BRIGHTNESS-Knopf ist bei HX3 der TONE-Regler des simulierten AO28-Preamps. HX3 simuliert den Keyclick nicht (er ist einfach da), deshalb gibt es keinen Keyclick-Regler. Der KEY CLICK Knopf steuert stattdessen das Pedalsustain des HX3.

Der d3c-Knopf "HARMONIC CONTENT" sollte nicht benutzt werden; er sendet unsinnigerweise die Controller-Nummer des PERCUSSION-Knopfes.

Die Preset-Buttons des d3c können in eingeschränkter Weise benutzt werden. HX3 verwaltet pro Manual 15 Presets und nicht wie bei der NI B4 127. Wenn BANK 1 angewählt ist, fungieren die 12 Preset-Taster alle für das Obermanual.
Wird die BANK 2 angewählt, fungieren die 12 Preset Taster für das Untermanual. Doepfer d3c sendet bei Bankwechsel die Programmchange-Daten erneut. Also hier wie folgt vorgehen: Zuerst BANK 2 Untermanual-Preset anwählen, dann BANK 1 und das Preset des Obermanuals anwählen. Anmerkung: Die Bank-Schalter senden keine Bank-Select-Daten, sondern addieren nur einen Offset auf das später gedrückte Preset - keine gute Lösung seitens Doepfer.

Das Doepfer Preset 1 entspricht der "LIVE" Einstellung beim HX3. Es wird automatisch gespeichert, wenn auf ein anderes Preset (2 bis 12) gewechselt wird. Kehrt man zum "LIVE"-Preset aus einem anderen Preset zurück, wird die letzte Zugriegeleinstellung wieder hergestellt.

Der NI B4 Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf dem Obermanual-MIDI-Kanal, Bereich 0..11 = Obermanual-Presets und 12..23 = Untermanual-Presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''Ab HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

Der '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (nur ein Zugriegel-Satz, von Böhm für Native Instruments gefertigt) sendet größtenteils die gleichen CCs wie der Doepfer d3c, der wichtigste Unterschied ist allerdings die Belegung der Drawbars: Alle Zugriegel werden jeweils auf CC 12..20 gesendet, aber mit unterschiedlicher Kanal-Kennung. Außerdem sendet es Tab-CCs (Percussion, Vibrato-Drehknopf) mit sehr eigenen Werten. Wir haben das NI B4-Set speziell für diesen Controller angepasst, es kann alternativ zum NI B4-Set für Doepfer d3c (Werkseinstellung) verwendet werden. Für den D4B laden Sie das Set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" hoch:

*Mit "Open CSV Table..." die Datei ''boehm_b4d.csv'' im Verzeichnis ''user'' laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Um wieder zum Doepfer-d3c-Set zurückzukehren, laden Sie mit dem HX3.5 Editor-Fenster "MIDI CC Editor" das Set ''nib4_send.csv'' hoch:

*Datei mit "Open CSV Table..." laden
*Mit "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" an HX3.5 senden.

Der D4B sendet beim Einschalten alle eingestellten MIDI-Werte, es sollte daher erst der HX3.5 und dann der D4B eingeschaltet werden. Beim Pedal gilt die Zugriegel-Reihenfolge 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) für die ersten 5 Zugriegel am D4B. Der Button "Bank" ist etwas missverständlich: Er sendet keinen Bank-Select-Befehl, sondern verschiebt nur die MIDI-Program-Changes ("Preset"-Nummern) nach oben.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 unterstützt die meisten der Hammond XK MIDI-Controller-Nummern. Der einfacheren Bedienung halber sind einige Controller anderen HX3 Funktionen zugeordnet:

* XK Overdrive regelt HX3 TubeAmp Gain
* XK REVERB schaltet HX3 Lower Manual Vibrato ON/OFF
* XK TUBE ON schaltet HX3 REVERB ein/aus

Hammond verwendet NRPN-Controller anstelle von standardgemäßen Controllern. Zugriegel werden unter Verwendung von nur drei CCs über ein seltsames Netzschema kodiert, Details siehe XK-Bedienungsanleitung.

Der Hammond XK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond XK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Die Hammond SK verwendet nicht das seltsame Kodierungsschema des XK, stattdessen standardgemäße CCs mit denselben Nummer wie NI B4 CCs für OM/UM und Bass Pedal 16'/8'. Für andere Bedienelemente wird jedoch ein ähnliche NRPN-Schema verwendet wie bei der XK. Einige NRPNs unterscheiden sich allerdings (siehe Tabelle).

Der Hammond SK Set akzeptiert Program Changes auf den MIDI-Kanälen für Obermanual und Untermanual, Bereich 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 wird konvertiert auf HX3 Preset 0 (Live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Die Hammond SK NRPN Kodierung ist wie folgt (NRPN dargestellt als hexadezimale Werte): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Versatile-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Er orientiert sich an der Belegung für Böhm Sempra Orgeln.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 
 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5)'''

Der Nord C1/C2-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce-Zugriegel===

HX3 in Verbindung mit VOCE MIDI-Zugriegeln zu nutzen ist sehr einfach, da das VOCE Modul nur einen MIDI-Kanal unterstützt (etwa das Obermanual). Bitte beachten Sie, dass das VOCE MIDI DRAWBARS keine Zugriegeldaten sendet, wenn dort nicht der "Drawbar/Save" Taster gedrückt ist (die LED im Taster muss leuchten). Den Voce-Sendekanal für MIDI-Zugriegel können Sie mit dem Drehschalter auf der Rückseite jederzeit auf Untermanual- (2) und Bass-Kanal (3) ändern, was allerdings etwas unbequem ist.

Der Voce CC-Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Der italienische KeyB/Diversi-Controller-Set unterstützt drei MIDI-Kanäle.

Der KeyB Set akzeptiert Program Changes für Obermanual, Untermanual und Pedal auf separaten MIDI-Kanälen, Bereich 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Der italienische Hamichord/Mojo-Controller Set unterstützt nur den MIDI-Basiskanal. Noten-ON/OFF-Daten auf den Kanälen 2 (UM) und 3 (Pedal) werden allerdings akzeptiert.

Der Hamichord/Mojo CC Set akzeptiert keine Program Change Befehle, weil Hamichord/Mojo beim Preset-Wechsel immer einen "Schnappschuss" aller MIDI CCs sendet.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Nur für HX3.5, HX3.6)'''

Der HX3/KBP-Set unterstützt MIDI-Kanäle für Obermanual, Untermanual und Basspedal. Dieser MIDI CC Set wurde speziell für die Nutzung mit der TouchOSC App entwickelt.

'''Bitte beachten Sie''': Zusätzlich zu MIDI-Basiskanal, Basiskanal+1 und Basiskanal+2 verwendet der HX3/KBP Set MIDI-Basiskanal+3 für spezifische TouchOSC-Befehle. Vermeiden Sie es, MIDI-Basiskanal+3 anderen Instrumenten zuweisen.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set Dokumentation, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

Ab HX3.4 Firmware #3.6 steht ein "Custom MIDI CC"-Set zur Verfügung, der mittels ''HX3 Remote'' nach Wunsch belegt werden kann (nur HX3.4). Ab Werk ist der Custom MIDI CC-Set für Nord C2 MIDI-Daten (auch kompatibel mit Ocean Beach DB-1) vorbelegt. Auf der Wiki-Seite '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' ist beschrieben, wie Sie einen eigenen CC-Set erstellen und im HX3 speichern können. Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Custom CC-Set Controller-Befehle nur auf dem MIDI-Kanal für das Obermanual empfängt (1 in der Werkseinstellung).

Ab HX3.5 Fimware 5.61 sind im Prinzip alle CC-Sets änderbar. Mit dieser Firmware sendet HX3.5 auch die eingestellten CCs. Verwenden Sie zum Editieren den im ''HX3.5 Editor'' eingebauten CC-Set-Editor . Eine Einschränkung betrifft die CC-Sets für Hammond, die mit ungewöhnlicher Zuordnung der Zugriegel-Werte und NRPNs arbeiten; diese sind empfangsseitig "fest verdrahtet".

 

==Zusätzliche Info==

Nur HX3 mk4: Firmware #3.6x und FPGA #20072014 oder neuer stellen einen '''zweiten MIDI-Eingang''' (gemerged mit dem anderen Eingang) zur Verfügung und senden auch MIDI CCs gemäß NI B4 von allen lokalen Bedienelementen (Zugriegel/Taster/Schalter).

Using HX3 with MIDI controllers

2023-06-27T14:22:34Z

Christian: /* #9, #10 MIDI Custom CC */

==MIDI Control==

HX3 accepts MIDI key on/off events (default: channel 1 to upper manual, 2 to lower manual, channel 3 to bass pedals) as well as various MIDI CCs with selectable compatibility sets. MIDI dynamics slightly affect key click noise. SysEx data other than its own are always ignored. Both MIDI jacks act as MIDI inputs with equal priority (default). The second MIDI jack may be jumpered as MIDI Out. (Details for HX3 mk4 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', for HX35 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

You may connect two MIDI keyboards or controllers at the same time. Connecting a third MIDI device requires a MIDI Merge Interface. All HX3 functions that are relevant for the organ player may be remote-controlled by MIDI commands.

==General==

Connect MIDI Out of your MIDI controller/keyboard to one of the two HX3 MIDI inputs. Since MIDI is a one-way interface, HX3 cannot determine the setting of any MIDI controller value until you touch/use it once. By default all HX3 controllers are OFF. Do not use any controller button or drawbar unless HX3 is ready to accept data (drawbar/preset menu displayed). It is a good idea to power up HX3 before your MIDI master keyboard or master controller.

MIDI CC #7 (default, CC number variable) controls master volume. MIDI CC #11 (default, CC number variable) controls swell pedal/expression if no expression pedal connected to HX3. If you use your HX3-attached swell pedal, any MIDI expression message will be overwritten. If the attached swell pedal is not actuated, MIDI expression messages are accepted.

==HX3.4==

Some MIDI controllers as well as organ keyboards (like Hammond XK and SK series) allow 2nd and 3rd harmonic percussion ON at the same time. In this case HX3 implementation regards "2nd ON" as "Percussion ON" tab.

Refer to section 3.2.4 Group Commons in the user manual to select the desired MIDI CC set. Factory default is Native Instruments B4.

MenuDisplay and HX3 Remote (HX3.4) or HX35 Editor (HX3.5 only) allow setup of MIDI Channel as well as MIDI CC set. Step down to MIDI menu section to alter settings. On the Menu Panel, press encoder knob for 2 seconds to save to power-up defaults.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT is THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI received, only own MIDI key events to MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge'(MIDI received, own MIDI key events and incoming MIDI events merged to MIDI OUT) and
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (as before, but MIDI CC commands discarded). On expander module, only valid setting is 'ReceiveThru'.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===HX3.4 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 board) transmits local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to NI B4 implementation (independently of selected CC set). From firmware 3.82 and up, HX3 will not send own MIDI CCs on MIDI OUT when '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC). MIDI Option = 3 is now default on all firmwares except HX3 Expander (which has to accept MIDI CCs). This change has been made since MIDI CCs sended by HX3 may disturb MIDI workstations/arrangers. Note: If send/receive of MIDI CCs is enabled (Option = 1 or 2), HX3 will transmit its own CCs.

HX3 will transmit swell pedal on CC #11 (0x0B) as well as rotary run/stop on CC #68 (0x44) and fast/stop on CC #01.

===Program Change on HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 will accept MIDI Program Change Commands in some MIDI CC sets. In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice according to common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 supports MIDI over USB through its USB port connected to a USB host, typically a PC. The USB connection is also suitable for controlling HX3.5 by the HX35 Editor application, firmware updates via MIDI SysEx, and DSP updates via DFU data transfer. '''Important:''' MIDI IN2 and MIDI IN over USB must not be used simultaneously.

'''(HX3.5 and later)''' The new CC Set Editor allows a very extensive adaptation to the controlling device; the CC Sets known from HX3.4 have been taken over and partly supplemented. They can be changed at will (exception: NI B4 and Hamichord due to some special features in vibrato, percussion and presets). Important: The extended scan driver available in HX3.5 accepts the MIDI CCs for the sustain and sostenuto pedal. However, some devices use CCs #64 and #66 for other functions (NI B4, Hamichord). When CCs #64 or #66 are used in a CC Set, the Sustain and Sostenuto functions in scan drivers (MIDI receive as well as directly connected keyboards) are disabled, so that the assigned controller does not result in "hanging" notes. The new CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (firmware #5.6xx or higher) is the most comprehensive CC-Set available, it allows remote control of all relevant HX3.5 parameters.

The menu panel and HX35 Editor allow you to set the MIDI channel and select the MIDI CC set. In the menu, press and hold the knob for two seconds to save the setting as the start default value.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sends own keyboard data),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 routed to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 routed to MIDI OUT) and
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB routed to MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'Versatile' Boehm, Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2'
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' for TouchOSC, but can also be used for freely configurable master keyboards,
** 'Custom A' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor) ex factory occupied by Nord C2D CC set,
** 'Custom B' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Further CC sets are available and can easily transfered to the HX3.5. Supported instruments include Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend and more.

===HX3.5 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.5 is transmitting local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to selected CC set. MIDI IN1, IN2 and MIDI over USB are always accepted.

For OEM only: Independent from MIDI option selected, HX3 will always send a 3.3V TTL level MIDI signal on PL16 pin 8 for controlling Ventilator/Minivent DSP board with synced stop/slow/fast. Pin 34 of Vent DSP board is MIDI TTL input. Also wire digital ground (PL16 pin 10). Ventilator DSP accepts MIDI CC #21 values 0 (stop), 1 (slow), 2 (fast) on channel 1.

With TouchOSC it is possible to create a preset by remote control; otherwise the memory function of the menu panel must be used.

===Program Change on HX3.5===

In general, HX3.5 (firmware 5.3 and up) will handle '''MIDI Program Change Commands''' (valid numbers range from 0 to 15). Numbers will be handled as "Set Drawbar Voice" for upper, lower and pedal MIDI channel separately, i.e. it resembles the "inverse" preset keys found on Hammond console organs. Drawbar Voice changes will not affect Tab settings (Percussion, Vibrato etc) in any way. Use the Common Presets for this.

However, not all HX3.5 MIDI CC sets are handling MIDI program changes in the same way: In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice complying with common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0. In Nord C1/C2 CC mode, program 126/127 are "live" presets (inverse "A#" and "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

===Bank Select on HX3.5===

HX3.5 will handle '''MIDI Bank Select Commands''' as "Set Overall Preset" (valid numbers range from 0 to 15 or 0 to 99 from FW #5.516 on) per default. Overall Presets include all Tab settings and additional pots (volume, reverb amount etc) as well as the drawbar settings. Note that some MIDI keyboards will send a MIDI Bank Select command separately, others will issue a MIDI Bank Select only with a MIDI Program Change. In the latter case, the issued MIDI Program Change command will override the voice setting.

Early HX3.5 boards switched Common Presets with a bank select command (20 hex or 32 dec.). This caused incompatibilities with unusual MIDI implementations of the controlling keyboard (e.g. Mojo). Starting with firmware #5.526, the CC command for switching the Common Presets can be set using the menu. Please note: Common Presets '''cannot''' be switched using MIDI Program Changes, which are reserved for the above Drawbar settings.

'''Up to HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 are selected in all CC Sets by Bank Select messages (MSB, CC #00), with all three channels valid.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 to #5.515:''' These firmwares contained a bug that prevented Common Preset switching.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by bank select commands (LSB, CC #32 decimal), where all three channels are valid.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by a CC command (default: #32 dec. = Bank Select LSB) that can be set in the menu, where all three channels are valid.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 provides several pre-configured MIDI CC sets plus one fully customizable set (two custom CC sets on HX3.5), selectable by MenuPanel, by HX3 Remote or HX35 Editor application, respectively. Factory default is the '''Native Instruments B4''' set, supported by many MIDI controllers. If MIDI CC output is enabled, HX3.4 will '''send''' CCs always according to NI B4 set. HX3 does '''not''' support weird SysEx encodings found on some Roland, Oberheim and Viscount models. '''All values based decimal!'''

A very comprehensive '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' MIDI CC set is available on HX3.5 mainboards.

Starting with firmware version 5.61x, the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window can be used to fetch, modify and write back CC sets from the HX3.5. Due to some special features, some functions are fixed for CC Set "#0 NI B4" and "#7 Hamichord" (e.g. the vibrato setting for the NI B4, where a NI B4 controller sends two values). With these sets, some CC settings previously handled in the firmware cannot be changed, all others can.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

The Doepfer d3c drawbar controller is a very nice and rugged piece of gear, so we recommend it for use with our HX3 board. It does support foot controllers and foot switches. The Keyswerk/Böhm db4 is also compatible with NI B4 CC set.

Upper, lower and bass drawbars work as usual. It is a good idea to set all to zero before switching on as this is a “known state” for HX3. Also the Percussion and Vibrato buttons work as described in d3c manual. There is a small drawback, anyway: Default HX3 Vibrato setting is V1 (but upper/lower vibrato OFF), while the V1 LED will not light up when powering up the d3c (there is no “V0” on a real Hammond!). So pressing the V1 button will not change the sound – just turn its LED on.

The BRIGHTNESS knob controls AO28 tone parameter of the HX3. There is no key click simulated by HX3 (it is just there), so there is no key click adjustment button. The KEY CLICK knob controls the bass sustain instead.

Do not use the HARMONIC CONTENT knob as it sends the PERCUSSION button’s controller number like a continuous controller. What for? No idea. This is definitely of no use.

Preset buttons may be used, but in a restricted way. First, HX3 has 15 presets per manual, not 127 like NI B4. When selecting BANK 1, all 12 available preset buttons work on upper manual. When selecting BANK 2, all 12 preset buttons work on lower manual. Doepfer d3c resends the program change message when changing the bank, which may be annoying. Therefore, proceeds as follows: Choose bank 2, lower preset first, then bank 1, upper preset. BTW: Bank buttons do not send bank select messages, they just add an offset to the preset buttons. Blame Doepfer for that.

Doepfer d3c preset 1 is the HX3 “Live” (preset 0) position. It will be saved temporarily (until HX3 is switched off) when a preset sound (2 to 12) is selected. If you return to preset 1 “Live”, your last drawbar/button setting will be recalled. Please note: HX3 tracks drawbar and button changes even when in preset position 2 to 12, so it keeps itself updated all the time.

NI B4 set accepts program changes for upper manual MIDI channel, range 0..11 = upper presets and 12..23 = lower presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''From HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

The '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (only one drawbar set, made by Böhm for Native Instruments) sends mostly the same CCs as the Doepfer d3c, but the most important difference is the assignment of the drawbars: All Drawbars are sent on CC 12..20, but with different channel identifiers. It also sends tab CCs (percussion, vibrato knob) with very own values. We have adapted the NI B4 set especially for this controller, it can be used alternatively to the NI B4 set for Doepfer d3c (factory setting). For the D4B, upload the set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' using the HX3.5 Editor window "MIDI CC Editor":

*Use "Open CSV Table..." to load the file ''boehm_b4d.csv'' in the ''user'' directory
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

To return to the Doepfer d3c set, upload the ''nib4_send.csv'' set using the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window:

*Load file with "Open CSV Table...
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

The D4B sends all set MIDI values when powered on, so you should first power up HX3.5 and then the D4B. For the pedal, the Drawbar sequence 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) applies to the first 5 Drawbars on the D4B. The "Bank" button is a little ambiguous: it does not send a bank select message, but only moves the MIDI program changes ("preset" numbers) up.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 supports most of Hammond XK MIDI controller functions. For convenience, some controllers have been relocated to other HX3 functions:

* XK Overdrive knob controls HX3 Rotary Tube Amp Volume
* XK Reverb button controls HX3 lower manual Vibrato On
* XK Tube On button controls HX3 Reverb

Hammond uses NRPN controllers instead of standard controllers. Drawbars are encoded through a weird grid scheme using only 3 CC#s, see XK manual for details.

Hammond XK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond XK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Hammond SK does not use the weird drawbar encoding scheme of the XK, instead standard CCs whith same numbers as NI B4 CCs for upper/lower manual and bass pedal 16'/8'. For other controllers, knobs and buttons, the SK uses a similar NRPN scheme as found on XK. Some NRPNs differ, though (see table).

The Hammond SK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond SK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Versatile set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Nord C1/C2 set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce Drawbars===

Using your HX3 board with Voce MIDI Drawbars is straightforward, as the Voce module sends on one MIDI channel only (i.e. upper manual). Please note that Voce MIDI Drawbars does not send drawbar data unless you press the “Drawbar/Save” button, so that its LED lights up. You may change the Voce MIDI Drawbars send channel (back rotary HEX switch) at any time to lower (2) and bass channel (3), although this is somewhat inconvenient. In case of your technician has installed a toggle switch on the back side, channels can be changed easily.

Voce CC set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Italian KeyB/Diversi controller set supports three MIDI channels.

KeyB set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Italian Hamichord/Mojo controller set supports only base MIDI channel. Key ON/OFF data of channel 2 (lower) and 3 (pedals) will be accepted, though.

Hamichord/Mojo CC set will not accept Program Change messages since Hamichord/Mojo always sends a "snapshot" of all MIDI CCs when changing a preset.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5 and HX3.6)'''

HX3/KBP set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal. This MIDI CC set has been designed for use with the TouchOSC app.

'''Please note''': In addition to MIDI base channel, base channel+1, and base channel+2, the HX3/KBP set uses base channel+3 for specific TouchOSC commands. Avoid assigning base channel+3 to other instruments.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

HX3.4 FW #3.6x and up provides a "custom MIDI CC" set, which may be altered to your needs by using ''HX3 Remote'' application (HX3.4 only). By factory default, it is set to accept Nord C2 MIDI data (also compatible with Ocean Beach DB-1 controller). See wiki page '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' on how to create a custom CC set and store it to HX3. Please note that currently the custom MIDI CC set only accepts controller commands on upper manual MIDI channel (1 on factory default).

 

From HX3 Fimware 5.61 on, in principle all CC Sets can be changed. With this firmware HX3.5 also sends the set CCs. For editing, use the built-in CC Set Editor in the ''HX3 Manager''.

 

==Additional Info==

HX3 mk4 only: Firmware #3.6x and FPGA #20072014 or newer provide a '''secondary MIDI input''' (merged with other) and also send MIDI CCs according to NI B4 from all local controllers (drawbars/buttons/switches).

Using HX3 with MIDI controllers

2023-06-27T14:22:19Z

Christian: /* #9, #10 MIDI Custom CC */

==MIDI Control==

HX3 accepts MIDI key on/off events (default: channel 1 to upper manual, 2 to lower manual, channel 3 to bass pedals) as well as various MIDI CCs with selectable compatibility sets. MIDI dynamics slightly affect key click noise. SysEx data other than its own are always ignored. Both MIDI jacks act as MIDI inputs with equal priority (default). The second MIDI jack may be jumpered as MIDI Out. (Details for HX3 mk4 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', for HX35 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

You may connect two MIDI keyboards or controllers at the same time. Connecting a third MIDI device requires a MIDI Merge Interface. All HX3 functions that are relevant for the organ player may be remote-controlled by MIDI commands.

==General==

Connect MIDI Out of your MIDI controller/keyboard to one of the two HX3 MIDI inputs. Since MIDI is a one-way interface, HX3 cannot determine the setting of any MIDI controller value until you touch/use it once. By default all HX3 controllers are OFF. Do not use any controller button or drawbar unless HX3 is ready to accept data (drawbar/preset menu displayed). It is a good idea to power up HX3 before your MIDI master keyboard or master controller.

MIDI CC #7 (default, CC number variable) controls master volume. MIDI CC #11 (default, CC number variable) controls swell pedal/expression if no expression pedal connected to HX3. If you use your HX3-attached swell pedal, any MIDI expression message will be overwritten. If the attached swell pedal is not actuated, MIDI expression messages are accepted.

==HX3.4==

Some MIDI controllers as well as organ keyboards (like Hammond XK and SK series) allow 2nd and 3rd harmonic percussion ON at the same time. In this case HX3 implementation regards "2nd ON" as "Percussion ON" tab.

Refer to section 3.2.4 Group Commons in the user manual to select the desired MIDI CC set. Factory default is Native Instruments B4.

MenuDisplay and HX3 Remote (HX3.4) or HX35 Editor (HX3.5 only) allow setup of MIDI Channel as well as MIDI CC set. Step down to MIDI menu section to alter settings. On the Menu Panel, press encoder knob for 2 seconds to save to power-up defaults.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT is THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI received, only own MIDI key events to MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge'(MIDI received, own MIDI key events and incoming MIDI events merged to MIDI OUT) and
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (as before, but MIDI CC commands discarded). On expander module, only valid setting is 'ReceiveThru'.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===HX3.4 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 board) transmits local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to NI B4 implementation (independently of selected CC set). From firmware 3.82 and up, HX3 will not send own MIDI CCs on MIDI OUT when '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC). MIDI Option = 3 is now default on all firmwares except HX3 Expander (which has to accept MIDI CCs). This change has been made since MIDI CCs sended by HX3 may disturb MIDI workstations/arrangers. Note: If send/receive of MIDI CCs is enabled (Option = 1 or 2), HX3 will transmit its own CCs.

HX3 will transmit swell pedal on CC #11 (0x0B) as well as rotary run/stop on CC #68 (0x44) and fast/stop on CC #01.

===Program Change on HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 will accept MIDI Program Change Commands in some MIDI CC sets. In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice according to common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 supports MIDI over USB through its USB port connected to a USB host, typically a PC. The USB connection is also suitable for controlling HX3.5 by the HX35 Editor application, firmware updates via MIDI SysEx, and DSP updates via DFU data transfer. '''Important:''' MIDI IN2 and MIDI IN over USB must not be used simultaneously.

'''(HX3.5 and later)''' The new CC Set Editor allows a very extensive adaptation to the controlling device; the CC Sets known from HX3.4 have been taken over and partly supplemented. They can be changed at will (exception: NI B4 and Hamichord due to some special features in vibrato, percussion and presets). Important: The extended scan driver available in HX3.5 accepts the MIDI CCs for the sustain and sostenuto pedal. However, some devices use CCs #64 and #66 for other functions (NI B4, Hamichord). When CCs #64 or #66 are used in a CC Set, the Sustain and Sostenuto functions in scan drivers (MIDI receive as well as directly connected keyboards) are disabled, so that the assigned controller does not result in "hanging" notes. The new CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (firmware #5.6xx or higher) is the most comprehensive CC-Set available, it allows remote control of all relevant HX3.5 parameters.

The menu panel and HX35 Editor allow you to set the MIDI channel and select the MIDI CC set. In the menu, press and hold the knob for two seconds to save the setting as the start default value.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sends own keyboard data),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 routed to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 routed to MIDI OUT) and
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB routed to MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'Versatile' Boehm, Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2'
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' for TouchOSC, but can also be used for freely configurable master keyboards,
** 'Custom A' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor) ex factory occupied by Nord C2D CC set,
** 'Custom B' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Further CC sets are available and can easily transfered to the HX3.5. Supported instruments include Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend and more.

===HX3.5 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.5 is transmitting local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to selected CC set. MIDI IN1, IN2 and MIDI over USB are always accepted.

For OEM only: Independent from MIDI option selected, HX3 will always send a 3.3V TTL level MIDI signal on PL16 pin 8 for controlling Ventilator/Minivent DSP board with synced stop/slow/fast. Pin 34 of Vent DSP board is MIDI TTL input. Also wire digital ground (PL16 pin 10). Ventilator DSP accepts MIDI CC #21 values 0 (stop), 1 (slow), 2 (fast) on channel 1.

With TouchOSC it is possible to create a preset by remote control; otherwise the memory function of the menu panel must be used.

===Program Change on HX3.5===

In general, HX3.5 (firmware 5.3 and up) will handle '''MIDI Program Change Commands''' (valid numbers range from 0 to 15). Numbers will be handled as "Set Drawbar Voice" for upper, lower and pedal MIDI channel separately, i.e. it resembles the "inverse" preset keys found on Hammond console organs. Drawbar Voice changes will not affect Tab settings (Percussion, Vibrato etc) in any way. Use the Common Presets for this.

However, not all HX3.5 MIDI CC sets are handling MIDI program changes in the same way: In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice complying with common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0. In Nord C1/C2 CC mode, program 126/127 are "live" presets (inverse "A#" and "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

===Bank Select on HX3.5===

HX3.5 will handle '''MIDI Bank Select Commands''' as "Set Overall Preset" (valid numbers range from 0 to 15 or 0 to 99 from FW #5.516 on) per default. Overall Presets include all Tab settings and additional pots (volume, reverb amount etc) as well as the drawbar settings. Note that some MIDI keyboards will send a MIDI Bank Select command separately, others will issue a MIDI Bank Select only with a MIDI Program Change. In the latter case, the issued MIDI Program Change command will override the voice setting.

Early HX3.5 boards switched Common Presets with a bank select command (20 hex or 32 dec.). This caused incompatibilities with unusual MIDI implementations of the controlling keyboard (e.g. Mojo). Starting with firmware #5.526, the CC command for switching the Common Presets can be set using the menu. Please note: Common Presets '''cannot''' be switched using MIDI Program Changes, which are reserved for the above Drawbar settings.

'''Up to HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 are selected in all CC Sets by Bank Select messages (MSB, CC #00), with all three channels valid.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 to #5.515:''' These firmwares contained a bug that prevented Common Preset switching.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by bank select commands (LSB, CC #32 decimal), where all three channels are valid.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by a CC command (default: #32 dec. = Bank Select LSB) that can be set in the menu, where all three channels are valid.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 provides several pre-configured MIDI CC sets plus one fully customizable set (two custom CC sets on HX3.5), selectable by MenuPanel, by HX3 Remote or HX35 Editor application, respectively. Factory default is the '''Native Instruments B4''' set, supported by many MIDI controllers. If MIDI CC output is enabled, HX3.4 will '''send''' CCs always according to NI B4 set. HX3 does '''not''' support weird SysEx encodings found on some Roland, Oberheim and Viscount models. '''All values based decimal!'''

A very comprehensive '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' MIDI CC set is available on HX3.5 mainboards.

Starting with firmware version 5.61x, the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window can be used to fetch, modify and write back CC sets from the HX3.5. Due to some special features, some functions are fixed for CC Set "#0 NI B4" and "#7 Hamichord" (e.g. the vibrato setting for the NI B4, where a NI B4 controller sends two values). With these sets, some CC settings previously handled in the firmware cannot be changed, all others can.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

The Doepfer d3c drawbar controller is a very nice and rugged piece of gear, so we recommend it for use with our HX3 board. It does support foot controllers and foot switches. The Keyswerk/Böhm db4 is also compatible with NI B4 CC set.

Upper, lower and bass drawbars work as usual. It is a good idea to set all to zero before switching on as this is a “known state” for HX3. Also the Percussion and Vibrato buttons work as described in d3c manual. There is a small drawback, anyway: Default HX3 Vibrato setting is V1 (but upper/lower vibrato OFF), while the V1 LED will not light up when powering up the d3c (there is no “V0” on a real Hammond!). So pressing the V1 button will not change the sound – just turn its LED on.

The BRIGHTNESS knob controls AO28 tone parameter of the HX3. There is no key click simulated by HX3 (it is just there), so there is no key click adjustment button. The KEY CLICK knob controls the bass sustain instead.

Do not use the HARMONIC CONTENT knob as it sends the PERCUSSION button’s controller number like a continuous controller. What for? No idea. This is definitely of no use.

Preset buttons may be used, but in a restricted way. First, HX3 has 15 presets per manual, not 127 like NI B4. When selecting BANK 1, all 12 available preset buttons work on upper manual. When selecting BANK 2, all 12 preset buttons work on lower manual. Doepfer d3c resends the program change message when changing the bank, which may be annoying. Therefore, proceeds as follows: Choose bank 2, lower preset first, then bank 1, upper preset. BTW: Bank buttons do not send bank select messages, they just add an offset to the preset buttons. Blame Doepfer for that.

Doepfer d3c preset 1 is the HX3 “Live” (preset 0) position. It will be saved temporarily (until HX3 is switched off) when a preset sound (2 to 12) is selected. If you return to preset 1 “Live”, your last drawbar/button setting will be recalled. Please note: HX3 tracks drawbar and button changes even when in preset position 2 to 12, so it keeps itself updated all the time.

NI B4 set accepts program changes for upper manual MIDI channel, range 0..11 = upper presets and 12..23 = lower presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''From HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

The '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (only one drawbar set, made by Böhm for Native Instruments) sends mostly the same CCs as the Doepfer d3c, but the most important difference is the assignment of the drawbars: All Drawbars are sent on CC 12..20, but with different channel identifiers. It also sends tab CCs (percussion, vibrato knob) with very own values. We have adapted the NI B4 set especially for this controller, it can be used alternatively to the NI B4 set for Doepfer d3c (factory setting). For the D4B, upload the set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' using the HX3.5 Editor window "MIDI CC Editor":

*Use "Open CSV Table..." to load the file ''boehm_b4d.csv'' in the ''user'' directory
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

To return to the Doepfer d3c set, upload the ''nib4_send.csv'' set using the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window:

*Load file with "Open CSV Table...
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

The D4B sends all set MIDI values when powered on, so you should first power up HX3.5 and then the D4B. For the pedal, the Drawbar sequence 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) applies to the first 5 Drawbars on the D4B. The "Bank" button is a little ambiguous: it does not send a bank select message, but only moves the MIDI program changes ("preset" numbers) up.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 supports most of Hammond XK MIDI controller functions. For convenience, some controllers have been relocated to other HX3 functions:

* XK Overdrive knob controls HX3 Rotary Tube Amp Volume
* XK Reverb button controls HX3 lower manual Vibrato On
* XK Tube On button controls HX3 Reverb

Hammond uses NRPN controllers instead of standard controllers. Drawbars are encoded through a weird grid scheme using only 3 CC#s, see XK manual for details.

Hammond XK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond XK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Hammond SK does not use the weird drawbar encoding scheme of the XK, instead standard CCs whith same numbers as NI B4 CCs for upper/lower manual and bass pedal 16'/8'. For other controllers, knobs and buttons, the SK uses a similar NRPN scheme as found on XK. Some NRPNs differ, though (see table).

The Hammond SK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond SK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Versatile set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Nord C1/C2 set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce Drawbars===

Using your HX3 board with Voce MIDI Drawbars is straightforward, as the Voce module sends on one MIDI channel only (i.e. upper manual). Please note that Voce MIDI Drawbars does not send drawbar data unless you press the “Drawbar/Save” button, so that its LED lights up. You may change the Voce MIDI Drawbars send channel (back rotary HEX switch) at any time to lower (2) and bass channel (3), although this is somewhat inconvenient. In case of your technician has installed a toggle switch on the back side, channels can be changed easily.

Voce CC set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Italian KeyB/Diversi controller set supports three MIDI channels.

KeyB set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Italian Hamichord/Mojo controller set supports only base MIDI channel. Key ON/OFF data of channel 2 (lower) and 3 (pedals) will be accepted, though.

Hamichord/Mojo CC set will not accept Program Change messages since Hamichord/Mojo always sends a "snapshot" of all MIDI CCs when changing a preset.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5 and HX3.6)'''

HX3/KBP set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal. This MIDI CC set has been designed for use with the TouchOSC app.

'''Please note''': In addition to MIDI base channel, base channel+1, and base channel+2, the HX3/KBP set uses base channel+3 for specific TouchOSC commands. Avoid assigning base channel+3 to other instruments.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

HX3.4 FW #3.6x and up provides a "custom MIDI CC" set, which may be altered to your needs by using ''HX3 Remote'' application (HX3.4 only). By factory default, it is set to accept Nord C2 MIDI data (also compatible with Ocean Beach DB-1 controller). See wiki page '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' on how to create a custom CC set and store it to HX3. Please note that currently the custom MIDI CC set only accepts controller commands on upper manual MIDI channel (1 on factory default).

 

From HX3.5 Fimware 5.61 on, in principle all CC Sets can be changed. With this firmware HX3.5 also sends the set CCs. For editing, use the built-in CC Set Editor in the ''HX3 Manager''.

 

==Additional Info==

HX3 mk4 only: Firmware #3.6x and FPGA #20072014 or newer provide a '''secondary MIDI input''' (merged with other) and also send MIDI CCs according to NI B4 from all local controllers (drawbars/buttons/switches).

Using HX3 with MIDI controllers

2023-06-27T14:13:53Z

Christian: /* #8 HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set */

==MIDI Control==

HX3 accepts MIDI key on/off events (default: channel 1 to upper manual, 2 to lower manual, channel 3 to bass pedals) as well as various MIDI CCs with selectable compatibility sets. MIDI dynamics slightly affect key click noise. SysEx data other than its own are always ignored. Both MIDI jacks act as MIDI inputs with equal priority (default). The second MIDI jack may be jumpered as MIDI Out. (Details for HX3 mk4 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3_mk3/mk4_additional_info#HX3_mk4_Changes HX3 mk4_Changes]]''', for HX35 see '''[[http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=HX3.5_Installation_Manual#MIDI_Configuration MIDI Configuration]]''').

You may connect two MIDI keyboards or controllers at the same time. Connecting a third MIDI device requires a MIDI Merge Interface. All HX3 functions that are relevant for the organ player may be remote-controlled by MIDI commands.

==General==

Connect MIDI Out of your MIDI controller/keyboard to one of the two HX3 MIDI inputs. Since MIDI is a one-way interface, HX3 cannot determine the setting of any MIDI controller value until you touch/use it once. By default all HX3 controllers are OFF. Do not use any controller button or drawbar unless HX3 is ready to accept data (drawbar/preset menu displayed). It is a good idea to power up HX3 before your MIDI master keyboard or master controller.

MIDI CC #7 (default, CC number variable) controls master volume. MIDI CC #11 (default, CC number variable) controls swell pedal/expression if no expression pedal connected to HX3. If you use your HX3-attached swell pedal, any MIDI expression message will be overwritten. If the attached swell pedal is not actuated, MIDI expression messages are accepted.

==HX3.4==

Some MIDI controllers as well as organ keyboards (like Hammond XK and SK series) allow 2nd and 3rd harmonic percussion ON at the same time. In this case HX3 implementation regards "2nd ON" as "Percussion ON" tab.

Refer to section 3.2.4 Group Commons in the user manual to select the desired MIDI CC set. Factory default is Native Instruments B4.

MenuDisplay and HX3 Remote (HX3.4) or HX35 Editor (HX3.5 only) allow setup of MIDI Channel as well as MIDI CC set. Step down to MIDI menu section to alter settings. On the Menu Panel, press encoder knob for 2 seconds to save to power-up defaults.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'ReceiveThru' (MIDI OUT is THRU),
** 'ReceiveSend' (MIDI received, only own MIDI key events to MIDI OUT),
** 'RcvSendMerge'(MIDI received, own MIDI key events and incoming MIDI events merged to MIDI OUT) and
** 'RcvSndMgNoCC' (as before, but MIDI CC commands discarded). On expander module, only valid setting is 'ReceiveThru'.

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Custom'

===HX3.4 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.4 (mk2/3/4 board) transmits local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to NI B4 implementation (independently of selected CC set). From firmware 3.82 and up, HX3 will not send own MIDI CCs on MIDI OUT when '''MIDI Option = 3''' (RcvSndMgNoCC). MIDI Option = 3 is now default on all firmwares except HX3 Expander (which has to accept MIDI CCs). This change has been made since MIDI CCs sended by HX3 may disturb MIDI workstations/arrangers. Note: If send/receive of MIDI CCs is enabled (Option = 1 or 2), HX3 will transmit its own CCs.

HX3 will transmit swell pedal on CC #11 (0x0B) as well as rotary run/stop on CC #68 (0x44) and fast/stop on CC #01.

===Program Change on HX3.4===

HX3 mk4 will accept MIDI Program Change Commands in some MIDI CC sets. In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice according to common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

==HX3.5==

HX3.5 supports MIDI over USB through its USB port connected to a USB host, typically a PC. The USB connection is also suitable for controlling HX3.5 by the HX35 Editor application, firmware updates via MIDI SysEx, and DSP updates via DFU data transfer. '''Important:''' MIDI IN2 and MIDI IN over USB must not be used simultaneously.

'''(HX3.5 and later)''' The new CC Set Editor allows a very extensive adaptation to the controlling device; the CC Sets known from HX3.4 have been taken over and partly supplemented. They can be changed at will (exception: NI B4 and Hamichord due to some special features in vibrato, percussion and presets). Important: The extended scan driver available in HX3.5 accepts the MIDI CCs for the sustain and sostenuto pedal. However, some devices use CCs #64 and #66 for other functions (NI B4, Hamichord). When CCs #64 or #66 are used in a CC Set, the Sustain and Sostenuto functions in scan drivers (MIDI receive as well as directly connected keyboards) are disabled, so that the assigned controller does not result in "hanging" notes. The new CC-Set "HX3.5/KBP native" (firmware #5.6xx or higher) is the most comprehensive CC-Set available, it allows remote control of all relevant HX3.5 parameters.

The menu panel and HX35 Editor allow you to set the MIDI channel and select the MIDI CC set. In the menu, press and hold the knob for two seconds to save the setting as the start default value.

* '''MIDI Channel''' - sets MIDI base send/receive channel 1 to 10 (upper manual, lower manual is on +1, pedals on +2).

* '''MIDI Option''' - sets MIDI routing behaviour to
** 'Local Tx' (MIDI OUT sends own keyboard data),
** 'Inp 1 Thru' (MIDI IN1 routed to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT over USB),
** 'Inp 2 Thru' (MIDI IN2 routed to MIDI OUT) and
** 'USB InThru' (MIDI IN over USB routed to MIDI OUT).

* '''MIDI CC Set''' - sets recognized MIDI CC set to
** 'NI B4' Native Instruments B4 (default),
** 'Hammond XK',
** 'Hammond SK' (Note: Hammond changed MIDI CC set between XK and SK series, please try out which one fits),
** 'Versatile' Boehm, Sempra,
** 'Nord C1/C2'
** 'Voce' MIDI drawbars,
** 'KeyB Duo',
** 'Hamichord' (or 'Mojo', same hardware),
** 'HX3.5/KBP' for TouchOSC, but can also be used for freely configurable master keyboards,
** 'Custom A' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor) ex factory occupied by Nord C2D CC set,
** 'Custom B' (to be set and renamed by HX3 MIDI CC Set Editor)

Further CC sets are available and can easily transfered to the HX3.5. Supported instruments include Hammond XB2, Hammond XB3, Nord electro 4, Viscount Legend and more.

===HX3.5 Generated MIDI Events===

HX3.5 is transmitting local keyboard ON/OFF events on MIDI base channel (upper), MIDI base channel +1 (lower) and MIDI base channel +2 (pedal). It sends MIDI CCs of user controls (drawbars, tabs) according to selected CC set. MIDI IN1, IN2 and MIDI over USB are always accepted.

For OEM only: Independent from MIDI option selected, HX3 will always send a 3.3V TTL level MIDI signal on PL16 pin 8 for controlling Ventilator/Minivent DSP board with synced stop/slow/fast. Pin 34 of Vent DSP board is MIDI TTL input. Also wire digital ground (PL16 pin 10). Ventilator DSP accepts MIDI CC #21 values 0 (stop), 1 (slow), 2 (fast) on channel 1.

With TouchOSC it is possible to create a preset by remote control; otherwise the memory function of the menu panel must be used.

===Program Change on HX3.5===

In general, HX3.5 (firmware 5.3 and up) will handle '''MIDI Program Change Commands''' (valid numbers range from 0 to 15). Numbers will be handled as "Set Drawbar Voice" for upper, lower and pedal MIDI channel separately, i.e. it resembles the "inverse" preset keys found on Hammond console organs. Drawbar Voice changes will not affect Tab settings (Percussion, Vibrato etc) in any way. Use the Common Presets for this.

However, not all HX3.5 MIDI CC sets are handling MIDI program changes in the same way: In NI B4 mode, MIDI program changes 12..23 on '''upper''' manual channel will set '''lower''' manual voice complying with common NI B4 hardware controllers. In Hammond CC modes, program 11 is the "live" preset (inverse "B" key) and will recall voice 0. In Nord C1/C2 CC mode, program 126/127 are "live" presets (inverse "A#" and "B" key) and will recall voice 0.

===Bank Select on HX3.5===

HX3.5 will handle '''MIDI Bank Select Commands''' as "Set Overall Preset" (valid numbers range from 0 to 15 or 0 to 99 from FW #5.516 on) per default. Overall Presets include all Tab settings and additional pots (volume, reverb amount etc) as well as the drawbar settings. Note that some MIDI keyboards will send a MIDI Bank Select command separately, others will issue a MIDI Bank Select only with a MIDI Program Change. In the latter case, the issued MIDI Program Change command will override the voice setting.

Early HX3.5 boards switched Common Presets with a bank select command (20 hex or 32 dec.). This caused incompatibilities with unusual MIDI implementations of the controlling keyboard (e.g. Mojo). Starting with firmware #5.526, the CC command for switching the Common Presets can be set using the menu. Please note: Common Presets '''cannot''' be switched using MIDI Program Changes, which are reserved for the above Drawbar settings.

'''Up to HX3.5 FW #5.4xx:''': Common Presets 0..15 are selected in all CC Sets by Bank Select messages (MSB, CC #00), with all three channels valid.

'''HX3.5 FW #5.500 to #5.515:''' These firmwares contained a bug that prevented Common Preset switching.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.516:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by bank select commands (LSB, CC #32 decimal), where all three channels are valid.

'''Starting with HX3.5 FW #5.526:''' Common Presets 0..99 are selected in all CC Sets by a CC command (default: #32 dec. = Bank Select LSB) that can be set in the menu, where all three channels are valid.

==MIDI CC Sets==

HX3 provides several pre-configured MIDI CC sets plus one fully customizable set (two custom CC sets on HX3.5), selectable by MenuPanel, by HX3 Remote or HX35 Editor application, respectively. Factory default is the '''Native Instruments B4''' set, supported by many MIDI controllers. If MIDI CC output is enabled, HX3.4 will '''send''' CCs always according to NI B4 set. HX3 does '''not''' support weird SysEx encodings found on some Roland, Oberheim and Viscount models. '''All values based decimal!'''

A very comprehensive '''Versatile Böhm/Keyswerk Sempra''' MIDI CC set is available on HX3.5 mainboards.

Starting with firmware version 5.61x, the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window can be used to fetch, modify and write back CC sets from the HX3.5. Due to some special features, some functions are fixed for CC Set "#0 NI B4" and "#7 Hamichord" (e.g. the vibrato setting for the NI B4, where a NI B4 controller sends two values). With these sets, some CC settings previously handled in the firmware cannot be changed, all others can.

===#0 NI B4 d3c===

The Doepfer d3c drawbar controller is a very nice and rugged piece of gear, so we recommend it for use with our HX3 board. It does support foot controllers and foot switches. The Keyswerk/Böhm db4 is also compatible with NI B4 CC set.

Upper, lower and bass drawbars work as usual. It is a good idea to set all to zero before switching on as this is a “known state” for HX3. Also the Percussion and Vibrato buttons work as described in d3c manual. There is a small drawback, anyway: Default HX3 Vibrato setting is V1 (but upper/lower vibrato OFF), while the V1 LED will not light up when powering up the d3c (there is no “V0” on a real Hammond!). So pressing the V1 button will not change the sound – just turn its LED on.

The BRIGHTNESS knob controls AO28 tone parameter of the HX3. There is no key click simulated by HX3 (it is just there), so there is no key click adjustment button. The KEY CLICK knob controls the bass sustain instead.

Do not use the HARMONIC CONTENT knob as it sends the PERCUSSION button’s controller number like a continuous controller. What for? No idea. This is definitely of no use.

Preset buttons may be used, but in a restricted way. First, HX3 has 15 presets per manual, not 127 like NI B4. When selecting BANK 1, all 12 available preset buttons work on upper manual. When selecting BANK 2, all 12 preset buttons work on lower manual. Doepfer d3c resends the program change message when changing the bank, which may be annoying. Therefore, proceeds as follows: Choose bank 2, lower preset first, then bank 1, upper preset. BTW: Bank buttons do not send bank select messages, they just add an offset to the preset buttons. Blame Doepfer for that.

Doepfer d3c preset 1 is the HX3 “Live” (preset 0) position. It will be saved temporarily (until HX3 is switched off) when a preset sound (2 to 12) is selected. If you return to preset 1 “Live”, your last drawbar/button setting will be recalled. Please note: HX3 tracks drawbar and button changes even when in preset position 2 to 12, so it keeps itself updated all the time.

NI B4 set accepts program changes for upper manual MIDI channel, range 0..11 = upper presets and 12..23 = lower presets.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|was "122 Amp volume" on older firmwares
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|31
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|1
|66
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|68
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|"Rotary On/Off" on B4
|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Fixed
|Vibr Mix
|Chorus if < 96
|-
|1
|74
|Fixed
|Vibr Amount
|0..55 = V1, 56..87 = V2, 88..127 = V3
|-
|1
|75
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Key Click" on B4
|-
|1
|76
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|"Tube Amp Drive" on B4
|-
|1
|78
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Tube Amp Body" on B4
|-
|1
|79
|Slider
|Tone
|"Tube Amp Brightness" on B4
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|30, 31
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|Same as 30 on Channel 1
|}

 

===#0 NI B4D===

'''From HX3.5 Firmware #5.621'''

The '''Drawbar-Controller B4D''' (only one drawbar set, made by Böhm for Native Instruments) sends mostly the same CCs as the Doepfer d3c, but the most important difference is the assignment of the drawbars: All Drawbars are sent on CC 12..20, but with different channel identifiers. It also sends tab CCs (percussion, vibrato knob) with very own values. We have adapted the NI B4 set especially for this controller, it can be used alternatively to the NI B4 set for Doepfer d3c (factory setting). For the D4B, upload the set ''boehm_b4d.csv'' using the HX3.5 Editor window "MIDI CC Editor":

*Use "Open CSV Table..." to load the file ''boehm_b4d.csv'' in the ''user'' directory
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

To return to the Doepfer d3c set, upload the ''nib4_send.csv'' set using the HX3.5 "MIDI CC Editor" window:

*Load file with "Open CSV Table...
*With "Actions -> Upload this CC set to HX3.5 as... ->#0 (NI B4, send only)" to HX3.5

The D4B sends all set MIDI values when powered on, so you should first power up HX3.5 and then the D4B. For the pedal, the Drawbar sequence 16, 16H, 8, 8H, Release (Sustain) applies to the first 5 Drawbars on the D4B. The "Bank" button is a little ambiguous: it does not send a bank select message, but only moves the MIDI program changes ("preset" numbers) up.

 

===#1 Hammond XK===

HX3 supports most of Hammond XK MIDI controller functions. For convenience, some controllers have been relocated to other HX3 functions:

* XK Overdrive knob controls HX3 Rotary Tube Amp Volume
* XK Reverb button controls HX3 lower manual Vibrato On
* XK Tube On button controls HX3 Reverb

Hammond uses NRPN controllers instead of standard controllers. Drawbars are encoded through a weird grid scheme using only 3 CC#s, see XK manual for details.

Hammond XK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|80
|Fixed
|Upper drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|81
|Fixed
|Lower drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|82
|Fixed
|Pedal drawbars
|According to Hammond encoding, see XK user manual
|-
|1,2,3
|95
|Don't Care
|Save Upper
|If received, saves upper drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|96
|Don't Care
|Save Lower
|If received, saves lower drawbars and setup to current preset#
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond XK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values):

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|17,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|00,09
|Leslie Run
|(same)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|05,09
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|01,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|-
|00,07
|Split
|Key Split ON
|}
 

===#2 Hammond SK===

Hammond SK does not use the weird drawbar encoding scheme of the XK, instead standard CCs whith same numbers as NI B4 CCs for upper/lower manual and bass pedal 16'/8'. For other controllers, knobs and buttons, the SK uses a similar NRPN scheme as found on XK. Some NRPNs differ, though (see table).

The Hammond SK set accepts program changes for upper manual and lower manual MIDI channel, range 0..15. Hammond Preset 11 will be converted to HX3 preset 0 (live).

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1,2,3
|6
|Value
|NRPN data entry
|
|-
|1,2,3
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1,2,3
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1,2,3
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|33
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|34
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|similar to NI B4 scheme
|-
|1,2,3
|98
|Value
|LSB of NRPN controller#
|
|-
|1,2,3
|99
|Value
|MSB of NRPN controller#
|
|}

Hammond SK NRPN Encoding is as follows (NRPN represented as hexadecimal values): 

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''NRPN #'''
|'''XK Function'''
|'''HX3 Function/Remarks'''
|-
|00,0A
|EQ Bass Gain
|Swell Trim (!)
|-
|02,0A
|EQ Treble Gain
|TONE pot (!)
|-
|02,09
|Vib Upper ON
|(same)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Lower ON
|(same)
|-
|04,0A
|Reverb ON
|Vib Lower ON (!)
|-
|03,09
|Vib Knob
|0=V1, 1=V2, 2=V3, 3=C1, 4=C2, 5=C3
|-
|07,09
|Leslie Stop
|(inverted Run!)
|-
|01,09
|Leslie Fast
|(same)
|-
|00,30
|Overdrive ON
|ignored (!)
|-
|02,30
|Overdrive
|Tube Amp Gain
|-
|00,08
|Perc ON
|(same)
|-
|01,08
|Perc THIRD
|(same)
|-
|02,08
|Perc FAST
|(same)
|-
|03,08
|Perc SOFT
|(same)
|-
|02,22
|Sustain ON
|Bass Sustain ON (!)
|-
|09,09
|Tube ON
|Reverb ON (!)
|-
|07,02
|User Switch
|Audio Config A/B (!)
|-
|00,07
|Manual Bass
|Key Split ON (!)
|}
 

===#3 Versatile MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Versatile set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

'''[https://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Versatile_CCs_5528.pdf HX3.5 Versatile MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#4 Nord C1/C2 MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5)'''

Nord C1/C2 set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|4
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|111
|Slider
|Tube Amp Gain
|
|-
|1
|113
|Slider
|Hi Equ
|HX3 Tone Pot
|-
|1
|102
|Slider
|Reverb Amount
|
|-
|1
|96
|Switch
|Reverb Type
|0 = Off, 1 = Rev I, 2 = Rev II, 3 = Rev I+II
|-
|1
|97
|Switch
|Reverb On/Off
|
|-
|1
|16..24
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|2
|16..24
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|16..17
|Slider
|Pedal Drawbars
|
|-
|3
|18
|Slider
|Pedal Pluck
|
|-
|3
|19
|Slider
|Pedal Release
|Sustain length
|-
|1
|87
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|27
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|28
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|85
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|85
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|84
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|}

 

===#5 Voce Drawbars===

Using your HX3 board with Voce MIDI Drawbars is straightforward, as the Voce module sends on one MIDI channel only (i.e. upper manual). Please note that Voce MIDI Drawbars does not send drawbar data unless you press the “Drawbar/Save” button, so that its LED lights up. You may change the Voce MIDI Drawbars send channel (back rotary HEX switch) at any time to lower (2) and bass channel (3), although this is somewhat inconvenient. In case of your technician has installed a toggle switch on the back side, channels can be changed easily.

Voce CC set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''HX3 Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1, 2
|68
|Switch
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|
|-
|1, 2
|70
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1, 2
|71
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1, 2
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1, 2
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1, 2
|87, 89
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|88
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass" on Voce
|-
|1, 2
|90
|Slider
|Reverb
|"Hum" on Voce, 0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1, 2
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Distortion" on Voce, same as CC #7
|-
|1, 2
|92
|Switch
|Rotary Stop/Run
|
|-
|1, 2
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|0..23 = V1, 24..42 = V2, 43..64 = V3, 65..90 = C1, 91..110 = C2, 111..127 = C3
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 5 1/3
|
|-
|3
|14
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|3
|15
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|}

 

===#6 KeyB Duo===

Italian KeyB/Diversi controller set supports three MIDI channels.

KeyB set accepts program changes for upper and lower manual on separate MIDI channels, range 0..15.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Master Volume
|

|-
|1
|9
|Fixed
|Reverb 0..3
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3

|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|68
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|0 = SLOW, 64 = STOP, 127 = FAST

|-
|1
|70
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|
|-
|1
|71
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|
|-
|1
|72
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|73
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|79
|Switch
|Split ON
|"String Bass" on KeyB
|-
|1
|89
|Slider
|Percussion Level
|"Key Click" on KeyB
|-
|1
|90
|Fixed
|Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on KeyB, scaled to 0..3
|-
|1
|91
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|"Tube Amp Drive" on KeyB
|-
|1
|95
|Switch
|Vibrato Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|93
|Fixed
|Vibrato Knob
|18 = V1, 79 = C1, 36 = V2, 100 = C2, 58 = V3, 122 = C3
|-
|1
|103
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Bass Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|104
|Slider
|Tone
|"Treble Equ" on KeyB
|-
|1
|105
|Slider
|Pedal Sustain
|
|-
|1
|106
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"Volume Soft" on KeyB
|-
|2
|12..20
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|Same as 21..29 on Channel 1
|-
|2
|95
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|3
|12
|Slider
|Bass DB 16
|
|-
|3
|13
|Slider
|Bass DB 8
|
|-
|}

 

===#7 Hamichord/Mojo===

Italian Hamichord/Mojo controller set supports only base MIDI channel. Key ON/OFF data of channel 2 (lower) and 3 (pedals) will be accepted, though.

Hamichord/Mojo CC set will not accept Program Change messages since Hamichord/Mojo always sends a "snapshot" of all MIDI CCs when changing a preset.

{| border="1" cellpadding="8" cellspacing="0"
|'''Channel'''
|'''CC#'''
|'''Type'''
|'''Function'''
|'''Remarks'''
|-
|1
|1
|Fixed
|Rotary Slow/Fast
|Modulation Wheel, 0..30 = SLOW, 31..94 = STOP, 95..127 = FAST
|-
|1
|7
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|
|-
|1
|11
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|
|-
|1
|12..20
|Slider
|Upper Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|21..29
|Slider
|Lower Drawbars
|
|-
|1
|30
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 16
|
|-
|1
|31
|Slider
|Pedal DDB 8
|
|-
|1
|32
|Fixed
|Vibr Knob
|0..21 = V1, 22..43 = C1, 44..65 = V2, 66..87 = C2, 88..109 = V3, 110..127 = C3
|-
|1
|34
|Slider
|Swell Pedal
|same as #11
|-
|1
|35
|Slider
|Amp 122 Volume
|same as #7, "Tube Amp Drive" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|38
|Slider
|Bass Pedal Sustain
|"Keyclick" on Hamichord/Mojo
|-
|1
|39
|Fixed
|Reverb
|0..23 = OFF, 24..47 = Rev 1, 48..63 = Rev 2, 64..127 = Rev 3
|-
|1
|42
|Switch
|Percussion ON
|
|-
|1
|43
|Switch
|Percussion SOFT
|inverted!
|-
|1
|44
|Switch
|Percussion FAST
|inverted!
|-
|1
|45
|Switch
|Percussion THIRD
|
|-
|1
|46
|Switch
|Vibr Upper ON
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Vibr Lower ON
|
|-
|1
|48
|Switch
|Rotary RUN
|
|-
|1
|47
|Switch
|Rotary SLOW/FAST
|
|-
|1
|54
|Switch
|Audio Config A/B
|"L/R out select" on Mojo
|-
|1
|91
|Fixed
|TG Leakage
|"Crosstalk" on Mojo
|-
|1
|92
|Fixed
|TG Cap Set
|"Keyclick length" on Mojo
|-
|1
|95
|Slider
|Swell Trim Cap
|"Percussion Volume" on Mojo
|}

 

===#8 HX3/KBP MIDI CC Set===

'''(Only available on HX3.5 and HX3.6)'''

HX3/KBP set supports MIDI channels for upper manual, lower manual and bass pedal. This MIDI CC set has been designed for use with the TouchOSC app.

'''Please note''': In addition to MIDI base channel, base channel+1, and base channel+2, the HX3/KBP set uses base channel+3 for specific TouchOSC commands. Avoid assigning base channel+3 to other instruments.

'''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/MIDI_Touchpad_CCs_560x.pdf HX3.5/KBP MIDI CC Set documentation, printable PDF file]''' 

 

===#9, #10 MIDI Custom CC===

HX3.4 FW #3.6x and up provides a "custom MIDI CC" set, which may be altered to your needs by using ''HX3 Remote'' application (HX3.4 only). By factory default, it is set to accept Nord C2 MIDI data (also compatible with Ocean Beach DB-1 controller). See wiki page '''[[HX3_Remote_Application#Editing_MIDI_Custom_CCs]]''' on how to create a custom CC set and store it to HX3. Please note that currently the custom MIDI CC set only accepts controller commands on upper manual MIDI channel (1 on factory default).

 

From HX3.5 Fimware 5.61 on, in principle all CC Sets can be changed. With this firmware HX3.5 also sends the set CCs. For editing, use the built-in CC Set Editor in the ''HX3.5 Editor''. One limitation concerns the CC Sets for Hammond, which work with unusual assignment of the Drawbar values and NRPNs; these are "hard-wired" on the receiving end.

 

==Additional Info==

HX3 mk4 only: Firmware #3.6x and FPGA #20072014 or newer provide a '''secondary MIDI input''' (merged with other) and also send MIDI CCs according to NI B4 from all local controllers (drawbars/buttons/switches).

HX3.6 Installationsanleitung

2023-06-06T09:59:39Z

Christian: /* Weitere Taster/Schalter */

'''>>[[HX3.6 Installation Manual]] (english)'''

 '''Fassung vom 17. April 2023, für Firmware Version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 Einplatinen-Sound-Engine zum Anschluss eines beliebigen Keyboards, zum Einbau in vorhandene Orgeln oder zur MIDI-Steuerung'''

[[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|800px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6-Platine einbaufertig''']]

== Vorwort ==

Die Installation von HX3.6 sollte nur von einem qualifizierten Techniker durchgeführt werden. Sie sollten mit der Montage von Flachbandkabeln, der Installation von Crimpkontakten und dem Löten von empfindlichen Teilen vertraut sein. Wichtig: Die Platine enthält statisch empfindliche Bauteile. Verwenden Sie unbedingt antistatisches Werkzeug und geerdetes Lötwerkzeug. HX3.6-Firmware-Versionen sind sowohl für die MIDI-Steuerung als auch für die direkte Tastatursteuerung mittels unserer FatarScan2-, Scan61-Inline-, Scan16-Strip- und (veralteten) OrganScan61-Karten verfügbar.

* Die Platine wird ab Werk konfiguriert als MIDI-Expander. Nach Anschluss der Betriebsspannung und einer MIDI-Verbindung ist sie '''auch ohne angeschlossene Peripheriebausteine''' (d.h. offene Steckverbinder) spielbereit.

* Für Updates und zum Download des HX3.6 Managers besuchen Sie die '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6-Download-Seite]'''. Dort finden Sie aktuelle und Beta-Firmware, Handbücher, Schaltpläne und Tools. Die Updates in der ZIP-Datei HX36_Manager_6xxx.zip enthalten die Anwendung ''HX3.6 Manager'' sowie DSP-Firmware, Soundbänke, FPGA-Konfigurationsdatei und Scan-Treiber.

* Ein kompletter Satz PDF-Schaltpläne, auch für die Peripherie, steht zum Download bereit auf unserer '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Schematics-Seite]''' und '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings-Seite]'''.

* Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard-Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für Gebrauchsanweisungen nach der Installation.

* Der '''HX3.6 Editor''' (für die Installation erforderlich) ist Bestandteil des '''HX3.6 Manager'''-Pakets. Eine Bedienungsanleitung steht als PDF zum Download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf auf unserem Update Server]''' zur Verfügung.

== Steckverbinder und Jumper ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Bauteil-/Steckverbinderplatzierung (auch als PDF verfügbar, siehe [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php auf unserem '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#F8F8F8;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
|style="background-color:#FFFADA"| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
|6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
|6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
|style="background-color:#F9C6BA"| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug Port (nicht verwenden!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC Eingang, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus auf Mittelkontakt
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input/output, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| 4014-basiertes Scan-Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 oder Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| ARM Cortex M3 Debug Port (nicht verwenden!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
|style="background-color:#"| SD card adapter
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Anschluss für FT800 Grafik-Display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
|style="background-color:#AEC905"| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
|style="background-color:#FBD8C9"| Serielle Schnittstelle für FTDI-Kabel
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
|style="background-color:#EF7D4B"| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch (Achtung: falsche Beschriftung "SWELL" auf Platine!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector FC-7-kompatibler Schweller (Achtung: falsche Beschriftung "FOOTSW" auf Platine!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Vibrato-Drehschalter
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), beide Pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC-Eingang auf PL9/PL11 (Steckernetzteilanschluss) wenn gejumpert 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (nicht verwenden) 
|-
! JP4
| Stromversorgung über USB (kann Störgeräusch verursachen)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), beide Pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default Jumper-Einstellung: 2 Jumper auf PL20 pin 2-3 und 5-6 (linker Pin ist 1) für zweiten MIDI IN''
|}

== Stromversorgung ==

Das HX3.6-Mainboard kann entweder über den koaxialen '''DC-Eingang PL9''' (5,5/2,1 mm-Stecker, Plus am Mittelstift, DC 9V 500mA Steckernetzteil) oder über die '''grünen DC-Anschlüsse''' PL11 (9 bis 12V Eingang) oder PL10 (5V Eingang; 5V Ausgang bei Versorgung an DC-Buchse PL11 oder PL9) mit Strom versorgt werden. '''Spannungen über 5,2V an PL11 zerstören die Platine!'''

Wenn Sie eine externe '''5V DC''' Versorgung am '''DC-Eingang PL9''' verwenden müssen, stecken Sie den Jumper JP2 (neben der DC-Buchse). Wir raten von dieser Konfiguration ab, da der versehentliche Anschluss einer DC-Versorgung mit mehr als 5V Ausgangsspannung zur '''Zerstörung der Platine''' führt!

Nach dem Einschalten flackert eine rote LED in der Nähe von PL17 kurz auf; sie flackert auch, wenn der HX3.6-Controller beschäftigt ist. Wenn die TrueOrgan-Sound-Engine bereit ist, wird eine gelbe LED gedimmt; sie "atmet" mit der Geschwindigkeit der Rotationssimulation. Wenn der Effekt-/GM-DSP bereit ist, blinkt eine blaue LED im Sekundentakt. Die blaue LED flackert ein/3x kurz aus, wenn der DSP bereit ist, ein DFU-Firmware-Update per USB zu akzeptieren.

== HX3.6 für den ersten Gebrauch vorbereiten ==

Ab Werk sind die HX3.6-Karten als MIDI-Expander konfiguriert (keine analogen Eingänge). Sie sollte mit MIDI-Input einen grundlegenden Orgelklang an den Audioausgängen liefern, auch wenn keine anderen Peripheriegeräte angeschlossen sind. Grundfunktionen sind verfügbar, wenn ein Menü-Panel angeschlossen ist. Zu anderen Installationen müssen Sie zumindest einige '''System Init'''-Parameter einstellen. Siehe Abschnitt '''Installation mit dem HX3.6 Manager''' weiter unten.

===Menü-Panel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 Menü-Panel''', bestückt mit optionalen LEDs]]

Unser [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] ermöglicht die bequeme Einstellung verschiedener HX3-Parameter, um Ihr Setup zu optimieren. Zwei Versionen sind erhältlich, die kurze Version ohne Anzeige-LEDs ist für den Einbau in Orgeln gedacht.

Das Menü-Panel wird über ein 10pol. Flachbandkabel an '''PL26 PANEL''' angeschlossen. Wird das Menü-Panel zusammen mit Preset16- oder Extend16-Platinen eingesetzt, sollte das Menü-Panel das letzte Modul in der Bus-Kette an PL26 sein, da es nur einen Bus-Anschluss aufweist.

Neuere Menü-Panel der langen Ausführung besitzen einen separaten Anschluss für die 7 LEDs. Dieser wird mit '''PL35''' des Mainboards verbunden.

===Serielles USB-Kabel===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI-Kabel verbunden mit HX3''']]

Zur schnellen Konfiguration des Boards können Sie eine serielle Verbindung über ein FTDI-USB-Adapterkabel oder ein USB-Interface verwenden, das mit PL22 verbunden wird (Kabelfarben aufgedruckt). Alternativ können Sie den USB-Anschluss oder sogar die MIDI IN/OUT-Buchsen über ein USB-MIDI-Interface eines Fremdherstellers verwenden. Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für weitere Details.

=== Konfiguration per SD-Karte ===

Wenn unser [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/sd-card-adapter SD-Kartenadapter] mit eingesteckter SD-Karte (FAT32-formatiert) eingesteckt ist, startet HX3.6 nach dem Einschalten grundsätzlich im Bootloader-Update-Modus. Starten Sie ein Update mit einem Druck auf den Menupanel-Drehknopf. Es werden nur die Teile aktualisiert, für die eine entsprechende Datei (.BIN, .DAT) auf der Karte gefunden wird.

Alternativ zu einzelnen Dateien kann mit dem ''HX3.6 Manager BootLoad'' auch eine einzelne gepackte DFU-Datei erstellt und auf der Karte gespeichert werden. Sie wird von HX3.6 genau so behandelt wie ein DFU-Update über USB-Kabel. Updates werden von uns in der Regel als eine solche DFU-Datei geliefert.

Bitte beachten Sie: Wenn eine neue Firmware installiert wurde, bleiben die bisherigen ''System Inits''-Einstellungen und erhalten; andere Parameter müssen möglicherweise geändert werden, damit Ihre Konfiguration funktioniert.

Fortgeschrittene Benutzer können eigene INI-Skripte erstellen, die alle notwendigen Befehle enthalten und im Grunde dasselbe tun wie der HX3.6-Editor. Details finden Sie auf der Seite '''[[HX3.6 Verwendung von SD-Karten]]'''.

=== Konfiguration mit dem HX3.6-Manager===

Verbinden Sie alternativ den HX3.6 mit Ihrem PC über USB. Starten Sie den '''HX3.6 Manager''', klicken sie '''Connect''' und öffnen Sie das Fenster '''Updater'''. Vollständige oder teilweise Updates können über Menüs ausgeführt werden. Ein klick auf "Get Board Info" sollte die aktuelle Konfiguration anzeigen. Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für Details.

Checkliste:

* Funktioniert MIDI IN? Fabrikneue Boards sollten an den Audioausgängen einen einfachen Orgelsound liefern, der MIDI-Eingang liegt auf MIDI-Kanal 1. Der rechte 5-polige DIN-Anschluss (von hinten gesehen) ist immer ein MIDI IN.
* Ist ein passender Scan-Treiber installiert? Sie können den Scan-Treiber mit Hilfe des Updaters im HX3.6 Manager ersetzen. Verwenden Sie das Menü Update und wählen Sie "Scan Driver file". Der HX3.6 Updater fragt nach einer DAT-Datei, öffnen Sie entweder ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'' oder ''scanfatr.dat'', je nach Ihren Anforderungen.
* Sind die HX3.6-System-Inits korrekt? HX3.6 scannt keine Tasten oder Analogeingänge, wenn diese nicht korrekt eingestellt sind. Verwenden Sie den Editor im HX3.6 Manager und klicken Sie auf die rote Schaltfläche '''System Inits'''. Klicken Sie auf '''Get Group''' im Action-Menü, um die Tabelleneinträge zu aktualisieren.
* Funktionieren die analogen Drawbar-Eingänge? Wenn alle analogen Eingänge aktiviert sind (Parameter 1503>1), prüfen Sie, ob Änderungen an den Zugriegeln auf '''Upper DB''' bzw. allen anderen analogen Eingangsgruppen zu sehen sind, wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche '''Get Group''' klicken.
* Funktionieren die analogen Volumen-Eingänge? Nicht funktionierende Analogeingänge wurden möglicherweise auf "nicht zugewiesen" umgewidmet. Siehe Gruppe '''Analog Remap''' im Editor.

=== Updates ===

Einzelheiten finden Sie auf der Seite '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' oder auf der Seite '''[[HX3.6 Verwendung von SD-Karten]]'''.

=== Aktualisieren von DSP-Soundbänken ===

Siehe Seite '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für weitere Details.

==Parameter-Optimierung ==

Wenn Sie Hardware zu Ihrem HX3.6-Board hinzufügen, müssen Sie möglicherweise einige Parameter anpassen, um sie zum Laufen zu bringen. Ab Werk ist der HX3.6 als MIDI-Expander konfiguriert; er fragt keine angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte außer dem Menü-Panel ab und steuert sie nicht. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel die FatarScan2-Karte anschließen, müssen Sie auch den Scan-Treiber aktualisieren. Wenn Sie Zugriegel, Tasten oder Schalter anschließen, müssen Sie diese aktivieren.

Das Ändern von Parametern, die nicht im Menüsystem vorhanden sind, ist nur mit dem HX3.6 Editor möglich.

== MIDI-Konfiguration ==

Die HX3.6-Karte ist ab Werk als MIDI-Expander mit zwei MIDI-Eingängen konfiguriert. Der linke MIDI-DIN-Anschluss (von hinten gesehen) ist standardmäßig MIDI IN2. Er kann als MIDI OUT konfiguriert werden, indem Sie die Jumper-Einstellung an der Stiftleiste PL20 gemäß der folgenden Tabelle ändern (Pin 1 liegt in der Nähe des USB-Anschlusses, Pin 10 in der Nähe der DIN-Buchse). Für die +5V-Phantomspeisung an MIDI IN setzen Sie Jumper an den Pins 7-8 und 9-10. Wenn die Jumper für die Phantomspeisung installiert sind, führt die DIN-Buchse Masse am mittleren Pin 2 und +5V an den beiden ansonsten unbenutzten äußeren Pins 1 und 3. Die Phantomspeisung kann zur Versorgung der an die linke DIN-Buchse angeschlossenen '''BASS25 MIDI''' Scan-Karte verwendet werden.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - Funktion der linken MIDI-Buchse
|-
!Funktion
!JP auf Pin
!JP auf Pin
!Gnd (blau) JP auf Pin
!Vcc (rot) JP auf Pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|offen
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|offen
|offen
|-
!MIDI IN m. Phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 ist links, von hinten (Platinenrand) aus gesehen''
|}

MIDI über USB ist verfügbar, wenn die USB-Buchse PL25 installiert ist oder ein Mini-USB-Buchsenadapter (optional) oder das HX3.5 Extension Board per Kabel mit PL32 verbunden ist. Bitte beachten Sie: Aufgrund von Hardware-Einschränkungen dürfen '''MIDI IN2 und USB MIDI IN nicht gleichzeitig verwendet werden'''. Es treten sonst Übertragungsfehler auf!

==USB Port==

An Position PL25 kann bei Bedarf ein USB-Typ-B-Stecker eingelötet werden. Er ist werksseitig nicht bestückt, um die mechanische Kompatibilität mit bestehenden Rückwänden zu gewährleisten. Zusätzlich ist das USB-Signal auf der Stiftleiste PL24 (in der Nähe der USB-Buchse) verfügbar, um USB zu unserem HX3.5 Extension Board zu leiten. Der USB-Anschluss ist standardmäßig als "MIDI over USB"-Gerät konfiguriert. Im DFU-Update-Modus wird er zum Anschluss für die HX3.6-DFU-Update-Anwendung.

'''Wichtig:''' Wenn Sie eine "MIDI-over-USB"-Verbindung verwenden (wie beim HX3.6 Manager), trennen Sie alle MIDI-Geräte von der sekundären (linken) MIDI-Eingangs-DIN-Buchse, da sie sich dieselbe MIDI-Eingangsleitung teilen.

Der USB-Anschluss wird auch für DSP-Firmware- oder Soundbank-Updates verwendet.

===Installation des Mini-USB-Adapters===

Zur Verwendung mit der HX3.4-Rückwand mit Mini-USB-Ausschnitt schließen Sie den Mini-USB-Adapter wie folgt an:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB-Adapter
!USB-Kabelfarbe
|-
|G
|GND
|schwarz
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|grün
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|weiß
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|rot
|}
 

==Audio-Ausgänge==

Zusätzlich zu den 1/4"-Audiobuchsen links/rechts liegt das Stereo-Audiosignal an PL3 an (Mitte = analoge Masse).

==Analoge Eingänge anschließen==

HX3.6 bietet '''24 interne Analogeingänge''', die alle auf den Stiftleisten '''PL31 und PL32''' liegen, sowie bis zu '''64 externe Analogeingänge''' über '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' Zugriegel- und '''PTX4-25/35''' Potentiometer-Baugruppen, die am '''PL27 MPX-Bus''' angeschlossen sind. Alle analogen Eingänge sind DC-gesteuert. Der Eingangsspannungsbereich reicht von 0V (aus oder minimale Lautstärke) bis +3,3V (maximale Lautstärke). In der Werkskonfiguration sind alle Analogeingänge deaktiviert, so dass HX3.6 '''ohne angeschlossene Schalter/Zugriegel/Potis''' verwendet werden kann. Sie können die internen Anschlüsse PL31 und PL32 offen lassen, wenn Sie nur eine Steuerung über MIDI planen.

===Analoge Eingänge zuweisen===

Um analoge Steuereingänge zu aktivieren, setzen Sie in der Anwendung HX3.6-Editor den Parameter #1503 auf den Wert 2 (wenn alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegel an PL31/PL32 verwendet werden sollen) oder 3 (sonst). Einzelne Analogeingänge können im Abschnitt '''Analog Remap''' des HX3.6-Editors mit den Parametern #5000 bis #5023 (für die internen Eingänge PL31/PL32) und #5024 bis #5088 (externe DBX/PTX-Platinen an PL27) deaktiviert oder umgelenkt werden. Siehe Abschnitt [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Mischen_von_DB9.2FDB12-_und_DBX-Drawbar-Sets]] für weitere Details.

Wenn einzelne interne Eingangspins an PL31/PL32 nicht verwendet werden (d.h. offen bleiben, keine Zugriegel oder Potis installiert), setzen Sie den entsprechenden Parameter #5000..#5023 auf "254 - Nicht belegt". Um '''alle''' internen Eingänge an PL31/PL32 zu sperren, setzen Sie den ersten Parameter #5000 auf "255 - Ende der Tabelle". Gleiches gilt für PL27 MPX-Bus-Eingänge: Wenn keine zusätzlichen DBX- oder PTX-Karten angeschlossen sind, setzen Sie Parameter #5024 auf "255 - Ende der Tabelle".

Hinweis: Weisen Sie eine Orgelfunktion nicht mehr als einem Analogeingang zu.

===Eingabeprüfung & -überwachung===

Alle zugewiesenen Eingänge sollten mit einem physischen Steuerelement verbunden sein. Andernfalls "floaten" die Eingänge und HX3.6 sendet zufällige MIDI-Steuerungswerte mit einer hohen Rate; dies kann ein Update unmöglich machen.

Im HX3.6 Editor gibt es eine Überwachungsfunktion, mit der Sie die Zustände der physischen Tasten und die analogen Eingangsspannungen überprüfen können. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Input Monitor" und markieren Sie die Checkboxen der Eingangstypen, die Sie überwachen möchten. Änderungen der Eingangsspannung sollten sofort in der/den Tabelle(n) erscheinen. Wenn Sie auf einen Tabelleneintrag klicken, springt die Haupttabelle auf die zugehörige Zuweisungsgruppe.

==Interne Analogeingänge==

Um interne Analogeingänge an '''PL31 und PL32''' zu verwenden, setzen Sie ''System Inits'' Parameter #1503 auf 2 oder 3. Setzen Sie die ''Analog Remap''-Parameter #5000 bis #5023 entsprechend Ihrer Anschlussbelegung. Standardmäßig ist die Anschlussbelegung auf HX3.4-DB9/DB12-Kompatibilität eingestellt.

===Anschluss von Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Zugriegel- und Potianschluss an PL31 und PL32 (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Untermanual-Konfiguration mit DB12 (A#-Presettaste, links) und DB9-MPX (B-Presettaste, rechts). Anschluss an HX3 über langes Flachbandkabel (rechts). Die Oberemanual-Konfiguration ist ähnlich, verwendet aber DB9 oder DB11 anstelle von DB12.''']]

Die klassischen Zugriegelsets DB9/DB11/DB12 können für Einzelzugriegelkonfigurationen verwendet werden. Der Anschluss an unsere alten Zugriegelplatinen DB9 und DB12 ist einfach: DB9 (oben) wird an '''PL31 ANLG UPR''' angeschlossen, DB12 (unten) an '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' über ein 16-adriges Flachbandkabel (Länge bis zu 1m, Stecker 1:1 verdrahtet). DB9 bietet 3-polige Stiftleisten für den Anschluss von Tone- und Amp122 Volume-Potis.

Zusätzliche DB9-MPX-Karten (veraltet - verwenden Sie stattdessen DBX-Zugriegel-Module) können für Konfigurationen mit zwei Zugriegelsätzen pro Manual eingefügt werden. Sekundäre DB9-MPX-Drawbar-Sets sollten wie bei Hammond-Konsolen rechts neben den entsprechenden primären DB9- oder DB12-Drawbars angeordnet werden. Ein kurzes Flachbandkabel verbindet beide (siehe Bild).

DB9 und DB11/12 sind kompatibel und austauschbar, trotz zusätzlicher Zugriegel für Basspedal bzw. Tone/Amp-Volume.

===Anschließen anderer Zugriegel-Potis===

Sie können auch Ihre eigenen oder vorhandene Zugriegel wie folgt verwenden: Schließen Sie mindestens 9 Zugriegel oder Schieberegler und den Lautstärkeregler Leslie an '''PL31 ANLG UPR''' an. Der R-Wert sollte im Bereich von 10 kOhm liegen, '''linear taper''' (zum Beispiel Typ B10K). Höhere Widerstandswerte sind zulässig, wenn Sie an den Schleifer-Anschluss einen 100n-Keramikkondensator nach Masse schalten. Beachten Sie, dass die Verwendung von Zugriegel-Potentiometern mit logarithmischer Kennlinie, wie sie in verschiedenen älteren LSI- und Transistor-Orgeln zu finden sind, nicht zu einer korrekten Lautstärke und Zugriegelposition auf dem Menü-Panel führt.

Jeder Analogeingang kann im Abschnitt "Analog Remap" des HX3.6-Editors mit einer beliebigen Analogfunktion "weich verdrahtet" werden. Standardmäßig werden analoge Funktionen so zugeordnet, dass die HX3.4-Kompatibilität erhalten bleibt (siehe unten).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Steuerspannungen Obermanual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, Volumen des simulierten Röhrenverstärkers
|-
! Pin 12
| Zugewiesenes Poti (zuweisbar mit HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Poti gemeinsame Masse GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B Schaltsignal (kann mit Pin 16 verbunden werden)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Poti Ende 3.3V+ (Referenz)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Steuerspannungen Untermanual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Poti Bass Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Poti gemeinsame Masse GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B Schaltsignal (kann mit Pin 16 verbunden werden)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Poti Ende 3.3V+ (Referenz)
|}
 
Auch bei MIDI-Steuerung sollte für eine schnellere Reaktion ein Schwellpedal an die SWELL-Buchse angeschlossen werden. Dies überschreibt die MIDI-Lautstärkeregelung. Sie können ein Schwellpedal wie das Yamaha FC-7 oder ein einfaches Lautstärkepotentiometer an die SWELL-Buchse anschließen.

Auf der HX3-Hauptplatine sind werkseitig die Eingänge für die Tone/Treble- und Amp-Lautstärkeregelung aktiv (kann auch mit dem ''HX3.6 Editor'' geändert werden). Der Schleifer des Tone-Potis wird an Pin 10 von PL31 angeschlossen. Pin 11 wird zum Lautstärke-/Drive-Regler des Leslie-Verstärkers (obligatorisch). Der Schleifer des Amp-Volume-Potis wird an Pin 11 von PL31 angeschlossen. Beide Potis beginnen mit GND und enden mit Ref 3.3V+.

Bitte beachten Sie: Offene Analogeingänge (nicht beschaltet) "schweben" und ändern sich zufällig, auch bei aktiven Presets. Deaktivieren Sie nicht verwendete Eingänge mit dem Abschnitt ''Analog Remap'' im HX3.6-Editor (auf "254 - Not assigned" einstellen).

 

==Externe Analogeingänge (PL27 MPX-Bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9-Drawbar-Set zum Anschluss an PL27-MPX-Bus-Eingang, auf der rechten Seite gekürzt, um in die Orgel zu passen (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 Drawbar-Set in 9+3-Konfiguration für B3-ähnliche Installationen. Beachten Sie, dass der rechte Anschluss PL4 (Bottom Mount) nicht verwendet werden kann, da der Platz vom Zugriegel-Potentiometer belegt wird. Verwenden Sie den oberen Anschluss PL8 oder die rechten Lötpads zum Aneinanderreihen von Zugriegel-Sets. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX6-Zugriegelsatz und PTX4-35-Potentiometer-Baugruppe hintereinandergeschaltet, geeignet für ADRS-, Lautstärke- oder Equalizer-Regelung (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 und DBX9 Zugriegel-Sets verbunden mit oberen Anschlüssen. Alternativ können auch Lötpads auf der linken und rechten Seite verwendet werden. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Aufgrund einer Design-Fehlers bei den Zugriegelsätzen DBX12 v4 und DBX9 v4 (erste Serie) muss bei Verwendung der oberen Anschlüsse ein Draht an PL8 Pin 2 und Pin 5 angelötet werden, wie gezeigt. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]

Wir empfehlen die Baugruppen '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 oder 12 DrawBars gemultipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog-Eingänge gemultipleXed) und '''PTX4-25 oder PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometer gemultipleXed) für neue Orgel-Designs, da sie die Installation stark vereinfachen. Diese Baugruppen besitzen eigene Multiplexer/Schieberegister-ICs, so dass sie über das MPX-Bussystem, ein 10-adriges Flachbandkabel, das an '''PL27 MPX''' auf der HX3.6-Hauptplatine angeschlossen wird, in Reihe geschaltet werden können. Es können beliebig viele DBX6-, DBX9-, DBX12-, ANX8- und PTX4-Module in beliebiger Reihenfolge aneinandergereiht werden, bis die maximale Kapazität von 64 analogen Reglern erreicht ist. Die 24 internen Eingänge auf '''PL31/PL32''' können unabhängig davon genutzt werden, so dass sich insgesamt '''88 analoge Eingänge''' ergeben.

===DBX-Steckverbinder installieren===

DBX-Platinen sind mit zwei abgewinkelten 10-poligen Steckern versehen. Alle DBX-Zugriegelplatinen sind auch ohne Zugriegel-Potentiometer lieferbar. Bitte bestellen Sie Zugriegel-Potentiometer und -Kappen dafür gesondert. Stecken Sie die Zugriegel von der Unterseite der Platine (keine Siebdruckbeschriftung) an den gewünschten Positionen in die Lötpads, drehen Sie sie um und legen Sie sie vor dem Löten auf eine ebene Fläche, um gleichmäßige Abstände zu erhalten.

Für den Einsatz in engen Installationen können alle DBX-Platinen mit einem fein gezahnten Sägeblatt entlang der weißen Linien auf der Platine ohne Beeinträchtigung der Funktion getrennt werden. Dies sollte vor der Montage von Zugriegel-Potentiometern erfolgen.

===DBX6 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX6-Karten sind für ADSR, Equalizer oder Lautstärkeregler mit 4 bis 6 Zugriegeln geeignet. Bei 6 montierten Zugriegeln wird die rechte untere Position des Steckverbinders durch den letzten Zugriegel belegt. Verwenden Sie in diesem Fall Lötpad-Drahtverbindungen oder oben montierte Steckverbinder für die Anreihung von Boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX6 (Zugriegel für diverse Funktionen)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX9-Karten eignen sich für klassische 9-Zugriegel-Installationen an B3- oder M100-ähnlichen Orgelkonsolen. Sie bieten zusätzlich 3 analoge Eingänge (bei Bedarf) zum Anschluss eigener Potentiometer (10k bis 47k Typen geeignet). Um diese zu nutzen, setzen Sie den Lötpunkt-"Jumper" JP1 offen und JP2 geschlossen (Modus 12 Analogeingänge). Die Potentiometer-Eingänge stehen an dem 6-poligen Stecker PL2 zur Verfügung (nicht montiert; alle 6-poligen Stecker sind parallel verdrahtet, gleiche Pinbelegung). Die Eingänge sind auch an 5 Lötpads verfügbar, die mit AIN +9 bis AIN +11 gekennzeichnet sind, sowie an GND und VREF (gemeinsam für alle Potis). Die Jumper-Einstellungen geschehen durch Entfernen oder Hinzufügen von Lötpunkten. Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Bedienelements auf dem nächsten Modul in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper-Einstellungen DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars auf DBX9
|offen
|geschlossen
|-
!9 Drawbars und 1 bis 3 Potis auf DBX9
|geschlossen
|offen
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 harmonische Zugriegel, JP2 geschlossen)''
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX9 + 3 Analogeingänge
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 Zugriegel) plus 3 zusätzliche Potentiometer-Eingänge (JP1 geschlossen)''
|}

Die Belegung der 6-poligen Steckerleisten zum Anschluss weiterer Potentiometer ist wie folgt:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Belegung der 6-poligen Steckerleiste PL2
|-
!Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(nicht verbunden)
|-
!5
|VREF (gemeinsames Poti-Ende)
|-
!6
|GND (gemeinsamer Poti-Anfang)
|}

===DBX12 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX12-Platinen sind für 12-Zugriegel-Installationen auf '''H100-, Böhm- oder Wersi'''-ähnlichen Orgelpulten geeignet. Die Zugriegelpositionen DB+0 bis DB+11 sind bestückt, die ganz rechte Position R16 bleibt leer.

Es ist aber auch möglich, DBX12-Platinen in einer '''B3-ähnlichen 9+3'''-Zugriegelkonfiguration zu verwenden (d.h. 9 obere oder untere auf der linken Seite, eine Leerstelle und 3 Pedal-Zugriegel auf der rechten Seite). Bestücken Sie in diesem Fall nicht R13 (Leerstelle), sondern verwenden Sie stattdessen die Position R16 (ganz rechts). Beachten Sie, dass die Position R16 (Pedal Sustain) als Eingang #9 (R13) behandelt wird, nicht #12. In jedem Fall hat der DBX12 nur 12 Eingänge, nicht 13. Es ist '''nicht''' möglich, DBX12 als 3+9 Zugriegel (Pedalzugriegel auf der linken Seite) zu bestücken, da sich die Positionen R13 und R16 denselben Analogeingang teilen! Siehe Abschnitt [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Typische_Anwendungen]] für Details. Jumper-Einstellungen durch Entfernen oder Hinzufügen von Lötpunkten. Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelements des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper-Einstellungen DBX12
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars auf DBX12
|geschlossen
|offen
|-
!9+3 Drawbars auf DBX12
|geschlossen
|offen
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX12 in H100-Konfiguration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | kein R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| keiner
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Eingangsbelegung für H100-ähnliche Installation (12 Zugriegel) mit '''R13''' installiert, '''kein R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX12 in B3-ähnlicher Konfiguration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | kein R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| keiner
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 harmonische plus 3 Pedal-Zugriegel) mit '''R16''' installiert, '''kein R13''' ''
|}

===PTX4 Potentiometer-Modul===

Die Karten '''PTX4-25''' und '''PTX4-35''' verfügen über 4 hochwertige Potentiometer, wahlweise mit oder ohne Mittelrastung. Der einzige Unterschied ist der Abstand von einem Poti zum nächsten (25mm bei PTX4-25, 35mm bei PTX4-35). Beliebig viele PTX4-Karten können an beliebiger Stelle in die MPX-Bus-Kette eingefügt werden. Eine einzelne PTX4-Platine fügt +4 zum Nummerierungschema der Eingänge hinzu, wie oben erwähnt, d.h. wenn das erste (linke) Potentiometer zum Eingang #20 wurde ( wegen vorgeschalteter DBX-Platinen), ist das ganz rechte Potentiometer #23, und die nächste PTX- oder DBX-Platine (rechts angeschlossen) wird mit #24 beginnen.

PTX4-Potentiometerplatinen sind '''nicht''' zur Verwendung als externe Potentiometer an den DBX9-Analogeingängen vorgesehen. Verwenden Sie stattdessen separate Potentiometer.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung PTX4-25 und PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Poti
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 ist das erste linke Potentiometer''
|}

Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelement des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls). 

===ANX8 Analoges Eingangsmodul===

'''ANX8'''-Boards verfügen über 8 zusätzliche analoge Eingänge zum Anschluss von eingebauten Potentiometern, Zugriegeln, Pitch/Modulationsrädern und anderen analogen Bedienelementen. Es können beliebig viele ANX8-Karten an beliebiger Stelle in die MPX-Buskette eingefügt werden, wobei PL9 "NEXT BOARD" zum Ende der Kette zeigt. Eine einzelne ANX8-Karte fügt +8 zur Eingangsnummerierung hinzu, wie oben erwähnt, d.h. wenn das erste (ganz linke) Potentiometer zum Eingang #20 wurde ( wegen vorgeschalteter DBX-Boards), ist das ganz rechte Potentiometer #27, und die nächste PTX- oder DBX-Platine (rechts angeschlossen) wird mit #28 beginnen.

Es stehen 8 separate Eingänge an den 3-poligen Stiftleisten PL1 bis PL8 zur Verfügung. Verbinden Sie den/die mit "REF" gekennzeichneten Pin(s) mit dem Ende des Potentiometers, Pin "GND" mit dem Anfang, Pin "AIN" mit dem Schleifer.

Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelements des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Eingang
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

Zur komfortablen Verdrahtung sind die Analogeingänge auch in Gruppen von 4 Eingängen zugänglich (PL11 mit den Eingängen +0 bis +3, PL12 mit den Eingängen +4 bis +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Eingang
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Hintereinanderschaltung von DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 und PTX4===

Schließen Sie die erste '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' oder '''PTX4''' Baugruppe an PL27 an. Der äußerste linke Regler, den HX3.6 in der Kette "sieht", ist der externe MPX-Analogeingang #0 (zugewiesen durch Parameter #5024). Die Nummer zählt bis zur nächsten DBX/PTX-Baugruppe, die an den Daisy-Chain-Anschluss angeschlossen ist. D.h. wenn Sie einen DBX9 und einen PTX4 (in dieser Reihenfolge) verketten, wird das ganz linke (erste) Potentiometer am PTX4 zum Regler #9, zugewiesen durch Parameter #5033 (#0 bis #8 durch DBX9 verbraucht). Das Hinzufügen eines DBX12 beginnt bei #13, zugewiesen durch Parameter #5037, und so weiter.

Ihre Kette sieht nun so aus:
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

Hinweis: PL1 (links oben, unten montiert) und PL7 sind intern parallel geschaltet, ebenso wie PL3 (rechts oben, unten montiert) und PL8. Diese Anschlüsse können alternativ verwendet werden (siehe [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Installations-Alternativen]] für Details).

Wie bereits erwähnt, können DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 oder PTX4 in beliebiger Reihenfolge angeordnet werden, solange sie eine Kette von einer Karte zur anderen bilden. Die Parametrierung beginnt immer bei #0 (Parameter #5024) für das am weitesten links stehende Bedienelement in der Kette. Es ist möglich, einzelne Zugriegel-Eingänge zu '''überspringen''', indem ihr Zuordnungsparameter auf "254 - Not assigned" gesetzt wird. Dies kann bei Leerstellen in der Zugriegelanordnung sinnvoll sein, z. B. zwischen harmonischen und ADSR-Zugriegeln oder Obermanual- und Pedalzugriegeln. Alle DBX-Karten sind ohne montierte Zugriegel-Potentiometer erhältlich, so dass Sie diese nach Ihren Wünschen konfigurieren können.

===Typische Anwendungen===
Eine typische Orgelkonfiguration (9 Zugriegel pro Manual, 3 für Pedal) mit DBX12 kann wie folgt aussehen:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
oder, je nach Installation (um die Kabellänge kurz zu halten):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
Eine H100-ähnliche Installation kann wie folgt aussehen:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Hinweis: PL1 (links oben, unten montiert) und PL7 sind intern parallel geschaltet, ebenso wie PL3/PL4 (rechts oben, unten montiert) und PL8. Diese Anschlüsse können alternativ verwendet werden (siehe [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Installations-Alternativen]] für Details).

====Installations-Alternativen====

DBX-Platinen können miteinander verkettet (hintereinandergeschaltet) werden, indem Sie 10-polige Steckverbinder von unten (linke und rechte Seite der Platine), 10-polige Steckverbinder von oben oder auf Lötpads gelötete Drähte verwenden. Mit jeder Karte werden 2 abgewinkelte 10-polige Steckverbinder mitgeliefert; Sie können auch gerade Steckverbinder verwenden, wenn der Platz dies zulässt.

Statt Flachbandkabel zu verwenden, können benachbarte DBX-Platinen mit Hilfe von Lötpunkten und 6 kurzen Drahtstücken (in obiger Tabelle mit "=" gekennzeichnet) dort verkettet werden, wo die Platinen "aneinanderstoßen". Lötpads auf der linken und rechten Seite ermöglichen eine einfache Verbindung von einer Platine zur nächsten durch '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG und NRST''' Pads ('''VREF3 bleibt unbeschaltet''', ebenso wie zusätzliche Potentiometer-Pads!)

Die Platinen können auch '''entlang der weißen Linien''' abgesägt werden, wenn kein Platz von einem Zugriegel zum nächsten auf einer anderen Platine vorhanden ist. Trennen Sie die Platine bei Bedarf '''vor''' der Montage der Zugriegel-Potentiometer. Die Platinen verfügen über zusätzliche Lötpads für die Verkettung mit Drähten, auch wenn die Platine gekürzt wird. Die letzte DBX-Platine der Reihe sollte jedoch PL3 (DBX9) oder PL4 (DBX12) beibehalten, da Sie in Zukunft eventuell weitere DBX- oder PTX4-Platinen hinzufügen möchten. '''Auch hier gilt: Planen Sie sorgfältig, bevor Sie Zugriegel-Potis einlöten oder Boards absägen!'''

 

====Zweifache/sekundäre DBX-Drawbar-Sätze====

Klassische Konsolorgel-Installationen erfordern zwei Zugriegelsätze für jedes Manual. Die Verwendung von doppelten Zugriegelsätzen mit dem DBX-Sammelsystem unterscheidet sich von alten DB9-MPX-Installationen. In DBX-Installationen können alle Zugriegel von der Firmware "gesehen" werden, auch die inaktiven (sie werden nur übersprungen, wenn der Zugriegelsatz nicht aktiv ist). Setzen Sie den Parameter #1503 auf 3 (DBX-Modus) und weisen Sie allen Eingängen, die primäre Zugriegel sind, die Werte ''Upr1'' oder ''Lwr1'' zu, während sekundäre Zugriegel zu ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' werden (128 und höher).

Die sekundären Zugriegel werden aktiviert, wenn die im jeweiligen Manual eingestellte '''Voice''' der Nummer in "System Inits" Parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number) entspricht, andernfalls werden sie übersprungen und die primären Zugriegel werden aktiv.

====Mischen von DB9/DB12- und DBX-Drawbar-Sets====

Da die internen Eingänge an PL31/PL32 auch in DBX-Konfigurationen als Zugriegel-Eingänge verwendet werden können, dürfen vorhandene DB9/DB12- und sogar DB9-MPX-Zugriegel, die an PL31/PL32 angeschlossen sind (zugewiesen durch ''Analog Remap'' #5000 bis #5023), weiterhin verwendet werden, entweder als primäre oder sekundäre Zugriegel-Sets.

* Wenn '''alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegelboards''' als sekundäre Zugriegel-Sets an PL31/PL32 angeschlossen sind, setzen Sie den Wert von Parameter #1503 auf 2 (DB9-MPX-Modus). In diesem Fall '''verwenden Sie nicht''' die sekundären Zugriegel-Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' für die Eingänge (Parameterwerte 128 und höher) im Abschnitt "Analog Remap"; die Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' werden ignoriert.

* Wenn alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegelboards '''nicht''' verwendet werden, setzen Sie den Wert von Parameter #1503 auf 3 (DBX-Modus). In diesem Fall können die sekundären Zugriegel-Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' für Eingänge (Parameterwerte ab 128) im Abschnitt "Analog Remap" verwendet werden.

 

==Digitale Eingänge==

Das HX3.6-System bietet insgesamt 64 interne (logische) Schalterfunktionen oder "Tabs" (z. B. "Tube Amp Bypass" oder "H100 Keying Mode") sowie einige Sonderfunktionen (ab Firmware 5.7, z.B. Transpose Up/Down). Das Mainboard besitzt '''16 interne digitale Eingänge''' an PL35/PL36 (erweiterbar durch bis zu 5 externe Boards '''Preset16''' oder '''Extend16''' auf bis zu 96 Preset- und Schalterfunktionen) zum Anschluss von Schaltern oder Tastern plus einen Drehschaltereingang (Vibrato-Knopf V1..C3). Schalter sind einrastende Taster, Wipp- oder Kippschalter. Taster sind momentane Schaltkontakte, normalerweise offen. Alle Eingänge sind aktiv low, d.h. sie liegen auf Masse, wenn der Schalter/Taster betätigt wird. Sie können die Schalteranschlüsse offen lassen, wenn Sie HX3.6 nur über MIDI steuern wollen.

===Input Monitor===

Eine sehr hilfreiche Funktion des HX3.6 Editors ist der ''Input Monitor''. Sie können hiermit die Funktion aller Taster und Schalter überprüfen. Aktive (gedrückte) Buttons werden mit "ON" gekennzeichnet.

Durch Klick in die Input-Tabelle erfahren Sie auch, welchem HX3.6-Tab der Eingang bzw. der Button zugeordnet ist. Umgekehrt springt das aktive Feld in den Input-Monitor-Tabellen beim Klick auf eine Zuordnung in ''Switch Remap'' auf den zugeordneten Eingang.

===Onboard-Eingänge PL35/PL36===

Die Steckverbinder '''PL35 und PL36''' führen die 16 internen digitalen Eingänge; hier können eigene Taster/Schalter oder ein Panel16-Board angeschlossen werden (siehe unter '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Viele Installationen werden mit diesen 16 Tabs auskommen.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinbelegung PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default-Funktion
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinbelegung PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default-Funktion
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Taster oder Schalter====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss von Tasten mit LED-Anzeigen an PL35 PERC/VIBON und PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Verwenden Sie für blaue oder weiße LEDs einen R-Wert von 1k, da diese LEDs sehr hell sind.''']]

Anstelle von Panel16 können Sie auch Ihre eigenen Taster oder Registerkartenschalter (bis zu 16) direkt an die HX3.6-Hauptplatine anschließen. Jede Funktion wird entweder durch eine Taste oder einen Schalter (abhängig vom Parameter '''Button Mask''' in den Systemeinstellungen des HX3.6-Editors) an den digitalen Eingängen PL35/PL36 aktiviert. Bei Tastern schaltet ein kurzzeitiger Kontakt mit Masse an jedem PL35/PL36-Pin den Status um und steuert Anzeige-LEDs an (siehe Schaltplan). Bei Schaltern kann die Anzeige-LED weggelassen werden, da der mechanische Schalter den aktuellen Zustand anzeigt. Lassen Sie unbenutzte digitale Eingänge offen.

====Panel16====

Die einfachste Lösung für ein Schaltpanel ist die Verwendung [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/panel16 unserer Panel16-Platine], die über zwei 10-polige Flachbandkabel mit '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL und PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' verbunden ist. '''Panel16''' bietet 16 Tasten für die komplette Steuerung des HX3; fügen Sie einfach den Drehschalter für die Vibratotiefe hinzu.

Panel16 hat 4 "Common Preset"-Tasten im Layout für Standard-Orgelinstallationen. Die "Common Preset"-Tasten sind binär kodiert, so dass mehr als eine Preset-Taste aktiv sein kann (gleichzeitiges Drücken). Dies ermöglicht 16 Tastenkombinationen (alle aus bis alle an), die den Common Presets 0 (live) bis 15 entsprechen. Alternativ können diese Tasten zur Auswahl von V1-V3-Vibrato oder C1-C3-Chorus-Tiefe verwendet werden. In diesem Fall entfällt der Vibrato-Drehschalter an PL24; stellen Sie dann ''System Inits'' Parameter #1497 auf 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default-Button-Zuordnung Panel16 an PL25/26
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons obere Reihe
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe mit Vibrato-Buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe mit Preset-Buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Die Positionen der Tasten, die für Common Presets oder V1..V3 V/C verwendet werden, sind unter den Parametern ''Switch Remap Onboard'' abgelegt. Alle Tasten können frei belegt werden.

===Weitere Taster/Schalter===

Zur Erweiterung der Taster-/Schalter-Eingänge stehen die Boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' und auch das ältere '''Preset12-2''' zur Verfügung. Sie werden an '''PL26 PANEL''' auf dem Mainboard angeschlossen und über ein Bus-System (I2C) in Serie geschaltet. Jedes Board bildet eine Gruppe aus 16 Eingängen (2 x 12 bei Preset 12-2). Das MenüPanel wird ebenfalls mit diesem Bus verbunden; praktischerweise setzt man es an das Ende der Kette, da es nur einen Bus-Steckverbinder aufweist. Es ist ebenso möglich, mehrere 10polige Steckverbinder auf das Flachbandkabel an PL26 anzupressen.

Jedem Board muss über seine Jumper eine '''eindeutige Bus-Adresse''' zugeordnet werden ($60 bis $65, siehe Aufdruck und Tabelle unten). Bei älteren Preset16 und dem Preset12-2 sind die Adressen fest verdrahtet ($60 oder $61 für Preset16 alt, Preset12-2 belegt gleich zwei Adressen $60 und $61). Jede Adresse darf im Verbund nur einmal vergeben sein, sonst kommt es zu Bus-Konflikten.

Die 16 Eingänge eines Preset16- oder Extend16-Boards bilden ein Gruppe, bei 5 Boards sind dies die Gruppen 0 bis 5 entsprechend den eingestellten Adressen $60 bis $65. Es ist nicht nötig, die Adressen und damit die Gruppennummern der angeschlossenen Boards fortlaufend zu numerieren, es dürfen "Lücken" vorhanden sein. Diese fragt HX3.6 nicht ab.

Alle Taster-/Schalter können über die HX3.6-Editor-Parameter ''Switch Remap'' einer beliebigen HX3.6-Funktion ("Tab") zugeordnet werden; die Parameter in der Gruppe ''Input Mode'' entscheiden, ob am entsprechenden Eingang ein Schalter (ON, 255) oder ein Taster mit LED (OFF, 0, default) angeschlossen ist.

Um die Funktion und Zugehörigkeit eines digitalen Eingangs zu überprüfen, verwenden Sie den ''Input Monitor'' im HX3.6-Editor. Durch einen Klick in die Monitor-Tabelle können Sie außerdem feststellen, welchem HX3.6-Tab dieser Eingang zugeordnet ist.

Jeder digitale Eingang kann im Abschnitt ''Switch Remap'' des HX3-Editors, Parameter 5100 bis 5195, aktiviert/deaktiviert oder umgeleitet werden. Auch Preset- und Voice-Taster dürfen beliebig auf die 96 Eingänge verteilt werden. Einzige Restriktion: Taster einer bestimmten Preset-Funktion (Upper, Lower oder Common) müssen innerhalb einer Gruppe bzw. eines Boards auf fortlaufenden Buttons liegen, es ist nicht möglich, zum Beispiel Upper Voices auf 2 Boards/Gruppen zu verteilen.

====Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge====

Input-Gruppe 2 ($62) ist bereits für die 16 Eingänge auf dem HX3.6-Mainboard vergeben (siehe unten, Abschnitt '''Panel16''') und darf für externe Preset16/Extend16 nicht verwendet werden.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input-Gruppe
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus-Adresse
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper auf Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 geschlossen
|JP2, JP3 geschlossen
|JP1, JP3 geschlossen
|JP3 geschlossen
|JP1, JP2 geschlossen
|JP2 geschlossen
|-
!Hinweis
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Feste Adressen für Preset16 (alt, Upper 0, Lower 1) und Preset12-2 (beide)
|HX3.6-Platine onboard, feste Adresse '''Nicht für Preset16, Extend16 benutzen!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button links oben oder erster Eingang
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

Die Nummer eines bestimmten Tasters/Schalters ergibt sich aus der Gruppen-Basisnummer (16 * Gruppe/Board-Nummer) plus dem angegebenen Offset. Für das Board mit Adresse '''$63''' wäre der erste Eingang also 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] ist ein eigenständiges Panel mit 2 Reihen zu je 8 LED-Tasten. Es wird über ein 10-poliges Flachbandkabel mit '''HX3 PL26''' verbunden. Weitere Preset16 können an die jeweils zweite 10-polige Stiftleiste angeschlossen werden (Daisy Chain). Beide 10-poligen Stiftleisten am Preset16 können verwendet werden (sind parallel verdrahtet).

Ein gesteckter Jumper auf älteren Preset16-Platinen wählt das obere Manual aus, falls vorhanden. Fehlt die Brücke, arbeitet Preset16 auf unterem Manual. Neuere Preset16-Platinen verfügen über drei Jumper (Lötbrücken), um das Preset16 auf obere oder untere manuelle Voice-Presets (Adresse $60 und $61) einzustellen (siehe Tabelle '''Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge'''). Setzen Sie Lötpunkte, um eine der in der Tabelle angegebenen Platinenadressen zu erhalten.

Wenn Sie zwei Zugriegel pro Manual verwenden, indem Sie DBX oder ältere DB9-MPX (veraltet) Zugriegelkarten verwenden, setzen Sie den ''System Inits'' Parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" auf 1. Dadurch wird der erste Zugriegelsatz auf Preset 0 aktiviert, der zweite Zugriegelsatz auf Preset 1. Sie können eine beliebige Voice von 1 bis 15 für die Aktivierung des zweiten Zugriegelsets verwenden. Höhere Zahlen deaktivieren die Umschaltung.

Die Board-Adresse darf beliebig sein (außer $62 für Gruppe 2), da die Preset-Buttons über ''Switch Remap'' zugewiesen werden. Voreingestellt in der Firmware sind allerdings $60 und $61, um mit bestehenden Installationen kompatibel zu bleiben. Um eine Kompatibilität mit vorhendenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, was obere und untere Button-Reihe von Preset16 vertauscht. Alternativ können Sie die grauen Tastenkappen in die obere Button-Reihe umstecken; sie lassen sich mit etwas Kraft abziehen. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default-Button-Belegung
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons obere Reihe
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live-Einstellung
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (oder 2. DB-Satz)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Änderbar über '''Switch Remap''', können auf jedem Board und in jeder Gruppe liegen, jedoch fortlaufende Buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16-Schalter-Erweiterung''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss von Tasten mit LED-Anzeigen an Extend16, PL17 und PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/taster-schalter-eingangsplatine-extend16 Extend16-Boards] sind im Prinzip Preset16 ohne Taster; der Anschluss von Schaltern oder Buttons (ggf. mit LED) erfolgt wie oben für die On-Board-Eingänge des HX3.6 beschrieben. Die Pinbelegung von PL17/PL16 auf dem Extend16-Board ist kompatibel mit '''PL35/PL36 des Mainboards'''. Zusätzlich sind alle Taster-Eingänge auf 3-polige Steckverbinder geführt. Extend16 können bei entsprechender Konfiguration auch zur Auswahl von Presets dienen und ersetzen dann die älteren '''Preset12-2'''.

Die Nummer des Tasters/Schalters ergibt sich aus der Gruppen-Basisnummer (16 * Gruppe/Board-Nummer) plus dem angegebenen Offset. Für das Board mit Adresse '''$63''' (Gruppe 3) wäre der erste Eingang also 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pin-Belegung PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Einzeleingang
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pin-Belegung PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Einzeleingang
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
Zur bequemeren Verdrahtung sind die LED-Taster-Eingänge auch auf 16 dreipolige Steckverbinder geführt, an die jeweils ein LED-Taster angeschlossen wird. Wenn Sie Schalter oder Taster ohne LED verwenden, lassen Sie den Anschluss L+ offen. Vorwiderstände für die LEDs sind hier bereits enthalten, sie können rote, gelbe und grüne LEDs direkt an PL1..PL16 anschließen. Für blaue und weiße LEDs sollte in die Leitung L+ noch ein zusätzlicher Vorwiderstand von 1kOhm eingefügt werden, da die LEDs sonst zu hell sind und blenden. Pinbelegung PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Einzeleingänge
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Funktion
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button und LED- (Verbindung)
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

Die Board-Adresse darf beliebig sein (außer $62 für Gruppe 2), da die Preset-Buttons über ''Switch Remap'' zugewiesen werden. Voreingestellt in der Firmware sind allerdings $60 und $61, um mit bestehenden Installationen kompatibel zu bleiben. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolet)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|Die Preset12-2-Platine wird an HX3.6 PL26 angeschlossen. Das Flachbandkabel kann mit einem zusätzlichen Stecker verlängert werden, um das Menü-Panel anschließen zu können.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] ist eine Interface-Platine für bis zu 2 x 12 "invertierte" Preset-Tasten (mit optionalen LED-Anzeigen), wie sie an Hammond-Konsolenorgeln zu finden sind. Die Preset12-2-Platine entspricht im Prinzip zwei Panel16 oder Extend16, bei dem die letzten 4 Eingänge fehlen. Sie wird über ein 10-adriges Flachbandkabel mit dem '''HX3.6 PL26''' verbunden. Pin 1 der beiden 14-poligen Stiftleisten ist Preset 0 = Live (rechter Zugriegelsatz) = B-Taste, Pin 2 ist Preset 1 = Live (linker Zugriegelsatz) usw. bis hinunter zu Pin 12 = CANCEL-Taste.

Die Standard-Orgel-Firmware unterstützt '''Momentan-Kontakte'''. Um ein Preset zu speichern, halten Sie die Preset-Taste/den Taster für 2 Sekunden gedrückt.

Bei Verwendung von '''2 Zugriegelsätzen pro Manual''' durch DB9-MPX-Zugriegel/Multiplexer und Preset12-2-Platine, setzen Sie ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" Parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" auf 1. Das Umschalten von Zugriegelsätzen A#/B ist nur aktiv, wenn kein Common Preset eingeschaltet ist ("Live" Modus #0). Wenn ein '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) angewählt ist, wird immer das '''rechte Zugriegel-Set''' aktiv.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 Kathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 Kathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 Kathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 Kathode (Preset 11, CANCEL-Taste) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

Die LED-Ausgänge haben integrierte 220-Ohm-Widerstände, wodurch sich ein LED-Strom von 15 mA ergibt. Das lange Bein der LEDs ist die Anode (+), das kurze Bein die Kathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Taster/Schalter)''' 
Pin - Funktion (active low – auf Gnd schalten) 
1: Schalter 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Schalter 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Schalter 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Schalter 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Gemeinsames Gnd (0V)

Um eine Kompatibiltät mit vorhandenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. Dadurch wird die richtige Voice-Preset-Reihenfolge wiederhergestellt. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolet)====

Die alten '''Preset12-MPX'''-Karten für HX3 mk2/mk3 können auch für HX3.6 zusammen mit zwei Sätzen von Nicht-MPX-Drawbar-Boards verwendet werden. Sie bieten jedoch keine variable Voreinstellnummer für den zweiten Zugriegelsatz. Stattdessen ist der zweite Zugriegelsatz fest auf Voice Preset 15 verdrahtet. Sie müssen also die Nummer des zweiten Zugriegelsatzes in Parameter #1505 auf 15 ändern, nicht auf 1, wenn Sie Preset12-MPX verwenden.

Um eine Kompatibiltät mit vorhandenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. Dadurch wird die richtige Voice-Preset-Reihenfolge wiederhergestellt. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets und Voices====

HX3.6 kennt für jedes Manual und das Pedal getrennt gespeicherte reinen Zugriegeleinstellungen ("Voices") und die (je nach System Inits-Konfiguration) viele oder sämtliche Analog- und Tab-Einstellungen umfassenden "Common Presets" (1 bis 99). Zugriegel-'''Voices''' (wie sie als "invertierte Tasten" auf B3-Konsolen zu finden sind) arbeiten unabhängig von den Common Presets; sie wirken sich nur auf die Zugriegel-Einstellungen aus und können über das Menü aufgerufen werden. 2x8, 2x12 oder 2x16 Voice Presets können mit den optionalen Karten '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (mehrere zulässig) oder '''Preset12-2''' erreicht werden.

Wird ein Common Preset aufgerufen und steht ein Voice-Preset nicht auf 0 (live), blinkt der nun ungültige Voice-Button. Ein erneuter Druck auf den Voice-Button ruft die hier abgespeicherte Zugriegeleinstellung auf; nun blinkt der Common-Preset-Button, um anzuzeigen, dass das Common Preset nicht mehr gültig ist.

===Vibrato-Knopf (Drehschalter)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss des Vibrato-Drehschalters an PL33 VIBSW. Ignorieren Sie die Beschriftung "PL5" im Schaltplan. Erste Kontaktfahne des Drehschalters wird nicht verwendet!''']]

Vibrato/Chorus V1 bis C3 wird mit einem Drehschalter ausgewählt, der an '''PL33''' angeschlossen ist. Die Schalterstellung wird immer abgefragt, es sei denn, Panel16 ist mit V1..3/Chorus-Tasten konfiguriert (''System Inits'' Parameter #1504, siehe auch Hinweis unten). PL33 führt auch Schaltsignale, die die Drehschalterstellung anzeigen. Sie können hier eine LED mit seriellem Widerstand (330R und höher) anschließen, wobei die Kathode (-) mit Common Gnd verbunden ist.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato-Drehschalter (active low – auf Gnd schalten):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato-Knopf
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|nicht verwendet
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|nicht verwendet
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

Um Vibrato-Tasten zuzuweisen, setzen Sie die entsprechenden Eingänge im Abschnitt ''Switch Remap'' auf 84, 85, 87 (Drei-Tasten-Modus) bzw. 84..87 (Vier-Tasten-Modus). Der ''System Inits'' Parameter #1504 = 1 wird ignoriert.

==Anschließen von Tastatur-Scan-Karte(n)==

Für geringste Key-to-Audio-Latenz empfehlen wir den direkten Tastaturanschluss über Scan-Boards (verschiedene Versionen verfügbar). Scan-Boards werden durch Update von SD-Karte (passend zu Ihrer Anwendung) oder ''HX3.6 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie die Treiber ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' bzw. ''scansr61.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6. Alle Scan-Treiber unterstützen auch MIDI-Input/Output, aber für reine MIDI-Fernsteuerung empfehlen wir den MIDI-Input-Treiber ''scanmidi.dat''. Neue HX3.6-Karten werden mit installierter ''scanmidi.dat'' geliefert.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2-Anschlussplan (mk4-Mainboard abgebildet, PL-Indizes für HX3.6 nicht gültig), Anschluss an PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

Eine einzelne [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2-Karte] wird an '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN''' angeschlossen. An eine FatarScan2-Platine können ein oder zwei Fatar 61-Tastaturen (Typ TP/8O o.ä.) mit Hilfe eines speziellen Kabelsatzes (MicroMatch-Stecker zu Tastatur-Scanleisten) angeschlossen werden. Siehe Seite [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] für weitere Bilder. Wir empfehlen den Kauf des FatarScan2-Kabelsatzes für den Anschluss an die MicroMatch-Steckerleisten der Fatar-Tastaturen (ein Satz für jedes Manual).

Eine FatarScan2-Platine '''muss''' an PL8 angeschlossen werden, wenn Sie den FatarScan-Treiber verwenden, ansonsten ist ein lautes Geräusch zu hören.

Basspedale können an eine zusätzliche Scan16-Strip-, Scan61-Inline- oder Bass25-Karte angeschlossen werden, die mit '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!) verbunden wird.

FatarScan2-Karten werden durch Update von SD-Karte oder ''HX3 Manager'' Anwendung aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scanfatr.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6.

'''Bitte beachten Sie:''' Die FatarScan2-Platine muss angeschlossen sein, wenn der Treiber scanfatr.dat verwendet wird, sonst wird die Kommunikation mit dem HX3.6 Manager blockiert.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Anschluss von Scan16 Strip oder Scan61 an HX3-Platine PL12 4014 SCAN (HX3.4 abgebildet, HX3.6 hat andere PL-Indizes)]]'''

Für die meisten "ein Kontakt pro Taste"-Orgeln können ein oder zwei Sätze von langen [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] Boards (ein Satz für jedes Manual) verwendet werden, die eine einfachere Installation an diesen Tastaturen ermöglichen. Für jedes Manual benötigen Sie 3 (44 oder 49 Tasten) oder 4 (61 Tasten) Scan16-Platinen. Bitte beachten Sie die [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN Schaltpläne und Teileplatzierung] in unserem Git Repo. Alle mit Scan16 bestückten Manuale werden parallel mit einem 10-adrigen Flachbandkabel (mit mehreren Steckern) an '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN''' verdrahtet. Bass25 kann als Pedal-Scanboard verwendet werden. Ein Jumper auf der "untersten" Scan16-Platine legt fest, ob das Tastenfeld oberes, unteres oder Bass-Pedal ist:

JP1 = Obermanual 
JP2 = Untermanual 
JP3 = Pedal 

Bitte beachten Sie: Das unterste Tastenkontakt-Pad auf dem Scan16 ist immer die Taste "C" auf 4- und 5-Oktaven-Tastaturen. Bei 61-Tasten-Manualen kann der obere Teil der rechten Scan16-Platine abgeschnitten sein, wie auf dem Siebdruck der Platine markiert (oder die Pads bleiben offen). Bei 44-Tasten-Manualen bleiben die untersten 5 Pads offen, Manual(e) beginnen mit Taste "F". Bei 49-Tasten-Manualen wird das Pad PL20 mit der höchsten "C"-Note verbunden. Alle Kontakte müssen auf Masse schalten. Die Boards stellen Massekontakte für den Anschluss an die Stromschiene zur Verfügung.

Scan16-Karten für ein oder zwei 49/61-Tasten-Manuale werden durch Update von SD-Karte oder Anwendung ''HX3 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scansr61.dat'' mit dem ''Updater''-Fenster auf den HX3.6 hoch. Siehe Seite [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] für Bilder.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board verbunden mit HX3 Board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] funktioniert genau wie ein Scan16-Strip-Set mit 4 Platinen, hat aber alle Teile auf einer kompakten Platine montiert (für jedes Manual wird eine Scan61-Inline benötigt). Daher muss jede Taste separat verdrahtet werden. Bitte beachten Sie [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN Schaltplan und Teileplatzierung] in unserem Git Repo. Alle mit Scan61 bestückten Manuale werden parallel mit einem 10-adrigen Flachbandkabel (mit mehreren Steckern) an '''HX3.6 PL12''' verdrahtet. Bass25 kann als drittes Pedal-Scanboard verwendet werden. Ein Jumper auf der Scan61-Inlineplatine legt fest, ob das Tastenfeld oberes, unteres oder Bass-Pedal ist:

JP1 = Obermanual 
JP2 = Untermanual 
JP3 = Pedal 

Bitte beachten Sie: Unterstes Tastenkontakt-Pad bei Strip61-Inline ist immer Taste "C". Bei kürzeren Manualen lassen Sie unbenutzte Tasteneingänge offen. Wie bei OrganScan61 oder Scan16-Strip müssen alle Kontakte auf Masse schalten. Die Karten stellen Massekontakte für den Anschluss an die Stromschiene zur Verfügung.

Scan61-Inline-Karten werden per Update von der SD-Karte oder der Anwendung ''HX3 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scansr61.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 und Bass25 MIDI (oben rechts) mit eigenem MIDI OUT und Phantomspeisung''']]

Die [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/bass25 Bass25] Scanplatine (siehe PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 unserem Github Repo-Ordner PLATINEN/BASS25]) kann als Ergänzung zu den FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline und Scan16-Strip Platinen zum bequemen Anschluss der Basspedalkontakte wie oben abgebildet verwendet werden (beachten Sie die unterschiedlichen HX3 Stecker). Die Karte kann im Boden der Orgel platziert werden, wenn das 10-adrige Flachbandkabel zum HX3 oder zur letzten OrganScan61-Karte nicht länger als 1 m ist. Bitte beachten Sie die Jumperstellung am Bass25:

* '''JP1''' Lötbrücke, immer offen
* '''JP2''' Lötbrücke bei Verwendung mit HX3.4 OrganScan61 (wird bei HX3.6 nicht unterstützt)
* '''JP3''' Lötbrücke bei Verwendung mit FatarScan2 auf '''HX3.6 PL8''' oder Scan16 Strip auf '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 bietet In-Line-Stecker und einen 26-poligen Flachbandkabelanschluss für den alternativen Anschluss von Basspedal-Kontakten:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 Tasten-Anschluss
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Tiefste Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|weitere Tasten
|-
!25
|Höchste Note C
|-
!26
|Gemeinsame Masse (busbar)
|}

Statt an PL1 können die Tastaturkontakte auch an die Inline-Stiftleisten PL2 bis PL7 oder an die Lötpads vor den Stiftleisten angeschlossen werden (linker Pin PL2: tiefstes C). Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 dient auch als gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

'''JP3 und JP4''' Lötbrücken müssen geschlossen sein.

Hinweis: Eine dritte Scan16-Strip- oder Scan61-Inline-Platine kann alternativ für das Basspedal anstelle von Bass25 verwendet werden, wobei nur die ersten 13 oder 25 Kontakteingänge genutzt werden. Setzen Sie den Jumper JP3 auf der Scan-Karte, um sie für die Verwendung als Basspedal zu aktivieren.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] ist mit einem eigenen MIDI-Controller und einer MIDI-Ausgangsbuchse ausgestattet. Er wird über ein 5-adriges MIDI-Kabel mit der HX3.6-Hauptplatine verbunden. Bass25 MIDI bietet Inline-Steckverbinder und einen 26-poligen Flachbandkabelanschluss für den alternativen Anschluss von Basspedal-Kontakten. Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 bietet auch eine gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI Tasten-Anschluss
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Tiefste Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|weitere Tasten
|-
!25
|Höchste Note C
|-
!26
|Gemeinsame Masse (busbar)
|}

Statt an PL1 können die Tastaturkontakte auch an die Inline-Stiftleisten PL2 bis PL7 an die Lötpads vor den Stiftleisten angeschlossen werden (linker Pin PL2: tiefstes C). Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 dient auch als gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

'''JP3''' Lötbrücke muss geschlossen sein.

'''JP4''' Lötbrücke muss geschlossen sein, wenn der Bass25 MIDI mit Phantomspeisung von der HX3-Platine, linke MIDI-Eingangsbuchse (von hinten gesehen), versorgt wird. MIDI-Phantomspeisung-Jumper auf der HX3-Platine müssen gesteckt sein.

Für eine separate Stromversorgung (interne +5V oder externes 9V DC Steckernetzteil), öffnen Sie die '''JP4'''-Lötbrücke. Verwenden Sie die 2-polige Stiftleiste PL12 neben der MIDI OUT-Buchse für die interne +5V-Versorgung: Pin 1 (links, zur Diode weisend) ist VCC +5V, Pin 2 (rechts) ist Masse (siehe PDF-Schaltplan in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 unserem Github-Repo-Ordner PLATINEN/BASS25]).

Eine +5V-MIDI-Phantomspeisung an den äußeren Pins des MIDI-Eingangs kann von der HX3-Hauptplatine durch Einsetzen von zwei '''zusätzlichen''' Jumpern auf HX3.6 PL20 '''Pins 7-8 und 9-10''' erhalten werden. Installieren Sie diese Steckbrücken nicht, wenn Sie andere MIDI-Geräte anschließen, die keine Phantomspeisung verwenden.

==Extension Board==

Das HX3 Extension Board mk5 ist für den Anschluss eines Leslie mit 11-Pin-Anschluss und Kopfhörer verfügbar. Es ist kompatibel mit HX3.6.

Die alte Erweiterungsplatine für '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' kann verwendet werden, nachdem zwei Widerstände von der Erweiterungsplatine entfernt und zwei Drähte auf der Rückseite der HX3.6-Hauptplatine vom Anschluss der Erweiterungsplatine zum seriellen Anschluss gelötet wurden.

'''Siehe Seite [[HX3.5 Extension Board (deutsch)]]''' für Details.

SWC-60/SQC-60 mk3

2023-05-15T10:28:04Z

Christian: /* Einbau */

[[File:swc60mk3.jpg|400px|thumb|right]]

'''For english manual/description, see [[SWC-60/SQC-60 mk3 (english)]]'''

==Beschreibung==

Frequenzwandler/Power Conditioner SWC-60/SQC-60 mk3 zum Betrieb von elektromagnetischen US-Hammonds (60 Hz Netzfrequenz) in Netzen mit abweichender Frequenz - ideal zum Betrieb einer amerkanischen Orgel in Europa oder an unstabilen Generatoren. Die Eingangsfrequenz darf 40 bis 400 Hz betragen – der Power Conditioner liefert unabhängig von der Netzfrequenz immer die für die Orgel nötigen 60 Hz. Er eignet sich daher auch zum Betrieb der Orgel an instabilen Netzen, zum Beispiel beim Open-Air-Festival.

Im Unterschied zur SQC-60 Rechteck-Version ist der etwas stärkere Sinus-Wandler SWC-60 auch für selbststartende Motoren (L-, H-, T-Series) geeignet.

In Verbindung mit der optionalen Bedieneinheit erhalten Sie außerdem eine Transponier- und Feinstimm-Möglichkeit in Halbton- und Cent-Schritten.

Quarzstabil, keinerlei Abweichung von eingestellter Stimmung. Sehr einfache Installation, wird einfach in die Leitungen zum Run-Motor eingeschleift. Die einzigartige Soft-Start-Logik sorgt für sicheres Starten auch bei schlaffen Startmotoren, Nennfrequenz wird von 50 Hz ausgehend innerhalb einiger Sekunden angelaufen.

Relais-Schaltausgang (10A/230V) zum gleichzeitigen Einschalten eines Leslies zusammen mit der Orgel. Der Schaltkontakt wird aktiviert, sobald die Orgel läuft.

Nach dem Einschalten blinkt eine Leuchtdiode auf der SQC-60/SWC-60-Platine zur Funktionskontrolle sechsmal schnell, dann nach einer kurzen Pause langsam. Bei Frequenzänderungen mit dem PCC (siehe unten) blinkt sie bis zum Erreichen der Zielfrequenz schnell.

Zum Betrieb einer US-Orgel an 230V benötigen Sie zusätzlich einen Step-Down-/Vorschalttransformator 230V auf 117V (sofern noch nicht vorhanden). Der Transformator sollte eine Leistung von 160 VA (nur Orgel) oder 400 VA (Orgel und Leslie) aufweisen und möglichst ein Trenntransformator sein (kein "Spartransformator").

Die Frequenzwandler SQC-60 und SWC-60 sind für Eingangsspannungen von 100V bis 120V ausgelegt. Versehentlich angelegte 230V führen zur Zerstörung des Gerätes! Schließen Sie außer dem Run-Motor keine weiteren Verbraucher (Preamp, Leslie) an den SQC-60/SWC-60 an.

==Einbau==

'''WICHTIG: Der Einbau erfordert Lötkenntnisse und darf nur vom Fachmann ausgeführt werden. Bitte ziehen Sie ggf. einen Techniker zu Rate. Trennen Sie bei jeglichen Arbeiten die Orgel vom Stromnetz (Netzstecker ziehen).'''

Die folgende Anleitung bezieht sich auf den Einbau in Orgeln der Serien B3 und A-100. Bei anderen/älteren Modellen entspricht das Anschlusspanel am Generator möglicherweise nicht dem abgebildeten. Ziehen Sie in diesem Fall das Service Manual Ihrer Orgel und einen versierten Techniker zu Rate.

[[File:Swc60-diagram.png|800px]]

Der SQC-60/SWC-60 wird mit 4 Holzschrauben (beiliegend) in der Orgel befestigt, am besten (von hinten gesehen) am linken Seitenbrett in der Nähe des Run-Motors. Er wird einfach in die Leitung zum Run-Motor eingeschleift, d.h. die Verbindung wird aufgetrennt und das Gerät dazwischengeschaltet. Löten Sie die rot-schwarzen Doppel-Leitungen des Motors von der Klemmenleiste des Generator-Chassis (ganz rechte und mittlere der sieben Lötklemmen bei Konsolen-Modellen, unter einer Blechkappe verborgen) ab und verbinden Sie die Motoranschlüsse mit den Schraubklemmen 3 und 4 des SWC-60/SQC-60 (mit „OUT“ gekennzeichnet). Trennen Sie die Doppel-Adern (zwei Paare rot/schwarz) des Motors nicht voneinander! Zuleitungen ggf. verlängern und mit Schrumpfschlauch isolieren. Alle anderen Kabel bleiben wie sie sind!

Die Eingangsklemmen „IN“ (5 und 6) werden nun mit dem Generator-Panel verbunden – und zwar mit den Anschlüssen, die vorher mit dem Motor verbunden waren. Die Polarität ist nicht wichtig. Verwenden Sie zur Verdrahtung Litzen mit min. 0,75qmm. Die Klemmen sind steckbar und können zur leichteren (De-)Montage abgezogen werden.

Der Einschaltkontakt RLY (Klemmen 1 und 2) wird geschlossen, sobald der RUN-Motor der Orgel läuft. Er ist mit 10A bei 230V AC belastbar und kann zum Einschalten eines 230V-Leslies an einer 117V-Orgel dienen.

Zur Erdung des Gehäuses muss Anschluss PE (Klemme 7) mit der Generator-Masse und dem Schutzleiter (sofern vorhanden, grün-gelbe Ader im Netzkabel) verbunden werden. Ein nicht geerdeter SQC-60/SWC-60 kann Störungen im Ausgangssignal der Orgel verursachen.

Die Orgel kann nun ganz normal gestartet werden.

Zum Auswechseln der Sicherung muss das Gehäuse (4 Blechschrauben) geöffnet werden. Ersetzen Sie die Sicherung durch den passenden Wert (500 mA oder 630mA träge für SQC-60, 1,25A oder 1,4A träge für SWC-60). Eine defekte Sicherung ist oft Anzeichen für einen weiteren Defekt, etwa durch Überspannung verursacht. Im Falle eines Defekts senden Sie das Gerät ein. Die Schraubklemmen sind steckbar und können für die (De-)Montage einfach abgezogen werden.

==US-Umrüstung==

Falls in Ihrer Orgel noch kein 230/117V-Trenntransformator eingebaut ist, muss die Netzspannungsversorgung wie im Bild gezeigt geändert werden. Entfernen Sie das 110-V-Netzkabel vollständig und bauen Sie im Anschlusskasten der Orgel eine Kaltgerätebuchse mit Schutzleiter ein. Die Hammond-Schalter sind nicht für den Betrieb an 230V zulässig, Sie sollten also den Trenntrafo ohne Schalter mit der Netzleitung verbinden; er bleibt dann dauernd eingeschaltet, und an der Verdrahtung der Start/Run-Schalter auf der 117V-Seite muss nichts geändert werden.

Das Bild zeigt auch den (optionalen) Anschluss des Einschaltrelais für 230V-Leslies. Soll ein 117V-Leslie aus dem Trenntransformator der Orgel mitversorgt werden, ist der Trafo mit 400VA zu bemessen, ansonsten reichen 160VA (B3 und ähnliche) bzw. 240VA (A-100 und alle Orgeln mit eingebauten Endstufen).

[[File:Swc60-diagram_relay.png|800px]]

Beim Einbau des Transformators in die Orgel ist zur Vermeidung von Brummeinstreuungen die optimale Position experimentell zu ermitteln; der Trafo sollte möglichst weit links (von hinten gesehen) platziert werden.

http://wiki.keyboardpartner.de/index.php?title=Spezial:Anmelden&action=submitlogin&type=login&returnto=Benutzer:2A02:8106:1E:4900:5D6B:9739:B6AE:E09C

==T100/T200/T500-Serie==

Spinett-Orgeln der T-Seria haben grundsätzlich einen selbststartenden Motor, der mit einem Anlaufkondensator versehen ist. An diesem wird ein gelbes Kabel zum Netzschalter durchgeschleift. Ändern Sie sie Verdrahtung wie aus dem Bild ersichtlich; der Anlaufkondensator muss mit dem Motor verbunden bleiben!

[[Datei:T500-SWC60.png|600px]]

==Brumm-Unterdrückung==

[[File:netzfilter.jpg|200px|thumb|right|'''Netzfilter''']]

Bei Leslies mit entfernten Entstörkondensatoren ("death caps" .047uF) am Netzeingang oder bei nicht vorschriftsmäßiger Erdung der Orgel kann ein Summton im Leslie hörbar sein. Wir empfehlen dann, ein Netzfilter mit min. 3A (wie abgebildet) in die Leitungen vom Verdrahtungspanel zum SWC60/SQC60/SQC50 einzufügen. Der Masse/Erdungsanschluss ist mit dem Generator-Chassis zu verbinden. Ein solches Filter wird auch zum Einbau in den Leslie-Verstärker empfohlen, falls dort die "death caps" entfernt wurden.

==Anschluss PCC==

[[File:Pccunit.jpg|400px|thumb|right]]

Die optionale Bedieneinheit PCC (Power Conditioner Control) dient zum Transponieren und Stimmen der Orgel in Halbton- und Cent-Schritten, etwa zur Anpassung auf Orchester-Stimmungen. Das PCC-Panel wird mit dem Anschluss CTRL verbunden. Bauen Sie den SWC-60/SQC-60 so ein, dass diese Buchse leicht zugänglich bleibt. Zur Vorbereitung können Sie bereits jetzt ein normales Ethernet-Patchkabel (RJ-45-Stecker) in der Orgel verlegen; es kann zwischen Untermanual und Gehäuse herausgeführt werden. Das zur Montage am Spieltisch gedachte PCC-Panel besitzt die gleiche Buchse. '''Schalten Sie die Orgel immer aus, bevor Sie den PCC verbinden oder entfernen!'''

Der PCC besitzt ein zweizeiliges Display, das in der oberen Zeile die Transponierung in Halbtonschritten (Grenzen +4, -3) und in der unteren Zeile die Feinstimmung in Cent (plusminus 50) anzeigt. Nach dem Einschalten befindet sich der PCC im LOCKED-Modus. Drücken Sie kurz auf den Drehknopf, um in den NOTE-Modus zu gelangen (Transponierung), dies wird durch einen Pfeil auf NOTE gekennzeichnet. Mit dem Drehknopf ändern Sie die Transponierung und/oder die Stimmung. Drücken Sie nochmals auf den Drehknopf, um in den Tuning-Modus und wieder zurück zum LOCKED-Modus zu wechseln. Die gewählte Einstellung beibt dauerhaft gespeichert (auch nach Abziehen des PCC von der Orgel und nach Aus- und Wiedereinschalten), wenn Sie den Drehknopf zweimal hintereinander drücken. ''Hinweis: Bei der ersten Serie der SWC-60/SQC-60 ist kein LOCKED-Modus vorhanden, außerdem war eine - nicht sinnvolle - Transponierung auf plusminus 6 Halbtöne möglich.''

Es ist möglich, auch bei Transponierung eine Feinstimmung vorzunehmen.

Der PCC lässt eine Transponierung von bis zu +4 oder -3 Halbtönen nach unten wie nach oben zu. Bitte beachten Sie, dass sich durch den mitlaufenden Vibrato-Scanner bei Transponierung auch die Vibrato-Frequenz verschiebt. Außerdem kann das Klangbild der Orgel durch die festen Filterfrequenzen im Generator etwas dumpfer werden.

==Technische Daten==

Eingang 100-120V 40Hz bis 400Hz

Ausgang 117V 60Hz Quarz-stabilisiert, Sinus (SWC-60) oder gefilterte Rechteck-Schwingung (SQC-60), variable Ausgangsfrequenz in Verbindung mit optionalem Controller PCC

Ausgangsleistung: 60W bei SWC-60, 40W bei SQC-60

Eingebaut in belüftetes Aluminiumgehäuse, Abmessungen 164 x 115 mm, Höhe 55 mm, Befestigungslochabstand 154 x 90 mm.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2023-05-04T10:34:48Z

Christian: /* FatarScan2 */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of April 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:Hx36_mainboard_top.JPG|800px|thumb|right|'''HX3.6 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards.

* HX3.6 mainboard is factory programmed as MIDI expander. It will work after power-up '''without any additional boards attached''' (i.e. open pin headers).

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29/HX3.6%20Mainboard Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#F8F8F8;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
|style="background-color:#FFFADA"| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
|6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
|6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
|style="background-color:#F9C6BA"| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input/ouput, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
|style="background-color:#A6C9EC"| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
|style="background-color:#62C2CF"| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
|style="background-color:#"| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
|style="background-color:#AEC905"| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
|style="background-color:#D64B95"| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
|style="background-color:#FBD8C9"| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
|style="background-color:#EF7D4B"| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
|style="background-color:#FFCB00"| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch (note wrong label "SWELL" on PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
|style="background-color:#D1CCE6"| 3-pin connector FC-7 compatible swell pedal (note wrong label "FOOTSW" on PCB!)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
|style="background-color:#A6D2AD"| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
|style="background-color:#FEEB18"| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#FFAEAE;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL12). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL11 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Two daisy-chained Preset16 boards connected to PL26 PANEL. MenuPanel may be connected to last Preset16 board.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons ( possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

===Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|not used
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

The [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6/3.7 SD Card Usage

2023-04-19T16:04:42Z

Christian: Die Seite wurde neu angelegt: „'''SD card adapter for convenient firmware updates''' ==Overview== You can use a standard SD or SDHC card formatted with FAT32 as an alternative to updating via USB cable. A suitable SD card adapter is available in our store. With this, updates are also possible from other operating systems than Windows. Connect the SD card adapter to PL18. Updates for HX3.6 are available for download from our [http://update…“

[[Datei:Hx35_sdcard.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''SD card adapter for convenient firmware updates''']]

==Overview==

You can use a standard SD or SDHC card formatted with FAT32 as an alternative to updating via USB cable. A suitable SD card adapter is available in our store. With this, updates are also possible from other operating systems than Windows.

Connect the SD card adapter to PL18.

Updates for HX3.6 are available for download from our [http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=HX3.6%20Manager%20Current%20Firmware update-server]. Unzip the ZIP file matching your device into a local directory and copy the files to be updated from the ''sdcard'' directory to an empty, FAT32 formatted (!) SD or SDHC card. The directory may contain a subset of the ''updates'' directory:

* Controller Firmware (firmware.bin), responsible for the behavior of the control interface and the processing of MIDI controller data.
* FPGA Sound Engine (fpgamain.bin), generates all organ sounds.
* Wavesets (wavesetX.bin), waveform definitions for different organ models
* Scan Driver (scanXXX.dat), responsible for keyboard query and MIDI reception
* Taperings (taperX.dat), B3/H100 tone generator filters and tapering definitions
* and possibly others (speakers.dat, organs.dat etc).

In most cases an update will only be done to the firmware, sometimes also to the FPGA sound engine. Parts that are not found on the SD card remain unchanged.

==Complete update==

An update from the SD card can only be done in the HX3.6 bootloader mode. Press the DOWN button in the preset main menu and select the item ''BootLoader Update''. Insert the SD card in the card slot. Press the encoder knob for about two seconds until the display shows ''System Reset...''. The bootloader is active when an inverse '''BL''' appears at the bottom right of the display.

The bootloader is automatically activated if HX3.6 finds an SD card in the slot adapter when it is switched on.

If you confirm the menu item ''Update from SD Card'', the HX3.6 bootloader will search for updates on the SD card. This can be either a DFU package (hx36_update.dfu) or single files (e.g. ''firmware.bin'' or ''fpgamain.bin''). Attention: Loading presets and defaults will overwrite your settings, so check carefully if these files are really needed. Usually there are no defaults and presets included in the DFU package.

==INI scripts==

In the HX3.6 firmware (but not in the bootloader!) INI scripts can also be executed via a submenu. The available INI scripts (text files with the extension .INI) are listed in the display when you turn the knob. To start a script, press and hold the knob for about two seconds until a "running" message appears.

In contrast to HX3.5, firmware updates can no longer be executed via INI scripts, this is reserved for the boot loader.

==Own INI scripts==

INI scripts contain valid HX3.5 commands in text format and can be edited with any text editor. Comments start with a "/" slash. HX3.6 command format:

/ comment line
<parameter1>=<newvalue1>
<parameter2>=<newvalue2>
...

For example "1000=127" to set the Upper 16' drawbar to full level. The valid parameter numbers and their meaning can be found in the main table in the HX3.5 editor. The number of parameters that can be changed by an INI file is not limited. All changes are volatile. To save them permanently, a final save command is necessary, because the used ARM controller has no EEPROM area like in HX3.5 anymore:

<parameter1>=<newvalue1>
<parameter2>=<newvalue2>
...

/ Save Preset:
900=<presetnr>

/ Save Upper Voice:
901=<voicenr>

/ Save Lower Voice:
902=<voicenr>

/ Save Pedal Voice:
903=<voicenr>

/ Save Defaults:
905=1

/ Save System Inits (#1496..#1511):
906=1

/ Save Extended Params (#2000..#6999):
907=1

/ Store as Organ Model:
908=1

/ Store as Rotary Speaker Model:
908=1

/ Example
/ Enable analog Inputs:
1503=2
/ Set 2nd Drawbar Set Voice number:
1505=1
/ Save System Inits:
906=1

If possible, use the store commands 900..909 only once at the end of each section.

==Dateiliste==

'''firmware.bin''' - ARM Controller Firmware (Flash-Inhalt) 
'''fpgamain.bin''' – FPGA configuration (Sound Engine) 
'''scan.dat''' - Scan Driver (either MIDI, Fatar or Scan16/61 Typ) 
'''scanmidi.dat''' - Scan Driver for MIDI Input (MIDI Expander, Drawbar Expander) 
'''scansr61.dat''' - Scan Driver for Scan16-Strip and Scan61-Inline boards (StdOrgan) 
'''scanfatr.dat''' - Scan Driver for Fatar keybed und FatarScan2 board (StdOrgan) 
'''fir_coe.dat''' - Finite Impulse Response Filter parameters for rotary horn simulation 
'''taperX.dat''' - 4 Tapering files (note loudness) for Hammond emulation 
'''wavesetX.dat''' - 8 WaveSet files (generator wave forms) 
'''hx36_update.dfu''' - DFU package, can contain all above mentioned components

Diskussion:HX3.6/3.7 SD Card Usage

2023-04-19T16:02:14Z

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2023-04-19T15:52:34Z

Christian: /* Bass25 */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of April 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards.

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Update/Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
| 6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
| 6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
| DC input/oupu, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
| 3-pin connector swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL12). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL11 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons ( possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

===Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|not used
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver, otherwise loud noise will be heard.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

The [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2023-04-19T15:51:40Z

Christian: /* Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch) */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of April 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards.

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Update/Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
| 6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
| 6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
| DC input/oupu, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
| 3-pin connector swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL12). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL11 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons ( possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

===Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|not used
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver, otherwise loud noise will be heard.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2023-04-19T15:51:14Z

Christian: /* Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch) */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of April 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards.

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Update/Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
| 6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
| 6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
| DC input/oupu, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
| 3-pin connector swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL12). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL11 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons ( possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

===Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|nicht verwendet
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver, otherwise loud noise will be heard.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2023-04-19T15:50:13Z

Christian: /* Preset12-2 (obsolete) */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of April 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards.

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Update/Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
| 6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
| 6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
| DC input/oupu, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
| 3-pin connector swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL12). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL11 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons ( possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

==Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)==

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|nicht verwendet
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver, otherwise loud noise will be heard.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installationsanleitung

2023-04-19T15:50:11Z

Christian: /* Preset12-2 (obsolet) */

'''>>[[HX3.6 Installation Manual]] (english)'''

 '''Fassung vom 17. April 2023, für Firmware Version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 Einplatinen-Sound-Engine zum Anschluss eines beliebigen Keyboards, zum Einbau in vorhandene Orgeln oder zur MIDI-Steuerung'''

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5-Platine einbaufertig''']]

== Vorwort ==

Die Installation von HX3.6 sollte nur von einem qualifizierten Techniker durchgeführt werden. Sie sollten mit der Montage von Flachbandkabeln, der Installation von Crimpkontakten und dem Löten von empfindlichen Teilen vertraut sein. Wichtig: Die Platine enthält statisch empfindliche Bauteile. Verwenden Sie unbedingt antistatisches Werkzeug und geerdetes Lötwerkzeug. HX3.6-Firmware-Versionen sind sowohl für die MIDI-Steuerung als auch für die direkte Tastatursteuerung mittels unserer FatarScan2-, Scan61-Inline-, Scan16-Strip- und (veralteten) OrganScan61-Karten verfügbar.

* Für Updates und zum Download des HX3.6 Managers besuchen Sie die '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6-Download-Seite]'''. Dort finden Sie aktuelle und Beta-Firmware, Handbücher, Schaltpläne und Tools. Die Updates in der ZIP-Datei HX36_Manager_6xxx.zip enthalten die Anwendung ''HX3.6 Manager'' sowie DSP-Firmware, Soundbänke, FPGA-Konfigurationsdatei und Scan-Treiber.

* Ein kompletter Satz PDF-Schaltpläne, auch für die Peripherie, steht zum Download bereit auf unserer '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Update/Schematics-Seite]''' und '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings-Seite]'''.

* Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard-Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für Gebrauchsanweisungen nach der Installation.

* Der '''HX3.6 Editor''' (für die Installation erforderlich) ist Bestandteil des '''HX3.6 Manager'''-Pakets. Eine Bedienungsanleitung steht als PDF zum Download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf auf unserem Update Server]''' zur Verfügung.

== Steckverbinder und Jumper ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Bauteil-/Steckverbinderplatzierung (auch als PDF verfügbar, siehe [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php auf unserem '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Steckverbinder
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
| 6,3mm-Buchse Audio-Ausgang rechts
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
| Stereo Audio-Ausgang; Mitte = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
| Stereo Audio-Mixereingang; Mitte = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
| 6,3mm-Buchse Audio-Ausgang links
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
| DSP Debug (nicht verwenden)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (nicht verwenden)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
| DC-Eingang, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus auf Mittenkontakt
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
| DC-Eingang/Ausgang, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
| DC-Eingang, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (falls externe Buchsen, siehe Schaltplan)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (je nach Jumper auf PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
| Aux digital I/O, bei einigen Scan-Treibern Sustain- und Cancel-Eingänge (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (nicht verwenden)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
| SD-Kartenadapater (oder ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
| Anschluss für FT800 Grafikdisplay
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
| MIDI IN/OUT Konfigurations-Jumper
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
| MIDI-Steuerung für MAG Vent, TTL-Pegel
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
| Serielles Interface für FTDI-Kabel
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
| Bluetooth-/WiFi-Modul (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
| 4-pin-Steckerleiste USB zu HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
| USB-Anschluss (MIDI-USB, Updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
| Menü-Panel/Preset-Boards, I2C
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
| MPX-Bus (neue DBX-Zugriegel- und PTX-Poti-Platinen)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
| 3-pin-Steckerleiste Fußschweller (FC-7-kompatibel)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
| 3-pin-Steckerleiste Fußschalter Rotary-Steuerung
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm-Buchse Fußschalter Rotary-Steuerung
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
| Analoge Eingänge 0 bis 11 (Default Zugriegel Obermanual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
| Analoge Eingänge 12 bis 23, (Default Zugriegel Untermanual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
| Vibrato-Drehschalter (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3-mm-Buchse Fußschweller (FC-7-kompatibel)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
| Taster/Schalter 0 bis 7 (Default Percussion, Vib On, Rotary-Steuerung)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
| Taster/Schalter 8 bis 15 (Default Presets oder Vibrato Buttons, Reverb, Bypass, Split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), beide Pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC-Eingang auf PL9/PL11 (Steckernetzteilanschluss) wenn gejumpert 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (nicht verwenden) 
|-
! JP4
| Stromversorgung über USB (kann Störgeräusch verursachen)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), beide Pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default Jumper-Einstellung: 2 Jumper auf PL20 pin 2-3 und 5-6 (linker Pin ist 1) für zweiten MIDI IN''
|}

== Stromversorgung ==

Das HX3.6-Mainboard kann entweder über den koaxialen '''DC-Eingang PL9''' (5,5/2,1 mm-Stecker, Plus am Mittelstift, DC 9V 500mA Steckernetzteil) oder über die '''grünen DC-Anschlüsse''' PL11 (9 bis 12V Eingang) oder PL10 (5V Eingang; 5V Ausgang bei Versorgung an DC-Buchse PL11 oder PL9) mit Strom versorgt werden. '''Spannungen über 5,2V an PL11 zerstören die Platine!'''

Wenn Sie eine externe '''5V DC''' Versorgung am '''DC-Eingang PL9''' verwenden müssen, stecken Sie den Jumper JP2 (neben der DC-Buchse). Wir raten von dieser Konfiguration ab, da der versehentliche Anschluss einer DC-Versorgung mit mehr als 5V Ausgangsspannung zur '''Zerstörung der Platine''' führt!

Nach dem Einschalten flackert eine rote LED in der Nähe von PL17 kurz auf; sie flackert auch, wenn der HX3.6-Controller beschäftigt ist. Wenn die TrueOrgan-Sound-Engine bereit ist, wird eine gelbe LED gedimmt; sie "atmet" mit der Geschwindigkeit der Rotationssimulation. Wenn der Effekt-/GM-DSP bereit ist, blinkt eine blaue LED im Sekundentakt. Die blaue LED flackert ein/3x kurz aus, wenn der DSP bereit ist, ein DFU-Firmware-Update per USB zu akzeptieren.

== HX3.6 für den ersten Gebrauch vorbereiten ==

Ab Werk sind die HX3.6-Karten als MIDI-Expander konfiguriert (keine analogen Eingänge). Sie sollte mit MIDI-Input einen grundlegenden Orgelklang an den Audioausgängen liefern, auch wenn keine anderen Peripheriegeräte angeschlossen sind. Grundfunktionen sind verfügbar, wenn ein Menü-Panel angeschlossen ist. Zu anderen Installationen müssen Sie zumindest einige '''System Init'''-Parameter einstellen. Siehe Abschnitt '''Installation mit dem HX3.6 Manager''' weiter unten.

===Menü-Panel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 Menü-Panel''', bestückt mit optionalen LEDs]]

Unser [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] ermöglicht die bequeme Einstellung verschiedener HX3-Parameter, um Ihr Setup zu optimieren. Zwei Versionen sind erhältlich, die kurze Version ohne Anzeige-LEDs ist für den Einbau in Orgeln gedacht.

Das Menü-Panel wird über ein 10pol. Flachbandkabel an '''PL26 PANEL''' angeschlossen. Wird das Menü-Panel zusammen mit Preset16- oder Extend16-Platinen eingesetzt, sollte das Menü-Panel das letzte Modul in der Bus-Kette an PL26 sein, da es nur einen Bus-Anschluss aufweist.

Neuere Menü-Panel der langen Ausführung besitzen einen separaten Anschluss für die 7 LEDs. Dieser wird mit '''PL35''' des Mainboards verbunden.

===Serielles USB-Kabel===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI-Kabel verbunden mit HX3''']]

Zur schnellen Konfiguration des Boards können Sie eine serielle Verbindung über ein FTDI-USB-Adapterkabel oder ein USB-Interface verwenden, das mit PL22 verbunden wird (Kabelfarben aufgedruckt). Alternativ können Sie den USB-Anschluss oder sogar die MIDI IN/OUT-Buchsen über ein USB-MIDI-Interface eines Fremdherstellers verwenden. Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für weitere Details.

=== Konfiguration per SD-Karte ===

Wenn ein SD-Kartenadapter mit eingesteckter SD-Karte (FAT32-formatiert) eingesteckt ist, startet HX3.6 nach dem Einschalten grundsätzlich im Bootloader-Update-Modus. Starten Sie ein Update mit einem Druck auf den Menupanel-Drehknopf. Es werden nur die Teile aktuaöisiert, für die eine entsprechende Datei (.BIN, .DAT) auf der Karte gefunden wird.

Alternativ zu einzelnen Dateien kann mit dem HX3.6 Manager BootLoad auch eine einzelne gepackte DFU-Datei erstellt und auf der Karte gespeichert werden. Sie wird von HX3.6 genau so behandelt wie ein DFU-Update über USB-Kabel. Updates werden von uns in der Regel als eine solche DFU-Datei geliefert.

Bitte beachten Sie: Wenn eine neue Firmware installiert wurde, bleiben einige ''System Inits''-Einstellungen erhalten und müssen möglicherweise geändert werden, damit Ihre Konfiguration funktioniert.

Fortgeschrittene Benutzer können eigene INI-Skripte erstellen, die alle notwendigen Befehle enthalten und im Grunde dasselbe tun wie der HX3.6-Editor. Details finden Sie auf der Seite '''[[HX3.6 Verwendung von SD-Karten]]'''.

=== Konfiguration mit dem HX3.6-Manager===

Verbinden Sie alternativ den HX3.6 mit Ihrem PC über USB. Starten Sie den '''HX3.6 Manager''', klicken sie '''Connect''' und öffnen Sie das Fenster '''Updater'''. Vollständige oder teilweise Updates können über Menüs ausgeführt werden. Ein klick auf "Get Board Info" sollte die aktuelle Konfiguration anzeigen. Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für Details.

Checkliste:

* Funktioniert MIDI IN? Fabrikneue Boards sollten an den Audioausgängen einen einfachen Orgelsound liefern, der MIDI-Eingang liegt auf MIDI-Kanal 1. Der rechte 5-polige DIN-Anschluss (von hinten gesehen) ist immer ein MIDI IN.
* Ist ein passender Scan-Treiber installiert? Sie können den Scan-Treiber mit Hilfe des Updaters im HX3.6 Manager ersetzen. Verwenden Sie das Menü Update und wählen Sie "Scan Driver file". Der HX3.6 Updater fragt nach einer DAT-Datei, öffnen Sie entweder ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'' oder ''scanfatr.dat'', je nach Ihren Anforderungen.
* Sind die HX3.6-System-Inits korrekt? HX3.6 scannt keine Tasten oder Analogeingänge, wenn diese nicht korrekt eingestellt sind. Verwenden Sie den Editor im HX3.6 Manager und klicken Sie auf die rote Schaltfläche '''System Inits'''. Klicken Sie auf '''Get Group''' im Action-Menü, um die Tabelleneinträge zu aktualisieren.
* Funktionieren die analogen Drawbar-Eingänge? Wenn alle analogen Eingänge aktiviert sind (Parameter 1503>1), prüfen Sie, ob Änderungen an den Zugriegeln auf '''Upper DB''' bzw. allen anderen analogen Eingangsgruppen zu sehen sind, wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche '''Get Group''' klicken.
* Funktionieren die analogen Volumen-Eingänge? Nicht funktionierende Analogeingänge wurden möglicherweise auf "nicht zugewiesen" umgewidmet. Siehe Gruppe '''Analog Remap''' im Editor.

=== Updates ===

Einzelheiten finden Sie auf der Seite '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' oder auf der Seite '''[[HX3.6 Verwendung von SD-Karten]]'''.

=== Aktualisieren von DSP-Soundbänken ===

Siehe Seite '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für weitere Details.

==Parameter-Optimierung ==

Wenn Sie Hardware zu Ihrem HX3.6-Board hinzufügen, müssen Sie möglicherweise einige Parameter anpassen, um sie zum Laufen zu bringen. Ab Werk ist der HX3.6 als MIDI-Expander konfiguriert; er fragt keine angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte außer dem Menü-Panel ab und steuert sie nicht. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel die FatarScan2-Karte anschließen, müssen Sie auch den Scan-Treiber aktualisieren. Wenn Sie Zugriegel, Tasten oder Schalter anschließen, müssen Sie diese aktivieren.

Das Ändern von Parametern, die nicht im Menüsystem vorhanden sind, ist nur mit dem HX3.6 Editor möglich.

== MIDI-Konfiguration ==

Die HX3.6-Karte ist ab Werk als MIDI-Expander mit zwei MIDI-Eingängen konfiguriert. Der linke MIDI-DIN-Anschluss (von hinten gesehen) ist standardmäßig MIDI IN2. Er kann als MIDI OUT konfiguriert werden, indem Sie die Jumper-Einstellung an der Stiftleiste PL20 gemäß der folgenden Tabelle ändern (Pin 1 liegt in der Nähe des USB-Anschlusses, Pin 10 in der Nähe der DIN-Buchse). Für die +5V-Phantomspeisung an MIDI IN setzen Sie Jumper an den Pins 7-8 und 9-10. Wenn die Jumper für die Phantomspeisung installiert sind, führt die DIN-Buchse Masse am mittleren Pin 2 und +5V an den beiden ansonsten unbenutzten äußeren Pins 1 und 3. Die Phantomspeisung kann zur Versorgung der an die linke DIN-Buchse angeschlossenen '''BASS25 MIDI''' Scan-Karte verwendet werden.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - Funktion der linken MIDI-Buchse
|-
!Funktion
!JP auf Pin
!JP auf Pin
!Gnd (blau) JP auf Pin
!Vcc (rot) JP auf Pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|offen
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|offen
|offen
|-
!MIDI IN m. Phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 ist links, von hinten (Platinenrand) aus gesehen''
|}

MIDI über USB ist verfügbar, wenn die USB-Buchse PL25 installiert ist oder ein Mini-USB-Buchsenadapter (optional) oder das HX3.5 Extension Board per Kabel mit PL32 verbunden ist. Bitte beachten Sie: Aufgrund von Hardware-Einschränkungen dürfen '''MIDI IN2 und USB MIDI IN nicht gleichzeitig verwendet werden'''. Es treten sonst Übertragungsfehler auf!

==USB Port==

An Position PL25 kann bei Bedarf ein USB-Typ-B-Stecker eingelötet werden. Er ist werksseitig nicht bestückt, um die mechanische Kompatibilität mit bestehenden Rückwänden zu gewährleisten. Zusätzlich ist das USB-Signal auf der Stiftleiste PL24 (in der Nähe der USB-Buchse) verfügbar, um USB zu unserem HX3.5 Extension Board zu leiten. Der USB-Anschluss ist standardmäßig als "MIDI over USB"-Gerät konfiguriert. Im DFU-Update-Modus wird er zum Anschluss für die HX3.6-DFU-Update-Anwendung.

'''Wichtig:''' Wenn Sie eine "MIDI-over-USB"-Verbindung verwenden (wie beim HX3.6 Manager), trennen Sie alle MIDI-Geräte von der sekundären (linken) MIDI-Eingangs-DIN-Buchse, da sie sich dieselbe MIDI-Eingangsleitung teilen.

Der USB-Anschluss wird auch für DSP-Firmware- oder Soundbank-Updates verwendet.

===Installation des Mini-USB-Adapters===

Zur Verwendung mit der HX3.4-Rückwand mit Mini-USB-Ausschnitt schließen Sie den Mini-USB-Adapter wie folgt an:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB-Adapter
!USB-Kabelfarbe
|-
|G
|GND
|schwarz
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|grün
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|weiß
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|rot
|}
 

==Audio-Ausgänge==

Zusätzlich zu den 1/4"-Audiobuchsen links/rechts liegt das Stereo-Audiosignal an PL3 an (Mitte = analoge Masse).

==Analoge Eingänge anschließen==

HX3.6 bietet '''24 interne Analogeingänge''', die alle auf den Stiftleisten '''PL31 und PL32''' liegen, sowie bis zu '''64 externe Analogeingänge''' über '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' Zugriegel- und '''PTX4-25/35''' Potentiometer-Baugruppen, die am '''PL27 MPX-Bus''' angeschlossen sind. Alle analogen Eingänge sind DC-gesteuert. Der Eingangsspannungsbereich reicht von 0V (aus oder minimale Lautstärke) bis +3,3V (maximale Lautstärke). In der Werkskonfiguration sind alle Analogeingänge deaktiviert, so dass HX3.6 '''ohne angeschlossene Schalter/Zugriegel/Potis''' verwendet werden kann. Sie können die internen Anschlüsse PL31 und PL32 offen lassen, wenn Sie nur eine Steuerung über MIDI planen.

===Analoge Eingänge zuweisen===

Um analoge Steuereingänge zu aktivieren, setzen Sie in der Anwendung HX3.6-Editor den Parameter #1503 auf den Wert 2 (wenn alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegel an PL31/PL32 verwendet werden sollen) oder 3 (sonst). Einzelne Analogeingänge können im Abschnitt '''Analog Remap''' des HX3.6-Editors mit den Parametern #5000 bis #5023 (für die internen Eingänge PL31/PL32) und #5024 bis #5088 (externe DBX/PTX-Platinen an PL27) deaktiviert oder umgelenkt werden. Siehe Abschnitt [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Mischen_von_DB9.2FDB12-_und_DBX-Drawbar-Sets]] für weitere Details.

Wenn einzelne interne Eingangspins an PL31/PL32 nicht verwendet werden (d.h. offen bleiben, keine Zugriegel oder Potis installiert), setzen Sie den entsprechenden Parameter #5000..#5023 auf "254 - Nicht belegt". Um '''alle''' internen Eingänge an PL31/PL32 zu sperren, setzen Sie den ersten Parameter #5000 auf "255 - Ende der Tabelle". Gleiches gilt für PL27 MPX-Bus-Eingänge: Wenn keine zusätzlichen DBX- oder PTX-Karten angeschlossen sind, setzen Sie Parameter #5024 auf "255 - Ende der Tabelle".

Hinweis: Weisen Sie eine Orgelfunktion nicht mehr als einem Analogeingang zu.

===Eingabeprüfung & -überwachung===

Alle zugewiesenen Eingänge sollten mit einem physischen Steuerelement verbunden sein. Andernfalls "floaten" die Eingänge und HX3.6 sendet zufällige MIDI-Steuerungswerte mit einer hohen Rate; dies kann ein Update unmöglich machen.

Im HX3.6 Editor gibt es eine Überwachungsfunktion, mit der Sie die Zustände der physischen Tasten und die analogen Eingangsspannungen überprüfen können. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Input Monitor" und markieren Sie die Checkboxen der Eingangstypen, die Sie überwachen möchten. Änderungen der Eingangsspannung sollten sofort in der/den Tabelle(n) erscheinen. Wenn Sie auf einen Tabelleneintrag klicken, springt die Haupttabelle auf die zugehörige Zuweisungsgruppe.

==Interne Analogeingänge==

Um interne Analogeingänge an '''PL31 und PL32''' zu verwenden, setzen Sie ''System Inits'' Parameter #1503 auf 2 oder 3. Setzen Sie die ''Analog Remap''-Parameter #5000 bis #5023 entsprechend Ihrer Anschlussbelegung. Standardmäßig ist die Anschlussbelegung auf HX3.4-DB9/DB12-Kompatibilität eingestellt.

===Anschluss von Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Zugriegel- und Potianschluss an PL31 und PL32 (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Untermanual-Konfiguration mit DB12 (A#-Presettaste, links) und DB9-MPX (B-Presettaste, rechts). Anschluss an HX3 über langes Flachbandkabel (rechts). Die Oberemanual-Konfiguration ist ähnlich, verwendet aber DB9 oder DB11 anstelle von DB12.''']]

Die klassischen Zugriegelsets DB9/DB11/DB12 können für Einzelzugriegelkonfigurationen verwendet werden. Der Anschluss an unsere alten Zugriegelplatinen DB9 und DB12 ist einfach: DB9 (oben) wird an '''PL31 ANLG UPR''' angeschlossen, DB12 (unten) an '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' über ein 16-adriges Flachbandkabel (Länge bis zu 1m, Stecker 1:1 verdrahtet). DB9 bietet 3-polige Stiftleisten für den Anschluss von Tone- und Amp122 Volume-Potis.

Zusätzliche DB9-MPX-Karten (veraltet - verwenden Sie stattdessen DBX-Zugriegel-Module) können für Konfigurationen mit zwei Zugriegelsätzen pro Manual eingefügt werden. Sekundäre DB9-MPX-Drawbar-Sets sollten wie bei Hammond-Konsolen rechts neben den entsprechenden primären DB9- oder DB12-Drawbars angeordnet werden. Ein kurzes Flachbandkabel verbindet beide (siehe Bild).

DB9 und DB11/12 sind kompatibel und austauschbar, trotz zusätzlicher Zugriegel für Basspedal bzw. Tone/Amp-Volume.

===Anschließen anderer Zugriegel-Potis===

Sie können auch Ihre eigenen oder vorhandene Zugriegel wie folgt verwenden: Schließen Sie mindestens 9 Zugriegel oder Schieberegler und den Lautstärkeregler Leslie an '''PL31 ANLG UPR''' an. Der R-Wert sollte im Bereich von 10 kOhm liegen, '''linear taper''' (zum Beispiel Typ B10K). Höhere Widerstandswerte sind zulässig, wenn Sie an den Schleifer-Anschluss einen 100n-Keramikkondensator nach Masse schalten. Beachten Sie, dass die Verwendung von Zugriegel-Potentiometern mit logarithmischer Kennlinie, wie sie in verschiedenen älteren LSI- und Transistor-Orgeln zu finden sind, nicht zu einer korrekten Lautstärke und Zugriegelposition auf dem Menü-Panel führt.

Jeder Analogeingang kann im Abschnitt "Analog Remap" des HX3.6-Editors mit einer beliebigen Analogfunktion "weich verdrahtet" werden. Standardmäßig werden analoge Funktionen so zugeordnet, dass die HX3.4-Kompatibilität erhalten bleibt (siehe unten).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Steuerspannungen Obermanual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, Volumen des simulierten Röhrenverstärkers
|-
! Pin 12
| Zugewiesenes Poti (zuweisbar mit HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Poti gemeinsame Masse GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B Schaltsignal (kann mit Pin 16 verbunden werden)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Poti Ende 3.3V+ (Referenz)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Steuerspannungen Untermanual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Poti Bass Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Poti gemeinsame Masse GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B Schaltsignal (kann mit Pin 16 verbunden werden)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Poti Ende 3.3V+ (Referenz)
|}
 
Auch bei MIDI-Steuerung sollte für eine schnellere Reaktion ein Schwellpedal an die SWELL-Buchse angeschlossen werden. Dies überschreibt die MIDI-Lautstärkeregelung. Sie können ein Schwellpedal wie das Yamaha FC-7 oder ein einfaches Lautstärkepotentiometer an die SWELL-Buchse anschließen.

Auf der HX3-Hauptplatine sind werkseitig die Eingänge für die Tone/Treble- und Amp-Lautstärkeregelung aktiv (kann auch mit dem ''HX3.6 Editor'' geändert werden). Der Schleifer des Tone-Potis wird an Pin 10 von PL31 angeschlossen. Pin 11 wird zum Lautstärke-/Drive-Regler des Leslie-Verstärkers (obligatorisch). Der Schleifer des Amp-Volume-Potis wird an Pin 11 von PL31 angeschlossen. Beide Potis beginnen mit GND und enden mit Ref 3.3V+.

Bitte beachten Sie: Offene Analogeingänge (nicht beschaltet) "schweben" und ändern sich zufällig, auch bei aktiven Presets. Deaktivieren Sie nicht verwendete Eingänge mit dem Abschnitt ''Analog Remap'' im HX3.6-Editor (auf "254 - Not assigned" einstellen).

 

==Externe Analogeingänge (PL27 MPX-Bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9-Drawbar-Set zum Anschluss an PL27-MPX-Bus-Eingang, auf der rechten Seite gekürzt, um in die Orgel zu passen (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 Drawbar-Set in 9+3-Konfiguration für B3-ähnliche Installationen. Beachten Sie, dass der rechte Anschluss PL4 (Bottom Mount) nicht verwendet werden kann, da der Platz vom Zugriegel-Potentiometer belegt wird. Verwenden Sie den oberen Anschluss PL8 oder die rechten Lötpads zum Aneinanderreihen von Zugriegel-Sets. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX6-Zugriegelsatz und PTX4-35-Potentiometer-Baugruppe hintereinandergeschaltet, geeignet für ADRS-, Lautstärke- oder Equalizer-Regelung (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 und DBX9 Zugriegel-Sets verbunden mit oberen Anschlüssen. Alternativ können auch Lötpads auf der linken und rechten Seite verwendet werden. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Aufgrund einer Design-Fehlers bei den Zugriegelsätzen DBX12 v4 und DBX9 v4 (erste Serie) muss bei Verwendung der oberen Anschlüsse ein Draht an PL8 Pin 2 und Pin 5 angelötet werden, wie gezeigt. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]

Wir empfehlen die Baugruppen '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 oder 12 DrawBars gemultipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog-Eingänge gemultipleXed) und '''PTX4-25 oder PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometer gemultipleXed) für neue Orgel-Designs, da sie die Installation stark vereinfachen. Diese Baugruppen besitzen eigene Multiplexer/Schieberegister-ICs, so dass sie über das MPX-Bussystem, ein 10-adriges Flachbandkabel, das an '''PL27 MPX''' auf der HX3.6-Hauptplatine angeschlossen wird, in Reihe geschaltet werden können. Es können beliebig viele DBX6-, DBX9-, DBX12-, ANX8- und PTX4-Module in beliebiger Reihenfolge aneinandergereiht werden, bis die maximale Kapazität von 64 analogen Reglern erreicht ist. Die 24 internen Eingänge auf '''PL31/PL32''' können unabhängig davon genutzt werden, so dass sich insgesamt '''88 analoge Eingänge''' ergeben.

===DBX-Steckverbinder installieren===

DBX-Platinen sind mit zwei abgewinkelten 10-poligen Steckern versehen. Alle DBX-Zugriegelplatinen sind auch ohne Zugriegel-Potentiometer lieferbar. Bitte bestellen Sie Zugriegel-Potentiometer und -Kappen dafür gesondert. Stecken Sie die Zugriegel von der Unterseite der Platine (keine Siebdruckbeschriftung) an den gewünschten Positionen in die Lötpads, drehen Sie sie um und legen Sie sie vor dem Löten auf eine ebene Fläche, um gleichmäßige Abstände zu erhalten.

Für den Einsatz in engen Installationen können alle DBX-Platinen mit einem fein gezahnten Sägeblatt entlang der weißen Linien auf der Platine ohne Beeinträchtigung der Funktion getrennt werden. Dies sollte vor der Montage von Zugriegel-Potentiometern erfolgen.

===DBX6 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX6-Karten sind für ADSR, Equalizer oder Lautstärkeregler mit 4 bis 6 Zugriegeln geeignet. Bei 6 montierten Zugriegeln wird die rechte untere Position des Steckverbinders durch den letzten Zugriegel belegt. Verwenden Sie in diesem Fall Lötpad-Drahtverbindungen oder oben montierte Steckverbinder für die Anreihung von Boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX6 (Zugriegel für diverse Funktionen)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX9-Karten eignen sich für klassische 9-Zugriegel-Installationen an B3- oder M100-ähnlichen Orgelkonsolen. Sie bieten zusätzlich 3 analoge Eingänge (bei Bedarf) zum Anschluss eigener Potentiometer (10k bis 47k Typen geeignet). Um diese zu nutzen, setzen Sie den Lötpunkt-"Jumper" JP1 offen und JP2 geschlossen (Modus 12 Analogeingänge). Die Potentiometer-Eingänge stehen an dem 6-poligen Stecker PL2 zur Verfügung (nicht montiert; alle 6-poligen Stecker sind parallel verdrahtet, gleiche Pinbelegung). Die Eingänge sind auch an 5 Lötpads verfügbar, die mit AIN +9 bis AIN +11 gekennzeichnet sind, sowie an GND und VREF (gemeinsam für alle Potis). Die Jumper-Einstellungen geschehen durch Entfernen oder Hinzufügen von Lötpunkten. Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Bedienelements auf dem nächsten Modul in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper-Einstellungen DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars auf DBX9
|offen
|geschlossen
|-
!9 Drawbars und 1 bis 3 Potis auf DBX9
|geschlossen
|offen
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 harmonische Zugriegel, JP2 geschlossen)''
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX9 + 3 Analogeingänge
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 Zugriegel) plus 3 zusätzliche Potentiometer-Eingänge (JP1 geschlossen)''
|}

Die Belegung der 6-poligen Steckerleisten zum Anschluss weiterer Potentiometer ist wie folgt:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Belegung der 6-poligen Steckerleiste PL2
|-
!Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(nicht verbunden)
|-
!5
|VREF (gemeinsames Poti-Ende)
|-
!6
|GND (gemeinsamer Poti-Anfang)
|}

===DBX12 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX12-Platinen sind für 12-Zugriegel-Installationen auf '''H100-, Böhm- oder Wersi'''-ähnlichen Orgelpulten geeignet. Die Zugriegelpositionen DB+0 bis DB+11 sind bestückt, die ganz rechte Position R16 bleibt leer.

Es ist aber auch möglich, DBX12-Platinen in einer '''B3-ähnlichen 9+3'''-Zugriegelkonfiguration zu verwenden (d.h. 9 obere oder untere auf der linken Seite, eine Leerstelle und 3 Pedal-Zugriegel auf der rechten Seite). Bestücken Sie in diesem Fall nicht R13 (Leerstelle), sondern verwenden Sie stattdessen die Position R16 (ganz rechts). Beachten Sie, dass die Position R16 (Pedal Sustain) als Eingang #9 (R13) behandelt wird, nicht #12. In jedem Fall hat der DBX12 nur 12 Eingänge, nicht 13. Es ist '''nicht''' möglich, DBX12 als 3+9 Zugriegel (Pedalzugriegel auf der linken Seite) zu bestücken, da sich die Positionen R13 und R16 denselben Analogeingang teilen! Siehe Abschnitt [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Typische_Anwendungen]] für Details. Jumper-Einstellungen durch Entfernen oder Hinzufügen von Lötpunkten. Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelements des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper-Einstellungen DBX12
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars auf DBX12
|geschlossen
|offen
|-
!9+3 Drawbars auf DBX12
|geschlossen
|offen
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX12 in H100-Konfiguration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | kein R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| keiner
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Eingangsbelegung für H100-ähnliche Installation (12 Zugriegel) mit '''R13''' installiert, '''kein R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX12 in B3-ähnlicher Konfiguration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | kein R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| keiner
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 harmonische plus 3 Pedal-Zugriegel) mit '''R16''' installiert, '''kein R13''' ''
|}

===PTX4 Potentiometer-Modul===

Die Karten '''PTX4-25''' und '''PTX4-35''' verfügen über 4 hochwertige Potentiometer, wahlweise mit oder ohne Mittelrastung. Der einzige Unterschied ist der Abstand von einem Poti zum nächsten (25mm bei PTX4-25, 35mm bei PTX4-35). Beliebig viele PTX4-Karten können an beliebiger Stelle in die MPX-Bus-Kette eingefügt werden. Eine einzelne PTX4-Platine fügt +4 zum Nummerierungschema der Eingänge hinzu, wie oben erwähnt, d.h. wenn das erste (linke) Potentiometer zum Eingang #20 wurde ( wegen vorgeschalteter DBX-Platinen), ist das ganz rechte Potentiometer #23, und die nächste PTX- oder DBX-Platine (rechts angeschlossen) wird mit #24 beginnen.

PTX4-Potentiometerplatinen sind '''nicht''' zur Verwendung als externe Potentiometer an den DBX9-Analogeingängen vorgesehen. Verwenden Sie stattdessen separate Potentiometer.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung PTX4-25 und PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Poti
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 ist das erste linke Potentiometer''
|}

Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelement des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls). 

===ANX8 Analoges Eingangsmodul===

'''ANX8'''-Boards verfügen über 8 zusätzliche analoge Eingänge zum Anschluss von eingebauten Potentiometern, Zugriegeln, Pitch/Modulationsrädern und anderen analogen Bedienelementen. Es können beliebig viele ANX8-Karten an beliebiger Stelle in die MPX-Buskette eingefügt werden, wobei PL9 "NEXT BOARD" zum Ende der Kette zeigt. Eine einzelne ANX8-Karte fügt +8 zur Eingangsnummerierung hinzu, wie oben erwähnt, d.h. wenn das erste (ganz linke) Potentiometer zum Eingang #20 wurde ( wegen vorgeschalteter DBX-Boards), ist das ganz rechte Potentiometer #27, und die nächste PTX- oder DBX-Platine (rechts angeschlossen) wird mit #28 beginnen.

Es stehen 8 separate Eingänge an den 3-poligen Stiftleisten PL1 bis PL8 zur Verfügung. Verbinden Sie den/die mit "REF" gekennzeichneten Pin(s) mit dem Ende des Potentiometers, Pin "GND" mit dem Anfang, Pin "AIN" mit dem Schleifer.

Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelements des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Eingang
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

Zur komfortablen Verdrahtung sind die Analogeingänge auch in Gruppen von 4 Eingängen zugänglich (PL11 mit den Eingängen +0 bis +3, PL12 mit den Eingängen +4 bis +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Eingang
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Hintereinanderschaltung von DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 und PTX4===

Schließen Sie die erste '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' oder '''PTX4''' Baugruppe an PL27 an. Der äußerste linke Regler, den HX3.6 in der Kette "sieht", ist der externe MPX-Analogeingang #0 (zugewiesen durch Parameter #5024). Die Nummer zählt bis zur nächsten DBX/PTX-Baugruppe, die an den Daisy-Chain-Anschluss angeschlossen ist. D.h. wenn Sie einen DBX9 und einen PTX4 (in dieser Reihenfolge) verketten, wird das ganz linke (erste) Potentiometer am PTX4 zum Regler #9, zugewiesen durch Parameter #5033 (#0 bis #8 durch DBX9 verbraucht). Das Hinzufügen eines DBX12 beginnt bei #13, zugewiesen durch Parameter #5037, und so weiter.

Ihre Kette sieht nun so aus:
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

Hinweis: PL1 (links oben, unten montiert) und PL7 sind intern parallel geschaltet, ebenso wie PL3 (rechts oben, unten montiert) und PL8. Diese Anschlüsse können alternativ verwendet werden (siehe [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Installations-Alternativen]] für Details).

Wie bereits erwähnt, können DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 oder PTX4 in beliebiger Reihenfolge angeordnet werden, solange sie eine Kette von einer Karte zur anderen bilden. Die Parametrierung beginnt immer bei #0 (Parameter #5024) für das am weitesten links stehende Bedienelement in der Kette. Es ist möglich, einzelne Zugriegel-Eingänge zu '''überspringen''', indem ihr Zuordnungsparameter auf "254 - Not assigned" gesetzt wird. Dies kann bei Leerstellen in der Zugriegelanordnung sinnvoll sein, z. B. zwischen harmonischen und ADSR-Zugriegeln oder Obermanual- und Pedalzugriegeln. Alle DBX-Karten sind ohne montierte Zugriegel-Potentiometer erhältlich, so dass Sie diese nach Ihren Wünschen konfigurieren können.

===Typische Anwendungen===
Eine typische Orgelkonfiguration (9 Zugriegel pro Manual, 3 für Pedal) mit DBX12 kann wie folgt aussehen:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
oder, je nach Installation (um die Kabellänge kurz zu halten):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
Eine H100-ähnliche Installation kann wie folgt aussehen:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Hinweis: PL1 (links oben, unten montiert) und PL7 sind intern parallel geschaltet, ebenso wie PL3/PL4 (rechts oben, unten montiert) und PL8. Diese Anschlüsse können alternativ verwendet werden (siehe [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Installations-Alternativen]] für Details).

====Installations-Alternativen====

DBX-Platinen können miteinander verkettet (hintereinandergeschaltet) werden, indem Sie 10-polige Steckverbinder von unten (linke und rechte Seite der Platine), 10-polige Steckverbinder von oben oder auf Lötpads gelötete Drähte verwenden. Mit jeder Karte werden 2 abgewinkelte 10-polige Steckverbinder mitgeliefert; Sie können auch gerade Steckverbinder verwenden, wenn der Platz dies zulässt.

Statt Flachbandkabel zu verwenden, können benachbarte DBX-Platinen mit Hilfe von Lötpunkten und 6 kurzen Drahtstücken (in obiger Tabelle mit "=" gekennzeichnet) dort verkettet werden, wo die Platinen "aneinanderstoßen". Lötpads auf der linken und rechten Seite ermöglichen eine einfache Verbindung von einer Platine zur nächsten durch '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG und NRST''' Pads ('''VREF3 bleibt unbeschaltet''', ebenso wie zusätzliche Potentiometer-Pads!)

Die Platinen können auch '''entlang der weißen Linien''' abgesägt werden, wenn kein Platz von einem Zugriegel zum nächsten auf einer anderen Platine vorhanden ist. Trennen Sie die Platine bei Bedarf '''vor''' der Montage der Zugriegel-Potentiometer. Die Platinen verfügen über zusätzliche Lötpads für die Verkettung mit Drähten, auch wenn die Platine gekürzt wird. Die letzte DBX-Platine der Reihe sollte jedoch PL3 (DBX9) oder PL4 (DBX12) beibehalten, da Sie in Zukunft eventuell weitere DBX- oder PTX4-Platinen hinzufügen möchten. '''Auch hier gilt: Planen Sie sorgfältig, bevor Sie Zugriegel-Potis einlöten oder Boards absägen!'''

 

====Zweifache/sekundäre DBX-Drawbar-Sätze====

Klassische Konsolorgel-Installationen erfordern zwei Zugriegelsätze für jedes Manual. Die Verwendung von doppelten Zugriegelsätzen mit dem DBX-Sammelsystem unterscheidet sich von alten DB9-MPX-Installationen. In DBX-Installationen können alle Zugriegel von der Firmware "gesehen" werden, auch die inaktiven (sie werden nur übersprungen, wenn der Zugriegelsatz nicht aktiv ist). Setzen Sie den Parameter #1503 auf 3 (DBX-Modus) und weisen Sie allen Eingängen, die primäre Zugriegel sind, die Werte ''Upr1'' oder ''Lwr1'' zu, während sekundäre Zugriegel zu ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' werden (128 und höher).

Die sekundären Zugriegel werden aktiviert, wenn die im jeweiligen Manual eingestellte '''Voice''' der Nummer in "System Inits" Parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number) entspricht, andernfalls werden sie übersprungen und die primären Zugriegel werden aktiv.

====Mischen von DB9/DB12- und DBX-Drawbar-Sets====

Da die internen Eingänge an PL31/PL32 auch in DBX-Konfigurationen als Zugriegel-Eingänge verwendet werden können, dürfen vorhandene DB9/DB12- und sogar DB9-MPX-Zugriegel, die an PL31/PL32 angeschlossen sind (zugewiesen durch ''Analog Remap'' #5000 bis #5023), weiterhin verwendet werden, entweder als primäre oder sekundäre Zugriegel-Sets.

* Wenn '''alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegelboards''' als sekundäre Zugriegel-Sets an PL31/PL32 angeschlossen sind, setzen Sie den Wert von Parameter #1503 auf 2 (DB9-MPX-Modus). In diesem Fall '''verwenden Sie nicht''' die sekundären Zugriegel-Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' für die Eingänge (Parameterwerte 128 und höher) im Abschnitt "Analog Remap"; die Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' werden ignoriert.

* Wenn alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegelboards '''nicht''' verwendet werden, setzen Sie den Wert von Parameter #1503 auf 3 (DBX-Modus). In diesem Fall können die sekundären Zugriegel-Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' für Eingänge (Parameterwerte ab 128) im Abschnitt "Analog Remap" verwendet werden.

 

==Digitale Eingänge==

Das HX3.6-System bietet insgesamt 64 interne (logische) Schalterfunktionen oder "Tabs" (z. B. "Tube Amp Bypass" oder "H100 Keying Mode") sowie einige Sonderfunktionen (ab Firmware 5.7, z.B. Transpose Up/Down). Das Mainboard besitzt '''16 interne digitale Eingänge''' an PL35/PL36 (erweiterbar durch bis zu 5 externe Boards '''Preset16''' oder '''Extend16''' auf bis zu 96 Preset- und Schalterfunktionen) zum Anschluss von Schaltern oder Tastern plus einen Drehschaltereingang (Vibrato-Knopf V1..C3). Schalter sind einrastende Taster, Wipp- oder Kippschalter. Taster sind momentane Schaltkontakte, normalerweise offen. Alle Eingänge sind aktiv low, d.h. sie liegen auf Masse, wenn der Schalter/Taster betätigt wird. Sie können die Schalteranschlüsse offen lassen, wenn Sie HX3.6 nur über MIDI steuern wollen.

===Input Monitor===

Eine sehr hilfreiche Funktion des HX3.6 Editors ist der ''Input Monitor''. Sie können hiermit die Funktion aller Taster und Schalter überprüfen. Aktive (gedrückte) Buttons werden mit "ON" gekennzeichnet.

Durch Klick in die Input-Tabelle erfahren Sie auch, welchem HX3.6-Tab der Eingang bzw. der Button zugeordnet ist. Umgekehrt springt das aktive Feld in den Input-Monitor-Tabellen beim Klick auf eine Zuordnung in ''Switch Remap'' auf den zugeordneten Eingang.

===Onboard-Eingänge PL35/PL36===

Die Steckverbinder '''PL35 und PL36''' führen die 16 internen digitalen Eingänge; hier können eigene Taster/Schalter oder ein Panel16-Board angeschlossen werden (siehe unter '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Viele Installationen werden mit diesen 16 Tabs auskommen.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinbelegung PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default-Funktion
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinbelegung PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default-Funktion
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Taster oder Schalter====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss von Tasten mit LED-Anzeigen an PL35 PERC/VIBON und PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Verwenden Sie für blaue oder weiße LEDs einen R-Wert von 1k, da diese LEDs sehr hell sind.''']]

Anstelle von Panel16 können Sie auch Ihre eigenen Taster oder Registerkartenschalter (bis zu 16) direkt an die HX3.6-Hauptplatine anschließen. Jede Funktion wird entweder durch eine Taste oder einen Schalter (abhängig vom Parameter '''Button Mask''' in den Systemeinstellungen des HX3.6-Editors) an den digitalen Eingängen PL35/PL36 aktiviert. Bei Tastern schaltet ein kurzzeitiger Kontakt mit Masse an jedem PL35/PL36-Pin den Status um und steuert Anzeige-LEDs an (siehe Schaltplan). Bei Schaltern kann die Anzeige-LED weggelassen werden, da der mechanische Schalter den aktuellen Zustand anzeigt. Lassen Sie unbenutzte digitale Eingänge offen.

====Panel16====

Die einfachste Lösung für ein Schaltpanel ist die Verwendung [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/panel16 unserer Panel16-Platine], die über zwei 10-polige Flachbandkabel mit '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL und PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' verbunden ist. '''Panel16''' bietet 16 Tasten für die komplette Steuerung des HX3; fügen Sie einfach den Drehschalter für die Vibratotiefe hinzu.

Panel16 hat 4 "Common Preset"-Tasten im Layout für Standard-Orgelinstallationen. Die "Common Preset"-Tasten sind binär kodiert, so dass mehr als eine Preset-Taste aktiv sein kann (gleichzeitiges Drücken). Dies ermöglicht 16 Tastenkombinationen (alle aus bis alle an), die den Common Presets 0 (live) bis 15 entsprechen. Alternativ können diese Tasten zur Auswahl von V1-V3-Vibrato oder C1-C3-Chorus-Tiefe verwendet werden. In diesem Fall entfällt der Vibrato-Drehschalter an PL24; stellen Sie dann ''System Inits'' Parameter #1497 auf 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default-Button-Zuordnung Panel16 an PL25/26
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons obere Reihe
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe mit Vibrato-Buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe mit Preset-Buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Die Positionen der Tasten, die für Common Presets oder V1..V3 V/C verwendet werden, sind unter den Parametern ''Switch Remap Onboard'' abgelegt. Alle Tasten können frei belegt werden.

===Weitere Taster/Schalter===

Zur Erweiterung der Taster-/Schalter-Eingänge stehen die Boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' und auch das ältere '''Preset12-2''' zur Verfügung. Sie werden an '''PL26 PANEL''' auf dem Mainboard angeschlossen und über ein Bus-System (I2C) in Serie geschaltet. Jedes Board bildet eine Gruppe aus 16 Eingängen (2 x 12 bei Preset 12-2). Das MenüPanel wird ebenfalls mit diesem Bus verbunden; praktischerweise setzt man es an das Ende der Kette, da es nur einen Bus-Steckverbinder aufweist. Es ist ebenso möglich, mehrere 10polige Steckverbinder auf das Flachbandkabel an PL26 anzupressen.

Jedem Board muss über seine Jumper eine '''eindeutige Bus-Adresse''' zugeordnet werden ($60 bis $65, siehe Aufdruck und Tabelle unten). Bei älteren Preset16 und dem Preset12-2 sind die Adressen fest verdrahtet ($60 oder $61 für Preset16 alt, Preset12-2 belegt gleich zwei Adressen $60 und $61). Jede Adresse darf im Verbund nur einmal vergeben sein, sonst kommt es zu Bus-Konflikten.

Die 16 Eingänge eines Prest16- oder Extend16-Boards bilden ein Gruppe, bei 5 Boards sind dies die Gruppen 0 bis 5 entsprechend den eingestellten Adressen $60 bis $65. Es ist nicht nötig, die Adressen und damit die Gruppennummern der angeschlossenen Boards fortlaufend zu numerieren, es dürfen "Lücken" vorhanden sein. Diese fragt HX3.6 nicht ab.

Alle Taster-/Schalter können über die HX3.6-Editor-Parameter ''Switch Remap'' einer beliebigen HX3.6-Funktion ("Tab") zugeordnet werden; die Parameter in der Gruppe ''Input Mode'' entscheiden, ob am entsprechenden Eingang ein Schalter (ON, 255) oder ein Taster mit LED (OFF, 0, default) angeschlossen ist.

Um die Funktion und Zugehörigkeit eines digitalen Eingangs zu überprüfen, verwenden Sie den ''Input Monitor'' im HX3.6-Editor. Durch einen Klick in die Monitor-Tabelle können Sie außerdem feststellen, welchem HX3.6-Tab dieser Eingang zugeordnet ist.

Jeder digitale Eingang kann im Abschnitt ''Switch Remap'' des HX3-Editors, Parameter 5100 bis 5195, aktiviert/deaktiviert oder umgeleitet werden. Auch Preset- und Voice-Taster dürfen beliebig auf die 96 Eingänge verteilt werden. Einzige Restriktion: Taster einer bestimmten Preset-Funktion (Upper, Lower oder Common) müssen innerhalb einer Gruppe bzw. eines Boards auf fortlaufenden Buttons liegen, es ist nicht möglich, zum Beispiel Upper Voices auf 2 Boards/Gruppen zu verteilen.

====Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge====

Input-Gruppe 2 ($62) ist bereits für die 16 Eingänge auf dem HX3.6-Mainboard vergeben (siehe unten, Abschnitt '''Panel16''') und darf für externe Preset16/Extend16 nicht verwendet werden.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input-Gruppe
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus-Adresse
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper auf Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 geschlossen
|JP2, JP3 geschlossen
|JP1, JP3 geschlossen
|JP3 geschlossen
|JP1, JP2 geschlossen
|JP2 geschlossen
|-
!Hinweis
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Feste Adressen für Preset16 (alt, Upper 0, Lower 1) und Preset12-2 (beide)
|HX3.6-Platine onboard, feste Adresse '''Nicht für Preset16, Extend16 benutzen!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button links oben oder erster Eingang
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

Die Nummer eines bestimmten Tasters/Schalters ergibt sich aus der Gruppen-Basisnummer (16 * Gruppe/Board-Nummer) plus dem angegebenen Offset. Für das Board mit Adresse '''$63''' wäre der erste Eingang also 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] ist ein eigenständiges Panel mit 2 Reihen zu je 8 LED-Tasten. Es wird über ein 10-poliges Flachbandkabel mit '''HX3 PL26''' verbunden. Weitere Preset16 können an die jeweils zweite 10-polige Stiftleiste angeschlossen werden (Daisy Chain). Beide 10-poligen Stiftleisten am Preset16 können verwendet werden (sind parallel verdrahtet).

Ein gesteckter Jumper auf älteren Preset16-Platinen wählt das obere Manual aus, falls vorhanden. Fehlt die Brücke, arbeitet Preset16 auf unterem Manual. Neuere Preset16-Platinen verfügen über drei Jumper (Lötbrücken), um das Preset16 auf obere oder untere manuelle Voice-Presets (Adresse $60 und $61) einzustellen (siehe Tabelle '''Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge'''). Setzen Sie Lötpunkte, um eine der in der Tabelle angegebenen Platinenadressen zu erhalten.

Wenn Sie zwei Zugriegel pro Manual verwenden, indem Sie DBX oder ältere DB9-MPX (veraltet) Zugriegelkarten verwenden, setzen Sie den ''System Inits'' Parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" auf 1. Dadurch wird der erste Zugriegelsatz auf Preset 0 aktiviert, der zweite Zugriegelsatz auf Preset 1. Sie können eine beliebige Voice von 1 bis 15 für die Aktivierung des zweiten Zugriegelsets verwenden. Höhere Zahlen deaktivieren die Umschaltung.

Die Board-Adresse darf beliebig sein (außer $62 für Gruppe 2), da die Preset-Buttons über ''Switch Remap'' zugewiesen werden. Voreingestellt in der Firmware sind allerdings $60 und $61, um mit bestehenden Installationen kompatibel zu bleiben. Um eine Kompatibilität mit vorhendenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, was obere und untere Button-Reihe von Preset16 vertauscht. Alternativ können Sie die grauen Tastenkappen in die obere Button-Reihe umstecken; sie lassen sich mit etwas Kraft abziehen. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default-Button-Belegung
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons obere Reihe
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live-Einstellung
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (oder 2. DB-Satz)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Änderbar über '''Switch Remap''', können auf jedem Board und in jeder Gruppe liegen, jedoch fortlaufende Buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16-Schalter-Erweiterung''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss von Tasten mit LED-Anzeigen an Extend16, PL17 und PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/taster-schalter-eingangsplatine-extend16 Extend16-Boards] sind im Prinzip Preset16 ohne Taster; der Anschluss von Schaltern oder Buttons (ggf. mit LED) erfolgt wie oben für die On-Board-Eingänge des HX3.6 beschrieben. Die Pinbelegung von PL17/PL16 auf dem Extend16-Board ist kompatibel mit '''PL35/PL36 des Mainboards'''. Zusätzlich sind alle Taster-Eingänge auf 3-polige Steckverbinder geführt. Extend16 können bei entsprechender Konfiguration auch zur Auswahl von Presets dienen und ersetzen dann die älteren '''Preset12-2'''.

Die Nummer des Tasters/Schalters ergibt sich aus der Gruppen-Basisnummer (16 * Gruppe/Board-Nummer) plus dem angegebenen Offset. Für das Board mit Adresse '''$63''' (Gruppe 3) wäre der erste Eingang also 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pin-Belegung PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Einzeleingang
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pin-Belegung PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Einzeleingang
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
Zur bequemeren Verdrahtung sind die LED-Taster-Eingänge auch auf 16 dreipolige Steckverbinder geführt, an die jeweils ein LED-Taster angeschlossen wird. Wenn Sie Schalter oder Taster ohne LED verwenden, lassen Sie den Anschluss L+ offen. Vorwiderstände für die LEDs sind hier bereits enthalten, sie können rote, gelbe und grüne LEDs direkt an PL1..PL16 anschließen. Für blaue und weiße LEDs sollte in die Leitung L+ noch ein zusätzlicher Vorwiderstand von 1kOhm eingefügt werden, da die LEDs sonst zu hell sind und blenden. Pinbelegung PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Einzeleingänge
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Funktion
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button und LED- (Verbindung)
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

Die Board-Adresse darf beliebig sein (außer $62 für Gruppe 2), da die Preset-Buttons über ''Switch Remap'' zugewiesen werden. Voreingestellt in der Firmware sind allerdings $60 und $61, um mit bestehenden Installationen kompatibel zu bleiben. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolet)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|Die Preset12-2-Platine wird an HX3.6 PL26 angeschlossen. Das Flachbandkabel kann mit einem zusätzlichen Stecker verlängert werden, um das Menü-Panel anschließen zu können.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset12-2 Preset12-2] ist eine Interface-Platine für bis zu 2 x 12 "invertierte" Preset-Tasten (mit optionalen LED-Anzeigen), wie sie an Hammond-Konsolenorgeln zu finden sind. Die Preset12-2-Platine entspricht im Prinzip zwei Panel16 oder Extend16, bei dem die letzten 4 Eingänge fehlen. Sie wird über ein 10-adriges Flachbandkabel mit dem '''HX3.6 PL26''' verbunden. Pin 1 der beiden 14-poligen Stiftleisten ist Preset 0 = Live (rechter Zugriegelsatz) = B-Taste, Pin 2 ist Preset 1 = Live (linker Zugriegelsatz) usw. bis hinunter zu Pin 12 = CANCEL-Taste.

Die Standard-Orgel-Firmware unterstützt '''Momentan-Kontakte'''. Um ein Preset zu speichern, halten Sie die Preset-Taste/den Taster für 2 Sekunden gedrückt.

Bei Verwendung von '''2 Zugriegelsätzen pro Manual''' durch DB9-MPX-Zugriegel/Multiplexer und Preset12-2-Platine, setzen Sie ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" Parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" auf 1. Das Umschalten von Zugriegelsätzen A#/B ist nur aktiv, wenn kein Common Preset eingeschaltet ist ("Live" Modus #0). Wenn ein '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) angewählt ist, wird immer das '''rechte Zugriegel-Set''' aktiv.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 Kathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 Kathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 Kathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 Kathode (Preset 11, CANCEL-Taste) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

Die LED-Ausgänge haben integrierte 220-Ohm-Widerstände, wodurch sich ein LED-Strom von 15 mA ergibt. Das lange Bein der LEDs ist die Anode (+), das kurze Bein die Kathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Taster/Schalter)''' 
Pin - Funktion (active low – auf Gnd schalten) 
1: Schalter 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Schalter 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Schalter 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Schalter 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Gemeinsames Gnd (0V)

Um eine Kompatibiltät mit vorhandenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. Dadurch wird die richtige Voice-Preset-Reihenfolge wiederhergestellt. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolet)====

Die alten '''Preset12-MPX'''-Karten für HX3 mk2/mk3 können auch für HX3.6 zusammen mit zwei Sätzen von Nicht-MPX-Drawbar-Boards verwendet werden. Sie bieten jedoch keine variable Voreinstellnummer für den zweiten Zugriegelsatz. Stattdessen ist der zweite Zugriegelsatz fest auf Voice Preset 15 verdrahtet. Sie müssen also die Nummer des zweiten Zugriegelsatzes in Parameter #1505 auf 15 ändern, nicht auf 1, wenn Sie Preset12-MPX verwenden.

Um eine Kompatibiltät mit vorhandenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. Dadurch wird die richtige Voice-Preset-Reihenfolge wiederhergestellt. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets und Voices====

HX3.6 kennt für jedes Manual und das Pedal getrennt gespeicherte reinen Zugriegeleinstellungen ("Voices") und die (je nach System Inits-Konfiguration) viele oder sämtliche Analog- und Tab-Einstellungen umfassenden "Common Presets" (1 bis 99). Zugriegel-'''Voices''' (wie sie als "invertierte Tasten" auf B3-Konsolen zu finden sind) arbeiten unabhängig von den Common Presets; sie wirken sich nur auf die Zugriegel-Einstellungen aus und können über das Menü aufgerufen werden. 2x8, 2x12 oder 2x16 Voice Presets können mit den optionalen Karten '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (mehrere zulässig) oder '''Preset12-2''' erreicht werden.

Wird ein Common Preset aufgerufen und steht ein Voice-Preset nicht auf 0 (live), blinkt der nun ungültige Voice-Button. Ein erneuter Druck auf den Voice-Button ruft die hier abgespeicherte Zugriegeleinstellung auf; nun blinkt der Common-Preset-Button, um anzuzeigen, dass das Common Preset nicht mehr gültig ist.

===Vibrato-Knopf (Drehschalter)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss des Vibrato-Drehschalters an PL33 VIBSW. Ignorieren Sie die Beschriftung "PL5" im Schaltplan. Erste Kontaktfahne des Drehschalters wird nicht verwendet!''']]

Vibrato/Chorus V1 bis C3 wird mit einem Drehschalter ausgewählt, der an '''PL33''' angeschlossen ist. Die Schalterstellung wird immer abgefragt, es sei denn, Panel16 ist mit V1..3/Chorus-Tasten konfiguriert (''System Inits'' Parameter #1504, siehe auch Hinweis unten). PL33 führt auch Schaltsignale, die die Drehschalterstellung anzeigen. Sie können hier eine LED mit seriellem Widerstand (330R und höher) anschließen, wobei die Kathode (-) mit Common Gnd verbunden ist.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato-Drehschalter (active low – auf Gnd schalten):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato-Knopf
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|nicht verwendet
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|nicht verwendet
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

Um Vibrato-Tasten zuzuweisen, setzen Sie die entsprechenden Eingänge im Abschnitt ''Switch Remap'' auf 84, 85, 87 (Drei-Tasten-Modus) bzw. 84..87 (Vier-Tasten-Modus). Der ''System Inits'' Parameter #1504 = 1 wird ignoriert.

==Anschließen von Tastatur-Scan-Karte(n)==

Für geringste Key-to-Audio-Latenz empfehlen wir den direkten Tastaturanschluss über Scan-Boards (verschiedene Versionen verfügbar). Scan-Boards werden durch Update von SD-Karte (passend zu Ihrer Anwendung) oder ''HX3.6 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie die Treiber ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' bzw. ''scansr61.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6. Alle Scan-Treiber unterstützen auch MIDI-Input/Output, aber für reine MIDI-Fernsteuerung empfehlen wir den MIDI-Input-Treiber ''scanmidi.dat''. Neue HX3.6-Karten werden mit installierter ''scanmidi.dat'' geliefert.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2-Anschlussplan (mk4-Mainboard abgebildet, PL-Indizes für HX3.6 nicht gültig), Anschluss an PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

Eine einzelne [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2-Karte] wird an '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN''' angeschlossen. An eine FatarScan2-Platine können ein oder zwei Fatar 61-Tastaturen (Typ TP/8O o.ä.) mit Hilfe eines speziellen Kabelsatzes (MicroMatch-Stecker zu Tastatur-Scanleisten) angeschlossen werden. Siehe Seite [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] für weitere Bilder. Wir empfehlen den Kauf des FatarScan2-Kabelsatzes für den Anschluss an die MicroMatch-Steckerleisten der Fatar-Tastaturen (ein Satz für jedes Manual).

Eine FatarScan2-Platine '''muss''' an PL8 angeschlossen werden, wenn Sie den FatarScan-Treiber verwenden, ansonsten ist ein lautes Geräusch zu hören.

Basspedale können an eine zusätzliche Scan16-Strip-, Scan61-Inline- oder Bass25-Karte angeschlossen werden, die mit '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!) verbunden wird.

FatarScan2-Karten werden durch Update von SD-Karte oder ''HX3 Manager'' Anwendung aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scanfatr.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6.

'''Bitte beachten Sie:''' Die FatarScan2-Platine muss angeschlossen sein, wenn der Treiber scanfatr.dat verwendet wird, sonst wird die Kommunikation mit dem HX3.6 Manager blockiert.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Anschluss von Scan16 Strip oder Scan61 an HX3-Platine PL12 4014 SCAN (HX3.4 abgebildet, HX3.6 hat andere PL-Indizes)]]'''

Für die meisten "ein Kontakt pro Taste"-Orgeln können ein oder zwei Sätze von langen [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] Boards (ein Satz für jedes Manual) verwendet werden, die eine einfachere Installation an diesen Tastaturen ermöglichen. Für jedes Manual benötigen Sie 3 (44 oder 49 Tasten) oder 4 (61 Tasten) Scan16-Platinen. Bitte beachten Sie die [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN Schaltpläne und Teileplatzierung] in unserem Git Repo. Alle mit Scan16 bestückten Manuale werden parallel mit einem 10-adrigen Flachbandkabel (mit mehreren Steckern) an '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN''' verdrahtet. Bass25 kann als Pedal-Scanboard verwendet werden. Ein Jumper auf der "untersten" Scan16-Platine legt fest, ob das Tastenfeld oberes, unteres oder Bass-Pedal ist:

JP1 = Obermanual 
JP2 = Untermanual 
JP3 = Pedal 

Bitte beachten Sie: Das unterste Tastenkontakt-Pad auf dem Scan16 ist immer die Taste "C" auf 4- und 5-Oktaven-Tastaturen. Bei 61-Tasten-Manualen kann der obere Teil der rechten Scan16-Platine abgeschnitten sein, wie auf dem Siebdruck der Platine markiert (oder die Pads bleiben offen). Bei 44-Tasten-Manualen bleiben die untersten 5 Pads offen, Manual(e) beginnen mit Taste "F". Bei 49-Tasten-Manualen wird das Pad PL20 mit der höchsten "C"-Note verbunden. Alle Kontakte müssen auf Masse schalten. Die Boards stellen Massekontakte für den Anschluss an die Stromschiene zur Verfügung.

Scan16-Karten für ein oder zwei 49/61-Tasten-Manuale werden durch Update von SD-Karte oder Anwendung ''HX3 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scansr61.dat'' mit dem ''Updater''-Fenster auf den HX3.6 hoch. Siehe Seite [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] für Bilder.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board verbunden mit HX3 Board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] funktioniert genau wie ein Scan16-Strip-Set mit 4 Platinen, hat aber alle Teile auf einer kompakten Platine montiert (für jedes Manual wird eine Scan61-Inline benötigt). Daher muss jede Taste separat verdrahtet werden. Bitte beachten Sie [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN Schaltplan und Teileplatzierung] in unserem Git Repo. Alle mit Scan61 bestückten Manuale werden parallel mit einem 10-adrigen Flachbandkabel (mit mehreren Steckern) an '''HX3.6 PL12''' verdrahtet. Bass25 kann als drittes Pedal-Scanboard verwendet werden. Ein Jumper auf der Scan61-Inlineplatine legt fest, ob das Tastenfeld oberes, unteres oder Bass-Pedal ist:

JP1 = Obermanual 
JP2 = Untermanual 
JP3 = Pedal 

Bitte beachten Sie: Unterstes Tastenkontakt-Pad bei Strip61-Inline ist immer Taste "C". Bei kürzeren Manualen lassen Sie unbenutzte Tasteneingänge offen. Wie bei OrganScan61 oder Scan16-Strip müssen alle Kontakte auf Masse schalten. Die Karten stellen Massekontakte für den Anschluss an die Stromschiene zur Verfügung.

Scan61-Inline-Karten werden per Update von der SD-Karte oder der Anwendung ''HX3 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scansr61.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 und Bass25 MIDI (oben rechts) mit eigenem MIDI OUT und Phantomspeisung''']]

Die [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/bass25 Bass25] Scanplatine (siehe PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 unserem Github Repo-Ordner PLATINEN/BASS25]) kann als Ergänzung zu den FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline und Scan16-Strip Platinen zum bequemen Anschluss der Basspedalkontakte wie oben abgebildet verwendet werden (beachten Sie die unterschiedlichen HX3 Stecker). Die Karte kann im Boden der Orgel platziert werden, wenn das 10-adrige Flachbandkabel zum HX3 oder zur letzten OrganScan61-Karte nicht länger als 1 m ist. Bitte beachten Sie die Jumperstellung am Bass25:

* '''JP1''' Lötbrücke, immer offen
* '''JP2''' Lötbrücke bei Verwendung mit HX3.4 OrganScan61 (wird bei HX3.6 nicht unterstützt)
* '''JP3''' Lötbrücke bei Verwendung mit FatarScan2 auf '''HX3.6 PL8''' oder Scan16 Strip auf '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 bietet In-Line-Stecker und einen 26-poligen Flachbandkabelanschluss für den alternativen Anschluss von Basspedal-Kontakten:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 Tasten-Anschluss
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Tiefste Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|weitere Tasten
|-
!25
|Höchste Note C
|-
!26
|Gemeinsame Masse (busbar)
|}

Statt an PL1 können die Tastaturkontakte auch an die Inline-Stiftleisten PL2 bis PL7 oder an die Lötpads vor den Stiftleisten angeschlossen werden (linker Pin PL2: tiefstes C). Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 dient auch als gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

'''JP3 und JP4''' Lötbrücken müssen geschlossen sein.

Hinweis: Eine dritte Scan16-Strip- oder Scan61-Inline-Platine kann alternativ für das Basspedal anstelle von Bass25 verwendet werden, wobei nur die ersten 13 oder 25 Kontakteingänge genutzt werden. Setzen Sie den Jumper JP3 auf der Scan-Karte, um sie für die Verwendung als Basspedal zu aktivieren.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] ist mit einem eigenen MIDI-Controller und einer MIDI-Ausgangsbuchse ausgestattet. Er wird über ein 5-adriges MIDI-Kabel mit der HX3.6-Hauptplatine verbunden. Bass25 MIDI bietet Inline-Steckverbinder und einen 26-poligen Flachbandkabelanschluss für den alternativen Anschluss von Basspedal-Kontakten. Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 bietet auch eine gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI Tasten-Anschluss
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Tiefste Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|weitere Tasten
|-
!25
|Höchste Note C
|-
!26
|Gemeinsame Masse (busbar)
|}

Statt an PL1 können die Tastaturkontakte auch an die Inline-Stiftleisten PL2 bis PL7 an die Lötpads vor den Stiftleisten angeschlossen werden (linker Pin PL2: tiefstes C). Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 dient auch als gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

'''JP3''' Lötbrücke muss geschlossen sein.

'''JP4''' Lötbrücke muss geschlossen sein, wenn der Bass25 MIDI mit Phantomspeisung von der HX3-Platine, linke MIDI-Eingangsbuchse (von hinten gesehen), versorgt wird. MIDI-Phantomspeisung-Jumper auf der HX3-Platine müssen gesteckt sein.

Für eine separate Stromversorgung (interne +5V oder externes 9V DC Steckernetzteil), öffnen Sie die '''JP4'''-Lötbrücke. Verwenden Sie die 2-polige Stiftleiste PL12 neben der MIDI OUT-Buchse für die interne +5V-Versorgung: Pin 1 (links, zur Diode weisend) ist VCC +5V, Pin 2 (rechts) ist Masse (siehe PDF-Schaltplan in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 unserem Github-Repo-Ordner PLATINEN/BASS25]).

Eine +5V-MIDI-Phantomspeisung an den äußeren Pins des MIDI-Eingangs kann von der HX3-Hauptplatine durch Einsetzen von zwei '''zusätzlichen''' Jumpern auf HX3.6 PL20 '''Pins 7-8 und 9-10''' erhalten werden. Installieren Sie diese Steckbrücken nicht, wenn Sie andere MIDI-Geräte anschließen, die keine Phantomspeisung verwenden.

==Extension Board==

Das HX3 Extension Board mk5 ist für den Anschluss eines Leslie mit 11-Pin-Anschluss und Kopfhörer verfügbar. Es ist kompatibel mit HX3.6.

Die alte Erweiterungsplatine für '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' kann verwendet werden, nachdem zwei Widerstände von der Erweiterungsplatine entfernt und zwei Drähte auf der Rückseite der HX3.6-Hauptplatine vom Anschluss der Erweiterungsplatine zum seriellen Anschluss gelötet wurden.

'''Siehe Seite [[HX3.5 Extension Board (deutsch)]]''' für Details.

HX3.6 Installationsanleitung

2023-04-19T15:49:22Z

Christian: /* Extend16 */

'''>>[[HX3.6 Installation Manual]] (english)'''

 '''Fassung vom 17. April 2023, für Firmware Version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 Einplatinen-Sound-Engine zum Anschluss eines beliebigen Keyboards, zum Einbau in vorhandene Orgeln oder zur MIDI-Steuerung'''

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5-Platine einbaufertig''']]

== Vorwort ==

Die Installation von HX3.6 sollte nur von einem qualifizierten Techniker durchgeführt werden. Sie sollten mit der Montage von Flachbandkabeln, der Installation von Crimpkontakten und dem Löten von empfindlichen Teilen vertraut sein. Wichtig: Die Platine enthält statisch empfindliche Bauteile. Verwenden Sie unbedingt antistatisches Werkzeug und geerdetes Lötwerkzeug. HX3.6-Firmware-Versionen sind sowohl für die MIDI-Steuerung als auch für die direkte Tastatursteuerung mittels unserer FatarScan2-, Scan61-Inline-, Scan16-Strip- und (veralteten) OrganScan61-Karten verfügbar.

* Für Updates und zum Download des HX3.6 Managers besuchen Sie die '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6-Download-Seite]'''. Dort finden Sie aktuelle und Beta-Firmware, Handbücher, Schaltpläne und Tools. Die Updates in der ZIP-Datei HX36_Manager_6xxx.zip enthalten die Anwendung ''HX3.6 Manager'' sowie DSP-Firmware, Soundbänke, FPGA-Konfigurationsdatei und Scan-Treiber.

* Ein kompletter Satz PDF-Schaltpläne, auch für die Peripherie, steht zum Download bereit auf unserer '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Update/Schematics-Seite]''' und '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings-Seite]'''.

* Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard-Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für Gebrauchsanweisungen nach der Installation.

* Der '''HX3.6 Editor''' (für die Installation erforderlich) ist Bestandteil des '''HX3.6 Manager'''-Pakets. Eine Bedienungsanleitung steht als PDF zum Download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf auf unserem Update Server]''' zur Verfügung.

== Steckverbinder und Jumper ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Bauteil-/Steckverbinderplatzierung (auch als PDF verfügbar, siehe [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php auf unserem '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Steckverbinder
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
| 6,3mm-Buchse Audio-Ausgang rechts
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
| Stereo Audio-Ausgang; Mitte = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
| Stereo Audio-Mixereingang; Mitte = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
| 6,3mm-Buchse Audio-Ausgang links
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
| DSP Debug (nicht verwenden)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (nicht verwenden)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
| DC-Eingang, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus auf Mittenkontakt
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
| DC-Eingang/Ausgang, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
| DC-Eingang, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (falls externe Buchsen, siehe Schaltplan)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (je nach Jumper auf PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
| Aux digital I/O, bei einigen Scan-Treibern Sustain- und Cancel-Eingänge (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (nicht verwenden)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
| SD-Kartenadapater (oder ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
| Anschluss für FT800 Grafikdisplay
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
| MIDI IN/OUT Konfigurations-Jumper
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
| MIDI-Steuerung für MAG Vent, TTL-Pegel
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
| Serielles Interface für FTDI-Kabel
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
| Bluetooth-/WiFi-Modul (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
| 4-pin-Steckerleiste USB zu HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
| USB-Anschluss (MIDI-USB, Updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
| Menü-Panel/Preset-Boards, I2C
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
| MPX-Bus (neue DBX-Zugriegel- und PTX-Poti-Platinen)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
| 3-pin-Steckerleiste Fußschweller (FC-7-kompatibel)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
| 3-pin-Steckerleiste Fußschalter Rotary-Steuerung
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm-Buchse Fußschalter Rotary-Steuerung
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
| Analoge Eingänge 0 bis 11 (Default Zugriegel Obermanual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
| Analoge Eingänge 12 bis 23, (Default Zugriegel Untermanual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
| Vibrato-Drehschalter (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3-mm-Buchse Fußschweller (FC-7-kompatibel)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
| Taster/Schalter 0 bis 7 (Default Percussion, Vib On, Rotary-Steuerung)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
| Taster/Schalter 8 bis 15 (Default Presets oder Vibrato Buttons, Reverb, Bypass, Split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), beide Pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC-Eingang auf PL9/PL11 (Steckernetzteilanschluss) wenn gejumpert 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (nicht verwenden) 
|-
! JP4
| Stromversorgung über USB (kann Störgeräusch verursachen)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), beide Pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default Jumper-Einstellung: 2 Jumper auf PL20 pin 2-3 und 5-6 (linker Pin ist 1) für zweiten MIDI IN''
|}

== Stromversorgung ==

Das HX3.6-Mainboard kann entweder über den koaxialen '''DC-Eingang PL9''' (5,5/2,1 mm-Stecker, Plus am Mittelstift, DC 9V 500mA Steckernetzteil) oder über die '''grünen DC-Anschlüsse''' PL11 (9 bis 12V Eingang) oder PL10 (5V Eingang; 5V Ausgang bei Versorgung an DC-Buchse PL11 oder PL9) mit Strom versorgt werden. '''Spannungen über 5,2V an PL11 zerstören die Platine!'''

Wenn Sie eine externe '''5V DC''' Versorgung am '''DC-Eingang PL9''' verwenden müssen, stecken Sie den Jumper JP2 (neben der DC-Buchse). Wir raten von dieser Konfiguration ab, da der versehentliche Anschluss einer DC-Versorgung mit mehr als 5V Ausgangsspannung zur '''Zerstörung der Platine''' führt!

Nach dem Einschalten flackert eine rote LED in der Nähe von PL17 kurz auf; sie flackert auch, wenn der HX3.6-Controller beschäftigt ist. Wenn die TrueOrgan-Sound-Engine bereit ist, wird eine gelbe LED gedimmt; sie "atmet" mit der Geschwindigkeit der Rotationssimulation. Wenn der Effekt-/GM-DSP bereit ist, blinkt eine blaue LED im Sekundentakt. Die blaue LED flackert ein/3x kurz aus, wenn der DSP bereit ist, ein DFU-Firmware-Update per USB zu akzeptieren.

== HX3.6 für den ersten Gebrauch vorbereiten ==

Ab Werk sind die HX3.6-Karten als MIDI-Expander konfiguriert (keine analogen Eingänge). Sie sollte mit MIDI-Input einen grundlegenden Orgelklang an den Audioausgängen liefern, auch wenn keine anderen Peripheriegeräte angeschlossen sind. Grundfunktionen sind verfügbar, wenn ein Menü-Panel angeschlossen ist. Zu anderen Installationen müssen Sie zumindest einige '''System Init'''-Parameter einstellen. Siehe Abschnitt '''Installation mit dem HX3.6 Manager''' weiter unten.

===Menü-Panel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 Menü-Panel''', bestückt mit optionalen LEDs]]

Unser [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] ermöglicht die bequeme Einstellung verschiedener HX3-Parameter, um Ihr Setup zu optimieren. Zwei Versionen sind erhältlich, die kurze Version ohne Anzeige-LEDs ist für den Einbau in Orgeln gedacht.

Das Menü-Panel wird über ein 10pol. Flachbandkabel an '''PL26 PANEL''' angeschlossen. Wird das Menü-Panel zusammen mit Preset16- oder Extend16-Platinen eingesetzt, sollte das Menü-Panel das letzte Modul in der Bus-Kette an PL26 sein, da es nur einen Bus-Anschluss aufweist.

Neuere Menü-Panel der langen Ausführung besitzen einen separaten Anschluss für die 7 LEDs. Dieser wird mit '''PL35''' des Mainboards verbunden.

===Serielles USB-Kabel===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI-Kabel verbunden mit HX3''']]

Zur schnellen Konfiguration des Boards können Sie eine serielle Verbindung über ein FTDI-USB-Adapterkabel oder ein USB-Interface verwenden, das mit PL22 verbunden wird (Kabelfarben aufgedruckt). Alternativ können Sie den USB-Anschluss oder sogar die MIDI IN/OUT-Buchsen über ein USB-MIDI-Interface eines Fremdherstellers verwenden. Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für weitere Details.

=== Konfiguration per SD-Karte ===

Wenn ein SD-Kartenadapter mit eingesteckter SD-Karte (FAT32-formatiert) eingesteckt ist, startet HX3.6 nach dem Einschalten grundsätzlich im Bootloader-Update-Modus. Starten Sie ein Update mit einem Druck auf den Menupanel-Drehknopf. Es werden nur die Teile aktuaöisiert, für die eine entsprechende Datei (.BIN, .DAT) auf der Karte gefunden wird.

Alternativ zu einzelnen Dateien kann mit dem HX3.6 Manager BootLoad auch eine einzelne gepackte DFU-Datei erstellt und auf der Karte gespeichert werden. Sie wird von HX3.6 genau so behandelt wie ein DFU-Update über USB-Kabel. Updates werden von uns in der Regel als eine solche DFU-Datei geliefert.

Bitte beachten Sie: Wenn eine neue Firmware installiert wurde, bleiben einige ''System Inits''-Einstellungen erhalten und müssen möglicherweise geändert werden, damit Ihre Konfiguration funktioniert.

Fortgeschrittene Benutzer können eigene INI-Skripte erstellen, die alle notwendigen Befehle enthalten und im Grunde dasselbe tun wie der HX3.6-Editor. Details finden Sie auf der Seite '''[[HX3.6 Verwendung von SD-Karten]]'''.

=== Konfiguration mit dem HX3.6-Manager===

Verbinden Sie alternativ den HX3.6 mit Ihrem PC über USB. Starten Sie den '''HX3.6 Manager''', klicken sie '''Connect''' und öffnen Sie das Fenster '''Updater'''. Vollständige oder teilweise Updates können über Menüs ausgeführt werden. Ein klick auf "Get Board Info" sollte die aktuelle Konfiguration anzeigen. Siehe '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für Details.

Checkliste:

* Funktioniert MIDI IN? Fabrikneue Boards sollten an den Audioausgängen einen einfachen Orgelsound liefern, der MIDI-Eingang liegt auf MIDI-Kanal 1. Der rechte 5-polige DIN-Anschluss (von hinten gesehen) ist immer ein MIDI IN.
* Ist ein passender Scan-Treiber installiert? Sie können den Scan-Treiber mit Hilfe des Updaters im HX3.6 Manager ersetzen. Verwenden Sie das Menü Update und wählen Sie "Scan Driver file". Der HX3.6 Updater fragt nach einer DAT-Datei, öffnen Sie entweder ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'' oder ''scanfatr.dat'', je nach Ihren Anforderungen.
* Sind die HX3.6-System-Inits korrekt? HX3.6 scannt keine Tasten oder Analogeingänge, wenn diese nicht korrekt eingestellt sind. Verwenden Sie den Editor im HX3.6 Manager und klicken Sie auf die rote Schaltfläche '''System Inits'''. Klicken Sie auf '''Get Group''' im Action-Menü, um die Tabelleneinträge zu aktualisieren.
* Funktionieren die analogen Drawbar-Eingänge? Wenn alle analogen Eingänge aktiviert sind (Parameter 1503>1), prüfen Sie, ob Änderungen an den Zugriegeln auf '''Upper DB''' bzw. allen anderen analogen Eingangsgruppen zu sehen sind, wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche '''Get Group''' klicken.
* Funktionieren die analogen Volumen-Eingänge? Nicht funktionierende Analogeingänge wurden möglicherweise auf "nicht zugewiesen" umgewidmet. Siehe Gruppe '''Analog Remap''' im Editor.

=== Updates ===

Einzelheiten finden Sie auf der Seite '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' oder auf der Seite '''[[HX3.6 Verwendung von SD-Karten]]'''.

=== Aktualisieren von DSP-Soundbänken ===

Siehe Seite '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/Bedienungsanleitung_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager Bedienungsanleitung, druckbare PDF-Datei]''' für weitere Details.

==Parameter-Optimierung ==

Wenn Sie Hardware zu Ihrem HX3.6-Board hinzufügen, müssen Sie möglicherweise einige Parameter anpassen, um sie zum Laufen zu bringen. Ab Werk ist der HX3.6 als MIDI-Expander konfiguriert; er fragt keine angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte außer dem Menü-Panel ab und steuert sie nicht. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel die FatarScan2-Karte anschließen, müssen Sie auch den Scan-Treiber aktualisieren. Wenn Sie Zugriegel, Tasten oder Schalter anschließen, müssen Sie diese aktivieren.

Das Ändern von Parametern, die nicht im Menüsystem vorhanden sind, ist nur mit dem HX3.6 Editor möglich.

== MIDI-Konfiguration ==

Die HX3.6-Karte ist ab Werk als MIDI-Expander mit zwei MIDI-Eingängen konfiguriert. Der linke MIDI-DIN-Anschluss (von hinten gesehen) ist standardmäßig MIDI IN2. Er kann als MIDI OUT konfiguriert werden, indem Sie die Jumper-Einstellung an der Stiftleiste PL20 gemäß der folgenden Tabelle ändern (Pin 1 liegt in der Nähe des USB-Anschlusses, Pin 10 in der Nähe der DIN-Buchse). Für die +5V-Phantomspeisung an MIDI IN setzen Sie Jumper an den Pins 7-8 und 9-10. Wenn die Jumper für die Phantomspeisung installiert sind, führt die DIN-Buchse Masse am mittleren Pin 2 und +5V an den beiden ansonsten unbenutzten äußeren Pins 1 und 3. Die Phantomspeisung kann zur Versorgung der an die linke DIN-Buchse angeschlossenen '''BASS25 MIDI''' Scan-Karte verwendet werden.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - Funktion der linken MIDI-Buchse
|-
!Funktion
!JP auf Pin
!JP auf Pin
!Gnd (blau) JP auf Pin
!Vcc (rot) JP auf Pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|offen
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|offen
|offen
|-
!MIDI IN m. Phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 ist links, von hinten (Platinenrand) aus gesehen''
|}

MIDI über USB ist verfügbar, wenn die USB-Buchse PL25 installiert ist oder ein Mini-USB-Buchsenadapter (optional) oder das HX3.5 Extension Board per Kabel mit PL32 verbunden ist. Bitte beachten Sie: Aufgrund von Hardware-Einschränkungen dürfen '''MIDI IN2 und USB MIDI IN nicht gleichzeitig verwendet werden'''. Es treten sonst Übertragungsfehler auf!

==USB Port==

An Position PL25 kann bei Bedarf ein USB-Typ-B-Stecker eingelötet werden. Er ist werksseitig nicht bestückt, um die mechanische Kompatibilität mit bestehenden Rückwänden zu gewährleisten. Zusätzlich ist das USB-Signal auf der Stiftleiste PL24 (in der Nähe der USB-Buchse) verfügbar, um USB zu unserem HX3.5 Extension Board zu leiten. Der USB-Anschluss ist standardmäßig als "MIDI over USB"-Gerät konfiguriert. Im DFU-Update-Modus wird er zum Anschluss für die HX3.6-DFU-Update-Anwendung.

'''Wichtig:''' Wenn Sie eine "MIDI-over-USB"-Verbindung verwenden (wie beim HX3.6 Manager), trennen Sie alle MIDI-Geräte von der sekundären (linken) MIDI-Eingangs-DIN-Buchse, da sie sich dieselbe MIDI-Eingangsleitung teilen.

Der USB-Anschluss wird auch für DSP-Firmware- oder Soundbank-Updates verwendet.

===Installation des Mini-USB-Adapters===

Zur Verwendung mit der HX3.4-Rückwand mit Mini-USB-Ausschnitt schließen Sie den Mini-USB-Adapter wie folgt an:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB-Adapter
!USB-Kabelfarbe
|-
|G
|GND
|schwarz
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|grün
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|weiß
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|rot
|}
 

==Audio-Ausgänge==

Zusätzlich zu den 1/4"-Audiobuchsen links/rechts liegt das Stereo-Audiosignal an PL3 an (Mitte = analoge Masse).

==Analoge Eingänge anschließen==

HX3.6 bietet '''24 interne Analogeingänge''', die alle auf den Stiftleisten '''PL31 und PL32''' liegen, sowie bis zu '''64 externe Analogeingänge''' über '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' Zugriegel- und '''PTX4-25/35''' Potentiometer-Baugruppen, die am '''PL27 MPX-Bus''' angeschlossen sind. Alle analogen Eingänge sind DC-gesteuert. Der Eingangsspannungsbereich reicht von 0V (aus oder minimale Lautstärke) bis +3,3V (maximale Lautstärke). In der Werkskonfiguration sind alle Analogeingänge deaktiviert, so dass HX3.6 '''ohne angeschlossene Schalter/Zugriegel/Potis''' verwendet werden kann. Sie können die internen Anschlüsse PL31 und PL32 offen lassen, wenn Sie nur eine Steuerung über MIDI planen.

===Analoge Eingänge zuweisen===

Um analoge Steuereingänge zu aktivieren, setzen Sie in der Anwendung HX3.6-Editor den Parameter #1503 auf den Wert 2 (wenn alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegel an PL31/PL32 verwendet werden sollen) oder 3 (sonst). Einzelne Analogeingänge können im Abschnitt '''Analog Remap''' des HX3.6-Editors mit den Parametern #5000 bis #5023 (für die internen Eingänge PL31/PL32) und #5024 bis #5088 (externe DBX/PTX-Platinen an PL27) deaktiviert oder umgelenkt werden. Siehe Abschnitt [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Mischen_von_DB9.2FDB12-_und_DBX-Drawbar-Sets]] für weitere Details.

Wenn einzelne interne Eingangspins an PL31/PL32 nicht verwendet werden (d.h. offen bleiben, keine Zugriegel oder Potis installiert), setzen Sie den entsprechenden Parameter #5000..#5023 auf "254 - Nicht belegt". Um '''alle''' internen Eingänge an PL31/PL32 zu sperren, setzen Sie den ersten Parameter #5000 auf "255 - Ende der Tabelle". Gleiches gilt für PL27 MPX-Bus-Eingänge: Wenn keine zusätzlichen DBX- oder PTX-Karten angeschlossen sind, setzen Sie Parameter #5024 auf "255 - Ende der Tabelle".

Hinweis: Weisen Sie eine Orgelfunktion nicht mehr als einem Analogeingang zu.

===Eingabeprüfung & -überwachung===

Alle zugewiesenen Eingänge sollten mit einem physischen Steuerelement verbunden sein. Andernfalls "floaten" die Eingänge und HX3.6 sendet zufällige MIDI-Steuerungswerte mit einer hohen Rate; dies kann ein Update unmöglich machen.

Im HX3.6 Editor gibt es eine Überwachungsfunktion, mit der Sie die Zustände der physischen Tasten und die analogen Eingangsspannungen überprüfen können. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Input Monitor" und markieren Sie die Checkboxen der Eingangstypen, die Sie überwachen möchten. Änderungen der Eingangsspannung sollten sofort in der/den Tabelle(n) erscheinen. Wenn Sie auf einen Tabelleneintrag klicken, springt die Haupttabelle auf die zugehörige Zuweisungsgruppe.

==Interne Analogeingänge==

Um interne Analogeingänge an '''PL31 und PL32''' zu verwenden, setzen Sie ''System Inits'' Parameter #1503 auf 2 oder 3. Setzen Sie die ''Analog Remap''-Parameter #5000 bis #5023 entsprechend Ihrer Anschlussbelegung. Standardmäßig ist die Anschlussbelegung auf HX3.4-DB9/DB12-Kompatibilität eingestellt.

===Anschluss von Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Zugriegel- und Potianschluss an PL31 und PL32 (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Untermanual-Konfiguration mit DB12 (A#-Presettaste, links) und DB9-MPX (B-Presettaste, rechts). Anschluss an HX3 über langes Flachbandkabel (rechts). Die Oberemanual-Konfiguration ist ähnlich, verwendet aber DB9 oder DB11 anstelle von DB12.''']]

Die klassischen Zugriegelsets DB9/DB11/DB12 können für Einzelzugriegelkonfigurationen verwendet werden. Der Anschluss an unsere alten Zugriegelplatinen DB9 und DB12 ist einfach: DB9 (oben) wird an '''PL31 ANLG UPR''' angeschlossen, DB12 (unten) an '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' über ein 16-adriges Flachbandkabel (Länge bis zu 1m, Stecker 1:1 verdrahtet). DB9 bietet 3-polige Stiftleisten für den Anschluss von Tone- und Amp122 Volume-Potis.

Zusätzliche DB9-MPX-Karten (veraltet - verwenden Sie stattdessen DBX-Zugriegel-Module) können für Konfigurationen mit zwei Zugriegelsätzen pro Manual eingefügt werden. Sekundäre DB9-MPX-Drawbar-Sets sollten wie bei Hammond-Konsolen rechts neben den entsprechenden primären DB9- oder DB12-Drawbars angeordnet werden. Ein kurzes Flachbandkabel verbindet beide (siehe Bild).

DB9 und DB11/12 sind kompatibel und austauschbar, trotz zusätzlicher Zugriegel für Basspedal bzw. Tone/Amp-Volume.

===Anschließen anderer Zugriegel-Potis===

Sie können auch Ihre eigenen oder vorhandene Zugriegel wie folgt verwenden: Schließen Sie mindestens 9 Zugriegel oder Schieberegler und den Lautstärkeregler Leslie an '''PL31 ANLG UPR''' an. Der R-Wert sollte im Bereich von 10 kOhm liegen, '''linear taper''' (zum Beispiel Typ B10K). Höhere Widerstandswerte sind zulässig, wenn Sie an den Schleifer-Anschluss einen 100n-Keramikkondensator nach Masse schalten. Beachten Sie, dass die Verwendung von Zugriegel-Potentiometern mit logarithmischer Kennlinie, wie sie in verschiedenen älteren LSI- und Transistor-Orgeln zu finden sind, nicht zu einer korrekten Lautstärke und Zugriegelposition auf dem Menü-Panel führt.

Jeder Analogeingang kann im Abschnitt "Analog Remap" des HX3.6-Editors mit einer beliebigen Analogfunktion "weich verdrahtet" werden. Standardmäßig werden analoge Funktionen so zugeordnet, dass die HX3.4-Kompatibilität erhalten bleibt (siehe unten).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Steuerspannungen Obermanual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, Volumen des simulierten Röhrenverstärkers
|-
! Pin 12
| Zugewiesenes Poti (zuweisbar mit HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Poti gemeinsame Masse GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B Schaltsignal (kann mit Pin 16 verbunden werden)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Poti Ende 3.3V+ (Referenz)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Steuerspannungen Untermanual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Poti Bass Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Poti gemeinsame Masse GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B Schaltsignal (kann mit Pin 16 verbunden werden)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Poti Ende 3.3V+ (Referenz)
|}
 
Auch bei MIDI-Steuerung sollte für eine schnellere Reaktion ein Schwellpedal an die SWELL-Buchse angeschlossen werden. Dies überschreibt die MIDI-Lautstärkeregelung. Sie können ein Schwellpedal wie das Yamaha FC-7 oder ein einfaches Lautstärkepotentiometer an die SWELL-Buchse anschließen.

Auf der HX3-Hauptplatine sind werkseitig die Eingänge für die Tone/Treble- und Amp-Lautstärkeregelung aktiv (kann auch mit dem ''HX3.6 Editor'' geändert werden). Der Schleifer des Tone-Potis wird an Pin 10 von PL31 angeschlossen. Pin 11 wird zum Lautstärke-/Drive-Regler des Leslie-Verstärkers (obligatorisch). Der Schleifer des Amp-Volume-Potis wird an Pin 11 von PL31 angeschlossen. Beide Potis beginnen mit GND und enden mit Ref 3.3V+.

Bitte beachten Sie: Offene Analogeingänge (nicht beschaltet) "schweben" und ändern sich zufällig, auch bei aktiven Presets. Deaktivieren Sie nicht verwendete Eingänge mit dem Abschnitt ''Analog Remap'' im HX3.6-Editor (auf "254 - Not assigned" einstellen).

 

==Externe Analogeingänge (PL27 MPX-Bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9-Drawbar-Set zum Anschluss an PL27-MPX-Bus-Eingang, auf der rechten Seite gekürzt, um in die Orgel zu passen (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 Drawbar-Set in 9+3-Konfiguration für B3-ähnliche Installationen. Beachten Sie, dass der rechte Anschluss PL4 (Bottom Mount) nicht verwendet werden kann, da der Platz vom Zugriegel-Potentiometer belegt wird. Verwenden Sie den oberen Anschluss PL8 oder die rechten Lötpads zum Aneinanderreihen von Zugriegel-Sets. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX6-Zugriegelsatz und PTX4-35-Potentiometer-Baugruppe hintereinandergeschaltet, geeignet für ADRS-, Lautstärke- oder Equalizer-Regelung (zum Vergrößern Bild anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 und DBX9 Zugriegel-Sets verbunden mit oberen Anschlüssen. Alternativ können auch Lötpads auf der linken und rechten Seite verwendet werden. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Aufgrund einer Design-Fehlers bei den Zugriegelsätzen DBX12 v4 und DBX9 v4 (erste Serie) muss bei Verwendung der oberen Anschlüsse ein Draht an PL8 Pin 2 und Pin 5 angelötet werden, wie gezeigt. (Bild zum Vergrößern anklicken)''']]

Wir empfehlen die Baugruppen '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 oder 12 DrawBars gemultipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog-Eingänge gemultipleXed) und '''PTX4-25 oder PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometer gemultipleXed) für neue Orgel-Designs, da sie die Installation stark vereinfachen. Diese Baugruppen besitzen eigene Multiplexer/Schieberegister-ICs, so dass sie über das MPX-Bussystem, ein 10-adriges Flachbandkabel, das an '''PL27 MPX''' auf der HX3.6-Hauptplatine angeschlossen wird, in Reihe geschaltet werden können. Es können beliebig viele DBX6-, DBX9-, DBX12-, ANX8- und PTX4-Module in beliebiger Reihenfolge aneinandergereiht werden, bis die maximale Kapazität von 64 analogen Reglern erreicht ist. Die 24 internen Eingänge auf '''PL31/PL32''' können unabhängig davon genutzt werden, so dass sich insgesamt '''88 analoge Eingänge''' ergeben.

===DBX-Steckverbinder installieren===

DBX-Platinen sind mit zwei abgewinkelten 10-poligen Steckern versehen. Alle DBX-Zugriegelplatinen sind auch ohne Zugriegel-Potentiometer lieferbar. Bitte bestellen Sie Zugriegel-Potentiometer und -Kappen dafür gesondert. Stecken Sie die Zugriegel von der Unterseite der Platine (keine Siebdruckbeschriftung) an den gewünschten Positionen in die Lötpads, drehen Sie sie um und legen Sie sie vor dem Löten auf eine ebene Fläche, um gleichmäßige Abstände zu erhalten.

Für den Einsatz in engen Installationen können alle DBX-Platinen mit einem fein gezahnten Sägeblatt entlang der weißen Linien auf der Platine ohne Beeinträchtigung der Funktion getrennt werden. Dies sollte vor der Montage von Zugriegel-Potentiometern erfolgen.

===DBX6 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX6-Karten sind für ADSR, Equalizer oder Lautstärkeregler mit 4 bis 6 Zugriegeln geeignet. Bei 6 montierten Zugriegeln wird die rechte untere Position des Steckverbinders durch den letzten Zugriegel belegt. Verwenden Sie in diesem Fall Lötpad-Drahtverbindungen oder oben montierte Steckverbinder für die Anreihung von Boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX6 (Zugriegel für diverse Funktionen)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX9-Karten eignen sich für klassische 9-Zugriegel-Installationen an B3- oder M100-ähnlichen Orgelkonsolen. Sie bieten zusätzlich 3 analoge Eingänge (bei Bedarf) zum Anschluss eigener Potentiometer (10k bis 47k Typen geeignet). Um diese zu nutzen, setzen Sie den Lötpunkt-"Jumper" JP1 offen und JP2 geschlossen (Modus 12 Analogeingänge). Die Potentiometer-Eingänge stehen an dem 6-poligen Stecker PL2 zur Verfügung (nicht montiert; alle 6-poligen Stecker sind parallel verdrahtet, gleiche Pinbelegung). Die Eingänge sind auch an 5 Lötpads verfügbar, die mit AIN +9 bis AIN +11 gekennzeichnet sind, sowie an GND und VREF (gemeinsam für alle Potis). Die Jumper-Einstellungen geschehen durch Entfernen oder Hinzufügen von Lötpunkten. Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Bedienelements auf dem nächsten Modul in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper-Einstellungen DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars auf DBX9
|offen
|geschlossen
|-
!9 Drawbars und 1 bis 3 Potis auf DBX9
|geschlossen
|offen
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 harmonische Zugriegel, JP2 geschlossen)''
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX9 + 3 Analogeingänge
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 Zugriegel) plus 3 zusätzliche Potentiometer-Eingänge (JP1 geschlossen)''
|}

Die Belegung der 6-poligen Steckerleisten zum Anschluss weiterer Potentiometer ist wie folgt:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Belegung der 6-poligen Steckerleiste PL2
|-
!Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(nicht verbunden)
|-
!5
|VREF (gemeinsames Poti-Ende)
|-
!6
|GND (gemeinsamer Poti-Anfang)
|}

===DBX12 Drawbar-Modul===

DBX12-Platinen sind für 12-Zugriegel-Installationen auf '''H100-, Böhm- oder Wersi'''-ähnlichen Orgelpulten geeignet. Die Zugriegelpositionen DB+0 bis DB+11 sind bestückt, die ganz rechte Position R16 bleibt leer.

Es ist aber auch möglich, DBX12-Platinen in einer '''B3-ähnlichen 9+3'''-Zugriegelkonfiguration zu verwenden (d.h. 9 obere oder untere auf der linken Seite, eine Leerstelle und 3 Pedal-Zugriegel auf der rechten Seite). Bestücken Sie in diesem Fall nicht R13 (Leerstelle), sondern verwenden Sie stattdessen die Position R16 (ganz rechts). Beachten Sie, dass die Position R16 (Pedal Sustain) als Eingang #9 (R13) behandelt wird, nicht #12. In jedem Fall hat der DBX12 nur 12 Eingänge, nicht 13. Es ist '''nicht''' möglich, DBX12 als 3+9 Zugriegel (Pedalzugriegel auf der linken Seite) zu bestücken, da sich die Positionen R13 und R16 denselben Analogeingang teilen! Siehe Abschnitt [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Typische_Anwendungen]] für Details. Jumper-Einstellungen durch Entfernen oder Hinzufügen von Lötpunkten. Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelements des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper-Einstellungen DBX12
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars auf DBX12
|geschlossen
|offen
|-
!9+3 Drawbars auf DBX12
|geschlossen
|offen
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX12 in H100-Konfiguration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | kein R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| keiner
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Eingangsbelegung für H100-ähnliche Installation (12 Zugriegel) mit '''R13''' installiert, '''kein R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung DBX12 in B3-ähnlicher Konfiguration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | kein R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| keiner
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Eingangsbelegung für B3-ähnliche Installation (9 harmonische plus 3 Pedal-Zugriegel) mit '''R16''' installiert, '''kein R13''' ''
|}

===PTX4 Potentiometer-Modul===

Die Karten '''PTX4-25''' und '''PTX4-35''' verfügen über 4 hochwertige Potentiometer, wahlweise mit oder ohne Mittelrastung. Der einzige Unterschied ist der Abstand von einem Poti zum nächsten (25mm bei PTX4-25, 35mm bei PTX4-35). Beliebig viele PTX4-Karten können an beliebiger Stelle in die MPX-Bus-Kette eingefügt werden. Eine einzelne PTX4-Platine fügt +4 zum Nummerierungschema der Eingänge hinzu, wie oben erwähnt, d.h. wenn das erste (linke) Potentiometer zum Eingang #20 wurde ( wegen vorgeschalteter DBX-Platinen), ist das ganz rechte Potentiometer #23, und die nächste PTX- oder DBX-Platine (rechts angeschlossen) wird mit #24 beginnen.

PTX4-Potentiometerplatinen sind '''nicht''' zur Verwendung als externe Potentiometer an den DBX9-Analogeingängen vorgesehen. Verwenden Sie stattdessen separate Potentiometer.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung PTX4-25 und PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Poti
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 ist das erste linke Potentiometer''
|}

Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelement des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls). 

===ANX8 Analoges Eingangsmodul===

'''ANX8'''-Boards verfügen über 8 zusätzliche analoge Eingänge zum Anschluss von eingebauten Potentiometern, Zugriegeln, Pitch/Modulationsrädern und anderen analogen Bedienelementen. Es können beliebig viele ANX8-Karten an beliebiger Stelle in die MPX-Buskette eingefügt werden, wobei PL9 "NEXT BOARD" zum Ende der Kette zeigt. Eine einzelne ANX8-Karte fügt +8 zur Eingangsnummerierung hinzu, wie oben erwähnt, d.h. wenn das erste (ganz linke) Potentiometer zum Eingang #20 wurde ( wegen vorgeschalteter DBX-Boards), ist das ganz rechte Potentiometer #27, und die nächste PTX- oder DBX-Platine (rechts angeschlossen) wird mit #28 beginnen.

Es stehen 8 separate Eingänge an den 3-poligen Stiftleisten PL1 bis PL8 zur Verfügung. Verbinden Sie den/die mit "REF" gekennzeichneten Pin(s) mit dem Ende des Potentiometers, Pin "GND" mit dem Anfang, Pin "AIN" mit dem Schleifer.

Hinweis: '''Next Board''' ist die Zuweisung des ersten Steuerelements des nächsten Moduls in der Kette (auf der rechten Seite dieses Moduls).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Eingang
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

Zur komfortablen Verdrahtung sind die Analogeingänge auch in Gruppen von 4 Eingängen zugänglich (PL11 mit den Eingängen +0 bis +3, PL12 mit den Eingängen +4 bis +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Eingang
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Hintereinanderschaltung von DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 und PTX4===

Schließen Sie die erste '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' oder '''PTX4''' Baugruppe an PL27 an. Der äußerste linke Regler, den HX3.6 in der Kette "sieht", ist der externe MPX-Analogeingang #0 (zugewiesen durch Parameter #5024). Die Nummer zählt bis zur nächsten DBX/PTX-Baugruppe, die an den Daisy-Chain-Anschluss angeschlossen ist. D.h. wenn Sie einen DBX9 und einen PTX4 (in dieser Reihenfolge) verketten, wird das ganz linke (erste) Potentiometer am PTX4 zum Regler #9, zugewiesen durch Parameter #5033 (#0 bis #8 durch DBX9 verbraucht). Das Hinzufügen eines DBX12 beginnt bei #13, zugewiesen durch Parameter #5037, und so weiter.

Ihre Kette sieht nun so aus:
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

Hinweis: PL1 (links oben, unten montiert) und PL7 sind intern parallel geschaltet, ebenso wie PL3 (rechts oben, unten montiert) und PL8. Diese Anschlüsse können alternativ verwendet werden (siehe [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Installations-Alternativen]] für Details).

Wie bereits erwähnt, können DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 oder PTX4 in beliebiger Reihenfolge angeordnet werden, solange sie eine Kette von einer Karte zur anderen bilden. Die Parametrierung beginnt immer bei #0 (Parameter #5024) für das am weitesten links stehende Bedienelement in der Kette. Es ist möglich, einzelne Zugriegel-Eingänge zu '''überspringen''', indem ihr Zuordnungsparameter auf "254 - Not assigned" gesetzt wird. Dies kann bei Leerstellen in der Zugriegelanordnung sinnvoll sein, z. B. zwischen harmonischen und ADSR-Zugriegeln oder Obermanual- und Pedalzugriegeln. Alle DBX-Karten sind ohne montierte Zugriegel-Potentiometer erhältlich, so dass Sie diese nach Ihren Wünschen konfigurieren können.

===Typische Anwendungen===
Eine typische Orgelkonfiguration (9 Zugriegel pro Manual, 3 für Pedal) mit DBX12 kann wie folgt aussehen:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
oder, je nach Installation (um die Kabellänge kurz zu halten):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
Eine H100-ähnliche Installation kann wie folgt aussehen:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Hinweis: PL1 (links oben, unten montiert) und PL7 sind intern parallel geschaltet, ebenso wie PL3/PL4 (rechts oben, unten montiert) und PL8. Diese Anschlüsse können alternativ verwendet werden (siehe [[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung#Installations-Alternativen]] für Details).

====Installations-Alternativen====

DBX-Platinen können miteinander verkettet (hintereinandergeschaltet) werden, indem Sie 10-polige Steckverbinder von unten (linke und rechte Seite der Platine), 10-polige Steckverbinder von oben oder auf Lötpads gelötete Drähte verwenden. Mit jeder Karte werden 2 abgewinkelte 10-polige Steckverbinder mitgeliefert; Sie können auch gerade Steckverbinder verwenden, wenn der Platz dies zulässt.

Statt Flachbandkabel zu verwenden, können benachbarte DBX-Platinen mit Hilfe von Lötpunkten und 6 kurzen Drahtstücken (in obiger Tabelle mit "=" gekennzeichnet) dort verkettet werden, wo die Platinen "aneinanderstoßen". Lötpads auf der linken und rechten Seite ermöglichen eine einfache Verbindung von einer Platine zur nächsten durch '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG und NRST''' Pads ('''VREF3 bleibt unbeschaltet''', ebenso wie zusätzliche Potentiometer-Pads!)

Die Platinen können auch '''entlang der weißen Linien''' abgesägt werden, wenn kein Platz von einem Zugriegel zum nächsten auf einer anderen Platine vorhanden ist. Trennen Sie die Platine bei Bedarf '''vor''' der Montage der Zugriegel-Potentiometer. Die Platinen verfügen über zusätzliche Lötpads für die Verkettung mit Drähten, auch wenn die Platine gekürzt wird. Die letzte DBX-Platine der Reihe sollte jedoch PL3 (DBX9) oder PL4 (DBX12) beibehalten, da Sie in Zukunft eventuell weitere DBX- oder PTX4-Platinen hinzufügen möchten. '''Auch hier gilt: Planen Sie sorgfältig, bevor Sie Zugriegel-Potis einlöten oder Boards absägen!'''

 

====Zweifache/sekundäre DBX-Drawbar-Sätze====

Klassische Konsolorgel-Installationen erfordern zwei Zugriegelsätze für jedes Manual. Die Verwendung von doppelten Zugriegelsätzen mit dem DBX-Sammelsystem unterscheidet sich von alten DB9-MPX-Installationen. In DBX-Installationen können alle Zugriegel von der Firmware "gesehen" werden, auch die inaktiven (sie werden nur übersprungen, wenn der Zugriegelsatz nicht aktiv ist). Setzen Sie den Parameter #1503 auf 3 (DBX-Modus) und weisen Sie allen Eingängen, die primäre Zugriegel sind, die Werte ''Upr1'' oder ''Lwr1'' zu, während sekundäre Zugriegel zu ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' werden (128 und höher).

Die sekundären Zugriegel werden aktiviert, wenn die im jeweiligen Manual eingestellte '''Voice''' der Nummer in "System Inits" Parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number) entspricht, andernfalls werden sie übersprungen und die primären Zugriegel werden aktiv.

====Mischen von DB9/DB12- und DBX-Drawbar-Sets====

Da die internen Eingänge an PL31/PL32 auch in DBX-Konfigurationen als Zugriegel-Eingänge verwendet werden können, dürfen vorhandene DB9/DB12- und sogar DB9-MPX-Zugriegel, die an PL31/PL32 angeschlossen sind (zugewiesen durch ''Analog Remap'' #5000 bis #5023), weiterhin verwendet werden, entweder als primäre oder sekundäre Zugriegel-Sets.

* Wenn '''alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegelboards''' als sekundäre Zugriegel-Sets an PL31/PL32 angeschlossen sind, setzen Sie den Wert von Parameter #1503 auf 2 (DB9-MPX-Modus). In diesem Fall '''verwenden Sie nicht''' die sekundären Zugriegel-Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' für die Eingänge (Parameterwerte 128 und höher) im Abschnitt "Analog Remap"; die Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' werden ignoriert.

* Wenn alte DB9-MPX-Zugriegelboards '''nicht''' verwendet werden, setzen Sie den Wert von Parameter #1503 auf 3 (DBX-Modus). In diesem Fall können die sekundären Zugriegel-Zuordnungen ''Upr2'' und ''Lwr2'' für Eingänge (Parameterwerte ab 128) im Abschnitt "Analog Remap" verwendet werden.

 

==Digitale Eingänge==

Das HX3.6-System bietet insgesamt 64 interne (logische) Schalterfunktionen oder "Tabs" (z. B. "Tube Amp Bypass" oder "H100 Keying Mode") sowie einige Sonderfunktionen (ab Firmware 5.7, z.B. Transpose Up/Down). Das Mainboard besitzt '''16 interne digitale Eingänge''' an PL35/PL36 (erweiterbar durch bis zu 5 externe Boards '''Preset16''' oder '''Extend16''' auf bis zu 96 Preset- und Schalterfunktionen) zum Anschluss von Schaltern oder Tastern plus einen Drehschaltereingang (Vibrato-Knopf V1..C3). Schalter sind einrastende Taster, Wipp- oder Kippschalter. Taster sind momentane Schaltkontakte, normalerweise offen. Alle Eingänge sind aktiv low, d.h. sie liegen auf Masse, wenn der Schalter/Taster betätigt wird. Sie können die Schalteranschlüsse offen lassen, wenn Sie HX3.6 nur über MIDI steuern wollen.

===Input Monitor===

Eine sehr hilfreiche Funktion des HX3.6 Editors ist der ''Input Monitor''. Sie können hiermit die Funktion aller Taster und Schalter überprüfen. Aktive (gedrückte) Buttons werden mit "ON" gekennzeichnet.

Durch Klick in die Input-Tabelle erfahren Sie auch, welchem HX3.6-Tab der Eingang bzw. der Button zugeordnet ist. Umgekehrt springt das aktive Feld in den Input-Monitor-Tabellen beim Klick auf eine Zuordnung in ''Switch Remap'' auf den zugeordneten Eingang.

===Onboard-Eingänge PL35/PL36===

Die Steckverbinder '''PL35 und PL36''' führen die 16 internen digitalen Eingänge; hier können eigene Taster/Schalter oder ein Panel16-Board angeschlossen werden (siehe unter '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Viele Installationen werden mit diesen 16 Tabs auskommen.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinbelegung PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default-Funktion
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinbelegung PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default-Funktion
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Taster oder Schalter====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss von Tasten mit LED-Anzeigen an PL35 PERC/VIBON und PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Verwenden Sie für blaue oder weiße LEDs einen R-Wert von 1k, da diese LEDs sehr hell sind.''']]

Anstelle von Panel16 können Sie auch Ihre eigenen Taster oder Registerkartenschalter (bis zu 16) direkt an die HX3.6-Hauptplatine anschließen. Jede Funktion wird entweder durch eine Taste oder einen Schalter (abhängig vom Parameter '''Button Mask''' in den Systemeinstellungen des HX3.6-Editors) an den digitalen Eingängen PL35/PL36 aktiviert. Bei Tastern schaltet ein kurzzeitiger Kontakt mit Masse an jedem PL35/PL36-Pin den Status um und steuert Anzeige-LEDs an (siehe Schaltplan). Bei Schaltern kann die Anzeige-LED weggelassen werden, da der mechanische Schalter den aktuellen Zustand anzeigt. Lassen Sie unbenutzte digitale Eingänge offen.

====Panel16====

Die einfachste Lösung für ein Schaltpanel ist die Verwendung [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/panel16 unserer Panel16-Platine], die über zwei 10-polige Flachbandkabel mit '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL und PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' verbunden ist. '''Panel16''' bietet 16 Tasten für die komplette Steuerung des HX3; fügen Sie einfach den Drehschalter für die Vibratotiefe hinzu.

Panel16 hat 4 "Common Preset"-Tasten im Layout für Standard-Orgelinstallationen. Die "Common Preset"-Tasten sind binär kodiert, so dass mehr als eine Preset-Taste aktiv sein kann (gleichzeitiges Drücken). Dies ermöglicht 16 Tastenkombinationen (alle aus bis alle an), die den Common Presets 0 (live) bis 15 entsprechen. Alternativ können diese Tasten zur Auswahl von V1-V3-Vibrato oder C1-C3-Chorus-Tiefe verwendet werden. In diesem Fall entfällt der Vibrato-Drehschalter an PL24; stellen Sie dann ''System Inits'' Parameter #1497 auf 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default-Button-Zuordnung Panel16 an PL25/26
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons obere Reihe
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe mit Vibrato-Buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe mit Preset-Buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Die Positionen der Tasten, die für Common Presets oder V1..V3 V/C verwendet werden, sind unter den Parametern ''Switch Remap Onboard'' abgelegt. Alle Tasten können frei belegt werden.

===Weitere Taster/Schalter===

Zur Erweiterung der Taster-/Schalter-Eingänge stehen die Boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' und auch das ältere '''Preset12-2''' zur Verfügung. Sie werden an '''PL26 PANEL''' auf dem Mainboard angeschlossen und über ein Bus-System (I2C) in Serie geschaltet. Jedes Board bildet eine Gruppe aus 16 Eingängen (2 x 12 bei Preset 12-2). Das MenüPanel wird ebenfalls mit diesem Bus verbunden; praktischerweise setzt man es an das Ende der Kette, da es nur einen Bus-Steckverbinder aufweist. Es ist ebenso möglich, mehrere 10polige Steckverbinder auf das Flachbandkabel an PL26 anzupressen.

Jedem Board muss über seine Jumper eine '''eindeutige Bus-Adresse''' zugeordnet werden ($60 bis $65, siehe Aufdruck und Tabelle unten). Bei älteren Preset16 und dem Preset12-2 sind die Adressen fest verdrahtet ($60 oder $61 für Preset16 alt, Preset12-2 belegt gleich zwei Adressen $60 und $61). Jede Adresse darf im Verbund nur einmal vergeben sein, sonst kommt es zu Bus-Konflikten.

Die 16 Eingänge eines Prest16- oder Extend16-Boards bilden ein Gruppe, bei 5 Boards sind dies die Gruppen 0 bis 5 entsprechend den eingestellten Adressen $60 bis $65. Es ist nicht nötig, die Adressen und damit die Gruppennummern der angeschlossenen Boards fortlaufend zu numerieren, es dürfen "Lücken" vorhanden sein. Diese fragt HX3.6 nicht ab.

Alle Taster-/Schalter können über die HX3.6-Editor-Parameter ''Switch Remap'' einer beliebigen HX3.6-Funktion ("Tab") zugeordnet werden; die Parameter in der Gruppe ''Input Mode'' entscheiden, ob am entsprechenden Eingang ein Schalter (ON, 255) oder ein Taster mit LED (OFF, 0, default) angeschlossen ist.

Um die Funktion und Zugehörigkeit eines digitalen Eingangs zu überprüfen, verwenden Sie den ''Input Monitor'' im HX3.6-Editor. Durch einen Klick in die Monitor-Tabelle können Sie außerdem feststellen, welchem HX3.6-Tab dieser Eingang zugeordnet ist.

Jeder digitale Eingang kann im Abschnitt ''Switch Remap'' des HX3-Editors, Parameter 5100 bis 5195, aktiviert/deaktiviert oder umgeleitet werden. Auch Preset- und Voice-Taster dürfen beliebig auf die 96 Eingänge verteilt werden. Einzige Restriktion: Taster einer bestimmten Preset-Funktion (Upper, Lower oder Common) müssen innerhalb einer Gruppe bzw. eines Boards auf fortlaufenden Buttons liegen, es ist nicht möglich, zum Beispiel Upper Voices auf 2 Boards/Gruppen zu verteilen.

====Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge====

Input-Gruppe 2 ($62) ist bereits für die 16 Eingänge auf dem HX3.6-Mainboard vergeben (siehe unten, Abschnitt '''Panel16''') und darf für externe Preset16/Extend16 nicht verwendet werden.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input-Gruppe
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus-Adresse
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper auf Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 geschlossen
|JP2, JP3 geschlossen
|JP1, JP3 geschlossen
|JP3 geschlossen
|JP1, JP2 geschlossen
|JP2 geschlossen
|-
!Hinweis
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Feste Adressen für Preset16 (alt, Upper 0, Lower 1) und Preset12-2 (beide)
|HX3.6-Platine onboard, feste Adresse '''Nicht für Preset16, Extend16 benutzen!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|Extend16 und Preset16 mit Jumper-Lötpads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button links oben oder erster Eingang
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

Die Nummer eines bestimmten Tasters/Schalters ergibt sich aus der Gruppen-Basisnummer (16 * Gruppe/Board-Nummer) plus dem angegebenen Offset. Für das Board mit Adresse '''$63''' wäre der erste Eingang also 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] ist ein eigenständiges Panel mit 2 Reihen zu je 8 LED-Tasten. Es wird über ein 10-poliges Flachbandkabel mit '''HX3 PL26''' verbunden. Weitere Preset16 können an die jeweils zweite 10-polige Stiftleiste angeschlossen werden (Daisy Chain). Beide 10-poligen Stiftleisten am Preset16 können verwendet werden (sind parallel verdrahtet).

Ein gesteckter Jumper auf älteren Preset16-Platinen wählt das obere Manual aus, falls vorhanden. Fehlt die Brücke, arbeitet Preset16 auf unterem Manual. Neuere Preset16-Platinen verfügen über drei Jumper (Lötbrücken), um das Preset16 auf obere oder untere manuelle Voice-Presets (Adresse $60 und $61) einzustellen (siehe Tabelle '''Board-Adressen für digitale Eingänge'''). Setzen Sie Lötpunkte, um eine der in der Tabelle angegebenen Platinenadressen zu erhalten.

Wenn Sie zwei Zugriegel pro Manual verwenden, indem Sie DBX oder ältere DB9-MPX (veraltet) Zugriegelkarten verwenden, setzen Sie den ''System Inits'' Parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" auf 1. Dadurch wird der erste Zugriegelsatz auf Preset 0 aktiviert, der zweite Zugriegelsatz auf Preset 1. Sie können eine beliebige Voice von 1 bis 15 für die Aktivierung des zweiten Zugriegelsets verwenden. Höhere Zahlen deaktivieren die Umschaltung.

Die Board-Adresse darf beliebig sein (außer $62 für Gruppe 2), da die Preset-Buttons über ''Switch Remap'' zugewiesen werden. Voreingestellt in der Firmware sind allerdings $60 und $61, um mit bestehenden Installationen kompatibel zu bleiben. Um eine Kompatibilität mit vorhendenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, was obere und untere Button-Reihe von Preset16 vertauscht. Alternativ können Sie die grauen Tastenkappen in die obere Button-Reihe umstecken; sie lassen sich mit etwas Kraft abziehen. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default-Button-Belegung
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons obere Reihe
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live-Einstellung
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (oder 2. DB-Satz)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons untere Reihe
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Änderbar über '''Switch Remap''', können auf jedem Board und in jeder Gruppe liegen, jedoch fortlaufende Buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16-Schalter-Erweiterung''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss von Tasten mit LED-Anzeigen an Extend16, PL17 und PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/taster-schalter-eingangsplatine-extend16 Extend16-Boards] sind im Prinzip Preset16 ohne Taster; der Anschluss von Schaltern oder Buttons (ggf. mit LED) erfolgt wie oben für die On-Board-Eingänge des HX3.6 beschrieben. Die Pinbelegung von PL17/PL16 auf dem Extend16-Board ist kompatibel mit '''PL35/PL36 des Mainboards'''. Zusätzlich sind alle Taster-Eingänge auf 3-polige Steckverbinder geführt. Extend16 können bei entsprechender Konfiguration auch zur Auswahl von Presets dienen und ersetzen dann die älteren '''Preset12-2'''.

Die Nummer des Tasters/Schalters ergibt sich aus der Gruppen-Basisnummer (16 * Gruppe/Board-Nummer) plus dem angegebenen Offset. Für das Board mit Adresse '''$63''' (Gruppe 3) wäre der erste Eingang also 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pin-Belegung PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Einzeleingang
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pin-Belegung PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input-Nummer
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Einzeleingang
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
Zur bequemeren Verdrahtung sind die LED-Taster-Eingänge auch auf 16 dreipolige Steckverbinder geführt, an die jeweils ein LED-Taster angeschlossen wird. Wenn Sie Schalter oder Taster ohne LED verwenden, lassen Sie den Anschluss L+ offen. Vorwiderstände für die LEDs sind hier bereits enthalten, sie können rote, gelbe und grüne LEDs direkt an PL1..PL16 anschließen. Für blaue und weiße LEDs sollte in die Leitung L+ noch ein zusätzlicher Vorwiderstand von 1kOhm eingefügt werden, da die LEDs sonst zu hell sind und blenden. Pinbelegung PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Einzeleingänge
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Funktion
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button und LED- (Verbindung)
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

Die Board-Adresse darf beliebig sein (außer $62 für Gruppe 2), da die Preset-Buttons über ''Switch Remap'' zugewiesen werden. Voreingestellt in der Firmware sind allerdings $60 und $61, um mit bestehenden Installationen kompatibel zu bleiben. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolet)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|Die Preset12-2-Platine wird an HX3.6 PL26 angeschlossen. Das Flachbandkabel kann mit einem zusätzlichen Stecker verlängert werden, um das Menü-Panel anschließen zu können.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset12-2] ist eine Interface-Platine für bis zu 2 x 12 "invertierte" Preset-Tasten (mit optionalen LED-Anzeigen), wie sie an Hammond-Konsolenorgeln zu finden sind. Die Preset12-2-Platine entspricht im Prinzip zwei Panel16 oder Extend16, bei dem die letzten 4 Eingänge fehlen. Sie wird über ein 10-adriges Flachbandkabel mit dem '''HX3.6 PL26''' verbunden. Pin 1 der beiden 14-poligen Stiftleisten ist Preset 0 = Live (rechter Zugriegelsatz) = B-Taste, Pin 2 ist Preset 1 = Live (linker Zugriegelsatz) usw. bis hinunter zu Pin 12 = CANCEL-Taste.

Die Standard-Orgel-Firmware unterstützt '''Momentan-Kontakte'''. Um ein Preset zu speichern, halten Sie die Preset-Taste/den Taster für 2 Sekunden gedrückt.

Bei Verwendung von '''2 Zugriegelsätzen pro Manual''' durch DB9-MPX-Zugriegel/Multiplexer und Preset12-2-Platine, setzen Sie ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" Parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" auf 1. Das Umschalten von Zugriegelsätzen A#/B ist nur aktiv, wenn kein Common Preset eingeschaltet ist ("Live" Modus #0). Wenn ein '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) angewählt ist, wird immer das '''rechte Zugriegel-Set''' aktiv.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 Kathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 Kathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 Kathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 Kathode (Preset 11, CANCEL-Taste) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

Die LED-Ausgänge haben integrierte 220-Ohm-Widerstände, wodurch sich ein LED-Strom von 15 mA ergibt. Das lange Bein der LEDs ist die Anode (+), das kurze Bein die Kathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Taster/Schalter)''' 
Pin - Funktion (active low – auf Gnd schalten) 
1: Schalter 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Schalter 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Schalter 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Schalter 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Gemeinsames Gnd (0V)

Um eine Kompatibiltät mit vorhandenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. Dadurch wird die richtige Voice-Preset-Reihenfolge wiederhergestellt. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolet)====

Die alten '''Preset12-MPX'''-Karten für HX3 mk2/mk3 können auch für HX3.6 zusammen mit zwei Sätzen von Nicht-MPX-Drawbar-Boards verwendet werden. Sie bieten jedoch keine variable Voreinstellnummer für den zweiten Zugriegelsatz. Stattdessen ist der zweite Zugriegelsatz fest auf Voice Preset 15 verdrahtet. Sie müssen also die Nummer des zweiten Zugriegelsatzes in Parameter #1505 auf 15 ändern, nicht auf 1, wenn Sie Preset12-MPX verwenden.

Um eine Kompatibiltät mit vorhandenen Installationen zu erreichen, setzen Sie Bits 0 und 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. Dadurch wird die richtige Voice-Preset-Reihenfolge wiederhergestellt. Stellen Sie die ''Input Modes'' für die Gruppen 0 und 1 auf Taster oder Schalter. Die Einstellung "Switch" kann auch mit Tastern verwendet werden; im Unterschied zur Einstellung "Button" wird dann ein Voice-Preset schon beim Drücken und nicht erst beim Loslassen der Taste aufgerufen, allerdings ist ein Speichern nur mit Hilfe der Cancel-Taste (> 2sek. drücken) möglich. Definieren Sie ggf. die Cancel-Taste von Ober- und Untermanual in ''Switch Remaps'' und das Voice-Preset für den zweiten Zugriegel-Satz in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets und Voices====

HX3.6 kennt für jedes Manual und das Pedal getrennt gespeicherte reinen Zugriegeleinstellungen ("Voices") und die (je nach System Inits-Konfiguration) viele oder sämtliche Analog- und Tab-Einstellungen umfassenden "Common Presets" (1 bis 99). Zugriegel-'''Voices''' (wie sie als "invertierte Tasten" auf B3-Konsolen zu finden sind) arbeiten unabhängig von den Common Presets; sie wirken sich nur auf die Zugriegel-Einstellungen aus und können über das Menü aufgerufen werden. 2x8, 2x12 oder 2x16 Voice Presets können mit den optionalen Karten '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (mehrere zulässig) oder '''Preset12-2''' erreicht werden.

Wird ein Common Preset aufgerufen und steht ein Voice-Preset nicht auf 0 (live), blinkt der nun ungültige Voice-Button. Ein erneuter Druck auf den Voice-Button ruft die hier abgespeicherte Zugriegeleinstellung auf; nun blinkt der Common-Preset-Button, um anzuzeigen, dass das Common Preset nicht mehr gültig ist.

===Vibrato-Knopf (Drehschalter)===

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Anschluss des Vibrato-Drehschalters an PL33 VIBSW. Ignorieren Sie die Beschriftung "PL5" im Schaltplan. Erste Kontaktfahne des Drehschalters wird nicht verwendet!''']]

Vibrato/Chorus V1 bis C3 wird mit einem Drehschalter ausgewählt, der an '''PL33''' angeschlossen ist. Die Schalterstellung wird immer abgefragt, es sei denn, Panel16 ist mit V1..3/Chorus-Tasten konfiguriert (''System Inits'' Parameter #1504, siehe auch Hinweis unten). PL33 führt auch Schaltsignale, die die Drehschalterstellung anzeigen. Sie können hier eine LED mit seriellem Widerstand (330R und höher) anschließen, wobei die Kathode (-) mit Common Gnd verbunden ist.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato-Drehschalter (active low – auf Gnd schalten):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato-Knopf
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|nicht verwendet
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|nicht verwendet
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

Um Vibrato-Tasten zuzuweisen, setzen Sie die entsprechenden Eingänge im Abschnitt ''Switch Remap'' auf 84, 85, 87 (Drei-Tasten-Modus) bzw. 84..87 (Vier-Tasten-Modus). Der ''System Inits'' Parameter #1504 = 1 wird ignoriert.

==Anschließen von Tastatur-Scan-Karte(n)==

Für geringste Key-to-Audio-Latenz empfehlen wir den direkten Tastaturanschluss über Scan-Boards (verschiedene Versionen verfügbar). Scan-Boards werden durch Update von SD-Karte (passend zu Ihrer Anwendung) oder ''HX3.6 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie die Treiber ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' bzw. ''scansr61.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6. Alle Scan-Treiber unterstützen auch MIDI-Input/Output, aber für reine MIDI-Fernsteuerung empfehlen wir den MIDI-Input-Treiber ''scanmidi.dat''. Neue HX3.6-Karten werden mit installierter ''scanmidi.dat'' geliefert.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2-Anschlussplan (mk4-Mainboard abgebildet, PL-Indizes für HX3.6 nicht gültig), Anschluss an PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

Eine einzelne [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2-Karte] wird an '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN''' angeschlossen. An eine FatarScan2-Platine können ein oder zwei Fatar 61-Tastaturen (Typ TP/8O o.ä.) mit Hilfe eines speziellen Kabelsatzes (MicroMatch-Stecker zu Tastatur-Scanleisten) angeschlossen werden. Siehe Seite [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] für weitere Bilder. Wir empfehlen den Kauf des FatarScan2-Kabelsatzes für den Anschluss an die MicroMatch-Steckerleisten der Fatar-Tastaturen (ein Satz für jedes Manual).

Eine FatarScan2-Platine '''muss''' an PL8 angeschlossen werden, wenn Sie den FatarScan-Treiber verwenden, ansonsten ist ein lautes Geräusch zu hören.

Basspedale können an eine zusätzliche Scan16-Strip-, Scan61-Inline- oder Bass25-Karte angeschlossen werden, die mit '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!) verbunden wird.

FatarScan2-Karten werden durch Update von SD-Karte oder ''HX3 Manager'' Anwendung aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scanfatr.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6.

'''Bitte beachten Sie:''' Die FatarScan2-Platine muss angeschlossen sein, wenn der Treiber scanfatr.dat verwendet wird, sonst wird die Kommunikation mit dem HX3.6 Manager blockiert.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Anschluss von Scan16 Strip oder Scan61 an HX3-Platine PL12 4014 SCAN (HX3.4 abgebildet, HX3.6 hat andere PL-Indizes)]]'''

Für die meisten "ein Kontakt pro Taste"-Orgeln können ein oder zwei Sätze von langen [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] Boards (ein Satz für jedes Manual) verwendet werden, die eine einfachere Installation an diesen Tastaturen ermöglichen. Für jedes Manual benötigen Sie 3 (44 oder 49 Tasten) oder 4 (61 Tasten) Scan16-Platinen. Bitte beachten Sie die [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN Schaltpläne und Teileplatzierung] in unserem Git Repo. Alle mit Scan16 bestückten Manuale werden parallel mit einem 10-adrigen Flachbandkabel (mit mehreren Steckern) an '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN''' verdrahtet. Bass25 kann als Pedal-Scanboard verwendet werden. Ein Jumper auf der "untersten" Scan16-Platine legt fest, ob das Tastenfeld oberes, unteres oder Bass-Pedal ist:

JP1 = Obermanual 
JP2 = Untermanual 
JP3 = Pedal 

Bitte beachten Sie: Das unterste Tastenkontakt-Pad auf dem Scan16 ist immer die Taste "C" auf 4- und 5-Oktaven-Tastaturen. Bei 61-Tasten-Manualen kann der obere Teil der rechten Scan16-Platine abgeschnitten sein, wie auf dem Siebdruck der Platine markiert (oder die Pads bleiben offen). Bei 44-Tasten-Manualen bleiben die untersten 5 Pads offen, Manual(e) beginnen mit Taste "F". Bei 49-Tasten-Manualen wird das Pad PL20 mit der höchsten "C"-Note verbunden. Alle Kontakte müssen auf Masse schalten. Die Boards stellen Massekontakte für den Anschluss an die Stromschiene zur Verfügung.

Scan16-Karten für ein oder zwei 49/61-Tasten-Manuale werden durch Update von SD-Karte oder Anwendung ''HX3 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scansr61.dat'' mit dem ''Updater''-Fenster auf den HX3.6 hoch. Siehe Seite [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] für Bilder.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board verbunden mit HX3 Board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] funktioniert genau wie ein Scan16-Strip-Set mit 4 Platinen, hat aber alle Teile auf einer kompakten Platine montiert (für jedes Manual wird eine Scan61-Inline benötigt). Daher muss jede Taste separat verdrahtet werden. Bitte beachten Sie [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN Schaltplan und Teileplatzierung] in unserem Git Repo. Alle mit Scan61 bestückten Manuale werden parallel mit einem 10-adrigen Flachbandkabel (mit mehreren Steckern) an '''HX3.6 PL12''' verdrahtet. Bass25 kann als drittes Pedal-Scanboard verwendet werden. Ein Jumper auf der Scan61-Inlineplatine legt fest, ob das Tastenfeld oberes, unteres oder Bass-Pedal ist:

JP1 = Obermanual 
JP2 = Untermanual 
JP3 = Pedal 

Bitte beachten Sie: Unterstes Tastenkontakt-Pad bei Strip61-Inline ist immer Taste "C". Bei kürzeren Manualen lassen Sie unbenutzte Tasteneingänge offen. Wie bei OrganScan61 oder Scan16-Strip müssen alle Kontakte auf Masse schalten. Die Karten stellen Massekontakte für den Anschluss an die Stromschiene zur Verfügung.

Scan61-Inline-Karten werden per Update von der SD-Karte oder der Anwendung ''HX3 Manager'' aktiviert. Laden Sie den Treiber ''scansr61.dat'' über das Fenster ''Updater'' auf den HX3.6.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 und Bass25 MIDI (oben rechts) mit eigenem MIDI OUT und Phantomspeisung''']]

Die [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/bass25 Bass25] Scanplatine (siehe PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 unserem Github Repo-Ordner PLATINEN/BASS25]) kann als Ergänzung zu den FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline und Scan16-Strip Platinen zum bequemen Anschluss der Basspedalkontakte wie oben abgebildet verwendet werden (beachten Sie die unterschiedlichen HX3 Stecker). Die Karte kann im Boden der Orgel platziert werden, wenn das 10-adrige Flachbandkabel zum HX3 oder zur letzten OrganScan61-Karte nicht länger als 1 m ist. Bitte beachten Sie die Jumperstellung am Bass25:

* '''JP1''' Lötbrücke, immer offen
* '''JP2''' Lötbrücke bei Verwendung mit HX3.4 OrganScan61 (wird bei HX3.6 nicht unterstützt)
* '''JP3''' Lötbrücke bei Verwendung mit FatarScan2 auf '''HX3.6 PL8''' oder Scan16 Strip auf '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 bietet In-Line-Stecker und einen 26-poligen Flachbandkabelanschluss für den alternativen Anschluss von Basspedal-Kontakten:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 Tasten-Anschluss
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Tiefste Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|weitere Tasten
|-
!25
|Höchste Note C
|-
!26
|Gemeinsame Masse (busbar)
|}

Statt an PL1 können die Tastaturkontakte auch an die Inline-Stiftleisten PL2 bis PL7 oder an die Lötpads vor den Stiftleisten angeschlossen werden (linker Pin PL2: tiefstes C). Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 dient auch als gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

'''JP3 und JP4''' Lötbrücken müssen geschlossen sein.

Hinweis: Eine dritte Scan16-Strip- oder Scan61-Inline-Platine kann alternativ für das Basspedal anstelle von Bass25 verwendet werden, wobei nur die ersten 13 oder 25 Kontakteingänge genutzt werden. Setzen Sie den Jumper JP3 auf der Scan-Karte, um sie für die Verwendung als Basspedal zu aktivieren.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] ist mit einem eigenen MIDI-Controller und einer MIDI-Ausgangsbuchse ausgestattet. Er wird über ein 5-adriges MIDI-Kabel mit der HX3.6-Hauptplatine verbunden. Bass25 MIDI bietet Inline-Steckverbinder und einen 26-poligen Flachbandkabelanschluss für den alternativen Anschluss von Basspedal-Kontakten. Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 bietet auch eine gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI Tasten-Anschluss
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Tiefste Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|weitere Tasten
|-
!25
|Höchste Note C
|-
!26
|Gemeinsame Masse (busbar)
|}

Statt an PL1 können die Tastaturkontakte auch an die Inline-Stiftleisten PL2 bis PL7 an die Lötpads vor den Stiftleisten angeschlossen werden (linker Pin PL2: tiefstes C). Die 2-polige Inline-Stiftleiste PL9 dient auch als gemeinsame Masse für die Stromschiene.

'''JP3''' Lötbrücke muss geschlossen sein.

'''JP4''' Lötbrücke muss geschlossen sein, wenn der Bass25 MIDI mit Phantomspeisung von der HX3-Platine, linke MIDI-Eingangsbuchse (von hinten gesehen), versorgt wird. MIDI-Phantomspeisung-Jumper auf der HX3-Platine müssen gesteckt sein.

Für eine separate Stromversorgung (interne +5V oder externes 9V DC Steckernetzteil), öffnen Sie die '''JP4'''-Lötbrücke. Verwenden Sie die 2-polige Stiftleiste PL12 neben der MIDI OUT-Buchse für die interne +5V-Versorgung: Pin 1 (links, zur Diode weisend) ist VCC +5V, Pin 2 (rechts) ist Masse (siehe PDF-Schaltplan in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 unserem Github-Repo-Ordner PLATINEN/BASS25]).

Eine +5V-MIDI-Phantomspeisung an den äußeren Pins des MIDI-Eingangs kann von der HX3-Hauptplatine durch Einsetzen von zwei '''zusätzlichen''' Jumpern auf HX3.6 PL20 '''Pins 7-8 und 9-10''' erhalten werden. Installieren Sie diese Steckbrücken nicht, wenn Sie andere MIDI-Geräte anschließen, die keine Phantomspeisung verwenden.

==Extension Board==

Das HX3 Extension Board mk5 ist für den Anschluss eines Leslie mit 11-Pin-Anschluss und Kopfhörer verfügbar. Es ist kompatibel mit HX3.6.

Die alte Erweiterungsplatine für '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' kann verwendet werden, nachdem zwei Widerstände von der Erweiterungsplatine entfernt und zwei Drähte auf der Rückseite der HX3.6-Hauptplatine vom Anschluss der Erweiterungsplatine zum seriellen Anschluss gelötet wurden.

'''Siehe Seite [[HX3.5 Extension Board (deutsch)]]''' für Details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2023-04-19T15:48:45Z

Christian: /* Extend16 */

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of April 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards.

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Update/Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
| 6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
| 6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
| DC input/oupu, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
| 3-pin connector swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL12). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL11 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/button-switch-input-board-extend16 Extend16] boards are basically preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons ( possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

==Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)==

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|nicht verwendet
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver, otherwise loud noise will be heard.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2023-04-19T15:47:55Z

Christian:

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of April 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards.

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Update/Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
| 6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
| 6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
| DC input/oupu, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
| 3-pin connector swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
| Analog inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
| Analog inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analog Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL12). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL11 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

Extend16 boards are basically preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons ( possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

==Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)==

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|nicht verwendet
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver, otherwise loud noise will be heard.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.

HX3.6 Installation Manual

2023-04-19T15:44:13Z

Christian:

'''>>[[HX3.6_Installationsanleitung]] (deutsch)'''

 '''Version of April 17th 2023, as of firmware version 6.016'''

'''HX3.6 single-board sound engine for connecting any keyboard, for installation into existing organs or MIDI control'''

[[Datei:HX35_1.JPG|400px|thumb|right|'''HX3 mk5 board ready for installation''']]

== Preface ==

HX3.6 should be installed by a qualified technician only. You should be familiar with ribbon cable mounting, crimp contact installation and soldering of delicate parts. Important: Boards contains static sensitive components. Be sure to use anti-static tools and grounded soldering toolset. HX3.6 firmware versions are available for MIDI control as well as direct keyboard control by means of our FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline, Scan16-Strip and (obsolete) OrganScan61 boards.

* For updates and HX3.6 Manager download, visit the '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files HX3.6 Files Page]''' for most recent and beta firmware, manuals, schematics and tools. Updates in ZIP file (named HX36_Update_6xxx.zip) contain ''HX3.6 Manager'' application as well as DSP firmware, sound bank(s), FPGA configuration images and scan drivers.

* A complete set of PDF schematics including peripherals is available for download on our '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/?dir=Schematics%20%28Schaltbilder%29 Update/Schematics Page]''' and '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/index.php?dir=Drawings Drawings Page]'''.

* See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Mainboard.pdf HX3.6 Mainboard User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for usage instructions after installation.

* ''HX3.6 Editor'' (required for installation) now is part of the ''HX3.6 Manager'' package. A complete user manual is available as PDF for download '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf on our Update Server]'''.

== Connectors and Jumpers ==

[[Datei:HX36_mainboard_vert_1.png|480px|thumb|right|HX3.6 Components/Connector placement (also avalable as PDF, see [http://keyboardpartner.remotewebaccess.com/Files/index.php on our '''Documentation and Update Server'''])]]

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard connectors
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL1
| HX3 Extension Board (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL2
| 6,3mm jack audio output right
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL3
| Stereo audio output; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL4
| Stereo audio mixer input; mid = GND
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL5
| 6,3mm jack audio output left
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL6
| DSP Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL7
| FPGA Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL8
| Scan Board (FatarScan2)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL9
| DC input, 5V or 9..12V/500mA, Plus on center contact
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL10
| DC input/oupu, 5V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL11
| DC input, 9..12V/500mA
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL12
| Scan Board (Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline, OrganScan61 or Bass25)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL13
| MIDI IN1
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL14
| MIDI IN1/IN2/OUT (if external jacks see schematics)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL15
| MIDI IN2/OUT (as configered by jumpers on PL20)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL16
| Aux digital I/O, for some scan drivers sustain and cancel inputs (active low)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL17
| ARM Cortex M3 Debug (do not use)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL18
| SD card adapter (or ISP AVR)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL19
| Connector for FT800 grafical display
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL20
| MIDI IN/OUT configuration jumpers
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL21
| MIDI control for MAG Vent, TTL level
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL22
| Serial interface for FTDI cable
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL23
| Bluetooth or WiFi module (BLE)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL24
| 4-pin connector USB to HX3.5 Extension Board
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL25
| USB jack (MIDI over USB, updates)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL26
| I2C bus (menu panel/preset boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL27
| MPX bus (DBX drawbar and PTX pot boards)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL28
| 3-pin connector swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL29
| 3-pin connector rotary control foot switch
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL30
| 6,3mm jack rotary control
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL31
| Analogue inputs 0 to 11 (default drawbars upper manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL32
| Analogue inputs 12 to 23, (default drawbars lower manual)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL33
| Vibrato rotary switch (optional)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL34
| 6,3mm jack swell pedal (FC-7 compatible)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL35
| Buttons/switches 0 to 7 (default percussion, vib on, rotary control)
|-
!style="width: 10%" | PL36
| Buttons/switches 8 to 15 (default presets or vibrato buttons, reverb, bypass, split
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | HX3.6 Mainboard Jumper
|-
! JP1
| Analogue Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
! JP2
| 5V DC input on PL10/PL12 (wall wart connector) if jumpered 
|-
! JP3
| Config Disable (do not use) 
|-
! JP4
| Power supply over USB (can cause noise)
|-
! JP5
| Digital Gnd (Probe Connection), both pins 
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Default jumper setting: 2 jumpers on PL20 pin 2-3 and 5-6 (leftmost pin is 1) for second MIDI IN''
|}

== Power Supply ==

The HX3.6 board may be powered either from coaxial '''DC input PL9''' (5.5/2.1 mm plug, plus on center pin, DC 9V 500mA wall wart) or from '''green DC connectors''' PL11 (9 to 12V input) or PL10 (5V input; 5V output when power provided to DC jack PL10 or PL12). '''Voltages exceeding 5.2V on PL11 will destroy the board!'''

If you have to use an external '''5V DC''' supply on '''DC input PL10''', insert JP2 (near DC jack). We do not recommend this configuration since inadvertently connecting a DC supply with more than 5V output '''will destroy the board!'''

After powering on, a red LED near PL17 will flicker briefly; it will also flicker when the HX3.6 controller is busy. When the RealOrgan Sound Engine is ready, a yellow LED will dim; it will "breathe" with rotary simulation speed. When the Effects/GM DSP is ready, a blue LED will flash every second. The blue LED will blink on/3x briefly off when the DSP is ready to accept a DFU firmware update by USB.

== Preparing HX3.6 for first Use ==

From factory HX3.6 boards are programmed with MIDI Expander firmware (no analog inputs). It should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input even with no other peripherals connected. Basic functions are available if a MenuPanel is connected. You have to set at least some '''System Init''' parameters after installing a different firmware. See '''Installation by HX3.6 Manager''' section below.

===MenuPanel===
[[Datei:MenuPanel_full.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''HX3 MenuPanel''', fitted with optional LEDs]]

Our [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/menupanel MenuPanel] allows convenient adjustments of various HX3 parameters to tweak your setup. Two versions available, short one without indicator LEDs intended for organ installation.

Connect HX3 MenuPanel to '''PL26 PANEL''' using a 10-wire flat ribbon cable. If you use the HX3 MenuPanel in parallel/simultaneously with Preset12-2 and Preset16 boards, it should be the last module on the chain connected to PL26, since it has only one bus connector.

Newer long version menu panels have a separate connector for the 7 LEDs that goes to '''PL35''' on the mainboard.

===Serial USB cable===
[[Datei:ftdi.jpg|300px|thumb|right|'''FTDI cable connected to HX3''']]

For fast board configuration you may use a serial connection through FTDI USB adaptor cable or USB interface connected to PL22 (cable colors imprinted). Alternatively, you may use the USB port or even the MIDI IN/OUT jacks through a third-party USB to MIDI interface. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

=== Configuration by SD Card ===

If an SD card adapter with an FAT 32 formatted SD card is detected, HX3.6 starts up in bootloader mode. To perform an update from the SD card press the menu panel encoder button. Only those parts are updated for which a corresponding file (.BIN, .DAT) is found on the card.

Alternatively to single files a single packed DFU file can be created with the HX3.6 Manager BootLoad and stored on the card. It is treated by HX3.6 exactly like a DFU update via USB cable. Updates are usually delivered by us as such a DFU file.

Please note: If new firmware has been installed, some ''System Inits'' settings are persistent and may need to be changed for your configuration to work.

Advanced users may create their own INI scripts containig all neccessary commands which do basically the same as HX3.6 Editor. See page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Configuration by HX3.6 Manager===

Alternatively, connect HX3.6 to your PC via USB. Start '''HX3.6 Manager''', connect to HX3.6 and open '''Updater''' window. Complete or partly updates may be triggered by menus. "Get Board Info" should show current configuration. See '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

Checklist:

* Is MIDI IN working? Brand new boards should deliver a basic organ sound on audio outputs with MIDI input on MIDI channel 1. Right 5-pin DIN connector (seen from back) is always a MIDI IN.
* Is an appropiate Scan Driver installed? You may replace the Scan Driver by using the Updater in HX3.6 Manager. Use Update menu and select "Scan Driver file". HX3.6 Updater will prompt for a DAT file, open either ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scansr61.dat'', or ''scanfatr.dat'', depending on your needs.
* Are HX3.6 System Inits correct? HX3.6 will not scan buttons or analog inputs if not set correctly. Use the Editor in HX3.6 Manager and click on pink '''System Inits''' button. Click '''Get Group''' in the Action menu to refresh table entries.
* Are analog drawbar inputs working? With all analog inputs enabled (parameter 1503>1), check if changes on drawbars are to be seen on '''Upper DB''' rsp. all other analog input groups when clicking '''Get Group''' button.
* Are analog volume inputs working? Non-working analog inputs may have been remapped to "not assigned". See '''Analog Remap''' group.

=== Updates ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' or page '''[[HX3.6 SD Card Usage]]''' for details.

=== Updating DSP Soundbanks ===

See page '''[http://updates.keyboardpartner.de/Files/Manuals%20%28Anleitungen%29/UserManual_HX36_Manager.pdf HX3.6 Manager User Manual, printable PDF file]''' for details.

==Parameter Tweaking ==

Adding hardware to your HX3.6 board may require some parameter tweaking to get it running. By factory, HX3.6 is configured as a MIDI expander; it will not poll or drive any peripherals attached except the MenuPanel. For example, if you attach the FatarScan2 board, you need to update the scan driver as well. If you attach drawbars, buttons or switches, you need to enable these.

As of today, tweaking parameters that are not present in the menu system is only possible by HX3.6 Editor.

== MIDI Configuration ==

The HX3.6 board is configured by factory as MIDI Expander with two MIDI inputs. Left MIDI DIN connector (seen from back) is MIDI IN2 by default. It may be configured as MIDI OUT by changing jumper setting on pin header PL18 according to following table (pin 1 is near USB connector, pin 10 is near DIN socket). For +5V phantom supply on MIDI IN set jumpers on pins 7-8 and 9-10. When phantom supply jumpers are installed, DIN jack carries ground on middle pin 2 and +5V on two otherwise unused outer pins 1 and 3. Phantom supply may be used to power '''BASS25 MIDI''' scan board connected to left DIN socket.

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL20 - function of left MIDI jack
|-
!Funktion
!JP on pin
!JP on pin
!Gnd (blue) JP on pin
!Vcc (red) JP on pin
|-
!MIDI OUT
|1-2
|4-5
|7-8
|open
|-
!MIDI IN
|2-3
|5-6
|open
|open
|-
!MIDI IN w/ phantom +5V
|2-3
|5-6
|7-8
|9-10
|-
|colspan="7" style="background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Pin 1 is left, seen from back''
|}

MIDI over USB is available if USB socket PL25 is installed, Mini USB socket adaptor (optional) or HX3 Extension Board is connected by cable to PL32. Please note: Due to hardware restrictions, '''MIDI IN2 and USB MIDI IN must not be used simultaneously'''. Transmission errors will occur!

==USB Port==

An USB type B connector may be soldered to position PL25 if needed. It is not populated by factory to ensure mechanical compatibility with existing rear panels. In addition, the USB signal is available on header PL24 (near USB jack) to route USB to our HX3.5 extension board. The USB port is configured as a "MIDI over USB" device by default. In DFU update mode it becomes the port for the HX3.6 DSP update application.

'''Important:''' When using a "MIDI over USB" connection (as the HX3 Manager does), disconnect any MIDI device from secondary (left) MIDI input DIN jack as they share the same MIDI input line.

USB port is also used for DSP firmware or soundbank updates.

===Mini USB Adaptor installation===

For use with the HX3.4 back panel with mini-USB cutout, connect the mini-USB adapter as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 20%;"
!HX3.6 PL24
!USB adapter
!USB cable color
|-
|G
|GND
|black
|-
|D +
|D +
|style="color:green|green
|-
|D -
|D -
|style="color:gray|white
|-
|V +
|VCC
|style="color:red|red
|}

==Audio Outputs==

In addition to left/right 1/4" audio jacks, the stereo audio signal is present on PL3 (center = analog ground).

==Connecting Analog Inputs==

HX3.6 provides '''24 internal analog inputs''', all located on pin headers '''PL31 and PL32''', as well as up to '''64 external analog inputs''' via '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''' drawbars and '''PTX4-25/35''' potentiometer assemblies connected to '''PL27 MPX bus''' input. All analog inputs are DC controlled. Input voltage range is from 0V (off or minimal volume) to +3.3V (max. volume). With factory configuration all analog inputs are disabled, so that HX3.6 may be used '''without any switches/drawbars/pots connected'''. You may leave internal connectors PL31 and PL32 open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Assigning Analog Inputs===

To enable analog control inputs, use the HX3.6 Editor application to set parameter #1503 to value 2 (when old DB9-MPX drawbars are to be used on PL31/PL32) or 3 (otherwise). Individual analog inputs may be disabled or re-routed in the HX3.6 Editor's '''Analog Remap''' section, parameters #5000 to #5023 (for internal inputs PL22/PL23) and #5024 to #5088 (external inputs on PL20). See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Mixing_DB9.2FDB12_and_DBX_Drawbar_Sets]] for details.

When individual internal input pins on PL31/PL32 are not used (i.e. remain open, no drawbar or pot installed), set corresponding parameter #5000..#5023 to "254 - Not assigned". To disable '''all''' internal inputs on PL31/PL32, set parameter #5000 to "255 - End of table". Same applies to PL27 MPX bus inputs: If no additional DBX or PTX boards are connected, set parameter #5024 to "255 - End of table".

Note: Do not assign an organ function to more than one analog input.

===Input Check & Monitoring===

All assigned inputs should be connected to a physical control. Otherwise, inputs will "float" and HX3.6 will send random MIDI control values at a high rate; this can make an update impossible.

HX3.6 Editor provides a monitoring function to check physical button states and raw analog input voltages. Click "Input Monitor" button and tick checkboxes of input types you want to monitor. Input voltage changes should appear immediately in the table(s). When you click on a table entry, the main table jumps to the associated assignment group.

==Internal Analog Inputs==

To use internal analog inputs on '''PL31 and PL32''', set ''System Inits'' parameter #1503 to 2 or 3. Set ''Analog Remap'' parameters #5000 to #5023 according to your pin assignment. By default, pin assignment is set to HX3.4 DB9/DB12 compatibility.

===Connecting Drawbar Boards DB9/DB11/DB12===

[[Datei:Wiring_drawbars.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Drawbar and pot connection to PL22 and PL23 (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:Db9mpx2.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Lower manual configuration with Drawbar12 (A# preset key, left) and Drawbar9-MPX (B preset key, right). Connects to HX3 via long flat ribbon cable (right). Upper manual configuration is similar, but uses Drawbar9 or Drawbar11 instead of Drawbar12.''']]

Classic drawbar sets DB9/DB11/DB12 may be used for single drawbar set configurations. Connection to our old drawbar boards DB9 and DB12 is simple: DB9 (upper) connects to '''PL31 ANLG UPR''', DB12 (lower) connects to '''PL32 ANLG LWR''' via 16-wire flat ribbon cable (length up to 1m, plugs wired 1:1). DB9 provides 3-pin headers for connection of Tone and Amp122 Volume pots.

Additional DB9-MPX boards (obsolete - use DBX drawbar modules instead) may be inserted for configurations with dual drawbar sets per manual. Secondary DB9-MPX drawbar sets should be located right to corresponding primary DB9 or DB12 drawbars as on Hammond Consoles. A short flat ribbon cable connects both (see picture).

DB9 and DB11/12 are compatible and interchangeable, despite additional drawbars for bass pedals resp. tone/amp volume.

===Connecting other Drawbar Pots===

You may also use your own or existing drawbars as follows: At least connect 9 drawbars or slider pots and Leslie volume control pot to '''PL31 ANLG UPR'''. R value should be in the 10 kOhm to 47 kOhm range, '''linear taper''' (for example type B10K). Note that using audio taper (log.) drawbar pots as found in various older LSI and transistor organs will not yield correct loudness and drawbar position on MenuPanel display.

Any analog input may be "soft wired" to any analog function with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section. By default, analog functions are mapped to keep HX3.4 compatibility as shown below.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL31 ANLG UPR - Control Voltages Upper Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Master Volume Pot
|-
! Pin 11
| Amp Pot, simulated tube amp volume
|-
! Pin 12
| Assigned pot (assignable with HX3.6 Editor)
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 45%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="2" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;"| PL32 ANLG LWR - Control Voltages Lower Manual
|-
! Pin 1
| Drawbar 16
|-
! Pin 2
| Drawbar 5 1/3
|-
! Pin 3
| Drawbar 8
|-
! Pin 4
| Drawbar 4
|-
! Pin 5
| Drawbar 2 2/3
|-
! Pin 6
| Drawbar 2
|-
! Pin 7
| Drawbar 1 5/9
|-
! Pin 8
| Drawbar 1 1/3
|-
! Pin 9
| Drawbar 1
|-
! Pin 10
| Drawbar Bass 16
|-
! Pin 11
| Drawbar Bass 8
|-
! Pin 12
| Drawbar/Pot Pedal Sustain
|-
! Pin 13, 14
| Drawbar/Pot common ground GND
|-
! Pin 15
| Drawbar set A/B switching signal (may be tied to pin 16)
|-
! Pin 16
| Drawbar/Pot end 3.3V+ (reference)
|}

Even with MIDI control, a swell pedal should be connected to SWELL jack for faster response. This overrides MIDI volume control. You may connect a swell pedal like Yamaha FC-7 or a simple volume pot to the SWELL jack.

HX3 mainboard is set to tone/treble and amp volume control inputs active by factory (may be altered also with ''HX3.6 Editor''). Tone pot center is connected to pin 10 of PL31. Pin 11 becomes the Leslie amp volume/drive control (mandatory). Amp volume pot center is connected to pin 11 of PL31. Both pots begin with GND and end with Ref 3.3V+.

Please note: Open analog inputs (unconnected) will "float" and change randomly, even with presets active. Disable unused inputs with HX3.6 Editor's ''Analog Remap'' section (set to "254 - Not assigned").

 

==External Analog Inputs (PL27 MPX bus)==

[[Datei:DBX9.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX9 drawbar set for connection to PL20 MPX bus input, shortened on right side to fit into organ (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_9_3.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 drawbar set in 9+3 configuration for B3-like installations. Note that right connector PL4 (bottom mount) cannot be used as space is occupied by drawbar potentiometer. Use top connector PL8 or right solder pads to chain drawbar sets. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX6_PTX4.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Chained DBX6 drawbar set and PTX4-35 potentiometer assembly, suited for ADRS, volume or equalizer control (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX_topconnect.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''DBX12 and DBX9 drawbar sets chained with top connectors. Alternatively solder pads on left and right side can be used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]
[[Datei:DBX12_quirk.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''''Does not apply to current version:'' Due to a design quirk on DBX12 v4 and DBX9 v4 drawbar sets, a wire must be soldered to PL8 pin 2 and pin 5 as shown when top connectors are used. (click picture to enlarge)''']]

We recommend '''DBX6/DBX9/DBX12''' (6, 9 or 12 DrawBars multipleXed), '''ANX8''' (8 ANalog multipleXed inputs) and '''PTX4-25 or PTX4-35''' (4 PoTentiometers multipleXed) assemblies for new organ designs as they greatly simplify the installation. These boards carry their own multiplexers/shift register ICs, so they can be daisy-chained via the MPX bus system, a 10-wire flat ribbon cable connected to '''PL27 MPX''' on HX3.6 mainboard. Any number of DBX6, DBX9, DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4 modules may be be strung together in any order until the maximum capacity of 64 analog controls is reached. The 24 internal inputs on '''PL31/PL32''' can be used independently, so this adds up to a total of '''88 analog inputs'''.

===DBX Connector Installation===

DBX boards are provided with two angled 10-pin headers. All DBX drawbar boards are available without drawbar potentiometers installed. Please order drawbar potentiometers and knobs separeately. Insert drawbars into solder pads from bottom of PCB (no silk screen lettering) on desired positions, turn over and place on an even surface before soldering to maintain even spacing.

To be used in tight installations, all DBX boards may be '''cut along white lines''' on board without affecting function, using a fine toothed saw blade. This must be done before mounting of drawbar potentiometers.

===DBX6 Drawbar Module===

DBX6 boards are suitable for ADSR, equalizer or volume control with 4 to 6 drawbars. With 6 drawbars mounted, right bottom chain header position is occupied by last drawbar. In this case, use solder pad wire connections or top mounted headers for chaining boards.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:40%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="9" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | DX6 input assignment (6 versatile drawbars)
|-
!style="width: 20%" |DBX6 Drawbar
!style="width: 10%" |R1
!style="width: 10%" |R2
!style="width: 10%" |R5
!style="width: 10%" |R6
!style="width: 10%" |R7
!style="width: 10%" |R8
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 19%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
|
| +6...
|}
 

===DBX9 Drawbar Module===

DBX9 boards are suitable for classic 9 harmonic drawbar installations on B3- or M100-like organ consoles. They offer additional 3 analog inputs (if needed) for connection of own potentiometers (10k to 47k types suitable). To use these, set "solder blob" jumper JP1 open and JP2 closed (12 analog inputs mode). Potentiometer inputs are available on 6-pin connectors PL2 (not mounted; all 6-pin connectors are wired in parallel, same pinout). The inputs are also available on 5 solder pads marked AIN +9 to AIN +11, as well as GND and VREF (common to all pots).

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper settings DBX9
|-
!Konfiguration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!9 Drawbars on DBX9
|open
|closed
|-
!9 Drawbars and 1 to 3 Pots on DBX9
|closed
|open
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:50%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX9
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
|
| +9...
|-
|colspan="12" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars, JP2 closed)''
|}

 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="15" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignement DBX9 + 3 analog inputs
|-
!style="width: 20% | DBX9 Drawbar
!style="width: 8%" | R1
!style="width: 8%" | R2
!style="width: 8%" | R4
!style="width: 8%" | R5
!style="width: 8%" | R6
!style="width: 8%" | R7
!style="width: 8%" | R9
!style="width: 8%" | R11
!style="width: 8%" | R12
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+9
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+10
!style="width: 10%" | AIN+11
!style="width: 0%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="15" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Input assignment for B3-like installation (9 drawbars) plus 3 additional pot inputs (JP1 closed)''
|}

 
Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

 
The assignment of the 6-pin header for the connection of further potentiometers is as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Pinout of 6-pin header PL2
|-
!Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Input AIN+9
|-
!2
|Input AIN+10
|-
!3
|Input AIN+11
|-
!4
|(not connected)
|-
!5
|VREF (common pot end)
|-
!6
|GND (common pot ground)
|}

 

===DBX12 Drawbar Module===

DBX12 boards are suitable for 12 harmonic drawbar installations on '''H100-, Böhm- or Wersi'''-like organ consoles. Drawbar positions DB+0 to DB+11 are populated, rightmost position R16 remains empty.

However, it is possible to use DBX12 boards in a '''B3-like 9+3''' drawbar configuration (i.e. 9 upper or lower on left side, one space and 3 pedal drawbars on right side). In this case, do not populate R13 (space), use positiion R16 (rightmost) instead. Note that position R16 (pedal sustain) is handled as input #9 (R13), not #12. In either case, DBX12 only has 12 inputs, not 13. It is '''not''' possible to populate DBX12 as 3+9 drawbars (pedal drawbars on left side), as position R13 and R16 share the same analog input! See section [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Typical_Applications]] for details.

Jumper settings via removing or adding solder blobs. Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="3" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Jumper setting DBX12
|-
!Configuration
!JP1
!JP2
|-
!12 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|-
!9+3 Drawbars on DBX12
|closed
|open
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in H100 configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | no R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| +9
| +10
| +11
| none
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assignment for H100 like installation (12 drawbars) with '''R13''' installed, '''no R16''' ''
|}
 
{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment DBX12 in B3 like configuration
|-
!style="width: 15% | DBX12 Drawbar
!style="width: 5%" | R1
!style="width: 5%" | R2
!style="width: 5%" | R4
!style="width: 5%" | R5
!style="width: 5%" | R6
!style="width: 5%" | R7
!style="width: 5%" | R9
!style="width: 5%" | R11
!style="width: 5%" | R12
!style="width: 5%" | no R13
!style="width: 5%" | R14
!style="width: 5%" | R15
!style="width: 5%" | R16
!style="width: 1%" |
!style="width: 15%" |Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| +8
| none
| +10
| +11
| +9
|
| +12...
|-
|colspan="16" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;"| ''Input assigment for B3 like installation (9 harmonic drawbars plus 3 pedal drawbars) with '''R16''' installed, '''no R13''' ''
|}

 

===PTX4 Potentiometer Module===

'''PTX4-25''' and '''PTX4-35''' boards feature 4 high quality potentiometers, available with or without middle detent. The only difference is the distance from one pot to next (25mm on PTX4-25, 35mm on PTX4-35). Any number of PTX4 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain. A single PTX4 board adds +4 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #23, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #24.

PTX4 potentiometer boards are '''not''' to be used as external potentiometers on additional DBX9 analog inputs. Use separate potentiometers instead.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment PTX4-25 and PTX4-35
|-
!PTX4 Pot
!P1
!P2
!P3
!P4
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
|
| +4...
|-
|colspan="7" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''P1 is the leftmost pot''
|}

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of this module). 

===ANX8 Analog Input Module===

'''ANX8''' boards feature 8 additional analog inputs for connection of built-in potentiometers, drawbars, pitch/modulation wheels and other analog controls. Any number of ANX8 boards may be inserted anywhere in the MPX bus chain, with PL9 "NEXT BOARD" pointing to end of chain. A single ANX8 board adds +8 to the input numbering scheme as mentioned above, i.e if the first (leftmost) pot became input #20 (due to some previous DBX boards), the rightmost pot is #27, and next PTX or DBX board (connected to the right) will start with #28.

8 separate inputs are available on 3-pin headers PL1 to PL8. Connect pin(s) marked "REF" to end of potentiometer, pin "GND" to start, pin "AIN" to wiper.

Note: '''Next Board''' is assignment of first control of next module in chain (on right side of
this module).

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:30%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Input assignment ANX8
|-
!ANX8 Input
! PL1
! PL2
! PL3
! PL4
! PL5
! PL6
! PL7
! PL8
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
|
| +8...
|}

 
For convenient wiring, analog inputs are also available in groups of 4 inputs (PL11 with inputs +0 to +3, PL12 with inputs +4 to +7):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="16" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Eingangsbelegung ANX8 PL11, PL12
|-
!ANX8 Input
!PL11-1
!PL11-2
!PL11-3
!PL11-4
!PL11-5
!PL11-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!PL12-1
!PL12-2
!PL12-3
!PL12-4
!PL12-5
!PL12-6
!style="width: 1%" |
!Next Board
|-
!Input #
| GND
| +0
| +1
| +2
| +3
| REF
|
| GND
| +4
| +5
| +6
| +7
| REF
|
| +8...
|}

===Chaining DBX6/DBX9/DBX12, ANX8 and PTX4===

Connect first '''DBX6, DBX9, DBX12''', '''ANX8''' or '''PTX4''' assembly to PL27. The leftmost control HX3.6 "sees" in the chain is external MPX analog input #0 (assigned by parameter #5024). The number counts up to the next DBX/PTX board connected to the daisy-chain connector. I.e. if you chain a DBX9 and a PTX4 (in this order), the leftmost (first) potentiometer on PTX4 becomes control #9, assigned by parameter #5033 (#0 to #8 used up by DBX9). Adding a DBX12 will start at #13, assigned by parameter #5037, and so on.

Your chain now looks like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX9''' PL3/8
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12''' PL4/8
|etc.
|-
|'''Eingang #'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
|
| 9 10 11 12
|
|13 14 15 16 17 ...
|
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

As mentioned before, DBX6, DBX9, DBX12 or PTX4 can be arranged in any order as long as they form a chain from one board to another. Parameter assignment always starts at #0 (parameter #5024) for the leftmost control in the chain. It is possible to '''skip individual drawbar inputs''' by setting its assignment parameter to "254 - Not assigned". This may be useful for empty spaces in the drawbar lineup, for example between harmonic and ADSR drawbars or upper and pedal drawbars. All DBX boards are available without drawbar potentiometers mounted, so you may configure them as required by your installation.

===Typical Applications===

A typical organ configuration (9 drawbars per manual, 3 for pedal) using DBX12 may look as follows:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- 10 11 9
|
|12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
|
|21 22 23 24
|}

 
or, depending on installation (to keep cable length short):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL/7 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL/7 '''DBX12 with R16''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX9''' PL3
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -- 14 15 13
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
|}

 
A H100-like installation may look like this:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width:70%"
|'''HX3.6''' PL27
|cable
|PL1 '''PTX4''' PL2
|cable
|PL1/7 '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|(=)
|(PL1/7) '''DBX12 with R13''' (PL4/8)
|-
|'''Input#'''
|
|0 1 2 3
|
|4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
|
|16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
|}

 
Note: PL1 (top left, bottom mounted) and PL7 are internally connected in parallel, as well as PL3/PL4 (top right, bottom mounted) and PL8. These connectors may be used alternatively (see [[HX3.6_Installation_Manual#Installation_Alternatives]] for details).

====Installation Alternatives====

DBX boards may be chained (connected to each other) by using bottom-mounted 10-pin headers (left and right side of board), top-mounted 10-pin headers or wires soldered to solder pads. We supply 2 angled 10-pin headers with each board; you may use straight headers when space allows this installation.

Instead of using flat ribbon cables, adjacent DBX boards may be chained using solder blobs and 6 short pieces of wire (marked as "=" in table above) where boards "butt against each other". Solder pads on left and right sides provide easy connection from one board to next one by '''DGND, VCC5, SRCLK, SRIN/OUT ANLG and NRST''' pads ('''VREF3 remains unconnected''', as well as additional potentiometer pads!).

Also boards may be '''cut along white lines''' if no space is allowed from one drawbar to next on different board. If needed, cut the board '''before''' mounting the drawbar potentiometers. The boards provide additional solder pads for chaining by wires even when board is shortened. However, the row's last DBX board should retain PL3 (DBX9) or PL4 (DBX12) as you may want to add more DBX or PTX4 boards in the future. '''Again, plan carefully before mounting drawbar pots or cutting boards!'''

 

====Dual/Secondary DBX Drawbar Sets====

Classic console organ installations mandate dual drawbar sets for each manual. Using dual drawbar sets with DBX bus system differs from old DB9-MPX installations. In DBX installations, all drawbars can be "seen" by the firmware, even the inactive ones (they are just skipped when drawbar set is not active). Set parameter #1503 to 3 (DBX mode) and assign all inputs which are primary drawbars with ''Upr1'' or ''Lwr1'' values, while secondary drawbars become ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' values (128 and up).

Secondary drawbars will be activated when drawbar '''Voice''' preset on particular manual matches number in "System Inits" parameter #1505 (2ndDB Select Voice Number), otherwise they are skipped and primary drawbars become active.

====Mixing DB9/DB12 and DBX Drawbar Sets====

As internal inputs on PL31/PL32 can be used as drawbar inputs even in DBX configurations, existing DB9/DB12 and even DB9-MPX drawbars connected to PL31/PL32 (assigned by ''Analog Remap'' #5000 to #5023) can still be used, either as primary or secondary drawbar sets.

* When '''old DB9-MPX drawbar boards''' are connected to PL31/PL32 as secondary drawbar sets, set parameter #1503 value to 2 (DB9-MPX mode). In this case, '''do not use''' secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) in "Analog Remap" section; ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' assignments will be ignored.

* When old DB9-MPX drawbar boards are '''not''' used, set parameter #1503 value to 3 (DBX mode). In this case, secondary drawbar assignments ''Upr2'' and ''Lwr2'' for inputs (parameter values 128 and up) can be used in "Analog Remap" section.

 

==Connecting Digital Inputs==

The HX3.6 system offers a total of 64 internal (logical) switch functions or "tabs" (e.g. "Tube Amp Bypass" or "H100 Keying Mode") as well as some special functions (from firmware 5.7, e.g. Transpose Up/Down). The HX3.6 mainboard provides '''16 internal digital inputs''' onboard on PL35/36 (extendable by 5 external boards '''Preset16''' or '''Extend16''' up to 96 tab and preset functions) plus one rotary swich input. Switches are defined as tab stops, rocker or toggle switches, buttons are momentary switch contacts, normally open. All inputs are active low, i.e. tie to ground when switch/button is operated. You may leave the switch connectors open if you plan to control by MIDI only.

===Input Monitor===

A very helpful function of HX3.6 Editor versions is the ''Input Monitor''. You can use it to check the function of all buttons and switches. Active (pressed) buttons are marked with "ON".

By clicking into the input table you will also find out to which HX3.6 tab the input or button is assigned. Conversely, when you click on an assignment in ''Switch Remap'', the active field in the input monitor tables jumps to the assigned input.

===Onboard Inputs PL35/PL36===

The '''PL35 and PL36''' connectors carry the 16 internal digital inputs; you can connect your own pushbuttons/switches or a Panel16 board here (see '''[[#Panel16]]'''). Many installations will get by with these 16 tabs.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#32
|#33
|#34
|#35
|#36
|#37
|#38
|#39
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Perc ON
|Perc SOFT
|Perc FAST
|Perc THIRD
|Vib ON Upper
|Vib ON Lower
|Leslie RUN
|Leslie FAST
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" |Pinout PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pins
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 1
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 2
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 3
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 4
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 5
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 6
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 7
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 8
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 9
!style="width: 5%"| Pin 10
|-
!Input #
|#40
|#41
|#42
|#43
|#44
|#45
|#46
|#47
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!Default function
|Preset 1 oder V1
|Preset 2 oder V2
|Preset 3 oder V3
|Preset 4 oder V/C
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
| +5V
|Gnd
|}

====Separate Buttons or Switches====

[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of buttons with LEDs on PL35 PERC/VIBON and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT. Use an R value of 1k for blue or white LEDs, as these LEDs are very bright.''']]

Instead of Panel16 you can also connect your own buttons or tab switches (up to 16) directly to the HX3.6 main board. Each function is activated either by a button or a switch (depending on the parameter '''Button Mask''' in the system settings of the HX3.6 editor) at the digital inputs PL35/PL36. For buttons, a momentary contact with ground on each PL35/PL36 pin toggles the status and drives indicator LEDs (see schematic). For switches, the indicator LED can be omitted since the mechanical switch indicates the current state. Leave unused digital inputs open.

===Panel16===

Easiest solution for a register/stop panel is using [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/panel16 our Panel16 board] connected to '''PL35 PERC/VIBON/LESL and PL36 PRESET/EFX/SPLIT''' by two 10-wire flat ribbon cables. '''Panel16''' provides 16 buttons for complete HX3 control; just add the rotary switch for vibrato depth.

Panel16 has 4 "Common Preset" keys in the layout for standard organ installations. The "Common Preset" keys are binary coded so that more than one preset key can be active (pressed simultaneously). This allows 16 key combinations (all off to all on) corresponding to Common Presets 0 (live) to 15. Alternatively, these keys can be used to select V1-V3 vibrato or C1-C3 chorus depth. In this case, the Vibrato rotary switch on PL24 is omitted; then set ''System Inits'' parameter #1497 to 2.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Default Button Assigment Panel16 on PL35/36
|-
!style="width: 25%" |Buttons upper row
|style="width: 9%" | Perc ON
|style="width: 9%" | Perc SOFT
|style="width: 9%" | Perc FAST
|style="width: 9%" | Perc THIRD
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON upper
|style="width: 9%" | Vib ON lower
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie RUN
|style="width: 9%" | Leslie FAST
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row with vibrato buttons
|V1
|V2
|V3
|Vib/Chorus
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|-
!Buttons lower row with preset buttons
|Preset 1
|Preset 2
|Preset 3
|Preset 4
!
|Reverb I
|Reverb II
|Bass On Leslie
|Split ON
|}

 
Buttons used for Common Presets, Drawbar Voices or V1..V3 V/C may be remapped deliberately to any digital input using the ''Switch Remap'' table in the HX3 Editor application.

===Other Buttons or Switches===

To extend the pushbutton/switch inputs, the boards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' and also the older '''Preset12-2''' are available. They are connected to '''PL26 PANEL''' on the mainboard and connected in series via a bus system (I2C). Each board forms a group of 16 inputs (2 x 12 for Preset 12-2). The MenuPanel is also connected to this bus; conveniently, it is placed at the end of the chain, since it has only one bus connector. It is also possible to press several 10-pin connectors onto the ribbon cable at PL26.

Each board must be assigned a '''unique bus address''' via its jumpers ($60 to $65, see imprint and table below). On older Preset16 and Preset12-2 the addresses are hardwired ($60 or $61 for Preset16 old, Preset12-2 occupies two addresses $60 and $61). Each address may be assigned only once in the network, otherwise there will be bus conflicts.

The 16 inputs of a Prest16 or Extend16 board form a group, with 5 boards these are the groups 0 to 5 corresponding to the set addresses $60 to $65. It is not necessary to number the addresses and thus the group numbers of the connected boards consecutively, there may be "gaps". HX3.6 does not query these.

All pushbutton/switches can be assigned to any HX3.6 function ("Tab") via the HX3.6 editor parameters ''Switch Remap''; the parameters in the group ''Input Mode'' determine whether a switch (ON, 255) or a pushbutton with LED (OFF, 0, default) is connected to the corresponding input.

To check the function and affiliation of a digital input, use the ''Input Monitor'' in the HX3.6 editor. By clicking into the monitor table you can also determine to which HX3.6 tab this input is assigned.

Each digital input can be enabled/disabled or redirected in the ''Switch Remap'' section of the HX3 editor, parameters 5100 to 5195. Preset and voice buttons may also be distributed to the 96 inputs as desired. Only restriction: Buttons of a certain preset function (Upper, Lower or Common) must be located on continuous buttons within a group or board, it is not possible to distribute for example Upper Voices on 2 boards/groups.

====Board Adresses for Digital Inputs====

Input group 2 ($62) is already assigned for the 16 inputs on the HX3.6 mainboard (see below, section '''Panel16''') and must not be used for external Preset16/Extend16.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="7" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Board Addresses for Digital Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Input group
!0
!1
!2 (onboard)
!3
!4
!5
|-
!Bus address
!$60
!$61
!$62
!$63
!$64
!$65
|-
!Jumper on Preset16, Extend16
|JP1, JP2, JP3 closed
|JP2, JP3 closed
|JP1, JP3 closed
|JP3 closed
|JP1, JP2 closed
|JP2 closed
|-
!Note
|scope="row" colspan="2" |Fixed addresses for Preset16 (old, Upper 0, Lower 1) and Preset12-2 (both)
|HX3.6 board onboard, fixed address '''Do not use for Preset16, Extend16!'''
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|Extend16 und Preset16 with solder pads
|-
|-
!Button-Funktion
|Button #0..#15
|Button #16..#31
|Button #32..#47 (onboard, Panel16)
|Button #48..#63
|Button #64..#79
|Button #80..#95
|-
!Button top left or first input
|#0
|#16
|#32 (PL25 Pin 1)
|#48
|#64
|#80
|}
 

The number of a specific pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. So for the board with address '''$63''' the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

====Preset16====

[[Datei:Panel16 anschl.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Zwei in Reihe geschaltete Preset16-Karten, die an PL26 PANEL angeschlossen sind. Optionales Menü-Panel kann an die letzte Preset16-Karte angeschlossen werden.''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/p/preset16 Preset16] is a stand-alone panel with 2 rows of 8 LED buttons each. It is connected to '''HX3 PL26''' via a 10-pin ribbon cable. Additional preset16 can be connected to the second 10-pin header each (daisy chain). Both 10-pin headers on preset16 can be used (are wired in parallel).

A plugged jumper on older Preset16 boards selects the upper manual, if available. If the jumper is missing, preset16 operates on lower manual. Newer preset16 boards have three jumpers (solder bridges) to set preset16 to upper or lower manual voice presets (address $60 and $61) (see table '''Board Addresses for Digital Inputs'''). Set solder pads to get one of the board addresses given in the table.

If you use two drawbars per manual, using DBX or older DB9-MPX (obsolete) drawbar cards, set ''System Inits'' parameter #1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. This will activate the first drawbar set on preset 0, and the second drawbar set on preset 1. You can use any voice from 1 to 15 to activate the second drawbar set. Higher numbers will disable the switchover.

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. To achieve compatibility with previous installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501, which swaps upper and lower button row of Preset16. Alternatively, move the gray button caps to the upper button row; they can be pulled off with some force. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbuttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible with the help of the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 70%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Preset16 Default Button Assigment
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Buttons upper row
|style="color:red; width: 10%"|Live setting
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 1 (or 2nd DB set)
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 2
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 3
!style="width: 1%" |
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 4
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 5
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 6
|style="width: 10%" | Voice 7
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
!
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|-
!colspan="10" |
|-
!Buttons lower row
|Voice 8
|Voice 9
|Voice 10
|Voice 11
!
|Voice 12
|Voice 13
|Voice 14
|Voice 15
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
!
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|-
|colspan="10" style="text-align:center; background-color:#f0f0f0;" | ''Assignable via '''Switch Remap''', can be on any board and in any group, but continuous buttons''
|}
 

====Extend16====

[[Datei:Extend16.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Extend16 switch extension''']]
[[Datei:Hoax_ledbtn.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Connection of keys with LED indicators to Extend16, PL17 and PL18.''']]

Extend16 boards are basically preset16 without buttons; the connection of switches or buttons ( possibly with LED) is done as described above for the on-board inputs of the HX3.6. The pinout of PL17/PL16 on the Extend16 board is compatible with '''PL35/PL36 of the mainboard'''. In addition, all pushbutton inputs are routed to 3-pin connectors. Extend16 can also be used to select presets if configured accordingly and then replace the older '''Preset12-2'''.

The number of the pushbutton/switch results from the group base number (16 * group/board number) plus the specified offset. For the board with address '''$63''' (group 3) the first input would be 16 * 3 = 48.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center;width: 63%; background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL18
|-
!style="width: 15%" | PL18 Pins'''
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +0
|# +1
|# +2
|# +3
|# +4
|# +5
|# +6
|# +7
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL1
|PL2
|PL3
|PL4
|PL5
|PL6
|PL7
|PL8
| +5V
|Gnd
|-
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Pinout PL17
|-
!PL17 Pins
!Pin 1
!Pin 2
!Pin 3
!Pin 4
!Pin 5
!Pin 6
!Pin 7
!Pin 8
!Pin 9
!Pin 10
|-
!Offset Input number
|# +8
|# +9
|# +10
|# +11
|# +12
|# +13
|# +14
|# +15
|
|
|-
!Single inputs
|PL9
|PL10
|PL11
|PL11
|PL13
|PL14
|PL15
|PL16
| +5V
|Gnd
|}
 
For more convenient wiring, the LED pushbutton inputs are also routed to 16 three-pin connectors, to each of which an LED pushbutton is connected. If you use switches or pushbuttons without LEDs, leave the L+ connector open. Series resistors for the LEDs are already included here, you can connect red, yellow and green LEDs directly to PL1..PL16. For blue and white LEDs an additional series resistor of 1kOhm should be inserted into the L+ line, otherwise the LEDs are too bright and dazzle. Pin assignment PL1..PL16:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="11" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | Extend16 Single Inputs
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin'''
!Function
|-
!BG
|Button Ground
|-
!BL
|Button and LED connection
|-
!L+
|LED+ (Anode)
|-
|}
 

The board address may be arbitrary (except $62 for group 2), because the preset buttons are assigned via ''Switch Remap''. However, $60 and $61 are preset in the firmware to remain compatible with existing installations. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to push buttons or switches. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; unlike the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then called up when the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1504.

====Preset12-2 (obsolete)====

'''[[Datei:Preset12-2_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|The Preset12-2 is connected to HX3.6 PL26. The ribbon cable can be extended with an additional connector to connect the menu panel.]]'''

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/preset12-2] is an interface board for up to 2 x 12 "inverted" preset keys (with optional LED indicators) as found on Hammond console organs. The Preset12-2 board is basically equivalent to two Panel16s or Extend16s, with the last 4 inputs missing. It is connected to the '''HX3.6 PL26''' via a 10-wire ribbon cable. Pin 1 of the two 14-pin headers is preset 0 = Live (right drawbar set) = B button, pin 2 is preset 1 = Live (left drawbar set) and so on down to pin 12 = CANCEL button.

The standard organ firmware supports '''momentary contacts'''. To save a preset, press and hold the preset button/pushbutton for 2 seconds.

When using '''2 Drawbar Sets per Manual''' by DB9-MPX Drawbar/Multiplexer and Preset12-2 board, set ''HX3 Editor'' "System Inits" parameter 1505 "2nd Drawbar Select Voice Number" to 1. Switching Drawbar Sets A#/B is only active when no Common Preset is on ("Live" mode #0). If a '''Common Preset''' (#1..#99) is selected, the '''right drawbar set''' is always active.

'''Pinout PL1 (LEDs)''' 
Pin - Funktion 
1: LED 1 cathode (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: LED 2 cathode (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: LED 3 cathode (Preset 2) 
... 
12: LED 12 cathode (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common LED Anode (+)

The LED outputs have integrated 220 ohm resistors, resulting in an LED current of 15 mA. The long leg of the LEDs is the anode (+), the short leg is the cathode (-).

'''Pinout PL2 (Buttons/Switches)''' 
Pin - Function (active low – switch to Gnd) 
1: Switch 1 (Preset 0, "B" key drawbar set) 
2: Switch 2 (Preset 1, "A#" key drawbar set) 
3: Switch 3 (Preset 2) 
... 
12: Switch 12 (Preset 11, CANCEL key) 
13,14: Common Gnd (0V)

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in *System Inits* "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set the ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Preset12-MPX (obsolete)====

The old '''Preset12-MPX''' boards for HX3 mk2/mk3 can also be used for HX3.6 together with two sets of non-MPX drawbar boards. However, they do not provide a variable preset number for the second drawbar set. Instead, the second drawbar set is hardwired to Voice Preset 15. So you must change the second drawbar set number in parameter #1505 to 15, not 1 if you are using Preset12-MPX.

To achieve compatibility with existing installations, set bits 0 and 1 in ''System Inits'' "Various Configurations #1501. This will restore the correct voice preset order. Set ''Input Modes'' for groups 0 and 1 to pushbutton or switch. The ''Switch'' setting can also be used with pushbuttons; in contrast to the ''Button'' setting, a voice preset is then recalled as soon as the button is pressed and not when it is released, but saving is only possible using the Cancel button (press > 2sec.). If necessary, define the Cancel key of the upper and lower manual in ''Switch Remaps'' and the voice preset for the second drawbar set in ''System Inits'' #1505.

====Presets and Voices====

HX3.6 knows for each manual and the pedal separately stored pure drawbar settings ("Voices") and the (depending on the System Inits configuration) many or all analog and tab settings "Common Presets" (1 to 99). Drawbar-''Voices''' (as found as "inverted keys" on B3 consoles) operate independently of Common Presets; they affect only Drawbar settings and can be accessed via the menu. 2x8, 2x12, or 2x16 Voice Presets can be created using the optional cards '''Preset16''', '''Extend16''' (multiple allowed) or '''Preset12-2'''.

If a common preset is called up and a voice preset is not set to 0 (live), the now invalid voice button flashes. Pressing the voice button again recalls the drawbar setting stored here; now the common preset button flashes to indicate that the common preset is no longer valid.

==Vibrato Knob (Rotary Switch)==

[[Datei:Hoax_rotary.png|300px|thumb|right|'''Vibrato rotary switch connection to PL33 VIBSW. Disregard "PL5" lettering in schematic. First contact lug of rotary switch is not used!''']]

Vibrato/chorus V1 to C3 is selected by a rotary switch connected to '''PL33'''. The switch position is always polled unless Panel16 is configured with V1..3/Chorus buttons (''System Inits'' parameter #1504, also see note below). PL33 also carries switching signals, indicating rotary operation. You may connect a LED with serial resistor (330R and up) here, cathode (-) connected to Common Gnd.

Pinout PL33 VIBSW Vibrato rotary switch (active low – switch to Gnd):

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL33 Vibrato Switch
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Funktion
|-
!1
|Chorus 1
|-
!2
|Vibrato 2
|-
!3
|Chorus 2
|-
!4
|Vibrato 3
|-
!5
|Chorus 3
|-
!6
|nicht verwendet
|-
!7
|Rotary Slow Indicator (active high)
|-
!8
|Rotary Fast Indicator (active high)
|-
!9
|not used
|-
!10
|Gnd
|-
|}

To assign vibrato keys, set the corresponding inputs in the ''Switch Remap'' section to 84, 85, 87 (three-key mode) or 84..87 (four-key mode). The ''System Inits'' parameter #1504 = 1 is ignored.

==Connecting Keyboard Scan Board(s)==

For lowest key-to-audio latency we recommend direct keyboard connection via scan board (different versions available). Scan boards are activated by update from SD card (appropriate for your application) or ''HX3.6 Manager''. Upload driver ''scanmidi.dat'', ''scanfatr.dat'' resp. ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. All Scan drivers will support MIDI input/output too, but for pure MIDI remote we recommend MIDI input driver ''scanmidi.dat''. New HX3.6 boards come with ''scanmidi.dat'' installed.

===FatarScan2===
'''[[Datei:Wiring fatar.png|300px|thumb|right|FatarScan2 connection diagram - mk4 board shown, disregard PL indices, connection to PL8 FATAR SCAN]]'''

A single [http://shop.keyboardpartner.de/epages/13705466.sf/de_DE/?ObjectPath=/Shops/13705466/Products/fatarscan2 FatarScan2 board] is connected to '''HX3.6 PL8 FATAR SCAN'''. One or two Fatar 61 key manuals (type TP/8O or similar) may be connected to one FatarScan2 board using a special cable set (MicroMatch connectors to keyboard scanning strips). See page [[Anschluss der Scan-Platine FatarScan2]] (German language) for more pictures. We recommend buying the FatarScan2 cable set for connection to MicroMatch headers on Fatar keybeds (one set for each manual).

A FatarScan2 board '''must''' be connected to PL8 if using the FatarScan driver, otherwise loud noise will be heard.

Bass pedals may be connected to an additional Scan16-Strip, Scan61-Inline or Bass25 board wired to '''PL12 4014 SCAN''' (!).

FatarScan2 boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3.6 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scanfatr.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

'''Please note:''' The FatarScan2 board must be connected when using the scanfatr.dat driver, otherwise communication with the HX3.6 manager will be blocked.

===Scan16-Strip Set===
'''[[Datei:wiring_scan16.png|300px|thumb|right|Connection of Scan16 Strip or Scan61 to HX3 board (HX3.4 pictured. Note: HX3.6 has different PL designators)]]'''

For most "one contact per key" organs one or two sets of tall [https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan16-strip Scan16-Strip] boards (one set for each manual) may be used which yield easier installation on these keybeds. For each manual you need 3 (44 or 49 keys) or 4 (61 keys) Scan16 boards. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan16 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12 4014 SCAN'''. Bass25 may be used as pedal scan board. A jumper on "lowest" Scan16 board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Scan16 is always "C" key on 4- and 5-octave keybeds. On 61-key manuals, upper part of rightmost Scan16 board may be cut off as marked on PCB silk screen printing (or pads are left open). On 44-key manuals, lowest 5 pads are left open, manual(s) start with "F" key. On 49-key manuals, connect pad PL20 to highest "C" note. All contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan16 boards for one or two 49/61-key manuals is are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window. See page [[Anschluss_der_Scan-Platine_Scan4014-16_(je_16_Tasten)]] (german only) for pictures.

===Scan61-Inline===
[[Datei:Scan61-Inline_ansch.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Scan61-Inline Board connected to HX3 board''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/scan61-inline Scan61-Inline] works exactly like a Scan16-Strip set of 4 PCB, but has all parts mounted on one compact PCB (one Scan61-Inline needed for each manual). So each key must be wired separately. Please refer to [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN schematics and part placement] in out Git repo. All Scan61 equipped manuals are wired in parallel with one 10-wire flat ribbon cable (multiple connectors attached) to '''HX3.6 PL12'''. Bass25 may be used as a third pedal scan board. A jumper on Scan61-inline board determines if keybed is upper, lower or bass pedal:

JP1 = Upper manual 
JP2 = Lower manual 
JP3 = Pedal notes 

Please note: lowest key contact pad on Strip61-Inline is always "C" key. On shorter manuals, leave unused key inputs open. As on OrganScan61 or Scan16-Strip, all contacts must switch to ground. Boards provide ground lugs for connection to busbar.

Scan61-Inline boards are activated by update from SD card or ''HX3 Manager'' application. Upload driver ''scansr61.dat'' to HX3.6 using ''Updater'' window.

===Bass25===
[[Datei:Midibass25.JPG|300px|thumb|right|'''Bass25 and Bass25 MIDI (top right) with own MIDI OUT and phantom supply''']]

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25 Bass25] scan board (refer to PDFs in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]) may be used as an addition to FatarScan2, Scan61-Inline and Scan16-Strip boards for convenient connection of bass pedal contacts as pictured above (note different HX3 headers). The board may be placed in bottom of organ if 10-wire flat ribbon cable to HX3 or last OrganScan61 board does not exceed 1m. Please note jumper setting on Bass25:

* '''JP1''' solder bridge, always open
* '''JP2''' solder bridge if used with HX3.4 OrganScan61 (not supported on HX3.6)
* '''JP3''' solder bridge if used with FatarScan2 on '''HX3.6 PL8''' or Scan16 Strip on '''HX3.6 PL12'''

Bass25 provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts:

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 or to the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3 and JP4''' solder bridges must be closed.

Note: A third Scan16-Strip or Scan61-Inline board may alternatively be used for bass pedal instead of Bass25, using only the first 13 or 25 contact inputs. Set jumper JP3 on scan boards to enable them for bass pedal use.

===Bass25 MIDI===

[https://shop.keyboardpartner.de/en/p/bass25-midi Bass25 MIDI] is equipped with an own MIDI controller and MIDI output jack. It is connected to the HX3.6 mainboard by 5-wire MIDI cable. Bass25 MIDI provides in-line headers and a 26-pin flat ribbon cable connector for alternative connection of bass pedal contacts. 2-pin inline header PL9 also provides common ground for the busbar.

{|class="wikitable" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:left;width: 25%;background-color:#ffffcc;"
!colspan="10" style="background-color:#d0d0d0;" | PL1 Bass25 MIDI key connection
|-
!style="width: 15%" | Pin
!Function
|-
!1
|Lowest Note C
|-
!2
|C#
|-
! ...
|further keys
|-
!25
|Highest Note C
|-
!26
|Common ground (busbar)
|}

Instead of PL1, the keyboard contacts can also be connected to the inline pin headers PL2 to PL7 on the solder pads in front of the pin headers (left pin PL2: lowest C). The 2-pin inline header PL9 also serves as common ground for the busbar.

'''JP3''' solder bridge must be closed.

'''JP4''' solder bridge must be closed if Bass25 MIDI is powered by phantom supply from HX3 board, left MIDI input jack (seen from back). MIDI phantom power jumpers on HX3 board must be inserted.

For separate power supply (internal +5V or external 9V DC wall wart), open '''JP4''' solder bridge. Use 2-pin header PL12 next to MIDI OUT jack to supply internal +5V: Pin 1 (left, facing towards diode) is VCC +5V, pin 2 (right) is ground (refer to PDF schematics in [https://github.com/keyboardpartner/HX3/tree/master/PLATINEN/Bass25 our Github repo folder PLATINEN/BASS25]).

A +5V MIDI phantom supply on outer pins of MIDI input may be obtained from HX3 mainboard by inserting two '''additional''' jumpers on HX3.6 PL20 '''pins 7-8 and 9-10'''. Do not install these jumpers if connecting other MIDI gear not using a phantom supply.

==Extension Board==

The HX3 Extension Board mk5 is available for Leslie and headphones connection. It is compatible with HX3.6.

The old Extension Board for '''HX3.4 (mk3/mk4)''' may be used after removing two resistors from the Extension Board and soldering two wires on the rear side of the HX3.6 mainboard from Extension Board connector to serial port.

'''See page [[HX3.5 Extension Board]]''' for details.